18.5MY Eclipse Cross Owners Manual

ECLIPSE CROSS - ENGLISH - OGKE18E5
ECLIPSE CROSS
OWNER’S MANUAL
ECLIPSE CROSS - ENGLISH - OGKE18E5

Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and CAUTION
appear.
Information for station service
Thank you for selecting an ECLIPSE CROSS as your new vehicle.
These serve as reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow instruc- 2WD models 63 litres
This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoyment of Fuel tank capacity
tions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
the many fine features of this vehicle. 4WD models 60 litres
It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way to oper- Fuel
ate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure. WARNING Unleaded petrol octane number
Fuel requirements 95 RON or higher
Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if in- Refer to the “General information” section for the fuel selection.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications and/or to make additions to or improvements in structions are not followed. Engine oil Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the selection of engine oil.
this product without obligation to install them on products previously manu- Tyre inflation pressure Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.
factured. CAUTION
It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws and
regulations concerning vehicles. Means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal in-
jury or damage to your vehicle.
This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws and reg- You will see another important symbol:
ulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory with later
amendment of the laws and regulations. NOTE
Please leave this owner’s manual in the vehicle at time of resale. The next Gives helpful information.
owner will appreciate having access to the information contained in this *: Indicates optional equipment.
owner’s manual. Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:
Repairs to your vehicle: M/T: Manual transmission LHD: Left-Hand Drive
Vehicles in the warranty period: A/T: Automatic Transmission RHD: Right-Hand Drive
All warranty repairs must be carried out by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
thorized Service Point. CVT: Continuously Variable
Vehicles outside the warranty period: Transmission
Where the vehicle is repaired is at the discretion of the owner. The symbol used on the vehicles:
: See owner’s manual
© 2018 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

OGKE18E5
BLO-18-000401
18
Table of contents
Overview/Quick guide 1
General information 2
Locking and unlocking 3
Seats and seat belts 4
Instruments and controls 5
Starting and driving 6
For pleasant driving 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care 9
Maintenance 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Declaration of Conformity 13
OGKE18E5
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

LHD 1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 5-52
Automatic High-Beam (AHB) switch p. 5-54
Turn-signal lever p. 5-60
Front fog lamp switch* p. 5-61
Rear fog lamp switch p. 5-62
2. Shift paddles* p. 6-35
3. Multi-information display switches p. 5-04
4. Head Up Display (HUD)* p. 5-46
5. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat)
p. 4-25, 4-29
1 Horn switch p. 5-69
22 2
21 3 6. Instruments p. 5-02
4 7. Engine switch* p. 6-15
20
19 8. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 5-62
5 Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 5-66
Headlamp washer switch* p. 5-67
6 9. Ignition switch* p. 6-14
18 10. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - front knee airbag (for driv-
17 7
er’s seat) p. 4-25, 4-30
16 11. Cruise control switches p. 6-57, 6-66
15 Speed Limiter* p. 6-61
12. Steering wheel height and reach adjustment lever p. 6-09
13. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* p. 7-56
14 14. Camera switch* p. 6-114
13 15. Steering wheel audio remote control switches* p. 7-34 [For DIS-
12 8 PLAY AUDIO, Smartphone Link Display Audio and
11 MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System (MMCS), refer to
10 the separate owner’s manual.]
9 16. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 5-58
17. Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF switch p. 6-25
18. Sonar switch* p. 6-106
19. Head Up Display (HUD) switches* p. 5-46
20. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch p. 6-56
21. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch p. 6-95
22. Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) ON/OFF switch
p. 6-84
1-02 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

RHD 1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 5-52

Automatic High-Beam (AHB) switch p. 5-54
Turn-signal lever p. 5-60
Front fog lamp switch* p. 5-61
Rear fog lamp switch p. 5-62
2. Shift paddles* p. 6-35
3. Engine switch* p. 6-15
2 4. Instruments p. 5-02
9 5. Head Up Display (HUD)* p. 5-46
3 6 6. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat)
4 10
p. 4-25, 4-29
5 11 Horn switch p. 5-69
1 7 7. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 5-62
Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 5-66
8 Headlamp washer switch* p. 5-67
12
8. Multi-information display switches p. 5-04
9. Head Up Display (HUD) switches* p. 5-46
10. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch p. 6-56
11. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch p. 6-95
13 12. Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) ON/OFF switch
14 p. 6-84
15 13. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 5-58
14. Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF switch p. 6-25
22 15. Sonar switch* p. 6-106,
16 16. Cruise control switches p. 6-57, 6-66
21 17 Speed Limiter* p. 6-61
18 17. Ignition switch* p. 6-14
19 18. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - front knee airbag (for driv-
20 er’s seat) p. 4-25, 4-30
19. Steering wheel height and reach adjustment lever p. 6-09
20. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* p. 7-56
21. Steering wheel audio remote control switches* p. 7-34 [For DIS-
PLAY AUDIO, Smartphone Link Display Audio and
MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System (MMCS), refer to
the separate owner’s manual.]
22. Camera switch* p. 6-114
OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-03

1
1. Rear window demister switch p. 5-67
LHD 2. Side ventilators p. 7-02
3. Seat belt reminder p. 4-10
4. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 5-60
5. Centre ventilators p. 7-02
6. Front passenger’s airbag indicator p. 4-28
Security alarm indicator* p. 3-23
5 7. Side ventilators p. 7-02
4 8. Air conditioning p. 7-05, 7-10
3 6 9. Heated steering wheel switch* p. 5-69
2 10. Heated windscreen switch* p. 5-68
1 11. Accessory socket p. 7-80
12. USB input terminal* p. 7-76
7 13. ECO mode switch p. 5-61
14. Touchpad controller* [refer to the separate owner’s manual.]
15. Front drink holder p. 7-84
21 Ashtray* p. 7-79
8
16. Accessory socket p. 7-80
20 9 17. Heated seat switches (rear seats)* p. 4-04
19 10 18. Fuel tank filler door release lever p. 2-03
19. Floor console box p. 7-84
Armrest* p. 4-03
18 20. Bonnet release lever p. 10-03
21. Fuses p. 10-17
17
15
11
12
14 13
16

1
1. Centre ventilators p. 7-02
RHD 2. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 5-60
3. Front passenger’s airbag indicator p. 4-28
Security alarm indicator* p. 3-23
4. Side ventilators p. 7-02
5. Air conditioning p. 7-05, 7-10
6. Rear window demister switch p. 5-67
1 2 7. Bonnet release lever p. 10-03
8. Fuel tank filler door release lever p. 2-03
18 10. Floor console box p. 7-84
4 Armrest* p. 4-03
11. Front drink holder p. 7-84
5 12. Touchpad controller* [refer to the separate owner’s manual.]
17 14. USB input terminal p. 7-76
7 15. ECO mode switch p. 5-61
16 16. Fuses p. 10-17
17. Side ventilators p. 7-02
18. Seat belt reminder p. 4-10
12
8
11
13 10 9
15 14

1
1. Audio* p. 7-22
LHD DISPLAY AUDIO*
Smartphone Link Display Audio*
MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System (MMCS)*
Multi Around Monitor* p. 6-111
[For DISPLAY AUDIO, Smartphone Link Display Audio and
1
2. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passeng-
er’s seat) p. 4-25, 4-29
3. Glove box p. 7-84
Card holder p. 7-84
2 4. Brake auto hold switch p. 6-46
5. Electric parking brake switch p. 6-05
3 6. Selector lever p. 6-32
7. Heated seat switches (front seats)* p. 4-04
Parking brake lever type Electric parking brake type 8. S-AWC drive mode-selector* p. 6-40
12 4 9. S-AWC drive mode-selector* p. 6-40
5 10. Heated seat switches (front seats)* p. 4-04
11 6
11. Gearshift lever* p. 6-31
Selector lever* p. 6-32
12. Parking brake lever p. 6-04
10 7
9
8

1
1. Audio* p. 7-22
RHD DISPLAY AUDIO*
Smartphone Link Display Audio*
MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System (MMCS)*
Multi Around Monitor* p. 6-111
[For DISPLAY AUDIO, Smartphone Link Display Audio and
2. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passeng-
1
er’s seat) p. 4-25, 4-29
3. Glove box p. 7-84
Card holder p. 7-84
2 4. Selector lever p. 6-32
5. Heated seat switches (front seats)* p. 4-04
3 6. S-AWC drive mode-selector* p. 6-40
7. Brake auto hold switch p. 6-46
8. Electric parking brake switch p. 6-05
Parking brake lever type Electric parking brake type
4 9. S-AWC drive mode-selector* p. 6-40
11 5 10. Heated seat switches (front seats)* p. 4-04
12 11. Gearshift lever* p. 6-31
6
Selector lever* p. 6-32
12. Parking brake lever p. 6-04
10 8
9 7

Interior
1 Interior
1. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors switch
LHD
p. 6-11
2. Electric window control switch p. 3-30
3. Lock switch p. 3-31
4. Central door lock switch p. 3-18
5. Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 4-11
Seat belts p. 4-08
6. Sun visors p. 7-78
6 Vanity mirror p. 7-78
1 2 7 Card holder p. 7-78
3 7. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-10
8. Front seat p. 4-02
4 9. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -side airbag (for front seat)
p. 4-25, 4-32
5 10. Rear seat p. 4-03
11. Seat belt plate storage p. 4-13
11 10

Interior
RHD 1. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-10

2. Sun visors p. 7-78
Vanity mirror p. 7-78
Card holder p. 7-78
3. Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 4-11
Seat belts p. 4-08
5 6
2 4. Seat belt plate storage p. 4-13
1 7 5. Lock switch p. 3-31
6. Central door lock switch p. 3-18
8 7. Electric window control switch p. 3-30
3 8. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors switch
p. 6-11
9. Rear seat p. 4-03
4 10. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -side airbag (for front seat)
p. 4-25, 4-32
11. Front seat p. 4-02
11
10

Interior
1
1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -curtain airbag p. 4-25,
LHD
4-33
2. Assist grips p. 7-87
Coat hook p. 7-87
3. Bottle holder p. 7-85
4. Front sunroof switch* p. 3-32
1 3 5 5. Room lamp switch p. 7-81
4 6 6. Hands-free microphone* p. 7-57
7. Front shade switch* p. 3-32
2 7 8. Map & room lamps (front) p. 7-81, 7-82
9. Head restraints p. 4-05
10. Rear shade switch* p. 3-32
11. Room lamp (rear) p. 7-81
12. Armrest* p. 4-03
Rear drink holder* p. 7-84
8 13. Cargo area cover* p. 7-85
9
10
11
12
13

Interior
RHD 1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -curtain airbag p. 4-25,

4-33
2. Bottle holder p. 7-85
3. Rear shade switch* p. 3-32
4. Assist grips p. 7-87
Coat hook p. 7-87
13 1 5. Bottle holder p. 7-85
6. Room lamp (rear) p. 7-81
14 12 2 7. Cargo area cover* p. 7-85
3 8. Armrest* p. 4-03
11 4 Rear drink holder* p. 7-84
5 9. Head restraints p. 4-05
10. Map & room lamps (front) p. 7-81, 7-82
11. Front shade switch* p. 3-32
12. Hands-free microphone* p. 7-57
10 6 13. Room lamp switch p. 7-81
14. Front sunroof switch* p. 3-32
8
7

Luggage area
1 Luggage area
1. Luggage room lamp p. 7-82
2. Tether anchorages for child restraint system p. 4-22
1 3. Luggage floor board p. 7-88
Jack p. 8-05
2 Tools p. 8-05
4. Luggage hooks p. 7-87
5. Convenient hook p. 7-88
4 3
AF5104661

Outside (Front)
Outside (Front) 1
1. Front view camera* p. 6-111
2. Headlamp washer* p. 5-67
5 3. Windscreen wipers p. 5-62, 10-14
4 4. Sensor [for Automatic High-Beam (AHB), Forward Collision Mit-
igation System (FCM) and Lane Departure Warning (LDW)]
6 p. 5-54, 6-79, 6-95
3
Rain sensor p. 5-62
2 5. Power panoramic sunroof* p. 3-32
7
1 6. Electric window control p. 3-30
7. Fuel tank filler p. 2-03
8. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 6-11
8
Side turn-signal lamps p. 5-60, 10-22
Side-view camera* p. 6-111
9. Bonnet p. 10-03
9 10. Front turn-signal lamps p. 5-60, 10-22, 10-25
11. Front fog lamps* p. 5-61, 10-22, 10-26
16 12. Headlamps, high/low beam p. 5-52, 10-22
10
11 13. Position lamps/Daytime running lamps p. 5-52, 5-54, 10-22
14. Position lamps/Daytime running lamps p. 5-52, 5-54, 10-22
Halogen headlamps type LED headlamps type
15. Headlamps, high/low beam p. 5-52, 10-22, 10-24
15 12 16. Parking sensors* p. 6-104
14 13

Outside (Rear)
1 Outside (Rear)
1. Antenna
2. Keyless entry system p. 3-04
Keyless operation system* p. 3-08
Locking and unlocking the doors p. 3-10
1 3. Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* p. 6-99
18 Changing tyres p. 8-13
17 2 Tyre p. 10-10
Tyre inflation pressures p. 10-10
16 Tyre rotation p. 10-12
15 Snow traction device (tyre chains) p. 10-13
Size of tyres and wheels p. 11-09
14 3 4. Tail lamps p. 5-52, 10-22
13 5. Stop lamps p. 10-22, 10-28
6. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 5-60, 10-22, 10-28
12 7. Rear fog lamp (RHD vehicles) p. 5-62, 10-22, 10-27
Reversing lamp (LHD vehicles) p. 10-22, 10-27
8. Parking sensors* p. 6-104
9. Reversing lamp (LHD vehicles) p. 10-22, 10-27
11 Rear fog lamp (RHD vehicles) p. 5-62, 10-22, 10-27
10. Spare wheel* p. 8-13
10 11. Rear-view camera* p. 6-108, 6-111
12. Licence plate lamps p. 10-22, 10-29
4 13. Rear spoiler
9 14. High-mounted stop lamp p. 10-22
5 15. Tailgate p. 3-21
16. Roof spoiler
6 17. Tail lamps p. 10-22
8 18. Rear window wiper p. 5-66, 10-14
7

Quick guide
Quick guide Keyless operation system* 1

When you are carrying the keyless operation
Locking and unlocking the key and within the operating range, if you
doors and tailgate press the driver’s or front passenger’s door
switch (A), or the tailgate lock switch (B)
Keyless entry system (when locking) and the tailgate open switch
(C) (when unlocking), the doors and the tail-
Press the key switch, and all doors and the gate are locked/unlocked.
tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired. The operating range is approximately 70 cm
The key switch will operate within approxi- from the driver’s door switch, front passeng-
mately 4 m from the vehicle. er’s door switch, and the tailgate switches.
Refer to “Keyless operation system*” on
Keyless entry key Keyless operation key page 3-08.
1- LOCK switch
2- UNLOCK switch
3- Indication lamp
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page

3-04.

Quick guide
1 Around the driver’s seat 1-Combination headlamps Headlamps and other lamps go
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. on
Refer to “Combination headlamps and
dipper switch” on page 5-52.
1-Turn-signal lever
The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is
operated
With the ignition switch or the

operation mode is in ON, head-
lamps, position, tail, licence
plate and instrument panel
lamps turn on and off automati-
cally in accordance with outside
1- Turn-signals
light level. {Daytime running
AUTO 2- Lane-change signals
lamps will be turned on while
the tail lamps are off.} All
Refer to “Turn-signal lever” on page
lamps turn off automatically
5-60.
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position
2-Steering wheel height and
or the operation mode is put in
reach adjustment
OFF.
1. Release the lever while holding the
Position, tail, licence plate and
steering wheel up.
instrument panel lamps on
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
Quick guide
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull- 3-Engine switch* 4-Wiper and washer switch 1
ing the lever fully upward.
If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
you can start the engine. If you press the en-
gine switch without depressing the brake
pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (M/T), you
can change the operation mode in the order
of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate
A- Locked
once.
B- Release
OFF- Off
Refer to “Steering wheel height and reach
AUTO- Auto-wiper control
adjustment” on page 6-09.
Rain sensor
The wipers will automati-
OFF- The indication lamp (A) on the cally operate depending on
engine switch turns off. the degree of wetness on
ACC- The indication lamp on the en- the windscreen.
gine switch illuminates orange. LO- Slow
ON- The indication lamp on the en- HI- Fast
gine switch illuminates green. The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
Refer to “Engine switch*” on page 6-15. windscreen by pulling the lever towards you.
Refer to “Wiper and washer switch” on
page 5-62.

Quick guide
1 5-Outside rear-view mirrors Refer to “Outside rear-view mirrors” on 7-Fuel tank filler door release
page 6-11. lever
To adjust the mirror position Open the fuel tank filler door.
6-Electric window control
The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left
Press the switch down for opening the win- side of your vehicle.
Type 1 dow, and pull the switch for closing.
Driver’s switches Driver’s switches

(LHD) (RHD)
Type 2
Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on page

1- Driver’s door window 2-03.
2- Front passenger’s door window
3- Rear left door window INVECS-III CVT with 8-step
L- Left outside mirror adjustment 4- Rear right door window Sports Mode*
5- Lock switch
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
Lock switch
Selector lever operation
1- Up
If you press the switch (5), the passenger’s The CVT selects an optimum gear ratio auto-
2- Down matically, depending on the speed of the ve-
switches cannot be operated. To unlock, press
3- Right it once again. hicle and the position of the accelerator ped-
4- Left Refer to “Electric window control” on al.
page 3-30.
5- Mirror retractor switch

Quick guide
“R” REVERSE 1- mark display screen ® p. 5-06 1

2- Information screen ® p. 5-04
This position is to back up. Interrupt display screen ® p. 5-06
3- Door ajar warning display screen
“N” NEUTRAL
® p. 5-07
At this position the transmission is disengag- 4- Odometer ® p. 5-08
ed. 5- " " mark indicator ® p. 5-06
“D” DRIVE
Refer to “Multi-information display” on
This position is for normal driving. page 5-02.
Refer to “INVECS-III CVT with 8-step
Sports Mode” on page 6-32. Head Up Display (HUD)*
1. Lock button
The Head Up Display (HUD) shows informa-
Multi information display tion on a transparent display so that you can
The lock button must be Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before easily check meter information (vehicle
pushed while the brake operating. speed, navigation instructions, etc.) while
pedal is depressed to The following information is included on the looking ahead when driving.
move the selector lever. multi-information display: warnings, odome-
The lock button must be ter, tripmeter, average and instant fuel con-
sumption, average speed, etc. Example
pushed to move the se-
lector lever.
The lock button need
not be pushed to move
the selector lever.
Selector lever positions
“P” PARK
This position locks the transmission to pre- 1. Display
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine 2. Speed display screen
can be started in this position. 3. Information display screen

Quick guide
1 4. Navigation information display screen* S-AWC con- Function Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
trol)” on page 6-39.
trol mode
Refer to “Head Up Display (HUD)” on
This mode is chiefly suita-
page 5-46.
ble for the snow road.
SNOW
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con- Stability improves on a
trol)* slippery road.
S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics High traction mode.
control system that helps enhance driving This mode excels at rough
performance, cornering performance, and ve- road driving and escape
hicle stability over a wide range of driving from stuck conditions, in
GRAVEL
conditions through integrated management of addition, realizes strong
the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC 4WD driving from low
(Active Yaw Control), the ABS and the ASC. speed to high speed on or-
dinary road.
S-AWC con- Function
trol mode S-AWC drive mode-selector
The drive mode can be switched by pressing
AUTO mode applied to
the switch while the ignition switch is in the
dry pavement road and wet
“ON” position or the operation mode is in
road, etc.
ON.
This mode controls driv-
ing/ braking torque be-
tween front right and front
AUTO
left wheel and between
front and rear wheel ac-
cording to the driving con-
dition, and achieves low
fuel consumption and agile
driving.

General information
2
Fuel selection...................................................................................... 2-02

Filling the fuel tank............................................................................. 2-03
Installation of accessories................................................................... 2-04
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems................... 2-05
Genuine parts...................................................................................... 2-05
Safety and disposal information for used engine oil...........................2-05
Disposal information for used batteries.............................................. 2-06
OGKE18E5
Fuel selection
Fuel selection NOTE Graphical expression for con-

sumer information
2 Recom- Unleaded petrol octane number
l Repeatedly driving short distances at low
speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
mended (EN228) system and engine, resulting in poor starting
fuel 95 RON or higher and poor acceleration. If these problems oc-
cur, you are advised to add a detergent addi-
tive to the petrol when you refuel the vehi-
CAUTION cle. The additive will remove the deposits,
thereby returning the engine to a normal
l The use of leaded fuel can result in serious condition. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI
damage to the engine and catalytic convert- MOTORS GENUINE FUEL SYSTEM
er. Do not use leaded fuel. CLEANER. Using an unsuitable additive E5: Petrol fuel containing up to 2.7 % (m/m)
could make the engine malfunction. For de-
tails, please contact your MITSUBISHI
oxygen or up to 5.0 % (V/V) ethanol – Eg.
NOTE MOTORS Authorized Service Point. E10: Petrol fuel containing up to 3.7 %
l Poor quality petrol can cause problems such (m/m) oxygen or up to 10.0 % (V/V) ethanol
l The vehicles have the knock control system
– Eg. EN 228 compliant unleaded petrol
so that you can use unleaded petrol 90 RON as difficult starting, stalling, engine noise
as an emergent measure in case unleaded and hesitation. If you experience these prob- The petrol engine are compatible with E5
petrol 95 RON or higher is not available on lems, try another brand and/or grade of pet- type petrol (containing 5 % ethanol) and E10
journey, etc. rol. type petrol (containing 10 % ethanol) con-
In such a case, you don’t need to adjust the If the check engine warning lamp flashes,
forming to European standards EN 228.
engine specially. In case of using unleaded have the system checked as soon as possible
petrol 90 RON, the engine performance lev- at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
el is reduced. Service Point. CAUTION
l Do not use more than 10 % concentration of
ethanol (grain alcohol) by volume.
Use of more than 10 % concentration may
lead to damage to your vehicle fuel system,
engine, engine sensors and exhaust system.
2-02 General information OGKE18E5

Filling the fuel tank
Filling the fuel tank Fuel tank capacity
WARNING
2WD models: 63 litres 2
4WD models: 60 litres
l When handling fuel, comply with the safe-
ty regulations displayed by garages and Refueling
filling stations.
l Gasoline is highly flammable and explo- 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
sive. You could be burned or seriously in- 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
jured when handling it. When refueling
left side of your vehicle.
your vehicle, always turn the engine off
and keep away from flames, sparks, and Open the fuel tank filler door by pulling
smoking materials. Always handle fuel in the release lever located on the side of
1- Remove
well-ventilated outdoor areas. the driver’s seat.
2- Close
l Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
get rid of your body’s static electricity by
touching a metal part of the vehicle or CAUTION
fuel pump. Any static electricity on your
body could create a spark that ignites fuel l Since the fuel system may be under pressure,
vapour. remove the fuel tank filler tube cap slowly.
This relieves any pressure or vacuum that
l Perform the whole refueling process
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov- might have built up in the fuel tank. If you
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops be-
let any other person come near the fuel fore removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may
tank filler. If you allowed a person to help spray out, injuring you or others.
you and that person was carrying static
electricity, fuel vapour could be ignited.
l Do not move away from the fuel tank fill-
er until refueling is finished. If you moved 3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly
away and did something else (for exam- turning the cap anticlockwise.
ple, sitting on a seat) part-way through
the refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
l If the tank cap must be replaced, use only
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine part.
OGKE18E5 General information 2-03

Installation of accessories
NOTE Installation of accessories l When installing the radio, for the re-
quired information (frequency, transmis-
2 l While filling with fuel, store the fuel cap in
the cap holder (A) or hang it on the hook (B) We recommend you to consult your sion output, installing procedure), con-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
located on the inside of the fuel tank filler
door. Point. ized Service Point.
If the frequency, transmission output and
installing condition are not appropriate,
CAUTION it can adversely affect the electronic de-
l Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis vices and could lead to unsafe vehicle
connector for checking and servicing the operation.
electronic control system. l Using a cellular phone or radio set inside
Do not connect a device other than a diagno- the vehicle without an external antenna
sis tool for inspections and service to this
may cause electrical system interference,
connector. Otherwise, the battery could be
discharged, the electronic devices of the ve-
which could lead to unsafe vehicle oper-
hicle could malfunction, or other unexpected ation.
problems could result. l Tyres and wheels which do not meet
4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it In addition, malfunctions caused by connect- specifications must not be used.
goes. ing a device other than a diagnosis tool may Refer to the “Specifications” section for
not be covered under warranty. information regarding wheel and tyre
CAUTION sizes.
l The installation of accessories, optional
l Do not tilt the gun. parts, etc., should only be carried out Important points!
within the limits prescribed by law in
5. When the gun stops automatically, do your country, and in accordance with the Due to large number of accessory and re-
not fill with fuel any more. guidelines and warnings contained with- placement parts of different manufactures
6. To close, turn the fuel cap slowly clock- in the documents accompanying this ve- available in the market, it is not possible, not
wise until you hear clicking sounds, then hicle. only for MITSUBISHI MOTORS, but also
gently push the fuel tank filler door l Installing electric components incorrect- for a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
closed. ly could lead to a fire. See the “Modifi- Service Point, to check whether the attach-
cation/ alterations to the electrical or fuel ment or installation of such parts affects the
systems” section within this owner’s overall safety of your vehicle.
manual.

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems
Even when such parts are officially author- Modification/alterations to Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
ized, for example by a “general operators per- Parts, designed and manufactured to maintain
mit” (an appraisal for the part) or through the the electrical or fuel systems your MITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at 2
execution of the part in an officially approved top performance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS
manner of construction, or when a single op- MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION GENUINE Parts are identified by this mark
eration permit following the attachment or in- has always manufactured safe, high quality and are available at all MITSUBISHI
stallation of such parts, it cannot be deduced vehicles. In order to maintain this safety and MOTORS Authorized Service Points.
from that alone, that the driving safety of quality, it is important that any accessory that
your vehicles has not been affected. is to be fitted, or any modifications carried
Consider also that there basically exists no li- out which involve the electrical or fuel sys-
ability on the part of the appraiser or the offi- tems, should be carried out in accordance
cial. Maximum safety can only be ensured with MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.
with parts recommended, sold and fitted or
installed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS au- CAUTION
thorized Service Point (MITSUBISHI
l If the wires interfere with the vehicle body Safety and disposal
MOTORS GENUINE replacement parts and
MITSUBISHI MOTORS accessories). The
or improper installation methods are used
(protective fuses not included, etc.), elec-
information for used engine
same also pertains to modifications of vehi- tronic devices may be adversely affected, re- oil
cles with respect to the production specifica- sulting in a fire or other accident.
tions. For safety reasons, do not attempt any WARNING
modifications other than those that follow the
recommendations of a MITSUBISHI Genuine parts l Prolonged and repeated contact may
cause serious skin disorders, including
MOTORS authorized Service Point.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great dermatitis and cancer.
lengths to bring you a superbly crafted auto- l Avoid contact with the skin as far as pos-
mobile offering the highest quality and de- sible and wash thoroughly after any con-
tact.
pendability.
l Keep used engine oils out of reach of chil-
dren.
OGKE18E5 General information 2-05

Disposal information for used batteries
Protect the environment

2 It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses
and soil. Use authorized waste collection fa-
cilities, including civic amenity sites and ga-
rages providing facilities for disposal of used
oil and used oil filters. If in doubt, contact
your local authority for advice on disposal.
Disposal information for

used batteries
Your vehicle contains batter-
ies and/or accumulators.
Do not mix with general
household waste.
For proper treatment, recov-
ery and recycling of used bat-
teries, please take them to ap-
plicable collection points, in
accordance with your nation-
al legislation and the Direc-
tives 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these batter-
ies correctly, you will help to
save valuable resources and
prevent any potential nega-
tive effects on human health
and the environment which
could otherwise arise from
inappropriate waste handling.

Locking and unlocking
3
Keys.................................................................................................... 3-02
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)........................... 3-03
Keyless entry system...........................................................................3-04
Keyless operation system*..................................................................3-08
Doors...................................................................................................3-16
Central door locks............................................................................... 3-18
Dead Lock System*............................................................................ 3-19
“Child-protection” rear doors..............................................................3-20
Tailgate................................................................................................3-21
Security alarm system*....................................................................... 3-23
Electric window control...................................................................... 3-30
Power panoramic sunroof*................................................................. 3-32
OGKE18E5
Keys
Keys WARNING NOTE

l When taking a key on flights, do not press • Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners or
The key fits all locks. any switches on the key while on the similar equipment.
3 plane. If a switch is pressed on the plane,
the key emits electromagnetic waves,
• Do not leave the key where it may be ex-
posed to high temperature or high humidi-
Keyless entry key
which could adversely affect the plane’s ty.
flight operation. l The engine is designed so that it will not
When carrying a key in a bag, be careful start if the ID code registered in the immo-
that no switches on the key can be easily bilizer computer and the key’s ID code do
pressed by mistake. not match. Refer to the “Electronic immobil-
izer” section for details and key usage.
l [For vehicles equipped with the security
Keyless operation key NOTE alarm system]
Pay attention to the following if the security
l The key (except for the emergency key) is a alarm is set to “Active”.
precision electronic part with a built-in sig-
Refer to “Security alarm system*” on page
nal transmitter. Please observe the following
3-23.
in order to prevent a malfunction.
• If the security alarm is in the system
• Do not leave in a place that is exposed to armed mode, the alarm will sound if the
direct sunlight, for example on the dash-
doors are opened after being unlocked
board.
with the key, the inside lock knob or the
• Do not disassemble or modify. central door lock switch.
1- Keyless entry key
• Do not excessively bend the key or sub- • Even if the security alarm is set to “Ac-
2- Keyless operation key ject it to strong impacts. tive”, the system preparation mode is not
3- Emergency key • Do not expose to water. entered if the keyless entry system or the
• Keep away from magnetic key rings. keyless operation function was not used to
• Keep away from audio systems, personal lock the vehicle.
computers, TVs, and other equipment that
generates a magnetic field.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong Key number tag
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular The key number is stamped on the tag as in-
phones, wireless devices and high fre-
dicated in the illustration.
quency equipment (including medical de-
vices).
3-02 Locking and unlocking OGKE18E5

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
Make a record of the key number and store The electronic immobilizer is designed to NOTE
the key and key number tag in separate pla- significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
ces, so that you can order a key from your theft. The purpose of the system is to immo- • When the key grip contacts metal of an-
other key
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attemp-
Point in the event the original keys are lost. ted. A valid start attempt can only be ach- 3
ieved by using a key “registered” to the im-
mobilizer system.
NOTE
l In the following cases, the vehicle may not
be able to receive the registered ID code
from the registered key and the engine may
not start. (vehicles equipped with the keyless
• When the key contacts or is close to other
entry system) immobilizing keys (including keys of oth-
• When the key contacts a key ring or other er vehicles)
metallic or magnetic object
1. Keyless entry key

2. Emergency key
Electronic immobilizer
(Anti-theft starting system)
CAUTION In cases like these, remove the object or
l Do not modify or add parts to the immobiliz- additional key from the vehicle key. Then
er system. Doing so could cause the immo- try again to start the engine. If the engine
bilizer to malfunction. does not start, we recommend you to con-
tact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
thorized Service Point.
OGKE18E5 Locking and unlocking 3-03

Keyless entry system
NOTE Keyless entry system To unlock

l If the engine does not start, we recommend Press the UNLOCK switch (2). All the doors
you to contact your MITSUBISHI Press the key switch, and all doors and the
tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired. and the tailgate will be unlocked. If the doors
3 MOTORS Authorized Service Point. (vehi-
cles equipped with the keyless operation sys- It is also possible to operate the outside rear- and tailgate are unlocked when the front or
tem) view mirrors. (vehicles equipped with the the rear room lamp switch is in the “ ” or
l If you lose one of them, contact a mirror retractor switch) the “•” position, the room lamp will illumi-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- nate for approximately 15 seconds and the
ice Point as soon as possible. To obtain a return-signal lamps will blink twice.
placement or extra spare key, take your vehi- Keyless entry key Keyless operation key The position and tail lamps can also be set to
cle and all remaining keys to your
turn on for approximately 30 seconds. Refer
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point. All the keys have to be re-regis- to “Instruments and controls: Welcome light”
tered in the immobilizer computer unit. The on page 5-57.
immobilizer can register as follows.
• Keyless entry key: up to eight different NOTE
keys
• Keyless operation key: up to four differ- l Except for vehicles equipped with a Dead
ent keys Lock System, the door and tailgate unlock
function can be set so that only the driver’s
door unlocks when the UNLOCK switch (2)
is pressed once.
1- LOCK switch If the door and tailgate unlock function is set
2- UNLOCK switch to work as described above, all the doors and
3- Indication lamp the tailgate unlock when the UNLOCK
switch is pressed two times in succession.
To lock Refer to “Setting of door and tailgate unlock
function (except for vehicles equipped with
Press the LOCK switch (1). All the doors and a Dead Lock System)” on page 3-06.
the tailgate will be locked. The turn-signal
lamps will blink once when the doors and the
tailgate are locked.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- • The number of times the turn-signal l If you wish to add a key, we recommend you
tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors au- lamps are flashed by the confirmation to contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
tomatically retract or extend when all the
doors and tailgate are locked or unlocked us- l
function can be changed.
The keyless entry system does not operate in
Authorized Service Point.
The below keys are available for your vehi-
3
ing the key switches of the keyless entry sys- the following conditions: cle.
tem. • The key is left in the ignition switch. (ex- • Keyless entry key: up to eight different
Refer to “Starting and driving: Outside rear- cept for vehicles equipped with the key- keys
view mirrors” on page 6-11. less operation system) • Keyless operation key: up to four differ-
l If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no • The operation mode is not in OFF. (vehi- ent keys
door or tailgate is opened within approxi- cles equipped with the keyless operation
mately 30 seconds, relocking will automati- system)
cally occur. • The LOCK switch (1) is pressed while a
Operation of the Dead Lock
l It is possible to modify functions as follows: door or the tailgate is open. System*
For further information, please contact your l The key switch will operate within approxi-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- mately 4 m from the vehicle. However, the With a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System,
ice Point. operating range of the key switch may it is possible to set the Dead Lock System by
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone change if the vehicle is located near a power pressing the LOCK switch (1) two times. Re-
Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI station, or radio/TV broadcasting station. fer to “Dead Lock System” on page 3-19.
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), l If either of the following problems occurs,
screen operations can be used to make the the battery may be exhausted. Operation of the outside rear-
adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s • The key switch is operated at the correct
manual for details. distance from the vehicle, but the doors view mirrors (Vehicles equip-
• The time for automatic relocking can be and tailgate are not locked/unlocked in re- ped with mirror retractor
changed. sponse.
switch)
• The confirmation function (flashing of the • The indication lamp (3) is dim or does not
turn-signal lamps) can be set to operate come on.
only when the doors and backdoor are For further information, please consult To retract
locked or only when the doors and back- your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
door are unlocked. Service Point. Locking the doors and tailgate using the
• The confirmation function (this indicates If you replace the battery yourself, refer to LOCK switch (1), the outside rear-view mir-
locking or unlocking of the doors and tail- “Procedure for replacing the key battery” rors are retracted automatically.
gate with the blink of the turn-signal on page 3-07.
lamps) can be deactivated. l If your key is lost or damaged, please con-
tact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point for a replacement key.

To extend NOTE Number of
Condition
Unlocking the doors and tailgate using the chimes
• Deactivate the automatic extension func-
UNLOCK switch (2), the outside rear-view tion. When the UNLOCK switch,
3 mirrors are extended automatically. The outside rear-view mirrors can be re-
tracted or extended by the following oper-
driver’s or front passenger’s
door lock/unlock switch, or
ations, even if changing to any of the
NOTE One chime tailgate open switch is press-
above. After pressing the LOCK switch to
lock the doors and tailgate, if the LOCK ed one time, all doors and
l Functions can be modified as stated below.
switch is pressed again twice in a row the tailgate unlock. [Factory
Please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
within approximately 30 seconds, the out- setting]
In a vehicle equipped with the Smartphone side rear-view mirrors will retract.
When the UNLOCK switch
Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI After pressing the UNLOCK switch to
unlock the doors and tailgate, if the UN- or the driver’s door lock/
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), it unlock switch is pressed one
is possible to change the setting by means of LOCK switch is pressed again twice in a
row within approximately 30 seconds, the time, only the driver’s door
screen operations.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for de- outside rear-view mirrors will extend unlocks. When the UN-
again. Two chimes
tails. LOCK switch or the driver’s
• Automatically extend when the driver’s door lock/unlock switch is
door is closed and the ignition switch is Setting of door and tailgate un- pressed two times in succes-
turned to the “ON” position or the opera- sion, all doors and the tail-
tion mode is put in ON. lock function (except for vehi- gate unlock.
In addition, automatically retract when the cles equipped with a Dead
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position or the operation mode
Lock System) position and then remove the key (ex-
is put in OFF or ACC, and the driver’s The door and tailgate unlock function can be cept for vehicles equipped with the key-
door is then opened. set to the following two conditions. less operation system), or put the opera-
• Automatically extend when the vehicle Each time the door and tailgate unlock function mode in OFF (vehicles equipped
speed reaches 30 km/h (16 mph).
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the with the keyless operation system).
condition of the door and tailgate unlock 2. Place the lamp switch in the “AUTO”
function. position, and leave the driver’s door
open.
3. Press the LOCK switch (1) for 4 to 10
seconds and press the UNLOCK switch
(2) during this time.

4. Release in sequence the LOCK and UN- NOTE notch in the key case and use it to open
LOCK switches within 10 seconds of the case.
pressing the LOCK switch in step 3. l You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
NOTE
l A MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point can replace the battery for you
Keyless entry key
3
if you prefer.
l On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), 1. Remove the screw (A) from the key.
screen operations can be used to make the (Keyless entry key only)
adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s
manual for details.
Keyless entry key
Procedure for replacing the key

battery
Keyless operation key
Before replacing the battery, remove static
electricity from your body by touching a met-
al grounded object.
WARNING
l Danger of explosion if battery is incor-
rectly replaced. 2. Remove the emergency key from the
Replace only with the same battery or an key. (Keyless operation key only)
equivalent type.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page
3-16.
CAUTION 3. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, NOTE
insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight
l When the key case is opened, be careful to
blade (or minus) screwdriver into the l Be sure to perform the procedure with the
keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the
the internal components. MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when
you open the key case, the switches may
come out.

Keyless operation system*
4. Remove the old battery. 9. Check the keyless entry system to see WARNING
5. Install a new battery with the + side (B) that it works.
up. l People with implantable cardiac pace-
makers or implantable cardiovascular-de-
3 Keyless operation system* fibrillators should not go near the exterior
Keyless entry key transmitters (A) or the interior transmit-
+ side The keyless operation system allows you to ters (B). The radio waves used by the key-
lock and unlock the doors and tailgate and less operation system could adversely af-
fect implantable cardiac pacemakers or
start the engine simply by carrying the key-
- side implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators.
less operation key with you.
The switches on the keyless operation key
Coin type can also be used as the key switch of keyless
battery entry system.
CR1620 Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”
on page 6-19.
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page
Keyless operation key 3-04.
+ side
The driver should always carry the keyless
operation key. This key is necessary for lock-
- side ing and unlocking the doors and tailgate,
starting the engine and otherwise operating
the vehicle, so before locking and leaving the
Coin type
battery
vehicle, be sure to check that you have the
CR2032 keyless operation key.
6. Close the key case firmly.

7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 1.
(Keyless entry key only)
8. Install the emergency key removed in
step 2.
(Keyless operation key only)
WARNING NOTE NOTE

l When using electro-medical devices other • The keyless operation system is carried l Because the keyless operation key continual-
than implantable cardiac pacemakers or together with a communications device ly receives signals, strong radio wave recep-
implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators,
contact the electromedical device manu-
such as a cellular phone or radio set, or
with an electronic device such as a per-
tion could affect battery wear. Do not leave
the key near a TV, personal computer, or
3
facturer ahead of time to determine the sonal computer. other electronic device.
affects of radio waves on the devices. Elec- • The keyless operation key is touching or
tromedical device operations could be ad- covered by a metal object.
versely effected by radio waves. • A keyless entry system is being used Operating range of the keyless
nearby. operation system
• When the keyless operation key battery is
You can limit the possible operations of the worn out. If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
keyless operation system in the following • When the keyless operation key is placed enter the operating range of the keyless oper-
ways. (The keyless operation system can be in an area with strong radio waves or ation system, and press the driver’s or front
used as a keyless entry system.) Please con- noise. In such cases, use the emergency passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail-
sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized key. gate lock switch or the tailgate open switch,
Service Point. Refer to “To operate without using the the ID code for your key is verified.
keyless operation function” on page
l You can limit operations to locking and 3-16.
You can only lock and unlock the doors and
unlocking the doors and tailgate. tailgate and start the engine only if the ID co-
l Because the keyless operation key receives
l You can limit operations to starting the signals in order to communicate with the des of your keyless operation key and the ve-
engine. transmitters in the vehicle, the battery con- hicle match.
l The keyless operation system can be dis- tinually wears down regardless of keyless
abled. operation key use. The battery life is 1 to 2
years, depending on usage conditions. When
the battery wears out, replace the battery ac-
NOTE cording to the description in this manual or
have it replaced at your MITSUBISHI
l The keyless operation key uses an ultra-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
weak electromagnetic wave. In the following
cases, the keyless operation system may not Refer to “Procedure for replacing the key
operate properly or may be unstable. battery” on page 3-07.
• When there is equipment nearby that
emits strong radio waves, such as: a pow-
er station, a radio/TV broadcasting station
or an airport.

NOTE NOTE Operating range for starting the

l If the keyless operation key battery is wear- l Locking and unlocking operate only when engine
ing out or there are strong electromagnetic you press a door or tailgate switch that de- The operating range is the interior of the ve-
3 waves or noise present, the operating range
may become smaller and operation may be- l
tects the keyless operation key.
Operation may not be possible if you are too
hicle.
come unstable. close to the front door, door window, or tail-
gate.
l Even if the keyless operation key is within
Operating range for locking 70 cm of the driver’s door switch, front pas-
and unlocking the doors and senger’s door switch, or the tailgate switch,
if the key is near to the ground or high up,
tailgate the system may not operate.
The operating range is approximately 70 cm l If the keyless operation key is within the op-
from the driver’s door switch, front passeng- erating range, even someone not carrying the
key can lock and unlock the doors and tail-
er’s door switch, and the tailgate switch.
gate by pressing the driver’s or front pas-
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail-
gate lock switch or the tailgate open switch.
*: Forward direction
: Operating range
NOTE
l Even if it is within the operating range, if the
keyless operation key is in a small item
holder such as the glove box, on top of the
instrument panel, door pocket or in the lug-
gage area, it may be impossible to start the
*: Forward direction engine.
: Operating range

NOTE A- Driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/ NOTE

unlock switch
l If a keyless operation key is too close to the l Be sure to have the keyless operation key
door or door window, it may be possible to with you before locking the vehicle. Even if
start the engine or change the operation
mode even when the key is outside the vehi-
the keyless operation key is left in the vehi-
cle in the glove box or other small storage
3
cle. compartment, near the instrument panel, or
in the luggage compartment, the vehicle may
be locked depending on the radio waves and
To operate using the keyless other conditions in the surrounding environ-
operation function ment, trapping the key inside the vehicle.
l For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors au-
tomatically retract when all the doors and
tailgate are locked using the keyless opera-
tion function.
Refer to “Starting and driving: Outside rear-
B- Tailgate lock switch view mirrors” on page 6-11.
C- Tailgate open switch
l For vehicles equipped with the Dead Lock
System, pressing the driver’s or front pas-
Locking the doors and tailgate senger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the
tailgate lock switch (B) two times in succes-
When you are carrying the keyless operation
sion causes the Dead Lock System to be set.
key, if you press the driver’s or front pas- (Refer to “Setting the system” on page
senger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the 3-19.)
tailgate lock switch (B) within the operating l The keyless operation function does not op-
range, the doors and the tailgate are locked. erate under the following conditions:
The turn-signal lamps will blink once. • The keyless operation key is inside the
Also refer to Locking and unlocking: Doors, vehicle.
Central door locks, Tailgate:3-16, 3-18, • The operation mode is not in OFF.
3-21. • A door or the tailgate is open or ajar.

NOTE If the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/ NOTE

unlock switch is pressed and any of the doors
l The tailgate open switch (C) can be used to or tailgate is not opened within approximate- l In order to make it possible to check that the
check that the vehicle is locked properly. doors and tailgate are locked, you cannot un-
ly 30 seconds, relocking will automatically
3 Press the tailgate open switch within approx-
imately 3 seconds of locking the vehicle. If occur.
lock them by using the tailgate open switch
for 3 seconds after locking them.
you wait longer than 3 seconds and press the Also refer to Locking and unlocking: Doors, l The time allowed for checking that the vehi-
tailgate open switch, the doors and tailgate Central door locks, Tailgate:3-16, 3-18, cle is locked can be adjusted. For further in-
will be unlocked. 3-21. formation, please contact a MITSUBISHI
l The time allowed for checking that the vehi- MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
cle is locked can be adjusted. For further in- On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
formation, please contact a MITSUBISHI NOTE Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. On ve- Multi-Communication System (MMCS),
hicles equipped with the Smartphone Link
l For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- screen operations can be used to make the
tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors au-
Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI Multi- tomatically extend when all the doors and adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s
Communication System (MMCS), screen tailgate are unlocked using the keyless oper- manual for details.
operations can be used to make the adjust- ation function. l The time between unlocking and automatic
ment. Refer to the separate owner’s manual Refer to “Starting and driving: Outside rear- locking can be adjusted. Please consult a
for details. view mirrors” on page 6-11. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point.
l Except for vehicles equipped with a Dead
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
Unlocking the doors Lock System, the keyless operation function
can be set so that only the driver’s door un-
When you are carrying the keyless operation locks when the driver’s door lock/unlock Multi-Communication System (MMCS),
key, if you press the driver’s or front pas- switch is pressed. screen operations can be used to make the
senger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the If the keyless operation function is set to adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s
work as described above, all the doors and manual for details.
tailgate open switch (C) within the operating
range, all the doors and the tailgate are un- the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door
locked.
lock/unlock switch is pressed two times in Operation confirmation when locking and
succession. unlocking
If the front or the rear room lamp switch is in (Refer to “Setting of door and tailgate un-
the “ ” or the “•” position, at this time, the lock function” on page 3-06.) Operation can be confirmed as shown below.
room lamp will turn on for 15 seconds. The l The keyless operation function does not op- However, the room lamp will only illuminate
turn-signal lamps will blink twice. erate, when the operation mode is not in if the front or the rear room lamp switch is in
OFF. the “ ” or the “•” position,
When locking: The turn-signal lamps blink
once.

When unlocking: The room lamp illuminates
for approximately 15 seconds, the turn-signal
lamps blink twice.
NOTE 3
For further information, please contact your
ice Point.
Multi-Communication System (MMCS),
screen operations can be used to make the
manual for details.
• Set the confirmation function (blinking of
the turn-signal lamps) to operate only
when the vehicle is locked or only when
the vehicle is unlocked.
• Disable the operation confirmation func-
tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps).
• Change the number of blinks for the oper-
ation confirmation function (blinks of the
turn-signal lamps).
Operation of the Dead Lock System*

For vehicles equipped with the Dead Lock
System, it is possible to set the Dead Lock
System using the driver’s or front passenger’s
door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate lock
switch.
(Refer to “Dead Lock System” on page
3-19.)

Warning activation
In order to prevent vehicle theft or the accidental operation of the keyless operation system, the buzzer and the display on the information screen
in the multi-information display are used to alert the driver.
3 If a warning is activated, always check the vehicle and the keyless operation key. The warning is also displayed if there is a fault in the keyless
operation system.
Item Display Buzzer Note (Solution)

Detection of failure Inner buzzer sounds There is a fault in the keyless operation system.
once
Fall of battery voltage Inner buzzer sounds The battery starts to run out, the warning is activated. (The
once warning is not activated if the battery is completely dead.)
Key not detected Engine switch is pressed Inner buzzer sounds once When the engine switch is pressed to change the operation mode
one time from OFF or when the engine is started, the warning is activated,
if any of the following conditions has occurred.
l Carrying another keyless operation key with a different code,
or the keyless operation key could be outside the operating
Engine switch is pressed range.
two times or more l The battery of the keyless operation key is dead.
l Communication is blocked by electric wave environment.
In such case, touch the keyless operation key to the engine switch
to change the operation mode or start the engine.
Refer to “If the keyless operation key is not operating properly”
on page 6-23.


Keyless operation key Inner buzzer sounds l When the vehicle is parked with the operation mode in any
take-out monitoring sys- once mode other than OFF, if you close the door after opening
tem Outer buzzer sounds in- any of the doors and taking the keyless operation key out of 3
termittently the vehicle, a warning is issued until the key is detected in
the vehicle.
l If you take the keyless operation key out of the vehicle
through a window without opening a door, the keyless oper-
ation key take-out monitoring system does not operate.
l It is possible to change the setting to make the keyless oper-
ation key takeout monitoring system operate if you take the
keyless operation key out from the vehicle through a win-
dow without opening a door. For further information, please
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
l Even if you have the keyless operation key within the en-
gine start operating range, if the keyless operation key and
vehicle ID codes cannot be matched, for example due to the
ambient environment or electromagnetic conditions, the
warning may be activated.
Key lock-in prevention Inner buzzer sounds l When the operation mode is in OFF, if you close all the
system once doors and the tailgate with the keyless operation key left in
Outer buzzer sounds ap- the vehicle and you try to lock the doors and tailgate by
proximately 3 seconds pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
intermittently switch, or the tailgate LOCK switch, a warning is issued
and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
l Make sure you have the keyless operation key with you be-
fore locking the doors. Even if you leave the keyless opera-
tion key inside the vehicle, it is possible that the doors will
lock depending on the surrounding environment and wire-
less signal conditions.

Doors

Door ajar prevention Inner buzzer sounds When the operation mode in OFF, if you try to lock the doors
system once and tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door
3 Outer buzzer sounds ap- lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate LOCK switch with one of the
proximately 3 seconds doors or the tailgate not completely closed, a warning is issued
intermittently and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
Operation mode OFF re- Inner buzzer sounds When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, if you
minder system once try to lock the doors and tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front
Outer buzzer sounds ap- passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate lock switch,
proximately 3 seconds a warning is issued and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
intermittently
To operate without using the Refer to “Doors” on page 3-16. NOTE

keyless operation function l Only use the emergency key for emergen-
cies. If the keyless operation key battery
Emergency key wears out, replace it as quickly as possible
The emergency key is built into the keyless so that you can use the keyless operation
operation key. If the keyless operation func- key.
tion cannot be used, for example because the l After using the emergency key, always re-
keyless operation key battery has worn out or turn it into the keyless operation key.
the vehicle battery is flat, you can lock and
unlock the driver’s door with the emergency
key. To use the emergency key (A), unlock
Doors
the lock knob (B) and remove it from the
keyless operation key (C). CAUTION
l Make sure the doors are closed: driving with
doors not completely closed is dangerous.
l Never leave children in the vehicle unatten-
ded.

Doors
CAUTION NOTE Pull the inside door handle towards you to

open the door.
l Be careful not to lock the doors while the l When locking or unlocking with the key, on-
key is inside the vehicle. ly the driver’s door will be locked or un-
locked. NOTE 3
To lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate,
NOTE use the central door lock switch, the keyless l The driver’s door can be opened without us-
ing the lock knob by pulling on the inside
entry system or the keyless operation func-
l To prevent the key from being locked inside door handle.
tion.
the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the
Refer to “Central door locks” on page 3-18, l In a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, it
driver’s door nor the key can be used to lock is not possible to unlock the door by pushing
“Keyless entry system” on page 3-04 , and
the driver’s door when it is open. the lock knob to the unlock side while the
“To operate using the keyless operation
Dead Lock System is set. (Refer to “Dead
function” on page 3-11.
Lock System” on page 3-19.)
To lock or unlock with the key l If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless
operation system, the driver’s door can be
locked or unlocked with the emergency key. To lock without using the key
Driver’s door Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-16.
To lock or unlock from inside Front passenger’s door, Rear

door
the vehicle
1- Lock
2- Unlock
Turning the key in the forward direction Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked po-
locks the door, and turning it in the rear di- 1- Lock sition, and close the door (2).
rection unlocks the door. 2- Unlock

Central door locks
NOTE To lock and unlock the doors These functions are not activated when the
and tailgate vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
l The driver’s door cannot be locked using the vate or deactivate these functions, please con-
inside lock knob while the driver’s door is
tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
3 opened.
Using the central door lock Service Point.
switch
Central door locks Using the ignition switch or the
Using the central door lock switch on the engine switch
driver’s door locks or unlocks all doors and
NOTE the tailgate. All doors and the tailgate will unlock when-
ever the ignition switch is turned to the
l Repeated continuous operation between lock
“LOCK” position or the operation mode is
and unlock could activate the central door LHD RHD
locking systems built-in protection circuit put in OFF.
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute be- Using the selector lever position
fore operating the central door lock switch.
All doors and the tailgate will unlock when-
l When the driver’s door is open, the central
door lock switch cannot be used to lock it. ever the selector lever is moved to the “P”
(PARK) position with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position or put the operation mode
in ON.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
To unlock the doors and tail-

gate
You can select the functions to unlock the
doors and tailgate either using the ignition
switch or the engine switch, or using the se-
lector lever position.

Dead Lock System*
NOTE B- Unlock switch CAUTION

l On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone l Do not set the Dead Lock System when
Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI someone is inside the vehicle. With the Dead
Lock System set, it is not possible to unlock
the doors using the inside lock knobs. If you
3
adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s erroneously set the Dead Lock System, un-
manual for details. lock the doors using the UNLOCK switch
on the key or using the keyless operation
function.
Dead Lock System*
The Dead Lock System helps prevent theft.
Setting the system
When the keyless entry system or the keyless 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
operation system has been used to lock all of position and then remove the key (ex-
the doors and the tailgate, the Dead Lock C- Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/ cept for vehicles equipped with the key-
System makes it impossible to unlock the unlock switches* less operation system), or put the opera-
doors using the inside lock knobs. tion mode in OFF (vehicles equipped
with the keyless operation system).
Keyless entry system Keyless operation
2. Get out of the vehicle. Close all of the
system doors and the tailgate.
3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the key
switch, the driver’s or front passenger’s
door lock/unlock switch (C), or the tail-
gate lock switch (D) to lock all of the
doors and the tailgate. The turn-signal
lamps will blink once.
4. Press the switch again within 2 seconds.
The turn-signal lamps will blink three
D- Tailgate lock switch* times to show that the Dead Lock Sys-
E- Tailgate open switch tem has been set.
A- Lock switch

“Child-protection” rear doors
NOTE NOTE Testing the system

l Pressing the LOCK switch (A) on the key l It is possible to adjust the time between Open all of the door windows, then set the
once while the Dead Lock System is set cau- pressing the UNLOCK switch (B) on the Dead Lock System.
3 ses the turn-signal lamps to blink three
times, so it is possible to confirm that the
key or the driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch (C) and automatic lock-
(Refer to “Setting the system” on page 3-19.)
After setting the Dead Lock System, reach
Dead Lock System is set. ing. For details, please contact a into the vehicle through a window and con-
firm that you cannot unlock the doors using
ice Point.
Cancelling the system On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone the lock knobs.
When the following operation is performed, Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI
the doors and tailgate will unlock and the Multi-Communication System (MMCS), NOTE
Dead Lock System will be simultaneously adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s l If you need advice on how to set the Dead
cancelled. manual for details. Lock System, please contact a MITSUBISHI
l The UNLOCK switch (B) on the key is l Even when it is not possible to use the key- MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
pressed. less entry system or keyless operation func-
l The driver’s or front passenger’s door tion to unlock the doors, it is possible to use
lock/unlock switch (C) or the tailgate the key to unlock the driver’s door. When “Child-protection” rear
the key is used to unlock the driver’s door,
open switch (E) is pressed while you are
the Dead Lock System is cancelled for only
doors
carrying the keyless operation key. the driver’s door. If you wish to subsequent-
ly unlock all other doors, turn the ignition
NOTE switch to the “ON” or “ACC” position, or
put the operation mode in on or ACC.
l If neither a door nor the tailgate is opened l It is possible to lock the doors and tailgate
within 30 seconds of unlocking (except us- and set the Dead Lock System at the same
ing the tailgate open switch), the doors and time with a single push of the LOCK switch
tailgate are automatically relocked and the (A) on the key, the driver’s or front passeng-
Dead Lock System is simultaneously set er’s door lock/unlock switch (C), or the tail-
again. gate lock switch (D). For details, please con-
tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
1- Lock
2- Unlock

Tailgate
Child protection helps prevent the rear doors WARNING To lock/unlock
from being opened accidentally from the in-
side. l When opening and closing the tailgate, The tailgate can be locked or unlocked by us-
make sure of the surrounding safety and
If the lever is set to the locked position, the ing the central door lock switch (driver side).
rear door cannot be opened using the inside
keep enough space from the back and up-
per of the vehicle and be careful not to hit
3
handle, but only with the outside handle. your head or pinch your hands, neck, etc. LHD RHD
If the lever is set to the unlock position (2), l When there is a build up of snow or ice, it
the child protection mechanism does not should be removed before opening the
function. tailgate. If you open the tailgate without
removing it, there is a possibility that the
tailgate may close suddenly due to the
CAUTION weight of that snow or ice.
l When driving with a child in the rear seat, l When you open the tailgate make sure
that the tailgate is opened fully and re-
please use the child protection to prevent ac-
mains fully open. If you only open the tail-
cidental door opening which may cause an
gate halfway there is a risk that the tail-
accident.
gate may drop and slam shut. If you open
the tailgate while your vehicle is parked
1- Lock
Tailgate on an incline it is more difficult to do so
than on the flat and also it may drop and 2- Unlock
slam shut.
WARNING NOTE
l The luggage compartment is not designed
for people to ride in. Do not let people
CAUTION l Repeated continuous operation between lock
and unlock could activate the central door
ride or children play there. This could re- l Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when locking systems built-in protection circuit
sult in a serious accident. loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
the exhaust could lead to burns. and prevent the system from operating. If
l It is dangerous to drive with the tailgate
this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute be-
open, since carbon monoxide (CO) gas l To avoid damage to the tailgate, make sure
fore operating the central door lock switch.
can enter the cabin. the area above and behind the tailgate is
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause clear before opening it.
unconsciousness and even death.
And also, if opening the tailgate while
driving, luggage may fall from the tail-
gate. This could result in a serious acci-
dent.

Tailgate
To open It is designed to provide a way to open the WARNING

tailgate in the case of a discharged battery.
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the tailgate. l Always keep the release lever lid on the
To open from outside the vehi- tailgate closed when driving so that your
3 cle luggage cannot accidentally bump against
the lever and open the tailgate.
After unlocking the tailgate, press the tailgate
open switch (A) and pull up the tailgate. To close
To close the tailgate, pull the tailgate grip (A)
downward and release it before the tailgate is
completely closed, then gently push shut the
tailgate from the outside.
2. Move the lever (B) to open the tailgate.
NOTE
l The tailgate cannot be pulled up when you
do not open it as soon as the tailgate open
switch is pressed.
In this case, push the tailgate open switch
once again and pull up the tailgate. CAUTION
l The tailgate cannot be opened when the bat-
tery is flat or disconnected. l When closing the tailgate, do not close it di-
rectly putting the hands on the tailgate grip.
If hands or arms got caught, a serious injury
To open from inside the vehicle 3. Push out on the tailgate to open it. could result.
The tailgate can also open from the inside of
vehicle.

Security alarm system*
NOTE Also, for vehicles equipped with the interior NOTE

alarm sensor, the alarm will be activated if
l Gas struts (B) are installed to support the any of the following occurs: l The alarm system will not be activated if the
tailgate. doors and the tailgate have been locked us-
l Attempt to an unlawful moving of the
vehicle. (the vehicle impact detection
ing a key, the inside lock knob or the central
door lock switch (instead of the keyless en-
3
function) try system or the keyless operation func-
l Detection of a motion in the vehicle (the tion).
interior intrusion detection function) l For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
l Disconnect the battery terminal. sensor, if the turn-signal lamps do not blink
after the locking and unlocking operation us-
ing the keyless entry system or the keyless
The security alarm system is set to “active”. operation function, the security alarm system
When making changes to the settings, please may be malfunctioning.
follow the procedure listed in the section ti- Have the vehicle inspected at a
To prevent damage or faulty operation. tled “Changing the security alarm settings” MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
• Do not hold the gas struts when closing on page 3-25. ice Point.
the tailgate. If the confirmation function (blinking of the
• Also, do not push or pull the gas struts. turn-signal lamps by locking and unlocking
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape, the doors and the tailgate) is deactivated, the
etc., to the gas struts. Multi-Communication System (MMCS), turn-signal lamps do not blink after the lock-
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas screen operations can be used to make the ad- ing and unlocking operation.
struts. justment. Refer to the separate owner’s man- For information on the confirmation func-
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts. ual for details. tion, refer to “Keyless entry system” on page
3-04 and “To operate using the keyless oper-
ation function” on page 3-11.
Security alarm system* CAUTION l For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
l Do not modify or add parts to the security sensor, the security alarm system could be
The security alarm system is for alerting the alarm system. activated in the following situations.
surrounding area of suspicious behaviour to Doing so could cause the security alarm to • Using a car wash
prevent unlawful entry into the vehicle by op- malfunction. • Taking the vehicle on a ferry
erating an alarm if a door, the tailgate or the • Parking in an automated car park
bonnet is opened when the vehicle has not • Leaving someone or a pet in the vehicle
been unlocked using the keyless entry system • Leaving a window or the front sunroof
open
or the keyless operation function.

NOTE The security alarm has four During this time, it is possible to temporarily
modes: open a door or the tailgate without using the
• Leaving an unstable object such as a stuf- keyless entry system or the keyless operation
fed toy or accessory in the vehicle
function and without causing the alarm to
3 • Suffering a continuous impact or vibra-
tion by hail, thunder, etc. System preparation mode (ap- sound (for example, when you forget some-
According to the situations, deactivate the proximately 20 seconds) thing inside the vehicle or realize that a win-
vehicle impact detection function and the dow is open).
interior intrusion detection function.
(The buzzer sounds intermittently and the se-
Refer to “To deactivate the vehicle impact curity indicator (A) blinks.) System armed mode
detection function and the interior intru-
sion detection function” on page 3-28. (The buzzer stops and the security indicator
l For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm continues to blink with the indicator’s re-
sensor, the sensitivity of the interior intru- duced lit-up duration time.)
sion detection function can be adjusted. For Once the system preparation mode has ended,
details, please contact a MITSUBISHI the system armed mode starts.
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. If an unlawful opening of any of the doors,
tailgate or bonnet is detected during the sys-
tem armed mode, the alarm will be activated
to warn people around the vehicle of an ab-
normal condition.
Also, for vehicles equipped with the interior
alarm sensor, if unlawful moving of the vehi-
The system preparation time extends from cle is attempted or a vehicle intrusion is de-
the point at which all of the doors and the tected, the alarm will be activated.
tailgate are locked by pressing the LOCK
switch on the key or the keyless operation Alarm activation
function to the point at which the system
armed mode goes into effect. Inside alarm (approximately 10 seconds):
The buzzer sounds, warning those inside the
vehicle of an abnormal condition.
(except for vehicles equipped with the interi-
or alarm sensor)
Outside alarm (approximately 30 seconds):

The turn-signal lamps blink and the horn (the Changing the security alarm
siren for vehicles equipped with the interior settings
alarm sensor) sounds, warning people around
the vehicle of an abnormal condition. It is possible to set the security alarm to the
Refer to “Alarm activation” on page 3-29. “active” mode or “inactive” mode. 3
Follow the procedure below.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
NOTE position and then remove the key (ex-
l The alarm will resume if unlawful actions cept for vehicles equipped with the key-
are taken again, even if the alarm has stop- less operation system), or put the opera-
ped. tion mode in OFF (vehicles equipped
with the keyless operation system).
System cancellation 2. Place the lamp switch in the “AUTO” 3. Pull the windscreen wiper and washer
position, and leave the driver’s door switch towards you and hold it there.
It is possible to cancel the system activation (Since the ignition switch is in the
during the system preparation mode or the open.
“LOCK” position or the operation mode
system armed mode. in OFF, washer fluid will not be
In addition, it is possible to cancel the alarm sprayed.)
once it has been activated.
Refer to “Cancelling the system” on page
3-28, “Cancelling the alarm” on page 3-29.
NOTE
l When lending the vehicle to another person
or allowing the vehicle to be driven by
someone who is unfamiliar with the security
alarm system, be sure to give the person a
proper explanation of the security alarm sys-
tem.
If a person who is unfamiliar with the securi-
ty alarm system accidentally unlocked the
vehicle, causing the alarm to sound, the
alarm would be a nuisance to people nearby.

4. After approximately 10 seconds, the Number of NOTE
buzzer will make a sound. Keep the times the Security alarm settings
windscreen wiper and washer switch buzzer mode l If anything with regard to making changes to
the security alarm system settings is hard to
pulled towards you. (If the windscreen sounds
3 wiper and washer switch was released,
understand, please consult
your
the setting change mode would be can- 1 Alarm inactive

ice Point.
celled. To start over, perform the proce- 2 Alarm active l Avoid leaving valuable items inside the ve-
dure again from step 3.) hicle even when the security alarm system
5. When the buzzer stops, with the wind- has been set to the “active” mode.
6. Any of the following operations can be
screen wiper and washer switch still used to terminate the system settings
pulled towards you, press the UNLOCK change mode. Setting the system
switch (A) on the key to select the secur- l Releasing the windscreen wiper and
ity alarm settings mode. Follow the procedure below to set the system
washer switch. to the system armed mode.
l Closing the driver’s door. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
Keyless entry key Keyless operation key l Inserting the key into the ignition position and then remove the key (ex-
switch. cept for vehicles equipped with the key-
(except for vehicles equipped with the less operation system), or put the opera-
keyless operation system) tion mode in OFF (vehicles equipped
l Putting the operation mode in ON or with the keyless operation system).
ACC. 2. Exit the vehicle and close all of the
(vehicles equipped with the keyless doors, tailgate and bonnet.
operation system) 3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the key,
l Placing the lamp switch in any posi- the driver’s or front passenger’s door
AJA115407B
tion other than “AUTO”. lock/unlock switch (B), or the tailgate
l Allowing 30 seconds to pass without lock switch (C) in order to lock all the
The settings mode can be toggled by making any changes to the settings. doors and the tailgate.
pressing the UNLOCK switch. The
mode can be confirmed from the number
of times the buzzer sounds.

Keyless entry key Keyless operation key By locking the vehicle using the keyless NOTE
entry system or the keyless operation
function, the system preparation mode is l If the bonnet is open, the security indicator
illuminates, and the system does not enter
activated.
The buzzer makes an intermittent beep-
the system preparation mode.
When the bonnet is closed, the system enters
3
ing sound and the security indicator (D) the system preparation mode, and after ap-
in the centre panel flashes for confirma- proximately 20 seconds the system enters
tion. the system armed mode.
AJA115410B 4. After approximately 20 seconds, the

buzzer stops, and when the blinking of
the security indicator starts to slow
down, the system armed mode goes into
effect.
The security indicator continues to blink
during the system armed mode.
NOTE
l The security alarm system can be activated
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
NOTE when the windows are open. To prevent ac-
cidental activation of the alarm, do not set
l The system preparation mode is not activa-
the system to the system armed mode while
ted when the doors and the tailgate have
people are riding in the vehicle.
been locked using a method other than the
keyless entry system or the keyless operation l Avoid leaving valuable items inside the ve-
hicle even when the security alarm system
function (namely a key, the inside lock knob
has been set to the “active” mode.
or the central door lock switch).

To deactivate the vehicle impact The buzzer will sound once and the function l Turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
will be activated. position. (except for vehicles equipped
detection function and the inte- with the keyless operation system)
rior intrusion detection function l Putting the operation mode in ON. (vehi-
3 The vehicle impact detection function and the cles equipped with the keyless operation
interior intrusion detection function can be system)
deactivated when parking in automated car l Opening any one of the doors or the tail-
parks, leaving pets in the vehicle or leaving gate, or inserting the key into the igni-
the vehicle with the windows slightly open. tion switch (except for vehicles equipped
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” with the keyless operation system) when
position and then remove the key (ex- the system is in the system preparation
cept for vehicles equipped with the key- mode.
less operation system), or put the opera- l Holding the keyless operation key and
tion mode in OFF (vehicles equipped pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s
with the keyless operation system). NOTE door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate
2. Raise and hold the wiper and washer open switch to unlock the doors and the
switch to the “MIST” position for ap-
l The function will be activated again if the
tailgate (vehicles equipped with the key-
following operation is performed.
proximately 3 seconds. The buzzer will • If the doors and the tailgate are unlocked less operation system).
sound twice and the function will be de- using the keyless entry system or the key-
activated. less operation function.
• If the ignition switch is turned to the
NOTE
“ON” or “ACC” position or the operation l If the bonnet is opened during the system
To activate the function again, raise and hold
mode is put in ON or ACC. preparation mode, the system preparation
the wiper and washer switch to the “MIST” mode is suspended.
position for approximately 3 seconds. The system returns to the system preparation
Cancelling the system mode when the bonnet is closed.
The following methods can be used to cancel l If the battery terminals are disconnected
the system when it is in the system prepara- while the system is in the system preparation
mode, the memory will be erased.
tion mode or the system armed mode.
l Pressing the UNLOCK switch on the
key.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l It is possible to register up to eight keys for l The time between pressing the UNLOCK l The time for the vehicle inside alarm can be
the keyless entry system and four keys for switch on the key, or the driver’s or front adjusted. Please consult a MITSUBISHI
the keyless operation system.
As long as they are registered, any of the
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch and au-
tomatic locking can be adjusted. Please con-
3
keys, other than the one used to activate the sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
system, can be used to cancel the system. Service Point. 2. The alarm will be activated for approxi-
If you want to register additional keys, On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone mately 30 seconds.
please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI The turn-signal lamps will blink, and the
Authorized Service Point. Multi-Communication System (MMCS), horn (the siren for vehicles equipped
l The activation distance for the keyless entry screen operations can be used to make the with the interior alarm sensor) will
system is approximately 4 m. adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s sound intermittently.
If it is not possible to lock or unlock the ve- manual for details.
hicle by pressing the switch at the correct
distance or the security alarm system cannot
be set or cancelled using the switch, the bat- Alarm activation
tery may need to be replaced. When the system is in the system armed
Refer to “Procedure for replacing the key
mode, the alarm will be activated as follows
battery” on page 3-07.
if the vehicle is unlocked or if any of the
l If the UNLOCK switch on the key, or the
driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/ doors, tailgate or bonnet is opened using a
unlock switch is pressed and no door or the method other than the keyless entry system or
tailgate is opened within 30 seconds, the the keyless operation function.
doors and the tailgate will automatically re- 1. The inside alarm will be activated for
lock. In this case as well, the system prepa- approximately 10 seconds. (except for
ration mode will go into effect. vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
sensor) 3. The alarm will resume if unlawful ac-
tions are taken again, even if the alarm
NOTE has stopped.
l If the bonnet is opened during the system

Cancelling the alarm
armed mode, the vehicle outside alarm oper-
ates immediately, without the vehicle inside It is possible to halt the activation of an alarm
alarm operating. using the following methods:

Electric window control
l Pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK switch NOTE WARNING
on the key.
(After pressing the LOCK switch, the l Even if the battery is disconnected, the alarm l Before operating the electric window con-
activation memory will not be erased. trol, make sure that nothing can get trap-
vehicle will lock if all the doors and the
3 tailgate are closed, after which the sys-
l
ped (head, hand, finger, etc.).
Never leave the vehicle without removing
tem preparation mode will once again go Electric window control the key.
into effect.) l Never leave a child (or other person who
l Turning the ignition switch to the “ON” The electric windows can only be operated might not be capable of safe operation of
position. (except for vehicles equipped with the ignition switch in the “ON” position the electric window control) in the vehicle
with the keyless operation system) alone.
or the operation mode in ON.
l Putting the operation mode in ON. (vehi-
cles equipped with the keyless operation Electric window control switch Driver’s switches
system) Each door window opens or closes while the The driver’s switches can be used to operate
l Holding the keyless operation key and corresponding switch is operated. all door windows. A window can be opened
locking or unlocking the doors and the or closed by operating the corresponding
tailgate using the keyless operation func- switch.
Driver’s switches Driver’s switches
tion (vehicles equipped with the keyless Press the switch down to open the window,
(LHD) (RHD)
operation system). and pull up the switch to close it.
If the switch for the driver’s window is fully
NOTE pressed down/pulled up, the door window au-
tomatically opens/closes completely.
l Even if a door or the tailgate is closed while If you want to stop the window movement,
the inside alarm is activating, this will not
cancel the alarm activation. (except for vehi- operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
cles equipped with the interior alarm sen- tion.
sor).
l When the ignition switch is turned to the Passenger’s switches
“ON” position or the operation mode is put
in ON, the buzzer sounds four times. This 1- Driver’s door window The passenger’s switches can be used to op-
operation indicates that the alarm was acti- 2- Front passenger’s door window erate the corresponding passenger’s door
vated while the vehicle was parked. 3- Rear left door window windows.
Please check the inside of the vehicle to con- 4- Rear right door window
firm that nothing was stolen. 5- Lock switch

Electric window control
Press the switch down for opening the win- Safety mechanism (driver’s
dow, and pull up the switch for closing it. window only)
When the door window is automatically
closed by pulling up the switch fully, if a 3
hand or head is trapped in the closing win-
dow, it will lower automatically.
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts
their head or hand out of the window when
closing the driver’s door window.
The lowered window will become operation-
al after a few seconds.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
WARNING
NOTE
WARNING l If the battery terminals are disconnected
or the fuse for electric window is replaced,
l Repeated operation with the engine stopped
will run down the battery. Operate the win- l A child may tamper with the switch at the the safety mechanism will be cancelled.
dow switches only while the engine is run- risk of its hands or head being trapped in If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
ning. the window. When driving with a child in injury could result.
l The rear door windows only open halfway. the vehicle, please push the window lock
switch to disable the passenger’s switches.
CAUTION
Lock switch Timer function l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-
When this switch is operated, the passenger’s fore the window is fully closed. This allows
switches cannot be used to open or close the The door windows can be opened or closed the window to close completely. Therefore
door windows and the driver’s switch cannot for 30 seconds after the engine is stopped. be especially careful that no fingers are trap-
open or close any door windows other than However, once the driver’s door or the front ped in the window.
the driver’s door window. passenger’s door is opened, the windows can- l The safety mechanism is deactivated while
not be operated. the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-
To unlock, push it once again. cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the door window opening.

Power panoramic sunroof*
NOTE Power panoramic sunroof* NOTE

l The safety mechanism can be activated if the l If the front sunroof, front shade, or rear
driving conditions or other circumstances WARNING shade does not operate when the switch is
3 cause the driver’s door window to be subjec-
ted to a physical shock similar to that caused l Do not put head, hands or anything else
operated, release the switch and check
whether something is trapped by the sunroof
by a trapped hand or head. out of the front sunroof opening while or shade. If nothing is trapped, we recom-
driving the vehicle.
l If the safety mechanism is activated five or mend you to have the sunroof or shade
more times in a row, the safety mechanism l Never leave a child (or other person who checked.
might not be capable of safe operation of
will be cancelled and the door window will
the sunroof switches) in the vehicle alone.
l Depending on the model of ski carriers or
not close correctly. roof carriers, the front sunroof may make
In such a case, the following procedure l Never leave the vehicle without removing contact with the carrier when the front sun-
should be implemented to rectify this situa- the key. roof is tilted up. Be careful when tilting up
tion. If the window is open, repeatedly raise l Before operating the front sunroof, front the front sunroof if such a ski carrier or a
the driver’s door window switch until that shade, or rear shade, make sure that noth- roof carrier is installed.
ing is capable of being trapped (head,
window has been fully closed. Following
hand, finger, etc.).
l Be sure to close the front sunroof completely
this, release the switch, raise the switch once when washing the vehicle or when leaving
again and hold it in this condition for at least l Because the front sunroof opens to the the vehicle.
outside of the vehicle, do not open the
1 second, then release it. You should now be
sunroof when cleaning the top of the roof,
l After washing the vehicle or after it has
able to operate in the normal fashion. rained, wipe off any water that is on the
etc. Your hands or arms could be trapped.
l If the battery terminals are disconnected or front sunroof before operating it.
the fuse for electric window is replaced, the l Operating the front sunroof, front shade, or
safety mechanism will be cancelled and the rear shade repeatedly with the engine stop-
door window will not automatically open/ NOTE ped will run down the battery. Operate the
close completely. l The front sunroof stops just before reaching front sunroof, front shade, and rear shade
If the window is open, repeatedly raise the the fully open position. while the engine is running.
driver’s door window switch until the win- If the vehicle is driven with the front sunroof
dow has been fully closed. Following this, in this position, wind throbs lower than with
release the switch, raise the switch once the front sunroof fully open.
again and hold it in this condition for at least l Do not try to operate the front sunroof if it is
1 second, then release it. You should now be frozen closed (after snow fall or during ex-
able to operate the driver’s door window in treme cold).
the normal fashion. l Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the
front sunroof or roof opening edge.
l Release the switch when the front sunroof,
front shade, or rear shade starts to move.

Front sunroof & front shade To stop the sunroof before it is fully open, NOTE
operate the switches in any of the directions
The front sunroof & front shade can only be (1) to (6). l Depending on the position of the front
shade, the front shade will open together
operated with the ignition switch in the “ON”
position or the operation mode in ON. NOTE
with the front sunroof.
3
l The front sunroof automatically stops just Tilting down the front sunroof
before reaching the fully open position.
Press the switch in direction (3) or pull the
Press the switch again to fully open it.
switch in direction (4) to fully close the front
l Depending on the position of the front
shade, the front shade will open together sunroof automatically.
with the front sunroof.
NOTE
Closing the front sunroof
l When you press the switch in direction (6),
Press the switch in direction (3) to fully close the front sunroof will close slightly, and then
the front sunroof automatically. the sunroof and front shade will fully close
To stop the sunroof before it is fully closed, automatically.
operate the switches in any of the directions
(1) to (6). Opening the front shade
Press the switch in direction (5) to fully open
NOTE the front shade automatically.
1- Open (front sunroof) To stop the shade before it is fully open, op-
l When you press the switch in direction (6), erate the switches in any of the directions (1)
2- Tilt up (front sunroof) the front sunroof will close slightly, and then
3- Close (front sunroof) the sunroof and front shade will fully close to (6).
4- Tilt down (front sunroof) automatically.
5- Open (front shade) Closing the front shade
6- Close (front shade) Tilting up the front sunroof Press the switch in direction (6) to fully close
Press the switch in direction (2) to raise the the front shade automatically.
Opening the front sunroof To stop the shade before it is fully closed, op-
rear edge of the front sunroof as it opens.
Press the switch in direction (1) to open the erate the switches in any of the directions (1)
front sunroof automatically. to (6).

NOTE 1. Press and hold the switch in direction (3) NOTE

or pull and hold the switch in direction
l If the front sunroof is open, it will close to- (4). l The safety mechanism can be activated if the
gether with the front shade. driving conditions or other circumstances
2. The front sunroof (if open) and front
3 shade will move to the fully closed posi-
cause the front sunroof or the front shade to
be subjected to a physical shock similar to
Timer function tions in small increments. that caused by a trapped hand or head.
Within approximately 30 seconds after the ig- l Do not release the switch until the resetting
procedure is finished. If you release the
nition switch is changed to “ACC” or NOTE switch, the resetting mode will be cancelled.
l If the front sunroof and front shade are both To perform the resetting procedure again, re-
changed to ACC or OFF, the front sunroof
open, the front sunroof will move to the peat the procedure from step 1.
and front shade can be opened and closed. fully closed position, and then the front
However, if the driver’s or front passenger’s shade will move to the fully closed position.
door is opened within 30 seconds after the ig- Rear shade
nition switch is changed to “ACC” or
3. When the front sunroof and front shade The rear shade can only be operated with the
have both stopped in the fully closed po- ignition switch in the “ON” position or the
changed to ACC or OFF, the front sunroof
sition, release the switch. (The resetting operation mode in ON.
and front shade cannot be opened or closed.
procedure is finished.)
Safety mechanism
If the front sunroof and front shade do not
If a person’s hand, neck, etc., is trapped in the move correctly to the fully closed position af-
front sunroof or front shade, the front sunroof ter you perform the resetting procedure, con-
or front shade will automatically open a max- tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
imum of 20 cm as a safety function. After the Service Point.
front sunroof and front shade open, you can
use the switch to close them.
If the safety mechanism operates five times CAUTION
or more consecutively, you will not be able to l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-
close the front sunroof and front shade nor- fore the front shade is fully closed. This al-
mally. lows the front shade to close completely.
Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
If this occurs, perform the following proce-
gers are trapped in the front shade.
dure to reset the safety mechanism.

7. Open (rear shade) 3. When the rear shade has stopped in the
8. Close (rear shade) fully closed position, release the switch.
(The resetting procedure is finished.)
Opening the rear shade
Press the switch in direction (7) to fully open If the rear shade does not move correctly to 3
the rear shade automatically. the fully closed position after you perform
To stop the shade before it is fully open, press the resetting procedure, contact a
the switch in direction (7) or (8). MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
Closing the rear shade
Press the switch in direction (8) to fully close CAUTION
the rear shade automatically. l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-
To stop the shade before it is fully closed, fore the rear shade is fully closed. This al-
press the switch in direction (7) or (8). lows the rear shade to close completely.
Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
Safety mechanism gers are trapped in the rear shade.
If a person’s hand, neck, etc., is trapped in the

rear shade, the shade will automatically open NOTE
a maximum of 20 cm as a safety function. l The safety mechanism can be activated if the
After the rear shade opens, you can use the driving conditions or other circumstances
switch to close it. cause the rear shade to be subjected to a
If the safety mechanism operates five times physical shock similar to that caused by a
or more consecutively, you will not be able to trapped hand or head.
close the rear shade normally. l Do not release the switch until the resetting
procedure is finished. If you release the
If this occurs, perform the following proce- switch, the resetting mode will be cancelled.
dure to reset the safety mechanism. To perform the resetting procedure again, re-
1. Press and hold the switch in direction peat the procedure from step 1.
(8).
2. The rear shade will move to the fully
closed position in small increments.

OGKE18E5
Seats and seat belts
Seat adjustment................................................................................... 4-02 4

Front seat.............................................................................................4-02
Rear seats............................................................................................ 4-03
Heated seats*.......................................................................................4-04
Head restraints.....................................................................................4-05
Making a luggage area........................................................................ 4-07
Seat belts............................................................................................. 4-08
Pregnant women restraint....................................................................4-14
Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system...................... 4-14
Child restraint......................................................................................4-15
Seat belt inspection............................................................................. 4-24
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag.................................... 4-25
OGKE18E5
Seat adjustment
Seat adjustment WARNING CAUTION

l To minimize the risk of personal injury in l When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are com- the event of a collision or sudden braking, pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
fortable and that you can reach the pedals, the seatbacks should always be in the al- gers.
steering wheel, switches etc. while retaining most upright position while the vehicle is
4 a clear field of vision. in motion. The protection provided by the
seat belts may be reduced significantly Front seat
when the seatback is reclined. There is
WARNING greater risk that the passenger will slide
under the seat belt, resulting in serious in- Manual type
l Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
jury, when the seatback is reclined.
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol and result in an accident. After ad- l Do not place objects under the seats. This
could prevent the seat from locking se-
justments are made, ensure the seating is
curely, and it could lead to an accident. It
locked in position by attempting to move
may also cause damage to the seat or oth-
the seat forward and rearward without
er parts.
using the adjusting mechanism.
l It is extremely dangerous to ride in the
luggage area of a vehicle. Also, the lug-
gage area and rear seats should never be
CAUTION
used as a play area by children. In a colli- l Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or
sion, people or children riding unrestrain- with adult supervision for correct and safe
ed in these areas are more likely to be se- operation.
riously injured or killed. l Do not place a cushion or the like between
l Do not allow people or children to ride in your back and the seatback while driving.
any area of your vehicle that is not equip- The effectiveness of the head restraints will 1- To adjust forward or backward
ped with seats and seat belts, and make be reduced in the event of an accident. Lift the handle and adjust the seat to the
sure that everyone travelling in your vehi- l The reclining mechanism of the front seat’s desired position, and release the handle.
cle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, or seatback is spring loaded, causing it to return 2- To recline the seatback
in the case of a child is strapped in a child to the vertical position when the lock lever is
restraint.
Pull the lever up and then lean backward
operated. When using the lever, sit close to
the seatback or hold it with your hand to to the desired position, and release the
control its return motion. lever.
l When sliding the seats, be careful not to 3- To adjust seat height (driver’s side only)
catch your hand or foot. Repeatedly operate the lever and adjust
the seat height to the desired position.
4-02 Seats and seat belts OGKE18E5

Rear seats
Power type (driver’s side on- NOTE Rear seats

ly)* l To prevent the battery from running down,
operate the switch with the engine running.
Armrest*
4
The lid of the floor console box can be
moved forward and backward, and used as an
armrest.
1- To adjust forward or backward

1- To adjust forward or backward Lift the handle and adjust the seat to the
Operate the switch as indicated by the desired position, and release the handle.
arrows and adjust the seat to the desired 2- To recline the seatback
position. Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback
2- To recline the seatback by hand to the desired position, and re-
Operate the switch as indicated by the lease the lever.
arrows and adjust the seatback angle to
the desired position.
3- To adjust seat height
CAUTION
Operate the switch as indicated by the l When sliding the rear seat rearward, make
arrows and adjust the seat height to the sure that there are no items behind the seat.
desired position. l If your vehicle is equipped with the armrest
and the seatback is reclined while the drink
4- To adjust seat cushion angle
holder is used, drinks could be spilled. If the
Operate the switch as indicated by the spilt drink is very hot, you could be burnt.
arrows and adjust the seat cushion angle
to the desired position.
OGKE18E5 Seats and seat belts 4-03

Heated seats*
NOTE NOTE CAUTION

l It is possible to adjust the seatback angle and l The top surface of the armrest contains a l Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
move the seats forward or backward inde- drink holder for rear seat occupants. stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
pendently on each side. Refer to “Drink holder” on page 7-84. into it.
l If your vehicle is equipped with the cargo l Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other mate-
4 area cover, the seatbacks cannot be reclined
unless the cargo area cover is installed in the Heated seats*
rial with high heat insulation properties on
the seat while using the heater; this might
rear position or removed. cause the heater element to overheat.
Refer to “Cargo area cover” on page 7-85. The heated seats can be operated with the ig- l Do not use benzine, kerosene, petrol, alcohol
nition switch in the “ON” position or the op- or other organic solvents when cleaning the
seats. Doing so could damage not only the
Armrest* eration mode in ON. seat cover, but also the heater element.
To use the armrest, fold it down. To return to l If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
the original position, push it backward level CAUTION seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before at-
tempting to use the heater.
with the seat. l Switch off seat heaters when not in use. l Turn the heater off immediately if it appears
l Operate in the high position for quick heat- to be malfunctioning during use.
ing. Once the seat is warm, set the heater
switch to the “LO” position to keep it warm.
Slight variations in seat temperature may be NOTE
felt while using the heated seats. This is
caused by the operation of the heater’s inter- l Do not use the seat heater for a long time
when the engine is not running, doing so
nal thermostat and does not indicate a mal-
will cause the battery to be discharged.
function.
l If the following types of persons use the
heated seats, they might become too hot or
receive minor burns (red skin, heat blisters,
etc.):
• Children, elderly or ill people
• People with sensitive skin
CAUTION • Excessively tired people
l Do not climb or sit on the armrest. • People under the influence of alcohol or
Doing so could damage the armrest. sleep inducing medication (cold medicine,
etc.)

Head restraints
For the front seats For the rear seats Head restraints
Operate the switch as indicated by arrows. Each time the switch is pressed, the mode
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while changes to the next one in the following se- WARNING
the heater is on. quence: OFF → HI → LO → OFF. l Driving without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
serious injury or death in an accident. To 4
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are
installed and properly positioned when
the seat is occupied.
l Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
To adjust height
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heat-
ing) Front seats
2 (OFF) - Heater off Adjust the head restraint height so that the
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat OFF - Heater off centre of the head restraint is as close as pos-
warm) sible to ear level to reduce the chances of in-
HI - Heater high (for quick heat-
jury in the event of collision. Any person too
ing)
tall for the head restraint to reach their seated
LO - Heater low (to keep the seat ear level, should adjust the restraint as high
warm) as possible.
NOTE
l The rear seat switch will automatically re-
turn to “OFF” after the engine is stopped.

Head restraints
To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To raise the head restraint, move it upward. WARNING
To lower the restraint, move it downward To lower the restraint, move it downward
while pressing the height adjusting knob (A) while pushing the height adjusting knob (A) l When a person sits in the rear seats, pull
up the head restraint to a height at which
in the direction of the arrow. After adjust- in the direction of the arrow. After adjust-
it locks in position. Be sure to make this
ment, push the head restraint downward and ment, push the head restraint downward and adjustment before starting to drive. Seri-
make sure that it is locked. make sure that it is locked.
4 ous injuries could otherwise be suffered as
the result of an impact.
Rear seats
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
pull up the head restraint to the locked posi-
tion.

Making a luggage area
CAUTION To install CAUTION

l The shape and size of the head restraint dif- l Confirm that the height adjusting knob (A)
fers according to the seat. Always use the NOTE is correctly adjusted as shown in the illustra-
correct head restraint provided for the seat tion, and also lift the head restraints to en-
and do not install the head restraint in the
l Before installing the head restraint to a rear sure that they do not come out of the seat-
outboard seat, tilt the seatback forward
wrong direction. slightly. back.
4
Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-03.
Confirm that the head restraint is facing the

correct direction, and then insert it into the
seatback while pressing the height adjusting
knob (A) in the direction indicated by the ar-
row.
The head restraint stalk with the adjustment
notches (B) must be installed in the hole with
the adjusting knob (A).
To remove Making a luggage area
Lift the head restraint with the height adjust-
ing knob (A) pressed in. To create luggage space, you can fold the rear
seats.
NOTE
CAUTION
l If a front seat head restraint contacts the
headliner and cannot be removed, tilt the l Do not stack luggage above the seatback
seatback rearward slightly. height. Secure the luggage firmly.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-02. Serious accidents could result due to unre-
strained objects entering the passenger com-
l To remove the head restraint from a rear out-
partment during sudden braking.
board seat, tilt the seatback forward slightly.
Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-03. l When folding the seat, be sure not to catch
your hand or leg.

Seat belts
NOTE NOTE The front seat belts have a pretensioner sys-

tem. These belts are used the same way as a
l It is possible to folding the seat independent- l If you do not move the rear seat to its most conventional seat belt.
ly on each side. rearward position, items may fall into the
Refer to “Seat belt pretensioner system and
gap between the rear seat and the luggage
floor. force limiter system” on page 4-14.
To fold
4
1. Lower the head restraints of the rear seat 5. Pull up the lever (A), then fold the seat- WARNING
to the lowest position. back forward. l Seat belts should always be worn by every
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-05. adult who drives or rides in this vehicle,
2. Store the seat belt for the rear centre and by all children who are tall enough to
seating position. wear seat belts properly.
Refer to “Rear-centre 3-point type seat Other children should always use proper
child restraint systems.
belt” on page 4-12.
3. Place the buckles in the pockets.
l Always place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
it behind you or under your arm.
l One seat belt should be used by only one
person. Doing otherwise can be danger-
ous.
l The seat belt will provide its wearer with
maximum protection if the recliner seat-
back is placed in fully upright position.
To return When the seatback is reclined, there is
greater risk that the passenger will slide
Raise the seatback until it locks securely into under the belt, especially in a forward im-
place. pact accident, and may be injured by the
belt or by striking the instrument panel or
seatbacks.
Seat belts l Remove any twists when using the belt.
4. Adjust the rear seat to its most rearward
position. To protect you and your passengers in the
Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-03. event of an accident, it is most important that
the seat belts are worn correctly while driv-
ing.

Seat belts
WARNING NOTE To unfasten

l No modifications or additions should be l When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a Hold the latch plate and push the button on
made by the user which will either pre- locked condition, pull the belts once force- the buckle.
vent the seat belt adjusting devices from fully and then return them. After that, pull
operating to remove slack, or prevent the the belts out slowly once again.
seat belt assembly from being adjusted to
remove slack.
4
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until
l Never hold a child in your arms or on
your lap when riding in this vehicle, even a “click” is heard.
if you are wearing your seat belt. To do so
risks severe or fatal injury to the child in
a collision or sudden stop.
l Always adjust the belt to a snug fit.
l Always wear the lap portion of the belt
over your hips.
3-point type seat belt (with NOTE

emergency locking mechanism) l As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold-
ing the latch plate while retracting so that the
This type of belt requires no length adjust- belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could
ment. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the damage the vehicle.
movement of the wearer, but in the event of a WARNING
sudden or strong shock, the belt automatical-
ly locks to hold the wearer’s body. l Never wear the lap portion of the belt
across your abdomen. During accidents it
can press sharply against the abdomen
NOTE and increase the risk of injury.
l The seat belts must not be twisted when
l You can check if the belt locks by pulling it worn.
forward quickly.
To fasten 3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness

as desired.
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while hold-
ing the latch plate.

Seat belts
NOTE Seat belt reminder If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still
unfastened, the warning lamp will blink and
l If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty, the tone will sound intermittently until the
the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat For the driver and the front
passenger’s seat seat belt is fastened. At the same time, “FAS-
belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
mild soap or detergent solution. TEN SEAT BELT” is displayed on the infor-
mation screen in the multi-information dis-
4 For the driver
play for the driver.
WARNING
l Do not install any accessory or sticker
that makes the lamp difficult to see.
NOTE
For the front passenger l If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-
tened, the warning lamp and the tone will is-
sue further warnings each time the vehicle
starts moving from a stop.
l For the front passenger seat, the warning
function works only while a person is sitting
on the seat.
l When luggage is placed on the front passen-
ger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may,
depending on the weight and position of the
luggage, cause the warning tone to sound
and the warning lamp to come on.
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or the operation mode is put in ON
while a seat belt is not fastened, the warning
lamp comes on and the tone sounds for ap-
proximately 6 seconds to remind the driver
and the front passenger to fasten the seat belt.

Seat belts
For the rear passenger’s seats WARNING Adjustable seat belt anchor
l Do not install any accessory or sticker (front seats)
that makes the lamp difficult to see. The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.
Raise or lower the seat belt anchor (A) while
pulling the lock knob (B).
NOTE 4
l The warning lamp comes on even if no one
is sitting on the rear seats.
l If a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle
is being driven, the tone sounds for approxi-
mately 1 second and the warning lamp
comes on for approximately 30 seconds. At
the same time, the warning lamp for the seat
where the seat belt is not fastened comes on.
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” l If the seat belts are initially fastened but a
seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is
position or the operation mode is put in ON
stationary and the vehicle is then driven with
while a seat belt is not fastened, the warning the seat belt still unfastened, the warning
lamp comes on for approximately 30 seconds lamp for the seat where the seat belt is not
to remind the rear passenger to fasten the seat fastened comes on again for approximately
belt. 30 seconds. WARNING
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still l When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set it
unfastened, the warning lamps come on for at a position that is sufficiently high so
approximately another 30 seconds. (This illu- that the belt will make full contact with
mination happens only the first time the vehi- your shoulder but will not touch your
neck.
cle starts moving with the seat belt still un-
fastened.)
The warning lamps go off when the seat belt
is fastened.

Seat belts
Rear-centre 3-point type seat 2. Pull out the latch plate (A) and then pull NOTE
belt out the small latch plate (B) by tilting it
as shown in the illustration. l When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a
The rear-centre 3-point type seat belt must be locked condition, pull the belt once forceful-
worn correctly as illustrated. ly and then return it.
After that, pull the belt out slowly once
4 again.
4. Pull the seat belt and insert the small

latch plate (B) into the buckle (C).
5. Insert the latch plate (A) into the buckle
(D).
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly and pass it

through the seat belt guide (E) so that
WARNING the latch plate (A) is turned to the front
side.
l Be sure to securely connect the both latch
plate (A and B). Failing to do so could sig-
nificantly reduce the amount of protection
and cause serious injures in a collision or
a sudden stop.
6. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness

To fasten as desired.
1. Pull out the buckle (C) from the seat-
back.
Refer to “Rear seat belt storage” on page
4-13.

Seat belts
To unfasten 2. To release the buckle (C), press the but- 4. After the seat belt is retracted complete-
ton (F) with the latch plate (A). ly, insert the small latch plate (B) into
CAUTION the upper slit (G) and the latch plate (A)
into the lower slit (H).
l As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold-
ing the latch plate while retracting so that the
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could
damage the vehicle. 4
1. Hold the latch plate (A) and push the
button on the buckle (D).
3. Retract the seat belt and remove it from

the seat belt guide (E).
Rear seat belt storage
When the seat belt is not in use, store it as
shown in the illustration.

Pregnant women restraint
Seat belt plate storage Pregnant women restraint Pretensioner system
When the ignition switch or the operation
Outboard seating position WARNING mode is under the following conditions, if
After passing the belt through the rear notch there is a frontal impact or a side impact se-
l Seat belts work for everyone, including
vere enough to injure the driver, front passen-
(A), insert the plate into the front notch (B). pregnant women. Pregnant women should
4 use the available seat belts. This will re- ger, and/or rear outboard passengers, the pre-
duce the likelihood of injury to both the tensioner system will retract their respective
woman and the unborn child. The lap belt seat belts instantaneously, thus maximizing
should be worn across the thighs and as the seat belt’s effectiveness.
snug against the hips as possible, but not [Except vehicles equipped with keyless oper-
across the waist. Consult your doctor if ation system]
you have any additional questions or con-
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
cerns.
“START” position.
[Vehicles equipped with keyless operation
Seat belt pretensioner system]
The operation mode is in ON.
system and force limiter
Centre seating position
system WARNING
Refer to “Rear-centre 3-point type seat belt” The driver’s seat, front passenger’s seat, and l To obtain the best results from your pre-
on page 4-12. rear outboard seats each have a seat belt tensioner seat belt, make sure you have
equipped with a pretensioner system and adjusted your seat correctly and wear
your seat belt properly.
force limiter system.
CAUTION
l Installation of audio equipment or repairs in
the vicinity of the pretensioner seat belts or
floor console must be performed in line with
MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines. It is
important to do so because the work could
affect the pretensioner systems.

Child restraint
CAUTION Child restraint Caution for installing the child

l If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con-
restraint on vehicles with a
sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized When transporting children in your vehicle, front passenger’s airbag
Service Point. some type of child restraint system should al-
It is important to do so because unexpected ways be used according to the size of the The label shown here is attached on vehicles
activation of the pretensioner seat belts
could cause injuries.
child. This is required by law in most coun- with a front passenger airbag. 4
tries.
The regulations concerning driving with chil-
NOTE dren in the front seat may differ from country
to country. You are advised to comply with
l The pretensioner seat belts will be activated the relevant regulations.
if the vehicle suffers a severe impact, even if
the seat belts are not worn.
l The pretensioner seat belts are designed to WARNING
work only once. After the pretensioner seat
belts have been activated, we recommend l When possible, put children in the rear
you have it replaced by a MITSUBISHI seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. dren of all sizes and ages are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat rather
than in the front seat.
SRS warning l Holding a child in your arms is no substi-
tute for a restraint system. Failure to use WARNING
The same warning lamp/display is shared by a proper restraint system can result in se-
the SRS airbags and the pretensioner seat vere or fatal injury to the child.
l Extreme Hazard!
NEVER use a rearward facing child re-
belts. l Each child restraint device or fixing is to straint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on be used only by one child. AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI-
page 4-35. l When attaching a child restraint system OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
to the rear seat, prevent the front seat-
Force limiter system backs from touching the child’s feet and
child restraint system.
In the event of a collision, each force limiter Otherwise, the child could be seriously in-
system will effectively absorb the load ap- jured in the event of hard braking or a
plied to the seat belt to minimize the impact collision.
to the passenger.

Child restraint
Use rearward facing child restraints in the WARNING l The child restraint system should be ap-
rear seat or turn off the front passenger’s air- propriate for the child’s weight and
bag ON-OFF switch. (Refer to “To turn an lA REARWARD FACING CHILD RE- height and properly fit in the vehicle.
STRAINT must NOT be used in the front
airbag off” on page 4-28.) For a higher degree of safety: THE
passenger seat when driver’s visibility is
obstructed. CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE
4 Front passenger's REAR SEAT.
airbag ON Infants and small children l Before purchasing a child restraint sys-
When transporting infants and small children tem, try installing it in the rear seat to
in your vehicle, follow the instruction given make sure there is a good fit. Because of
below. the location of the seat belt buckles and
the shape of the seat cushion, it may be
difficult to securely install some manu-
facturer’s child restraint systems.
If the child restraint system can be
pulled forward or to either side easily on
the seat cushion after the seat belt has
WARNING been tightened, choose another manufac-
lA REARWARD FACING CHILD RE- turer’s child restraint system.
STRAINT must NOT be used in the front
passenger seat if the front passenger’s air-
bag has not been deactivated. The force of WARNING
an inflating airbag could kill or cause se- l When installing a child restraint system,
rious injuries to the child. A rearward refer to the instructions provided by the
facing child restraint should be used in Instruction: manufacturer of the restraint system.
the rear seat. Failure to do so can result in severe or fa-
l A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE- l For small infants, an infant carrier tal injury to the child.
STRAINT should be used in the rear seat should be used. For small children
whenever possible; if it must be used in whose height when seated allows the
the front passenger seat, turn off the front shoulder belt to lie in contact with the
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. Fail- face or the throat, a child seat should be
ure to do so could kill or cause serious in- used.
juries to the child.

Child restraint
WARNING The lap portion of the belt should be snug

and positioned low on the abdomen so that it
l After installation, push and pull the child is below the top of the hip-bone. Otherwise,
restraint system back and forth, and side
the belt could intrude into the child’s abdo-
to side, to see that it is properly secured. If
the child restraint system is not installed men during an accident and cause injury.
securely, it may cause injury to the child
or other occupants in the case of accident
4
or sudden stops.
l When the child restraint system is not in
use, keep your child restraint system se-
cured with the seat belt or remove it from
the vehicle in order to prevent it from be-
ing thrown around inside the vehicle dur-
ing an accident.
NOTE
l Depending on the seating position in the ve-
hicle and the child restraint system that you
have, the child restraint can be attached us-
ing one of the following two ways:
• Using the lower anchorage in the rear seat
ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIX
mountings (See page 4-22).
• Using the seat belt (See to 4-23).
Older children
Children who have outgrown the child re-
straint system should be seated in the rear
seat and wear combination lap shoulder belt.

Child restraint
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions

Vehicle ISO-
FIX positions UN-R44 Approval
Mass group Size class Fixture Recommended Child Restraint Systems *
No.
Rear outboard
4 Carrycot F ISO/L1 X — —
G ISO/L2 X — —
0 -Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 IL — —
0+ - Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 IL, IL# BABY-SAFE plus: MZ314393 E1-04301146
BABY-SAFE ISOFIX BASE: MZ314394
D ISO/R2 IL — —
C ISO/R3 IL — —
I -9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 IL — —
C ISO/R3 IL — —
B ISO/F2 IUF — —
B1 ISO/F2X IUF, IL# DUO plus: MZ313045 E1-04301133
A ISO/F3 IUF — —
II & III -15 to IL# KIDFIX XP: MZ315025 E1-04301304
36 kg
*:MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For detailed information, consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Child restraint
CAUTION
l When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.
l When installing a child restraint system, adjust the seat slide to its most rearward position.
l When installing a child restraint system on the rear seat, adjust the front seat to prevent the front seatback from touching the child’s feet and child restraint
system.
l Do not sit in the centre seating position of the rear seat when installing a child restraint system on the left side of the rear seat. 4
Definition of characters the above table:
l IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
l IL- Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of semi-universal category approved for use in the mass group.
l IL#- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. See the above table of “Recommended Child Restraint Systems”.
l X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group.
i-Size child restraint system

Seating position
Rear outboard
i-Size child restraint system i-U
CAUTION
l When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.
system.
l Do not sit in the centre seating position of the rear seat when installing a child restraint system on the left side of the rear seat.

Child restraint
l i-U- Suitable for i-Size “universal” child restraint system forward and rearward facing.
Suitability for various seating positions

4 Seating position Recommended Child UN-R44
Restraint System*1 Approval No.
Front passenger Rear outboard Rear centre
Mass group
Deactivated air-
Activated airbag
bag*2
0 -Up to 10 kg X U U X — —
X U, L# U, L# X BABY-SAFE plus: E1-04301146
0+ - Up to 13 kg
MZ314393
X U, L# U, L# X DUO plus: E1-04301133
I -9 to 18 kg
MZ313045
II & III -15 to X KIDFIX XP:
U*3, L# U*3, L# X E1-04301304
36 kg MZ315025
*1: MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For detailed information, consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
*2: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
*3: Do not remove the head restraint when installing a “universal” category booster cushion.

Child restraint
CAUTION
l When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat. However, do not remove the head restraint when installing a booster cush-
ion (see 4-23).
system. 4
l Do not sit in the centre seating position of the rear seat when installing a child restraint system on the left side of the rear seat.

l U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
l L#- Suitable for particular child restraint systems. See the above table of “Recommended Child Restraint Systems”.
l X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

Child restraint
Installing a child restraint sys- These are for securing a child restraint sys- Child restraint system with
tem to the lower anchorage tem tether strap to each of the two rear seat- ISOFIX mountings
ing positions in your vehicle.
(ISOFIX child restraint mount- The child restraint system is designed only
ings) and tether anchorage for seats that incorporate lower anchorages.
Retain the child restraint system using the
4 Lower anchorage location lower anchorages.
It is not necessary to retain the child restraint
Your vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower system using the vehicle’s seat belts.
anchorages for attaching a child restraint sys-
tem with ISOFIX mountings.
WARNING
l Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
A- Child restraint system connectors
ing other items or equipment to the vehi-
To install
Tether anchorage locations cle.
Your vehicle has two child restraint anchor- NOTE

age points on the backside of the rear seats. CAUTION l On vehicles with the cargo area cover, install
l Do not sit in the centre seating position of the cargo area cover in the rear position or
the rear seat when installing a child restraint remove it.
system on the left side of the rear seat. Be- Refer to “Cargo area cover” on page 7-85.
cause the child restraint interferes with the
seat belt, you cannot fasten the seat belt cor-
rectly.

Child restraint
1. Remove any foreign material in or port leg at the stable position on the Installing a child restraint sys-
around the connectors and ensure the ve- floor. tem to a 3-point type seat belt
hicle seat belt is in its normal storage po- If your child restraint system requires
sition. the use of a tether strap, fasten the tether (with emergency locking mech-
2. Remove the head restraint from the loca- strap in accordance with step 5. anism)
tion in which you wish to install a child
restraint. 5. Latch the tether strap hook (C) of the 4
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-05. child restraint system to the tether an-
CAUTION
3. Adjust the rear seat slide to its most rear- chorage bar (D) and tighten the top teth- l Do not sit in the centre seating position of
ward position. er strap hook so it is securely fastened. the rear seat when installing a child restraint
system on the left side of the rear seat.
Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-03.
Because the child restraint interferes with
4. Push the child restraint system’s connec- the seat belt, you cannot fasten the seat belt
tors (A) into the lower anchorages (B) in correctly.
accordance with the instructions provi-
ded by the child restraint system’s manu-
facturer.
6. Push and pull the child restraint system

in all directions to be sure it is secured.
To remove
Remove the child restraint system in accord-
ance with the instructions provided by the
A: Connector child restraint system’s manufacturer.
B: Lower anchorage
If your child restraint system has a sup-
port leg, make sure that there is a sup-

Seat belt inspection
To install WARNING To remove
1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in l For some types of child restraint, the lock- Remove the plate from the buckle, then re-
which you wish to install it, and remove ing clip (A) should be used to help avoid move the seat belt from the child restraint
the head restraint from the seat. personal injury during a collision or sud- system.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-05. den manoeuvre.
4 It must be fitted and used in accordance
with the child restraint manufacturer’s Seat belt inspection
CAUTION instructions.
The locking clip must be removed when Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web-
l Do not remove the head restraint when in-
the child restraint is removed. bing and for cracked or deformed metallic
stalling a booster cushion.
parts. Replace the belt assembly if it is defec-
tive.
WARNING
l We recommend you to have all seat belt
assemblies including retractors and at-
taching hardware inspected after any col-
lision. We recommend that seat belt as-
semblies in use during a collision be re-
placed unless the collision was minor and
2. When installing a child restraint system the belts show no damage and continue to
in the front passenger seat or rear seat, 5. If your child restraint system has a sup-
operate properly.
port leg, make sure that there is a sup-
adjust the seat slide to its most rearward l Do not attempt to repair or replace any
position. port leg at the stable position on the part of the seat belt assemblies; we recom-
3. Route the belt through the child restraint floor. mend you to have this work done by a
according to the child restraint system 6. Before putting the child in the restraint, MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
push and pull the restraint in all direc- Service Point. Incorrect repair or replace-
manufacturer’s instructions, then insert ment could reduce the effectiveness of the
the latch plate into the buckle. tions to be sure it is secure. Do this be-
belts and could result in serious injury in
4. Use the locking clip to completely elimi- fore each use.
the event of a collision.
nate any slackness.

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag
WARNING Supplemental restraint The SRS curtain airbags are designed to sup-
plement properly worn seat belts and provide
l Once the pretensioner has been activated, system (SRS) - airbag the driver and passenger with protection
it cannot be re-used.
against head injuries in certain moderate-to-
It must be replaced together with the re- The information for SRS airbags includes im-
tractor. severe side impact collisions.
portant information concerning the driver’s The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat
l Do not insert any foreign objects (pieces
of plastic, paper clips, buttons, etc.) in the
and front passenger’s airbags, the driver’s belts. To ensure the maximum protection dur- 4
buckle or retractor mechanism. In addi- knee airbag, the side airbags and the curtain ing all types of collisions and accidents, all
tion, do not modify, remove or install the airbags. occupants, including the passengers as well
seat belt. Otherwise, the seat belt may not The SRS driver’s and front passenger’s air- as the driver, must wear their seat belts.
be able to provide adequate protection in bags are designed to supplement the primary
a collision or other situation. protection of the driver and front passenger How the Supplemental Re-
side seat belt systems by providing those oc- straint System works
cupants with protection against head and
The SRS includes the following components:
chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe
frontal collisions.
The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to

supplement the primary protection of the
driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
lA dirty belt should be cleaned with neu- and provide increased overall body protection
tral detergent in warm water. After rins- in certain moderate-to-severe frontal colli-
ing in water, let it dry in the shade. Do not sions.
attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts be-
cause this will affect their characteristics.
The SRS side airbags are designed to supple-
ment properly worn seat belts and provide the
driver and front passenger with protection 1- Airbag module (Driver)
against chest injuries in certain moderate-to- 2- Front passenger’s airbag indicator
severe side impact collisions. 3- Airbag module (Passenger)
4- Driver’s knee airbag module

5- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF The airbags deployment produces a sudden, WARNING
switch loud noise, and releases some smoke and
powder, but these conditions are not injuri- l IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE
PROPERLY SEATED.
ous, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
A driver or front passenger too close to
People with respiratory problems may feel the steering wheel or instrument panel
some temporary irritation from chemicals
4 used to produce the deployment; open the
during airbag deployment can be killed or
seriously injured.
windows after airbag deployment, if safe to Airbags inflate very fast, and with great
do so. force.
The airbags deflate very rapidly after deploy- If the driver and front passenger are not
properly seated and restrained, the air-
ment, so there is little danger of obscured vi-
bags may not protect you properly, and
sion. could cause serious or fatal injuries when
it inflates.
CAUTION l Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or sit
with your lower legs too close to the in-
6. Side airbag modules
l Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid speed. strument panel, or lean head or chest
7. Curtain airbag modules In certain situations, contact with inflating close to the steering wheel or instrument
airbags can result in abrasions, bruises, light panel. Do not put feet or legs on or against
cuts, and the like. the instrument panel.
Only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or the operation mode is under the
following conditions, the airbags will oper-
ate.
[Except for vehicles equipped with keyless
operation system]
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position.
[Vehicles equipped with keyless operation

system]
The operation mode is in ON.

WARNING WARNING Caution for installing the child

l Place all infants and small children in the l Infants and small children should never restraint on vehicle with front
rear seat and properly restrained using an be unrestrained, stand up against the in- passenger’s airbag
appropriate child restraint system. strument panel or be held in your arms or
The rear seat is the safest place for infants on your lap. They could be seriously in-
The label shown here is attached on vehicles
with front passenger’s airbag.
and children. jured or killed in a collision, including
when the airbag inflates. They should be
4
properly seated in the rear seat in an ap-
propriate child restraint system.
Refer to “Child restraint” on page 4-15.
l Older children should be seated in the WARNING

rear seat, properly wearing the seat belt,
with an appropriate booster cushion if l Extreme Hazard!
NEVER use a rearward facing child re-
needed. straint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI-
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Front passenger’s airbag ON- Front passenger’s airbag indi- WARNING

OFF switch cator l Do not fit any accessory that makes the
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch The front passenger’s airbag indicator is loca- indication lamp impossible to see, and do
can be used to disable the front passenger’s ted in the instrument panel. not cover the indication lamp with a stick-
er. You would not be able to verify the sta-
airbag. If you have a child restraint system
4 that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the
tus of the passenger airbag system.
front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the

front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch be- To turn an airbag off
fore using it.
(Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page
4-28)
WARNING
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch l To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
is located as shown in the illustration. • Always turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position or put the operation
mode in OFF, before operating the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch. Failure to do so could adversely
Both indicators normally come on when the affect the airbag performance.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position • Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes switch after turning the ignition switch
off a few seconds later. to the “LOCK” position or putting the
When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF operation mode in OFF.
switch is turned OFF, the OFF indicator will The SRS airbag system is designed to
stay on to show that the front passenger’s air- retain enough voltage to deploy the air-
bag is not operational. When the front pas- bag.
senger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned • Always remove the key from the front
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch af-
ON, the OFF indicator goes off, and the ON ter operating that switch. Failure to do
indicator comes on for approximately 1 mi- so could lead to improper position of
nute to show that the front passenger’s airbag the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
is operational. switch.

WARNING 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po- The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s
sition or put the operation mode in ON. airbag are designed to inflate at the same
• Do not turn OFF the front passenger’s The front passenger’s airbag OFF indi- time even if the passenger seat is not occu-
airbag ON-OFF switch except when a
cation lamp will stay on. pied.
child restraint system is fitted to the
front passenger seat.
• If the OFF indicator does not come on
when the front passenger’s airbag ON-
4
OFF switch is turned OFF, do not fit a
child restraint system to the front pas-
senger seat. We recommend you to
have the system inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
• If the OFF indicator remains on when
the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch is turned ON, do not allow any-
one to sit on the front passenger seat.
We recommend you to have the system
inspected by a MITSUBISHI The front passenger’s airbag is now deactiva-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. ted and will not deploy until switched on
again.
To turn an airbag off, follow these steps: Driver’s and front passenger’s
1. Insert the key into the front passenger’s
airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn it to the
airbag system
“OFF” position. The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
NOTE the instrument panel above the glove box.
l Ifthe vehicle is equipped with the keyless
operation system, use the emergency key.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-16.
2. Remove the key from the front passeng-

er’s airbag ON-OFF switch.

Driver’s knee airbag system Deployment of front airbags The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
and driver’s knee airbag will deploy if the severity of impact is above
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the
the designed threshold level, comparable to
steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
an approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) collision
designed to deploy at the same time as the The front airbags and driver’s when impacting straight into a solid wall that
driver’s front airbag. knee airbag ARE DESIGNED does not move or deform. If the severity of
4 TO DEPLOY when… the impact is below the above threshold level,
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a may not deploy. However, this threshold
moderate to severe frontal impact. The typi- speed will be considerably higher if the vehi-
cal condition is shown in the illustration. cle strikes an object that absorbs the impact
by either deforming or moving (for example,
another stationary vehicle, pole or a guard
rail).
Because frontal collisions can easily move
you out of position, it is important to always
properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts
will help keep you a safe distance from the
steering wheel and instrument panel during
the initial stages of airbag deployment. The
initial stage of airbag inflation is the most
forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fa-
1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at a tal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your
speed of approximately 25 km/h vehicle are your primary means of protection
(16 mph) or higher in a collision. The SRS airbags are designed
2- Moderate-to-severe frontal impact with- to provide additional protection. Therefore,
in the shaded area between the arrows for your safety and the safety of all occu-
pants, be sure to always properly wear your
seat belts.

The front airbags and driver’s Because the front airbags and driver’s knee The front airbags and driver’s
knee airbag MAY NOT DE- airbag do not protect the occupant in all types knee airbag MAY DEPLOY
PLOY when… of frontal collisions, be sure to always prop- when…
erly wear your seat belts.
With certain types of frontal collisions, the The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb The front airbags and driver’s may deploy if the bottom of the vehicle suf-
the shock to help protect the occupants from knee airbag ARE NOT DE- fers a moderate-to-severe impact (undercar- 4
harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may de- SIGNED TO DEPLOY when… riage damage).
form significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Examples of some typical conditions are
Under such circumstances, the front airbags The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are shown in the illustration.
and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy irre- not designed to deploy in conditions where
spective of the deformation and damage to they cannot typically provide protection to
the vehicle body. the occupant.
Examples of some typical conditions are Such conditions are shown in the illustration.
1- Collision with an elevated median/island

or kerb
2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
1- Rear end collisions 3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and
2- Side collisions hits the ground
1- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other 3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
narrow object
2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a
truck Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
3- Oblique frontal impacts airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
of collisions, be sure to always properly wear
your seat belts.
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee WARNING WARNING
airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts as shown in the illustration l Do not attach accessories to, or put them l Right after the airbag inflation, several
in front of, the windscreen. These objects airbag system components will be hot. Do
that can easily move you out of position, it is
could restrict the airbag inflation, or not touch these components. There is a
important to always properly wear your seat strike and injure an occupant if the air- danger of being burnt.
belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a
4 safe distance from the steering wheel and in- l
bags inflate.
Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
l The airbag system is designed to work on-
ly once. Once the airbags have deployed,
strument panel during the initial stages of air- ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to they will not work again. They must
bag deployment. The initial stage of airbag the ignition key. Such objects could pre- promptly be replaced and we recommend
inflation is the most forceful and can possibly vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflat- you to have the entire airbag system in-
ing normally or could be propelled to spected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
cause serious or fatal injuries if you contact it
cause serious injury if the airbag inflates. Authorized Service Point.
at this stage.
l Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
WARNING Such objects could prevent the driver’s Side airbag system
knee airbag from inflating normally or The side airbags (A) are contained in the
l Do not attach anything to the steering could be propelled to cause serious injury
driver and front passenger seatbacks.
wheel’s padded cover, such as badges or if the airbag inflates.
accessories. It might strike and injure an The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
occupant if the airbag inflates. the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even
l Do not set anything on, or attach anything with no passenger in the front seat.
to, the instrument panel above the glove
box. It might strike and injure an occu-
pant if the airbag inflates.
l Do not put packages, pets or other objects

between the airbags and the driver or
front passenger. It could affect airbag per-
formance, or could cause injury when the
airbag inflates.

The label shown here is attached to the seat- Deployment of side airbags and The side airbags and curtain
backs with a side airbag. curtain airbags airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY
when...
The side airbags and curtain With certain types of side collisions, the vehi-
airbags ARE DESIGNED TO cle’s body structure is designed to absorb the
DEPLOY when... shock to help protect the occupants from 4
harm. (The vehicle body’s side area may de-
The side airbags and curtain airbags are de-
form significantly as it absorbs the impact.)
signed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
Under such circumstances, the side airbags
moderate-to-severe side impact to the middle
and curtain airbags may not deploy irrespec-
of the passenger compartment.
tive of the deformation and damage to the ve-
The typical condition is shown in the illustra-
hicle body. Examples of some typical condi-
tion.
tions are shown in the illustration.
Curtain airbag system

The curtain airbags are contained in the roof
side rail. The curtain airbag is designed to in-
flate only on the side of the vehicle that is
impacted, even with no passenger in the front
seat or rear seat.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

1- Side impacts in an area away from the
mary means of protection in a collision. The
passenger compartment
SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are de-
2- Motorcycle or other similar small vehi-
signed to provide additional protection.
cle collides with the side of vehicle
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of
all occupants, be sure to always properly
wear your seat belts.

3- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other The side airbags and curtain WARNING
narrow object airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED
TO DEPLOY when... l The side airbags and curtain airbags are
designed to supplement the driver and
The side airbags and curtain airbags are not passenger seat belts in certain side im-
designed to deploy in conditions where they pacts. Seat belts should always be worn
4 cannot usually provide protection to the oc- properly, and the driver and passenger
should sit well back and upright without
cupant. Typical conditions are shown in the leaning against the window or door.
illustration.
l The side airbag and curtain airbag inflate
with great force. The driver and passen-
ger should not put their arms out of the
window, and should not lean against the
door, in order to reduce the risk of serious
or possible fatal injury from the deploying
side airbag and curtain airbag.
4- Oblique side impacts
5- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags

do not protect the occupant in all types of
side collisions, be sure to always properly
1- Head-on collisions
wear your seat belts.
2- Rear end collisions
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags

do not protect the occupant in all types of l Do not allow any rear seat occupant to
collisions, be sure to always properly wear hold onto the seatback of either front seat,
your seat belts. in order to reduce risk of injury from the
deploying side airbag. Special care should
be taken with children.

WARNING WARNING WARNING

l Do not place any objects near or in front l Do not attach a microphone (A) or any l Do not allow a child to lean against or
of the seatback of either front seat. They other device or object around the part close to the front door even if the child is
could interfere with proper side airbag in- where the curtain airbags (B) activate seated in a child restraint system.
flation, and also could cause injury if such as on the windscreen, side door glass, The child’s head should also not lean
l
thrown free by side airbag deployment.
Do not place stickers, labels or additional
front and rear pillars and roof side or as-
sist grips. When the curtain airbags in-
against or be close to the area where the
side airbag and curtain airbag are loca-
4
trim on the seatback of either front seat. flate, the microphone or other device or ted. It is dangerous if the side airbag and
They could interfere with proper side air- object will be hurled with great force or curtain airbag inflate.
bag inflation. the curtain airbags may not activate cor- Failure to follow all of these instructions
l Do not install seat covers on seats with rectly, resulting in death or serious injury. could lead to serious or fatal injury to the
side airbags. child.
Do not re-cover seats that have side air- l We recommend work around and on the
bags. This could interfere with proper side airbags and curtain airbags system to
side airbag inflation. be done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
SRS warning lamp/display
WARNING
l Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-
ted object on the coat hook. If the curtain
airbag was activated, any such item could
be propelled away with great force and
could prevent the curtain airbag from in-
flating correctly. Hang clothes directly on
the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.

There is a Supplemental Restraint System WARNING WARNING
(“SRS”) warning lamp on the instrument
panel. The system checks itself every time The SRS airbags and seat belt pretension- l Do not modify your front seats, centre pil-
ers are designed to help reduce the risk of lar and centre console.
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
serious injury or death in certain colli- It can adversely affect SRS performance
sition or the operation mode is put in ON. sions. If either of the above conditions oc- and lead to possible injury.
The SRS warning lamp will come on for sev-
4 eral seconds and then go out. This is normal
curs, immediately have your vehicle
checked by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
l If you found any tear, scratch, crack or
damage to the portion where the airbag is
and means the system is working properly. Authorized Service Point. stored, you should have the SRS inspected
If there is a problem involving one or more of by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
the SRS components, the warning lamp will Service Point.
SRS servicing
come on and stay on. At the same time, the
warning display will appear on the informa- NOTE
tion screen in the multi-information display. WARNING
The SRS warning lamp/display is shared by l If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in
the SRS airbag and the seat belt pretensioner l We recommend any maintenance per- line with local legislation and contact a
formed on or near the components of the MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
system. SRS to be performed by a MITSUBISHI ice Point to safely dismantle the airbag sys-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. tem.
Improper work on the SRS components
WARNING or wiring could result in inadvertent de-
l If any of the following conditions occur, ployment of the airbags, or could render
there may be a problem with the SRS air- the SRS inoperative; either situation
bags and/or seat belt pretensioners, and could result in serious injury.
they may not function properly in a colli- l Do not modify your steering wheel, seat
sion or may suddenly activate without a belt retractor or any other SRS compo-
collision: nents. For example, replacement of the
• Even when the ignition switch in the steering wheel, or modifications to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is front bumper or body structure can ad-
in ON, the SRS warning lamp does not versely affect SRS performance and lead
come on or it remains on. to possible injury.
• The SRS warning lamp and/or the l If your vehicle has sustained any damage,
warning display comes on while driv- we recommend you to have the SRS in-
ing. spected to ensure it is in proper working
order.

Instruments..........................................................................................5-02
Multi-information display................................................................... 5-02
Indication lamp, warning lamp, and information screen 5
display list....................................................................................... 5-21
Indication lamps..................................................................................5-43
Warning lamps.................................................................................... 5-43
Information screen display..................................................................5-45
Head Up Display (HUD)*...................................................................5-46
Combination headlamps and dipper switch........................................ 5-52
Headlamp levelling............................................................................. 5-58
Turn-signal lever................................................................................. 5-60
Hazard warning flasher switch............................................................5-60
ECO mode switch............................................................................... 5-61
Fog lamp switch.................................................................................. 5-61
Wiper and washer switch.................................................................... 5-62
Rear window demister switch............................................................. 5-67
Heated windscreen switch*.................................................................5-68
Heated steering wheel switch*............................................................5-69
Horn switch......................................................................................... 5-69
OGKE18E5
Instruments
Instruments NOTE
l You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
tively for when the position lamps are illu-
minated and when they are not.
l The meter illumination switches automati-
cally to the adjusted brightness, depending
on the brightness outside the vehicle.
5 l The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned off
or the operation mode is put in OFF.
l If you press and hold the button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds or more when the position
Meter illumination control lamps are illuminated, the brightness level
Each time you press the rheostat illumination changes to the maximum level. Pressing and
button, there is a sound and the brightness of holding the button for approximately 2 sec-
1- Tachometer the instruments changes. onds or more again returns the brightness
The tachometer indicates the engine level to the previous level.
speed (r/min). The tachometer helps you On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
to obtain more economical driving and Link Display Audio or MITSUBISHI Multi-
also warns you of excessive engine Communication System (MMCS), the map
screen colour may not be switched to night-
speeds (Red zone).
time setting when the meter illumination
2- Multi-information display ® p. 5-02 brightness level is at the maximum.
Information screen display ® p. 5-22
3- Speedometer (km/h or mph + km/h)
4- Rheostat illumination button ® p. 5-02 Multi-information display
CAUTION Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before
operating.
l When driving, watch the tachometer to make The following information is included on the
sure that the engine speed indication does 1- Brightness level multi-information display: warnings, odome-
not rise into the red zone (excessive engine
2- Reostat illumination button ter, tripmeter, average and instant fuel con-
rpm).
sumption, average speed, etc.
5-02 Instruments and controls OGKE18E5

Multi-information display
[When the ignition switch or 1- mark display screen ® p. 5-06

the operation mode is OFF] 2- Information screen ® p. 5-04
Interrupt display screen ® p. 5-06
3- Door ajar warning display screen
® p. 5-07
4- Odometer ® p. 5-08
5- “ ” mark indicator ® p. 5-06
[When the ignition switch or 5

the operation mode is ON]
1- S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) drive 4- ECO mode indicator display screen 7- Gearshift indicator display screen
mode display screen* ® p. 6-41 ® p. 5-61 ® p. 6-31, 6-35
2- mark display screen ® p. 5-06 5- Engine coolant temperature display 8- Selector lever position display screen*
3- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) display ® p. 5-07 ® p. 6-35
screen ® p. 6-95 6- Odometer ® p. 5-08 9- Cruise control display screen ® p. 6-57
OGKE18E5 Instruments and controls 5-03
10- Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) It is also possible to change elements such as Information screen (when the
display screen* ® p. 6-66 the language and units used on the multi-in- ignition switch or the operation
11- Speed limiter display screen* formation display by operating the multi-in-
® p. 6-61 formation display switches. mode is OFF)
12- ECO mode indicator* ® p. 5-12 Press the switch to display the information
13- “ ” mark indicator ® p. 5-06 screen. Then, press the switch or switch
14- Information screen ® p. 5-05 to switch the display screen in the following
15- Fuel remaining display screen order.
5 ® p. 5-07
16- Outside temperature display screen
® p. 5-08
17- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) display screen
® p. 6-25
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF display
screen ® p. 6-30
NOTE
l The fuel units, outside temperature units,
display language, and other settings can be
changed.
Changing the function settings ® p. 5-13 *1: When there is no warning display
*2: When there is a warning display
Multi-information display 1- Tripmeter ® p. 5-08
switches 2- Tripmeter ® p. 5-08
Each time the multi-information display 3- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) monitor
switches are operated, the buzzer sounds and ® p. 5-12
the multi-information display changes be- ECO score display ® p. 5-12
tween information such as warnings, tripme- 4- Service reminder ® p. 5-09
ter, average and instant fuel consumption, 5- Redisplay of a warning display screen
distance range. ® p. 5-06

Information screen (when the Information screen (when the 3- Driving range display ® p. 5-10
ignition switch is turned from ignition switch or the operation ECO drive assist display ® p. 5-12
4- Average fuel consumption display
the “LOCK” position to the mode is ON) ® p. 5-11
“ON” position or the operation Press the switch or switch to switch the ECO drive assist display ® p. 5-12
mode is changed from OFF to display screen in the following order. 5- Average speed display ® p. 5-11
ON) Instant fuel consumption display
® p. 5-11
When the ignition switch is turned to the
6- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) monitor
5
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
® p. 5-12
ON, the display screen switches in the fol-
ECO score display ® p. 5-12
lowing order.
7- S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) op-
eration display* ® p. 6-41
*2
8- Service reminder ® p. 5-09
9- Function setting screen ® p. 5-13
*1 10- Redisplay of a warning display screen
® p. 5-06
NOTE
l While driving, the service reminder are not
displayed even if you operate the multi-in-
formation display switches. Always stop the
vehicle in a safe place before operating.
*: When the inspection time has arrived

1. Screen when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is OFF
2. System check screen ® p. 5-10
3. Screen when the ignition switch or the *1: When there is no warning display
operation mode is ON *2: When there is a warning display
4. Service reminder ® p. 5-09 1- Tripmeter ® p. 5-08
2- Tripmeter ® p. 5-08

NOTE To return to the screen displayed before Redisplay of a warning display

the warning display screen
l While driving, the function setting screen is Even if the cause of the warning display is
not displayed even if you operate the multi- When the mark is displayed, if you press
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
information display switches. the switch or switch a few times, the
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place be- that was displayed before the warning dis-
warning display screen you switched from is
fore operating and firmly apply the parking play.
redisplayed.
brake and put the gearshift lever into the “N” If you press the switch, the display screen
switches to the screen that was displayed be-
5 (Neutral) position (M/T) or the selector lever
into the “P” (PARK) position (CVT). fore the warning display. The mark (A) is
Other interrupt displays
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on also displayed. The operation status of each system is dis-
page 5-13. played on the information screen.
l When there is information to be announced,
Refer to the appropriate page in the warning
such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds
and the screen display is switched. display list for further details.
Refer to “Interrupt display screen” on page Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page
5-06. 5-39.
mark display screen

Interrupt display screen This is displayed when you press the
switch and return from the warning display
Warning display screen to the previous screen.
When there is information to be announced, This mark is also displayed if there is another
such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds and warning other than the one displayed.
the information screen is switched to the If you want to switch the dis- When the cause of the warning display is
warning display screen. play eliminated, the mark goes out automatical-
Refer to the warning list and take the neces- ly.
sary measures. Warning display screens with the “ ” mark
Refer to “Warning display list” on page displayed in the upper right of the screen can
5-22. be switched. If you want to switch the dis-
When the cause of the warning display is play, press the switch for approximately 2
eliminated, the warning display goes out au- seconds or more.
tomatically.

NOTE CAUTION Fuel remaining display screen

l When the mark is displayed, the warning l Before moving your vehicle, check that the This displays the amount of fuel remaining.
display screen can be redisplayed on the in- warning display is OFF.
formation screen.
Refer to “Information screen (when the igni- Engine coolant temperature
tion switch or the operation mode is OFF)”
on page 5-04.
display
This indicates the engine
Refer to “Information screen (when the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is ON)” coolant temperature.
5
on page 5-05. If the coolant becomes hot,
“ ” will blink.
Door ajar warning display Pay careful attention to the
engine coolant temperature
screen
display while you are driv-
ing.
F- Full
E- Empty
CAUTION
l If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.
NOTE
In this case, the bar graph is in the red zone.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place l It may take several seconds to stabilise the
If any of the doors or the tailgate is not com- and take the required measures. Refer to display after refilling the tank.
pletely closed, this displays the open door or “Engine overheating” on page 8-04. l If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
tailgate. the operation mode is in ON, the fuel gauge
When the ignition switch or the operation may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.
mode is ON, if the vehicle speed exceeds ap- l The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
proximately 8 km/h while a door is ajar, a filler is located on the left side of the body.
buzzer sounds four times. This notifies the
driver that a door is ajar.

Fuel remaining warning dis- CAUTION Tripmeter

play l Do not run out of fuel, or the catalytic con- The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled
When the fuel is reduced to approximately 8 verter may be adversely affected. If the between two points.
litres, the information screen switches to the warning display appears, refuel as soon as
possible. Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter
interrupt display of the fuel remaining warn-
ing display, and the “ ” mark (B) on the fuel
It is possible to measure two currently
5
remaining display flashes slowly (approxi- NOTE travelled distances, from home using
mately once per second). After a few sec-
onds, the information screen returns from the l On inclines or curves, the display may be in- tripmeter and from a particular point
correct due to the movement of fuel in the on the way using tripmeter .
fuel remaining warning display to the previ- tank.
ous screen.
If the remaining fuel level is reduced further, Outside temperature display
the information screen switches to the fuel re-
maining warning display and the “ ” mark
screen To reset the tripmeter
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes This shows the temperature To return the display to “0”, hold down the
quickly (approximately twice per second). outside the vehicle. switch for approximately 2 seconds or more.
Only the currently displayed value will be re-
set.
Example
NOTE If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter
l The display setting can be changed to the will be reset.
preferred units (°C or °F).
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
page 5-13. NOTE
l Depending on factors such as the driving
l When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
conditions, the displayed temperature may
memory of tripmeter and are
vary from the actual outside temperature.
cleared, and the display returns to “0”.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the distance travel-
led.

Service reminder NOTE When the display is reset, the time until the
next periodic inspection is displayed and the
Displays the approximate time until the next l The distance is shown in units of 100 km warning display is no longer displayed when
periodic inspection recommended by (100 miles). The time is shown in units of
the ignition switch is turned from the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS. “---” is displayed months.
“LOCK” position to the “ON” position or the
when the inspection time has arrived.
operation mode is changed from OFF to ON.
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec- 1. When you press the switch or
NOTE tion is due. We recommend you to con- switch a few times, the information
5
sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- screen switches to the service reminder
l Depending on the vehicle specifications, the
ized Service Point.
displayed time may differ from the next peri- display screen.
odic inspection time recommended by At that time, when the ignition switch is
MITSUBISHI MOTORS. turned from the “LOCK” position to the
In addition, the display settings for the next “ON” position or the operation mode is
periodic inspection time can be modified. changed from OFF to ON, the warning
To modify the display settings, have it adjus- display is displayed for a few seconds on
ted at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized the information screen.
Service Point.
For more details, consult a MITSUBISHI 2. Press and hold the switch for about 2
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. seconds or more to display “ ” and
make it flash. (If there is no operation
for about 10 seconds with flashing, the
display returns to the previous screen.)
3. After your vehicle is inspected at a

Service Point, it displays the time until
the next periodic inspection.
To reset
The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
1. Displays the time until the next periodic
inspection.

3. Press the switch while the icon is NOTE Driving range display
flashing to change the display from “---”
l When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis- This displays the approximate driving range
to “CLEAR”. After this, the time until
tance and a certain period of time, the dis- (how many more kilometres or miles you can
the next periodic inspection will be dis-
play is reset and the time until the next peri- drive). When the driving range falls below
played. odic inspection is displayed. approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis-
l If you accidentally reset the display, we rec- played.
ommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
Refuel as soon as possible.
5 MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
System check screen

ON, the system check screen is displayed for
approximately 4 seconds. If there is no fault,
information screen (when the ignition switch NOTE
or the operation mode is ON) is displayed.
If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn- l The driving range is determined based on
CAUTION the fuel consumption data. This may vary
ing display. depending on the driving conditions and
l The customer is responsible for making sure Refer to “Warning display list” on page habits. Treat the distance displayed as just a
that periodic inspection and maintenance are
performed.
5-22. rough guideline.
Inspections and maintenance must be per- l When you refuel, the driving range display
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc- is updated.
tions. However, if you only add a small amount of
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
Fill with a full tank whenever possible.
NOTE l On rare occasions, the value displayed for
the driving range may change if you are
l “---” display cannot be reset when the igni- parked on an extremely steep incline. This is
tion switch or the operation mode is in ON. due to the movement of fuel in the tank and
does not indicate a malfunction.

NOTE NOTE
l The display setting can be changed to the l The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
preferred units (km or miles). mode”.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on l The average fuel consumption depends on
page 5-13. the driving condition (road condition, driv-
ing behavior, etc.). The displayed fuel con-
sumption may vary from the actual fuel con-
Average fuel consumption dis-
play
sumption. Treat the fuel consumption dis-
played as just a rough guideline. NOTE 5
This displays the average fuel consumption
l The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
ual reset mode for the average fuel con- l The average speed display can be reset sepa-
from the last reset to the present time. sumption display is erased if the battery is rately for the auto reset mode and for the
There are the following 2 mode settings. disconnected. manual reset mode.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver- l The display setting can be changed to the l “---” is displayed when the average speed
preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK) cannot be measured.
age fuel consumption and average speed” on
or L/100 km}. l The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
page 5-15. mode”.
For information on how to change the aver- l The display setting can be changed to the
page 5-13.
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to preferred units (km/h or mph).
“Changing the function settings” on page Average speed display Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
5-13 page 5-13.
This displays the average speed from the last l The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
reset to the present time. ual reset mode for the average speed display
There are the following 2 mode settings. is erased if the battery is disconnected.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-
age fuel consumption and average speed” on Instant fuel consumption dis-
page 5-15. play
For the method for changing the average While driving, this displays the instant fuel
speed display setting, refer to “Changing the consumption, using a bar graph.
NOTE function settings” on page 5-13.
l The average fuel consumption display can
be reset separately for the [1] auto reset
mode and for the [2] manual reset mode.
l “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
sumption cannot be measured.

The “ ” mark (A) in the instant fuel gauge
shows the average fuel consumption. ECO drive level
When the value of instant fuel consumption
surpasses the value of average fuel consump-
tion, the instant fuel consumption is dis-
played with a green bar graph.
Be conscious of maintaining the value of in- Low High
5 stant fuel consumption below the value of NOTE

average fuel consumption, it can help you to
l When the ignition switch or the operation
drive with the best fuel consumption. mode is ON again, the accumulated time
will be reset.
NOTE NOTE
ECO mode indicator* l On vehicles with CVT, the ECO drive assist
l When the instant fuel consumption cannot
This indicator will be dis- is displayed only when the vehicle is driven
be measured, the bar graph is not displayed.
played when fuel-efficient with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE)
l The display setting can be changed to the
position or when the vehicle is driven in the
preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK) driving is achieved.
sports mode (for vehicles equipped with
or L/100 km}.
shift paddles).
page 5-13.
l It is possible to cancel the green bar graph. ECO Drive Assist ECO Score
page 5-13. This function displays how fuel-efficiently ECO score indicates the points you have
you are driving under different driving condi- scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-
tions. ber of leaves as follows:
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) moni- The ECO drive assist display will change as
tor follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using [When the ignition switch or the operation
The accumulated time the engine has been the accelerator in a way well matched with mode is ON]
stopped by Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system the vehicle speed. The display shows the score you achieved in
is displayed. the last several minutes.
Refer to “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system”
on page 6-25. [When the ignition switch is turned off or the
operation mode is put in OFF]

The display shows the overall ECO score the Changing the function settings
function has counted from the time when the
The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
ignition switch is turned to “ON” to the time
“Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
when it is turned to “LOCK” or “ACC”, or
consumption and speed reset method” etc.
from the time when the operation mode is set
setting can be modified as desired.
to ON to the time when it is set to OFF.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Firmly apply the parking brake and put
the gearshift lever into the “N” (Neutral)
CAUTION 5
ECO drive level
position (M/T) or the selector lever into l For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
the “P” (PARK) position (CVT). While driving, even if you operate the multi-
2. Press the switch or switch a few information display switches ( , , ),
the function setting screen is not displayed.
times to switch the information screen to
the function setting screen.
Refer to “Information screen (when the
Low High
ignition switch or the operation mode is
ON)” on page 5-05.

3. Press the switch to switch to the top
screen (A) for the menu screens. Then,
press the switch or switch to
switch to the menu screens (B).
4. Changing the display language 10. Changing the navigation information

: switch : switch ® p. 5-17 display* ® p. 5-20
or 5. Changing the language cooperative con- 11. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)*: To operate
trol ® p. 5-17 ® p. 6-89
1. Changing the reset mode for average 6. Operation sound setting ® p. 5-18 12. Reset of low tyre pressure warning
fuel consumption and average speed 7. Changing the time until “REST RE- threshold* ® p. 6-102
® p. 5-15 MINDER” is displayed ® p. 5-19 13. Tyre ID set change* ® p. 6-103
2. Changing the fuel consumption display 8. Changing the turn-signal sound 14. Returning to the factory settings
unit ® p. 5-16 ® p. 5-19 ® p. 5-20
3. Changing the temperature unit 9. Changing the instant fuel consumption
® p. 5-16 display ® p. 5-19

NOTE 2. Press the switch or switch several l When the following operation is per-
times to switch to the “AVERAGE formed, the mode setting is automatical-
l If no operations are made within approxi- FUEL CONSUMPTION RESET ly switched from manual to auto.
mately 30 seconds of the menu screen being
MODE” screen. [Except for vehicles equipped with key-
displayed, the display returns to the function
setting screen. Then, press the switch to switch to the less operation system]
setting selection screen. Turn the ignition switch from the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position to the “ON” posi-
4. After switching to the menu screen (B) for tion.
the setting you want to change, press the [For vehicles equipped with keyless op-
5
switch to switch to the setting selection eration system]
screen. Refer to each item for further details Change the operation mode from ACC
on the operation methods. or OFF to ON.
Switching to auto occurs automatically.
NOTE If switching to manual mode is done,
however, the data from the last reset is
l If the battery is disconnected, these function
settings are reset from memory to the factory displayed.
settings automatically (except “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW): To operate”, “Reset of low Auto reset mode
tyre pressure warning threshold” and “Tyre l When the average fuel consumption and
ID set change”). 3. Press the switch or switch to select
the reset mode, and then press the average speed are being displayed, if
switch to confirm the setting. you press and hold the switch, the
Changing the reset mode for The setting is changed to the selected average fuel consumption and average
speed displayed at that time are reset.
average fuel consumption and mode condition.
average speed Manual reset mode
The mode conditions for the average fuel
consumption and average speed display can
l When the average fuel consumption and
average speed are being displayed, if
be switched between “Auto reset” and “Man-
you press and hold the switch, the
ual reset”.
average fuel consumption and average
1. Switch to the function setting screen.
speed displayed at that time are reset.
Refer to “Changing the function set-
tings” on page 5-13

l When the engine switch or the operation 1. Switch to the function setting screen. NOTE
mode is in the following conditions, the Refer to “Changing the function set-
average fuel consumption display and tings” on page 5-13. l The display units for the driving range, the
average fuel consumption, the average speed
average speed display are automatically 2. Press the switch or switch several
and the instant fuel consumption are switch-
reset. times to switch to the “FUEL CON- ed, but the units for the indicating needle
[Except for vehicles equipped with key- SUMPTION UNIT” screen. Then, press (speedometer), the odometer and the tripme-
less operation system] the switch to switch to the setting se- ter will remain unchanged.
The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or lection screen.
5 “LOCK” position for approximately 4 The distance and speed units are also switch-
hours or longer. ed in the following combinations to match
[For vehicles equipped with keyless op- the selected fuel consumption unit.
eration system]
The operation mode is in ACC or OFF Fuel con- Distance Speed
for approximately 4 hours or longer. sumption (driving (average
range) speed)
NOTE km/L km km/h
l The average fuel consumption display and L/100 km km km/h
average speed display can be reset separately
for the auto reset mode and for the manual mpg (US) mile(s) mph
reset mode.
mpg (UK) mile(s) mph
l The memory of the auto reset mode or man- 3. Press the switch or switch to select
ual reset mode for the average fuel con- the units, and then press the switch to Changing the temperature unit
sumption display and average speed display
confirm the setting. The display unit for temperature can be
is erased if the battery is disconnected.
The setting is changed to the selected switched.
unit. 1. Switch to the function setting screen.
Changing the fuel consumption Refer to “Changing the function set-
display unit tings” on page 5-13.
The display unit for fuel consumption can be 2. Press the switch or switch several
switched. The distance, speed, and amount times to switch to the “TEMPERATURE
units are also switched to match the selected UNIT” screen.
fuel consumption unit.

Then, press the switch to switch to the NOTE 3. Press the switch or switch to select
setting selection screen. the desired language, and then press the
l On vehicles equipped with the switch to confirm the setting.
MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
The setting is changed to the selected
tem (MMCS), the temperature value of the
air conditioner screen is switched in con- language.
junction with the outside temperature dis-
play unit of the multi-information display. NOTE
However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown to the
air conditioner screen. l If “---” is selected in the language setting, a 5
warning message is not displayed when
there is a warning display or interrupt dis-
Changing the display language play.
The language of the multi-information dis-
play can be switched. Changing the language cooper-
3. Press the switch or switch to select Refer to “Changing the function set- ative control
the units, and then press the switch to tings” on page 5-13. The language used in MITSUBISHI Multi-
confirm the setting. 2. Press the switch or switch several Communication System (MMCS) (if so
The setting is changed to the selected times to switch to the “LANGUAGE” equipped), the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so
temperature unit. screen. equipped), Multi Around Monitor (if so
Then, press the switch to switch to the equipped) or Head Up Display (HUD) (if so
NOTE setting selection screen. equipped) can be changed automatically to
the same language as that shown in the multi-
l The temperature value on the air conditioner information display.
panel is switched in conjunction with the
outside temperature display unit of the mul-
ti-information display. Refer to “Changing the function set-
However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown to tings” on page 5-13.
temperature display of an air conditioner. 2. Press the switch or switch several
times to switch to the “LANGUAGE

SYNC” screen. Then, press the switch NOTE 1. Switch to the function setting screen.
to switch to the setting selection screen. Refer to “Changing the function set-
• When “ON” (language cooperation ena- tings” on page 5-13.
bled) has been selected with the language
2. Press the switch or switch several
cooperative control, the language for
MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys- times to switch to the “OPERATION
tem (MMCS) (if so equipped), the Blue- SOUND” screen. Then, press the
tooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped), Mul- switch to switch to the setting selection
screen.
5 ti Around Monitor (if so equipped) or
Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)
is automatically changed to the language
selected for the multi-information display.
However, this changing function may not
work depending on the language selected
for the multi-information display.
• When “OFF” (language cooperation disa-
3. Press the switch or switch to select bled) has been selected with the language
cooperative control, the language for
the setting, and then press the switch
to confirm the setting. tem (MMCS) (if so equipped), the Blue-
The setting is changed to the selected tooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped), Mul-
condition. ti Around Monitor (if so equipped) or
Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)
NOTE is not automatically changed to the lan- 3. Press the switch or switch to select
guage selected for the multi-information the sound, and then press the switch to
l The language display modified with the lan- display. confirm the setting.
guage setting can be switched in the follow- l The language on the display of the audio
The setting is changed to the selected
ing manner. system (if so equipped) is not automatically
changed even if you select “ON” (language condition.
cooperation enabled) of the language coop-
eration control.
Operation sound setting

You can change the operation sounds of the
multi-information display switches and rheo-
stat illumination button.
NOTE 3. Press the switch or switch to select 3. Press the switch or switch to select
the time, and then press the switch to the sound, and then press the switch to
l The operation sound setting only deactivates confirm the setting. The setting is confirm the setting.
the operation sound of the multi-information
changed to the selected time. The setting changes to the selected turn-
display switches and rheostat illumination
button. The warning display and other signal sound.
sounds cannot be deactivated. NOTE
Changing the instant fuel con-
l The drive time is reset when the ignition
Changing the time until “REST switch is turned off or the operation mode is sumption display 5
put in OFF. It is possible to change the bar graph setting
REMINDER” is displayed
of the instant fuel consumption display.
The time until the display appears can be
Changing the turn-signal sound 1. Switch to the function setting screen.
changed.
It is possible to change the turn-signal sound. Refer to “Changing the function set-
1. Switch to the function setting screen. tings” on page 5-13.
Refer to “Changing the function set- 2. Press the switch or switch several
tings” on page 5-13.
tings” on page 5-13. times to switch to the “INSTANT FUEL
2. Press the switch or switch several CONSUMPTION DISPLAY” screen.
times to switch to the “REST REMIND-
times to switch to the “TURN SIGNAL Then, press the switch to switch to the
ER” screen. Then, press the switch to
SOUND” screen. Then, press the setting selection screen.
switch to the setting selection screen.
switch to switch to the setting selection
screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to select 3. Press the switch or switch to select 3. Press the switch or switch to select
the setting, and then press the switch the setting, and then press the switch “RESET”, and then press and hold the
to confirm the setting. to confirm the setting. switch for approximately 5 seconds or
The setting changes to the selected bar The setting is changed to the selected more to confirm the setting.
graph setting. navigation information display setting. The buzzer sounds and all of the func-
tion
Changing the navigation infor- Returning to the factory set- settings are returned to the factory set-
tings.
5 mation display* tings
On vehicles equipped with MITSUBISHI Many of the function settings can be returned
Multi- Communication System (MMCS), you to their factory settings. NOTE
can select whether to display the navigation 1. Switch to the function setting screen. l The factory settings are as follows.
information on the information screen. Refer to “Changing the function set- • “AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION
1. Switch to the function setting screen. tings” on page 5-13. RESET MODE”: AUTO
See “Changing the function settings” on 2. Press the switch or switch several • “FUEL CONSUMPTION UNIT”:
L/100 km
page 5-13. times to switch to the “FACTORY RE-
• “TEMPERATURE UNIT”: °C
2. Press the switch or switch several SET” screen. Then, press the switch
• “LANGUAGE”: ENGLISH or RUSSIAN
times to switch to the “NAVI INFOR- to switch to the setting selection screen.
• “LANGUAGE SYNC”: ON
MATION” screen. Then, press the
• “OPERATION SOUND”: ON
switch to switch to the setting selection
• “REST REMINDER”: OFF
screen.
• “TURN SIGNAL SOUND”: SOUND 1
• “INSTANT FUEL CONSUMPTION
DISPLAY”: ON
• “NAVI INFORMATION”: ON
l “BSW”, “TPMS SENSOR RESET” and
“TPMS ID” cannot be returned to their fac-
tory settings.

Indication lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list
Indication and warning lamp list
1- Position lamp indication lamp 7- LED headlamp warning lamp* 13- Electric parking brake warning lamp
® p. 5-43 ® p. 5-53 (yellow)* ® p. 5-44
2- Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard 8- Forward Collision Mitigation system 14- Active Stability Control (ASC) indicator
warning indication lamps ® p. 5-43 (FCM) OFF indicator ® p. 6-79 ® p. 6-56
3- Front fog lamp indication lamp* 9- Charge warning lamp ® p. 5-45 15- Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF in-
® p. 5-43 10- Electric power steering system (EPS) dication lamp ® p. 6-56
4- High-beam indication lamp ® p. 5-43 warning lamp ® p. 6-54 16- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning
5- Automatic High-Beam (AHB) indication 11- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indication lamp ® p. 6-53
lamp ® p. 5-54 lamp* ® p. 6-89 17- Supplement Restraint System (SRS)
6- Rear fog lamp indication lamp 12- Information screen display ® p. 5-22 warning lamp ® p. 4-35
® p. 5-43 18- Check engine warning lamp ® p. 5-44

19- Seat belt warning lamp ® p. 4-10 21- Brake auto hold indication lamp*
20- Tyre pressure monitoring system warn- ® p. 6-46
ing lamp* ® p. 6-99 22- Brake warning lamp (red) ® p. 5-43
Information screen display

When there is information to be announced, such as lamp reminder, the buzzer sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below.
5 Refer to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-22.
Refer to “Navigation information display” on page 5-38.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page 5-39.
NOTE
l A warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound in the following rare cases.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as noise or strong electromagnetic waves, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of installed electrical equipment (including after-market parts).
If the warning display appears many times, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Warning display list

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)
l You have forgotten to turn off the lamps. l Refer to “Lamps (headlamps, fog lamps,
etc.) auto-cutout function” on page 5-53.


l The washer fluid is running low. l Replenish the container with washer fluid.
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 10-06.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-11.
l There is a fault in the LED headlamps. l We recommend you to consult a

5
Service Point.
Refer to “LED headlamp warning lamp”
on page 5-53.
l There is a fault in the keyless operation l Refer to “Keyless operation system” on
system. page 3-08.


Engine switch is pressed one time l Although the engine switch was pressed, l Touch the keyless operation key to the en-
the keyless operation key could not be de- gine switch.
tected. Refer to “If the keyless operation key is
not operating properly” on page 6-23.
5 Engine switch is pressed two times or more
l The steering wheel is locked. l Press the engine switch while turning
steering wheel.
Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
6-18.
l The engine is stopped while the selector l Place the selector lever in the “P” (Park)
lever is in a position other than the “P” position to put the operation mode in OFF.
(PARK) position.
l The driver’s door is opened with the steer- l Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
ing wheel unlocked. 6-18.


l There is a fault in the EPS. l Have the vehicle inspected by a
Service Point as soon as possible.
Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 6-54.
l There is a fault in the ABS. l Avoid sudden braking and high-speed
driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place,
5
and take corrective measures.
Refer to “ABS warning lamp/display” on
page 6-53.
l The tyre pressure in one of the tyres is l Refer to “TPMS warning lamp/display”
low. on page 6-99.
l There is a fault in the tyre pressure moni- l Refer to “TPMS warning lamp/display”
toring system. on page 6-99.
l One of the doors or the tailgate is not l Close the door or tailgate.
completely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display
The open door is displayed. screen” on page 5-07.


l The bonnet is open. l Close the bonnet.
Refer to “ Bonnet ” on page 10-03.
5 l There is a fault in the electronic immobil-

izer (Anti-theft starting system).
l Put the operation mode in OFF, and then
start the engine again. If the warning is
not cancelled, please contact a
Service Point.
l The driver’s door is open when the opera- l Put the operation mode in OFF.
tion mode is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder
system” on page 6-18.
l An attempt was made to lock all the doors l Put the operation mode in OFF.
and the tailgate when the operation mode Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder
is in any mode other than OFF. system” on page 6-17.
l There is a fault in the steering wheel lock. l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
We recommend you to consult a
Service Point.
l There is a fault in the electrical system. l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
We recommend you to consult a
Service Point.


l The engine is overheated. l Stop the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page
8-04.
l The automatic transmission (CVT) fluid

temperature is too high.
l Refer to “INVECS-III CVT with 8-step
Sports Mode” on page 6-32.
5
l You turned the ignition switch to the l Fasten your seat belt properly. Refer to
“ON” position or put the operation mode “Seat belt reminder” on page 4-10.
in ON without fastening your seat belt.
l There is a fault in the fuel system. l We recommend you to consult a

Service Point.
l The fuel is running low. l Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to “Fuel

remaining warning display” on page 5-07


l You are driving with the parking brake l Release the parking brake. Refer to
still applied. “Brake warning display” on page 5-45.
5 l The brake fluid level in the reservoir has

fallen to a low level.
l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place. We recommend you to consult a
l There is a fault in the brake system. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-45.
l There is a fault with the Electric parking l We recommend you to have it checked,
brake. immediately.
Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
6-05.
l The parking brake cannot be applied tem- l Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
porarily due to repeated operation of the 6-05.
Electric parking brake switch within a
short time.
l You try to release the Electric parking l Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
brake switch without depressing the brake 6-05.
pedal.


l The Electric parking brake has been auto- l Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-46.
matically applied.
l The brake auto hold is automatically can-

celled.
l Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-46. 5
l The brake auto hold is not available. l Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-46.
l The Electric parking brake is not automat- l When the ignition switch is turned off or
ically applied because there is a fault in the operation mode is put in OFF, place
the Electric parking brake system. the selector lever in the “P” (Park) posi-
tion and depress the brake pedal more
firmly than usual with the right foot.
Then, operate the ignition switch or the
engine switch.
l We recommend you to have the brake au-
to hold system inspected by a
Service Point.
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-46.


l The brake auto hold system does not turn l Press the brake auto hold switch after fas-
on because the driver’s seat belt is not fastening the driver’s seat belt.
tened. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-46.
5 l The brake auto hold system does not turn

off because the brake pedal is not pressed.
l Depress the brake pedal more firmly than
usual with the right foot. Then, press the
brake auto hold switch.
l There is a fault in the engine oil circula- l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
tion system. place. We recommend you to have it
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display”
on page 5-46
l There is a fault in the charging system. l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place. We recommend you to consult a
Service Point.
Refer to “Charge warning display” on
page 5-46.
l There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the l We recommend you to have it checked,
pretensioner system. immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on
page 4-35.


l There is a fault in the Active Stability l We recommend you to have it checked.
Control (ASC). Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 6-55.
l There is a fault in the hill start assist. l We recommend you to have it checked.
Refer to “Hill start assist” on page 6-49.
l There is a fault in the S-AWC system. l We recommend you to have it checked. 5
Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
trol) ” on page 6-39.
l There is a fault in the CVT. l We recommend you to have it checked.

Refer to “INVECS-III CVT with 8-step
Sports Mode ” on page 6-32.
l The S-AWC system is hot. l Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-

trol) ” on page 6-39.
l More than specified limit amount of par- l Immediately have your vehicle checked
ticulate matter (PM) accumulates inside by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
the gasoline particulate filter (GPF). Service Point.


l An excessive amount of particulate matter l Refer to “Gasoline particulate filter
(PM) accumulates inside the gasoline par- (GPF)” on page 6-24
ticulate filter (GPF).
5 l The outside temperature is 3 °C (37 °F) or

less.
l Be careful of ice on the road.
l The road can be icy even when this warn-
ing is not displayed, so drive carefully.
l The Adaptive Cruise Control System l Increase the following distance by de-
(ACC) has detected the approach of the pressing the brake pedal or marking other
vehicles in front. decelerating control.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC): Proximity alarm ” on page 6-70.
l The Forward Collision Mitigation system l Take appropriate action such as depress-
(FCM) has detected the danger of colli- ing the brake to avoid collision.
sion. Refer to “Forward collision warning func-
tion” on page 6-80.
l The Electric parking brake cannot be ap- l Depress the brake pedal as soon as possi-
plied automatically. ble.
l The Adaptive Cruise Control System l Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 6-72.
(ACC) control is active.


l The Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC) control is automatically cancelled
and the system is placed in the standby
state.
l Conditions for the start of control are not

met, the Adaptive Cruise Control System
5
(ACC) cannot start the control.

(ACC) cannot start the control because
the speed is out of speed range.

(ACC) cannot start the control because
not detected the approach of the vehicles
in front.

(ACC) is not available temporarily such
as for adhesion of contaminants to the
sensor.
This is not a malfunction.


l There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise l We recommend you to have it checked.
Control System (ACC). Refer to “To terminate ACC control” on
page 6-75.
5 l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,

adhere to the bumper surface around the
l Remove a foreign object on the bumper
surface around the sensor. When the
sensor. warning display does not disappear after
having cleaned the bumper surface around
the sensor, contact a MITSUBISHI
Refer to “To terminate ACC control” on
page 6-75.
l There is a fault in the Forward Collision l We recommend you to have it checked.
Mitigation system (FCM). Refer to “System problem warning” on
page 6-85
l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, l Remove a foreign object on the bumper
adhere to the bumper surface around the surface around the sensor.
sensor. When the warning display does not disap-
pear after having cleaned the bumper sur-
face around the sensor, contact a
Service Point.
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation
system (FCM): System problem warn-
ing ” on page 6-85.


l The FCM braking function of the Forward l Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
Collision Mitigation system (FCM) has 6-81.
been activated.
l The Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM) is temporarily unavailable for
l Refer to “System problem warning” on
page 6-85.
5
some reason. This is not a malfunction.
l The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) has l Refer to “Lane Departure Warning” on
detected that your vehicle is about to page 6-95.
leave or has left the lane.
l There is a fault in the Lane Departure l We recommend you to have it checked.

Warning (LDW). Refer to “System problem warning” on
page 6-85.
l The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sensor is l When the warning display does not disap-
temporarily not available for some reason pear after waiting for a while, contact a
such as the environmental condition or in- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
crease of the sensor temperature. Service Point.
Refer to “When the sensor is temporarily
not available” on page 6-92.


l The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) does not l We recommend you to have it checked,
operate normally because there are some immediately.
malfunctions in the sensor or the system. Refer to “When there is a malfuntion in
the system” on page 6-92.
5 l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,

adhere to the bumper surface around the
l Remove a foreign object on the bumper
surface around the sensor.
sensor. When the warning display does not disap-
pear after having cleaned the bumper sur-
face around the sensor, contact a
Service Point.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW):
When there is a foreign object on the sen-
sor ” on page 6-93.
l The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) has l Pay special attention to the rear of your
detected a vehicle that is approaching vehicle.
your vehicle. Refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) ” on page 6-93.


l There is a fault in the sensor. l We recommend you to consult a
Service Point.
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation
system (FCM): System problem warn-
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning 5
(LDW): System problem warning” on
page 6-95.
Refer to “Automatic High-Beam (AHB):
System problem warning” on page 5-56.
l The Forward Collision Mitigation system l After the temperature of the sensor has
(FCM), Lane Departure Warning (LDW) been in range, the system will automati-
and Automatic High-Beam (AHB) are cally return to operation.
temporarily unavailable due to the high or Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation
low temperature of the sensor. system (FCM): System problem warn-
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning
page 6-95.
l The sensor is temporarily unavailable due l Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation
to conditions such as the adhesion of con- system (FCM): System problem warn-
taminants to the sensor or windscreen. ing ” on page 6-85.
This is not a malfunction. Refer to “Lane Departure Warning
page 6-95.


l There is a fault in the system of the auto- l We recommend you to consult a
matic high-beam. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
5 l There is a fault in the Auto Stop & Go

(AS&G) system.
l Refer to “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) sys-
tem” on page 6-25.
l On vehicles with CVT, the engine was not l Refer to “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) sys-
automatically started by the Auto Stop & tem” on page 6-25.
Go (AS&G) system.
l On vehicles with M/T, the engine was not

automatically started by the Auto Stop &
Go (AS&G) system.
Navigation information dis-

play*
On vehicles equipped with the MITSUBISHI
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), the
following information on navigation will be
displayed when guidance location such as
junction and destination is approached after

you set the destination and started the route Shows the direction of vehicle travel and 2- Remaining distance display
guidance. the guidance location. Shows the distance to the location where
the guidance is displayed.
Direction of vehicle travel (Example)
NOTE
l The navigation information display can be
Intermediate turned on or off.
Destination Ferry terminal Tollbooth
destination
(Example) Refer to“Changing the navigation informa- 5
tion display*” on page 5-20
l Please read this section and also the separate
owner’s manual for MITSUBISHI Multi-
Communication System (MMCS).
1- Guidance display
Other interrupt displays
Screen System operation status Reference
l When starting the engine, you pressed the l Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neu-
engine switch without depressing the tral) position, fully depress the clutch ped-
clutch pedal (M/T). al, depress the brake pedal with the right
foot. Then, press the engine switch.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the en-
gine” on page 6-19.
l When starting the engine, the selector lev- l Place the selector lever in the “P” (Park)
er is in a position other than the “P” position, depress the brake pedal with the
(PARK) or the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, right foot. Then, press the engine switch.
or you pressed the engine switch without Refer to “Starting and stopping the en-
depressing the brake pedal (CVT). gine” on page 6-19.


l When communication was successful af- l Refer to “Starting and stopping the en-
ter the keyless operation key was touched gine” on page 6-19.
to the engine switch.
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. Refer to the appropriate page for the system for further details.
5 NOTE
l When operating each system, confirm that the operation status of the system has changed on the information screen. However, the operation status of the
system may not be displayed immediately after the warning display appears even if the system is operated.

l When “AUTO” mode of S-AWC is selec- l Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
ted. trol)” on page 6-39.
l When “SNOW” mode of S-AWC is selec-

ted.
l When “GRAVEL” mode of S-AWC is se-

lected.


l When the parking sensor detects an obsta- l Refer to “Parking sensors (Front/Rear)*”
cle. on page 6-104.
l When the ECO mode is activated. l Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page
5-61.
5
l When the Forward Collision Mitigation l Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch” on page
system (FCM) is activated or the timing of 6-84.
an alarm is changed.
l When the Forward Collision Mitigation l Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch” on page
system (FCM) is deactivated. 6-84.

This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen Solution
We recommend you to have it checked. Refer to “Service reminder” for further de-
tails on page 5-09.
5
The setting for rest interval can be changed.
Screen Solution
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST REMINDER” is displayed” on page 5-19.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue
to drive without having a rest, the buzzer sounds approximately every 5 minutes to
encourage you to take a rest.
l In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the pre-
vious display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the buzzer
and display encourage you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds three times.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in
OFF.
• The multi-information display switches are held for approximately 2 seconds
or more.

Indication lamps
Indication lamps Front fog lamp indication Always make sure that the lamp goes off be-
lamp* fore driving.
With the ignition switch or the operation
Turn-signal indication lamps/ This lamp illuminates while mode in ON, the brake warning lamp illumi-
the front fog lamps are on. nates under the following conditions:
Hazard warning indication
lamps l When the parking brake lever has been
engaged.
These indication lamps blink l When the brake fluid level in the reser-
in the following situations. voir falls to a low level.
5
l When the turn-signal Rear fog lamp indication lamp l When the brake force distribution func-
lever is moved to acti- This lamp illuminates while tion is not operating correctly.
vate a turn-signal lamp. the rear fog lamp is on.
Refer to “Turn-signal With the ignition switch or the operation
lever” on page 5-60. mode in ON, a buzzer sounds under the con-
l When the hazard warning flasher switch dition that the vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h
is pressed to activate the hazard warning with the parking brake applied.
lamps. Position lamp indication lamp
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher This indication lamp illumi-
switch” on page 5-60. nates while the position
CAUTION
l When the hazard warning lamps auto- lamps are on. l In the situations listed below, brake perform-
matically activate due to sudden braking ance may be compromised or the vehicle
while driving. may become unstable if brakes are applied
suddenly; consequently, avoid driving at
Refer to “Emergency stop signal sys-
high speeds or applying the brakes suddenly.
tem” on page 6-51. Warning lamps Furthermore, the vehicle should be brought
to a stop in a safe location and to have it
High-beam indication lamp checked.
Brake warning lamp (red) • The brake warning lamp does not illumi-
This indication lamp illuminate when the parking brake is applied or
nates when the high-beam is This lamp illuminates when
does not turn off when the parking brake
used. the ignition switch is turned
is released.
to the “ON” position or the
operation mode is put in ON,
and goes off after a few sec-
onds.
Warning lamps
CAUTION Electric parking brake warn- Check engine warning lamp

• The ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp (yellow)* This lamp is a part of an on-
ing lamp illuminate at the same time This warning lamp will illu- board diagnostic system
For details, refer to “ABS warning lamp/ minate when there is a fault which monitors the emis-
display” on page 6-53. sions, engine control system
in the Electric parking brake
• The brake warning lamp remains illumi- or CVT control system.
nated during driving.
system.
Normally, this warning lamp If a problem is detected in
5 l The vehicle should be brought to a halt in
the following manner when brake perform- illuminates when the ignition one of these systems, this lamp illuminates or
ance has deteriorated. switch is turned to the “ON” position or the flashes.
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual. operation mode is put in ON, and goes off in Although your vehicle will usually be driva-
Even if the brake pedal moves down to a few seconds. ble and not need towing, we recommend you
the very end of its possible stroke, keep it to have the system checked as soon as possi-
pressed down hard. ble.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking CAUTION This lamp will also illuminate when the igni-
to reduce your speed and observe the fol-
lowing instructions. l When the warning lamp remains on or does tion switch is turned “ON” or the operation
not come on, there is a possibility that the mode is put in ON, and goes off after the en-
[Vehicles with the parking brake of the
parking brake cannot be operated or re- gine has started. If it does not go off after the
lever type]
leased. Immediately contact the nearest
Carefully pull the parking brake lever. engine has started, we recommend you to
[Vehicles with the Electric parking brake] have the vehicle checked.
ice Point. When the warning lamp comes on
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
during driving, immediately stop the vehicle
switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake”
on page 6-05.)
in a safe place, and contact your CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal to operate the
ice Point. If you inevitably have to park, l Prolonged driving with this lamp on may
park the vehicle on level and stable ground, cause further damage to the emission control
stop lamp to alert the vehicles behind you. system. It could also affect fuel economy
shift the selector lever in “P” (Park) position
and place chocks or blocks. and drivability.
l If the lamp does not illuminate when the ig-
nition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, we rec-
ommend you to have the system checked.

Information screen display
CAUTION The charge warning display is also displayed CAUTION

in the multi-information display.
l If the lamp illuminates while the engine is l If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
running, avoid driving at high speeds and parking brake, the brake will be overheated,
have the system inspected by a CAUTION resulting in ineffective braking and possible
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- brake failure.
ice Point as soon as possible. l If it illuminates while the engine is running, If this warning is displayed, release the park-
there is a problem in the charging system.
Accelerator pedal and brake pedal response ing brake.
Immediately park your vehicle in a safe
may be negatively influenced under these
conditions.
place and we recommend you to have it 5
checked.
NOTE Information screen display

l The engine electronic control module ac-
commodating the onboard diagnostic system Brake warning display
has various fault data (especially about the
exhaust emission) stored. When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is
This data will be erased if a battery cable is displayed.
disconnected which will make a rapid diag- The brake warning lamp in the instrument
nosis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery cluster also illuminates.
cable when the check engine warning lamp is For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp
This warning is displayed if you drive with
ON. (red)” on page 5-43.
the parking brake still applied. The brake
warning lamp in the instrument cluster only
Charge warning lamp illuminates when the parking brake is ap- CAUTION
If there is a fault with the plied.
charging system, this lamp For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp l If this warning stays illuminated and does
not go out while driving, there is a danger of
illuminates. (red)” on page 5-43.
ineffective braking. In this case, immediately
Normally, this lamp illumi- park your vehicle in a safe place and we rec-
nates when the ignition ommend you to have it checked.
switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON,
and goes off after the engine has started.

Head Up Display (HUD)*
CAUTION Charge warning display CAUTION

l If the brake warning display is displayed and l If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil
the brake warning lamp and the ABS warn- is low, or the oil level is normal but the
ing lamp are illuminated at the same time, warning is displayed, the engine may burn
the braking force distribution function will out and be damaged.
not operate, so the vehicle may be destabi- l If the warning is displayed while the engine
lised during sudden braking. Avoid sudden is running, immediately park your vehicle in
5 braking and high-speed driving, stop the ve-
hicle in a safe place, and we recommend you If there is a fault with the charging system, l
a safe place and check the engine oil level.
If the warning is displayed while the engine
to have it checked. the warning display is displayed on the infor- oil level is normal, have it inspected.
l The vehicle should be brought to a halt in mation screen in the multi-information dis-
the following manner when brake perform- play. The charge warning lamp in the instru-
ance has deteriorated.
ment cluster also illuminates. Head Up Display (HUD)*
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.
Even if the brake pedal moves down to The Head Up Display (HUD) shows informa-
the very end of its possible stroke, keep it CAUTION tion on a transparent display so that you can
pressed down hard.
l If the warning is displayed while the engine easily check meter information (vehicle
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
to reduce your speed and observe the fol- is running, immediately park your vehicle in speed, navigation instructions, etc.) while
lowing instructions. a safe place and we recommend you to have looking ahead when driving.
[Vehicles with the parking brake of the it checked.
lever type]
Carefully pull the parking brake lever. Oil pressure warning display Example
[Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
switch. (Refer to “Electric parking
brake*” on page 6-05.)
Depress the brake pedal to operate the

stop lamp to alert the vehicles behind you.
If the engine oil pressure drops while the en-
gine is running, the warning display is dis-
played on the information screen in the multi-
information display. 1- Display
2- Speed display screen
3- Information display screen WARNING CAUTION
4- Navigation information display screen*
l Do not spray water or spill beverages in l Do not affix a sticker, label, etc., to the dis-
the HUD. If the switches, wires or electri- play. They could block the display or ob-
Displayed information: cal components become wet, they could struct the opening or closing operation, re-
l Vehicle speed malfunction or cause a vehicle fire. sulting in a malfunction. Also, the sensor
l Navigation information* If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe (A) that adjusts the brightness of the display
l Auto-speed (cruise) control information up as much liquid as possible and imme- may not function correctly, causing the dis-
l Speed limiter information* diately consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
play to be difficult to see.
5
l Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
information*
CAUTION
When a warning is displayed on the informa-
l When opening or closing the display, keep
tion screen in the meter, a warning will also your hands, etc., away from the moving
be displayed on the HUD. parts. Otherwise, your hands could be
Examples of displayed warnings: caught, resulting in personal injury.
l Door ajar warning l Do not place any objects near the HUD. The
objects could prevent the display from open-
l Seat belt reminder ing or obstruct the opening operation, result- l Do not shine a bright light onto the light re-
l Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) ing in a malfunction. ceiving portion of the sensor (A). The sensor
warning* l Do not place beverages near the HUD. Wa- could malfunction.
l Forward Collision Mitigation system ter or other liquids could splash onto wires l If you drop an object into the storage space
(FCM) warning or electrical components, resulting in a mal- for the display and cannot retrieve it, or if
l Lane Departure Warning (LDW) function. the display was closed while an object was
l Never open, close, or adjust the angle of the in the storage space and can no longer be
display manually. Applying a strong force to opened, have the vehicle inspected by a
Refer to “Indication lamp, warning lamp, and the display could result in a malfunction. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
information screen display list” on page 5-21. ice Point.
WARNING
l Always stop the vehicle in a safe place be-
fore operating the HUD. Operating the
HUD while driving could distract you and
an accident might occur.

NOTE Opening the display NOTE

l When you are wearing sunglasses, the dis- 1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi- l If the HUD was closed when the ignition
play may be difficult to see. Remove your switch was turned to the “LOCK” position
sunglasses or adjust the brightness of the
tion or the operation mode is in ON, or the operation mode was put in OFF, the
display. push the switch to open the display. HUD will not open automatically when the
Refer to “Adjusting the brightness of the dis- ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
play ” on page 5-46. tion or the operation mode is put in ON.
5 l If the battery is disconnected or the battery
voltage is low, the display will return to the
default angle and may be difficult to see. If
Closing the display
this occurs, adjust the angle of the display.
Refer to “Adjusting the angle of the display” 1. When the display is open, push the
on page 5-46. switch.
l It may be difficult to see the display depend-
ing on the weather conditions (rain, snow,
direct sunlight, temperature, etc.). If this oc-
curs, adjust the angle and brightness of the
display.
Refer to “Adjusting the angle of the display
and Adjusting the brightness of the display ” 2. The launch screen will be displayed, and
on page 5-46. then information will be displayed.
Using the HUD NOTE

NOTE l If the HUD was open when the ignition
switch was turned to the “LOCK” position
l If the display does not open or close when or the operation mode was put in OFF, the
the switch is pushed, check that there are HUD will open automatically when the igni-
no objects near the display obstructing its tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
movement. If the display does not open or the operation mode is put in ON.
close even though there are no obstructions,
have the vehicle inspected by a
ice Point.

2. The setting top screen will be displayed Adjusting the angle of the dis- Adjusting the brightness of the
if the vehicle is stopped, push the play display
switch again.
When the display is open, push the side or When the display is open, push the side or
side of the switch to adjust the angle of side of the switch to adjust the bright-
the display to raise or lower the position ness of the display. The brightness can be ad-
where the information is displayed. justed to 16 different levels.
5
3. The ending screen will be displayed, and
then the display will close.
NOTE
l When the ignition switch is turned to the
put in OFF, the HUD will close automatical-
ly.
Switching the navigation infor-
mation display
On vehicles equipped with MITSUBISHI
Multi- Communication System (MMCS), you
can select whether to display the navigation
information on the display.

1. To change the display setting, push the 3. The display setting screen will be dis-
switch when the display is open. played.
Navigation information: ON
Navigation information: OFF
2. The setting top screen will be displayed,

push and hold the switch.
4. Push the side of the switch to select Navigation information: OFF

“NAVI INFORMATION ON” or “NAVI
INFORMATION OFF”, and then push
the switch.

5. Push the side or side of the 6. Push the side of the switch to select 7. Push again the switch while “RE-
switch to select “OFF” or “ON”, and “RETURN”. Push the switch to con- TURN” is selected in the setting screen,
then push the switch. firm the setting. and the navigation system display will
be set to “OFF” or “ON”.
Navigation information: ON Navigation information: ON
Navigation information: OFF Navigation information: OFF

Navigation information: OFF
Handling the HUD

A special coating is applied to the display
and mirror surface. Use a finely textured, soft
cloth, such as an eyeglass cleaning cloth.

Combination headlamps and dipper switch
CAUTION Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. NOTE

l Do not use cleaners or protectants that con- l When the headlamps are turned off by the
tain silicone or wax. If these cleaners and automatic on/off control with the ignition
protectants are used on the display or mirror switch in the “ON” position or the operation
surface, the coating could be scratched and mode in ON, the front fog lamp (if so equip-
come off. ped) and rear fog lamps also go off. When
the headlamps are subsequently turned back
5 Combination headlamps
on by the automatic on/off control, the front
fog lamps also come on but the rear fog
lamp stays off. If you wish to turn the rear
and dipper switch fog lamp back on, operate the switch again.
l Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automat-
ic on/off control by affixing a sticker or label
Headlamps to the windscreen.
With the ignition switch or the
NOTE operation mode in ON, the
l When entering a country in which vehicles headlamps, position, tail, licence
are driven on the opposite side of the road to plate and instrument panel
the country in which your vehicles is sup- lamps turn on and off automati-
plied, necessary measures have to be taken cally in accordance with outside
to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Howev-
light level.
er, headlamps on this vehicle do not need AUTO
any adjustment. {Daytime running lamps will go
l Do not leave the lights on for a long time on while the tail lamps are off.}
while the engine is stationary (not running). All lamps turn off automatically l If the lamps do not turn on or off with the
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
A run-down battery could result. when the ignition switch is
operate the switch and we recommend you
l When it rains, or when the vehicle has been turned to “LOCK” position or to have your vehicle checked.
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes be- the operation mode is put in
comes foggy, but this does not indicate a
OFF.
functional problem.
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will Position, tail, licence plate and
remove the fog. However, if water gathers instrument panel lamps on
inside the lamp, we recommend you to have
it checked. Headlamps and other lamps go
on

Lamps (headlamps, fog lamps, NOTE LED headlamp warning lamp*

etc.) auto-cutout function l The lamp auto-cutout will not function when This warning lamp will illuminate when there
l If the following operation is performed the lamp switch is in the “ ” position. is a fault in the LED headlamps.
while the lamp switch is in the “ ” po- l The lamp auto-cutout function can also be
sition, the lamps will turn off automati- disabled.
For further information, we recommend you
cally when the driver’s door is opened.
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
[Except for vehicles equipped with key-
less operation system]
5
The ignition switch is turned to the Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI
“LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key Multi-Communication System (MMCS),
is removed from the ignition switch. screen operations can be used to make the
[For vehicles equipped with keyless op- adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s
manual for details.
eration system]
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
l If the following operation is performed When you want to keep the
while the lamp switch is in the “ ” po- lamps on:
sition, the lamps will remain on for ap- NOTE
1. In the following cases, turn the lamp
proximately 3 minutes while the driver’s switch to the “AUTO” position. l If the warning lamp illuminates, there may
door is shut and will then automatically [Except for vehicles equipped with key- be a fault on the unit. Have the vehicle
turn off. checked at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
less operation system] thorized Service Point.
[Except for vehicles equipped with key- The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
less operation system] “ACC” position.
The ignition switch is turned to the [For vehicles equipped with keyless op- Lamp monitor buzzer
“LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key eration system] If the following operation is performed, a
is removed from the ignition switch. The operation mode is in OFF or ACC. buzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn
[For vehicles equipped with keyless op- 2. Turn on the lamps with the switch in the off the lamps.
eration system] “” or “” position again, then the [Except for vehicles equipped with keyless
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC. lamps will remain on. operation system]
If the driver’s door is opened when the key is
in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or re-
moved from the ignition switch while the
lamps are on.
Dipper (High/Low beam NOTE

[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera- change)
tion system] l If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps
When the headlamps are on, the beam set to high-beam, the headlamps are auto-
If the driver’s door is opened when the opera-
changes from high to low (or low to high) matically returned to their low beam setting.
tion mode is in ACC or OFF while the lamps
are on. each time the lever is pulled fully (1). While
the high-beam is on, the high-beam indica- Automatic High-Beam (AHB)
In both cases, the buzzer will automatically tion lamp in the instrument cluster will also
5 stop if the auto-cutoff function is activated or illuminate.
The Automatic High-Beam (AHB) switches
the headlamp beams (high/low) when the
the door is closed. sensor (A) senses a illuminant such as lights
of a vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle or a
Daytime running lamps street lamp.
The daytime running lamps come on when
the engine is running and the lamp switch is
in the “AUTO” position and the tail lamps
are off.
NOTE
l If the lamp switch is in the “ ” or “ ”
position, or if the tail lamps are on when the
lamp switch is in the “AUTO” position, the Headlamp flasher
daytime running lamps come on as position
The high-beams flash when the lever is
lamps.
pulled slightly (2), and will go off when it is
released.
When the high-beam is on, the high-beam in-
dication lamp in the instrument cluster will il-
luminate.

WARNING If the AHB switch is pressed again, the Manual switching

AHB will be deactivated and AHB indi-
l The headlamp beams (high/low) may not cator will go off. Switching to low beam
be switched automatically under certain
circumstances. Do not overestimate the 1. Pull the turn-signal lever towards you.
system. It is the responsibility of the driv- 2. The AHB indicator will go off.
er to switch the headlamp beams (high/ 3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
low) manually to suit each driving condi- AHB will activated.
tion.
Refer to “Dipper (High/Low beam Switching to high-beam 5
change)” on page 5-54 1. Pull the turn-signal lever towards you.
2. The AHB indicator will go off and the
high-beam indicator illuminates.
How to use the AHB 3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
1. Rotate the lamp switch to “ ” position AHB will activated.
or “AUTO” position when the engine is
running. Automatic switching conditions
2. Press the AHB switch. NOTE The high-beam headlamps illuminate when
all of the following conditions are met:
l If the headlamps are on when the lamp
l Your vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
switch is in the “AUTO” position, the AHB
works. mately 40 km/h (25 mph).
l You can switch the headlamp beams (high/ l It is dark ahead of your vehicle.
low) manually by operating the lever even if l There are no vehicles in front or oncom-
the AHB is working. ing vehicles, or none of their exterior
Refer to “Dipper (High/Low beam change)” lamps are illuminated.
on page 5-54
If the lever is operated manually, the AHB
indicator will go off and the AHB will be de- The low beam headlamps illuminate when
activated. any of the following conditions occur:
Refer to “Manual switching” on page 5-55. l Your vehicle speed does not exceed ap-
l The AHB is not deactivated when you pull proximately 30 km/h (19 mph).
The AHB is activated and the indicator the lever slightly (operation of the headlamp l It is bright ahead of your vehicle.
flasher).
will illuminate. l An exterior lamp of a vehicle in front or
oncoming vehicle is illuminating.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l The headlamps may not be switched from l The AHB recognises environmental condi- • The rear end of a vehicle in front (such as
high-beam to low beam under the following tions by sensing a light source ahead of your a container truck) reflect a strong light.
circumstances. vehicle. Therefore, you may feel like some- • Your vehicle’s headlamp is broken or
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is thing is not quite right when the headlamp dirty.
hindered by any object such as continuous beams are switched automatically. • Your vehicle is inclined due to a flat tyre
bends, elevated median/island, traffic l The system may not detect a light vehicle or towing.
5 signs, roadside trees.
• Your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle l
such as a bicycle.
The system may not detect an ambient
• The warning display appears.
(Refer to “System problem warning” on
suddenly on a bend with poor visibility. brightness precisely. This causes the traffic page 5-56.
• Another vehicle crosses ahead of your ve- to be dazzled by high-beam or the low beam l Observe the precautions below to maintain
hicle. to be maintained. In such cases, you should good usage conditions:
l The headlamps may remain at low beam (or switch the headlamp beams manually. • Do not attempt to disassemble the sensor.
be switched from high-beam to low beam) • In bad weather (heavy rain, fog, snow or • Do not affix a sticker or label on the
when a reflective object (e.g. street lamp, sandstorm). windscreen near the sensor.
traffic signal, noticeboard and signboard) re- • The windscreen is dirty or fogged up. • Avoid overload.
flects light. • The windscreen is cracked or broken. • Do not modify your vehicle.
l Any of the following factors may influence • The sensor is deformed or dirty. • When the windscreen is replaced, use the
the headlamp beam switching timing:
• A light that is similar to the headlamps or MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
• How brightly the exterior lamps of a vehi- tail lamps is shining around your vehicle. parts.
cle in front or oncoming vehicle illumi-
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is
nate.
• Movement or direction of a vehicle in
driven without lights, the exterior lamps System problem warning
are dirty or discoloured, or the direction
front or oncoming vehicle. of the headlamp beams is adjusted im-
If a problem occurs with the system, the fol-
• Only right or left exterior lamp of a vehi- properly. lowing warning display will appear to the
cle in front or oncoming vehicle is illumi- type of the problem.
• It becomes dark and bright suddenly and
nating. continuously around your vehicle.
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is • Your vehicle is driven on uneven surfaces. The AHB deactivation due to fault
a motorcycle.
• Road conditions (gradient, bends and road • Your vehicle is driven on a winding road. If a failure is detected in the system, the fol-
surface). • A reflective object such as a noticeboard lowing warning display will appear and the
• The number of occupants and luggage or a mirror reflects a light ahead of your AHB will automatically be turned off.
load. vehicle.
• When lamps of the vehicle in front or
headlamps of an oncoming vehicle blend
into the other lamps.

If the warning display remains even after the Sensor is too hot or cold l A vehicle in front or an oncoming vehi-
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi- cle is splashing water, snow or dirt.
tion or the operation mode is put in OFF and If the system becomes temporarily unavaila-
then turned back to ON, please contact a ble due to a high or low temperature of the
When the sensor performance returns, the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service sensor, the following warning display will
AHB will resume operation.
Point. appear.
If the warning display does not disappear af-
[When the AHB is malfunctioning] After the temperature of the sensor has been
ter waiting for a while, there is a possibility
in range, the system will automatically return
to operation.
that the sensor has a malfunction. Contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
5
If the warning display does not disappear af-
Point for inspection of the sensor.
ter waiting for a while, there is a possibility
that the automatic high-beam system has a
malfunction. Contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point for in-
[When the sensor is malfunctioning] spection of the system.
Welcome light
This function turns on the position and tail
lamps for approximately 30 seconds after the
UNLOCK switch on the key is pressed when
the combination headlamps and dipper switch
NOTE Windscreen is dirty is in the “AUTO” position. The welcome
If the AHB determines that its performance light function will operate only when it is
l If the sensor or its surrounding area reaches
an extremely high temperature when parking has been degraded, the warning display will dark outside the vehicle.
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “AHB appear.
SERVICE REQUIRED” warning display This can occur when:
may appear. NOTE
l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or
If the warning display remains even after the ice, adhere to the windscreen of the sen- l While the welcome light function is operat-
temperature of the sensor or its surrounding ing, perform one of the following operations
sor portion.
area has been in range, please contact a to cancel the function.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- l In adverse weather conditions, such as • Press the LOCK switch on the key.
ice Point. rain, snow, sandstorms, etc.

Headlamp levelling
NOTE 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition NOTE

switch to the “LOCK” position or put-
• Turn the combination headlamps and dip- ting the operation mode in OFF, pull the l While the coming home light function is op-
per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position. erating, perform one of the following opera-
turn signal lever towards you.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” positions to cancel the function.
tion or put the operation mode in ON. • Pull the turn-signal lever towards you.
l It is possible to modify functions as follows: • Turn the combination headlamps and dip-
• The headlamps can be set to come on in per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
5 the low beam setting.
• The welcome light function can be deacti-
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
vated. l It is possible to modify functions as follows:
For further information, please contact your • The time that the headlamps remain on
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- can be changed.
ice Point. • The coming home light function can be
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone deactivated.
Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI For further information, please contact your
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
screen operations can be used to make the ice Point.
adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s 4. The headlamps will come on in the low On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
manual for details. beam setting for approximately 30 sec- Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI
onds. After the headlamps go off, the Multi-Communication System (MMCS),
headlamps can be turned on again in the screen operations can be used to make the
Coming home light low beam setting for approximately 30 adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s
This function turns on the headlamps in the seconds by pulling the turn signal lever manual for details.
low beam setting for approximately 30 sec- towards you within 60 seconds of turn-
onds after the ignition switch is turned to the ing the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
Headlamp levelling
position or putting the operation mode in
put in OFF. OFF.
1. Turn the combination headlamps and To turn on the headlamps again after 60
Headlamp levelling switch (ex-
dipper switch to the “AUTO” position. seconds of turning the ignition switch to cept for vehicle with LED
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” the “LOCK” position or putting the op- headlamps)
position or put the operation mode in eration mode in OFF, repeat the process The angle of the headlamp beam varies de-
OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the from step 1. pending on the load carried by the vehicle.
engine, remove the key from the ignition
switch.

Headlamp levelling
The headlamp levelling switch can be used to Vehicle condition Switch position Switch position Driver + Full luggage
adjust the headlamp illumination distance 4- loading
(when the lower beam is illuminated) so that 2WD 4WD
the headlamps’ glare does not distract other “0” [Vehicles with 4WD]
drivers.
Set the switch according to the following ta- Switch position Driver only/Driver + 1
ble. 0- front passenger
“2” Switch position 5 passengers (including 5
2- driver)
Switch position 5 passengers (including
3- driver) + Full luggage
“3” loading/Driver + Full lug-
gage loading
Automatic headlamp levelling
“4” “3” (vehicles with LED headlamps)
This mechanism automatically adjusts the di-

rection of the headlamps (beam position) de-
CAUTION ●:1 person pending on changes in the condition of the
:Full luggage loading vehicle, such as the number of occupants or
l Always perform adjustments before driving.
Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as it luggage weight. When the headlamps are il-
could cause an accident. [Vehicles with 2WD] luminated with the ignition switch or the op-
Switch position Driver only/Driver + 1 eration mode in ON, the beam position of the
Vehicle condition Switch position 0- front passenger headlamps is automatically adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped.
2WD 4WD Switch position 5 passengers (including
2- driver)
“0”
Switch position 5 passengers (including
3- driver) + Full luggage
loading

Turn-signal lever
Turn-signal lever NOTE The hazard warning flashers can always be

operated, regardless of the ignition switch po-
l If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the sition or the operation mode.
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned
out. We recommend you to have the vehicle
inspected. Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning
l It is possible to activate the following func- flashers, all turn-signal lamps flash continu-
tions. ously.
To turn them off, push the switch again.
5 • Flashing of the turn-signal lamps when
the lever is operated with the ignition
switch or the operation mode is in ACC.
• Deactivate the turn-signal lamp 3-flash
function for lane changes
• The time required to operate the lever for
1- Turn-signals the 3-flash function can be adjusted.
When making a normal turn, use posi- For further information, we recommend
tion (1). The lever will return automati- you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
cally when cornering is completed. Authorized Service Point.
2- Lane-change signals On vehicles equipped with the Smart-
When moving the lever to (2) slightly to phone Link Display Audio or the
change a lane, the turn-signal lamps and tem (MMCS), screen operations can be
indication lamp in the instrument cluster used to make the adjustment. Refer to the
will only flash while the lever is operat- separate owner’s manual for details.
ed. l It is possible to change the tone of a sound- NOTE
Also, when you move the lever to (2) ing buzzer as the turn-signal lamps flash.
l As your vehicle is equipped with the emer-
slightly then release it, the turn-signal Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound” gency stop signal system, while the hazard
lamps and indication lamp in the instru- on page 5-19. warning lamps are blinking due to having
ment cluster will flash 3 times. manually pushed the switch, the emergency
stop signal system does not operate.
Hazard warning flasher Refer to “Emergency stop signal system” on
switch page 6-51.
Use the hazard warning flasher switch when

the vehicle has to be parked on the road for
any emergency.

ECO mode switch
ECO mode switch NOTE Fog lamp switch

l Even if the ECO mode is operating, you can
ECO mode is an eco-driving support system select normal operation of the air condition- Front fog lamp switch*
which automatically controls the engine and er.
The front fog lamps can be operated while
air conditioning system to improve fuel effi- For further information, we recommend you
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- the headlamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the
ciency.
thorized Service Point. knob in the “ON” direction to turn on the
The ECO mode starts working by pressing
front fog lamps. An indication lamp in the in-
the ECO mode switch when the ignition On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI strument cluster will also come on. Turn the 5
switch or operation mode is in ON. Push the Multi-communication System (MMCS), it is knob in the “OFF” direction to turn off the
switch again and the ECO mode will cancel. possible to change the setting by means of front fog lamps. The knob will automatically
While the ECO mode is working, an ECO screen operations.
return to its original position when you re-
mode indicator will be turned on. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for de-
tails.
lease it.
NOTE NOTE
l Since the air conditioning operation is con-
trolled while the ECO mode is operating, l The front fog lamps are automatically turned
you may feel that effectiveness of the air off when the headlamps or tail lamps are
conditioner is weak. turned off. To turn the front fog lamps on
again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction
after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.

Wiper and washer switch
NOTE Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to NOTE

turn on the front fog lamps. Turn the knob
l Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of once more in the “ON” direction to turn on l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the
fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may knob twice in the “ON” direction after turn-
the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers. ing on the headlamps. (Vehicle with front
off, turn the knob once in the “OFF” direc- fog lamps)
tion. Turn the knob once more in the “OFF”
Rear fog lamp switch direction to turn off the front fog lamps. The
5 The rear fog lamp can be operated when the knob will automatically return to its original Wiper and washer switch
headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) position when you release it.
turn on. CAUTION
An indication lamp in the instrument cluster
comes on when the rear fog lamp is turned l If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
on. freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
the glass with the defroster or rear window
[Vehicle without front fog lamps] demister before using the washer.
Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to
turn on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog Windscreen wipers
lamp off, turn the knob once in the “OFF” di-
rection. The knob will automatically return to
its original position when you release it. NOTE
[Vehicle with front fog lamps] l To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear
NOTE window wiper will automatically perform
several continuous operations if the gearshift
l The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off lever or the selector lever is put in the “R”
when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so position while the windscreen wipers are op-
equipped) are turned off. erating.
l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
knob once in the “ON” direction after turn- on page 5-66.
ing on the headlamps. (Vehicle without front
fog lamps)
The windscreen wipers can be operated with
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
in ON or ACC.

If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, CAUTION
rear window, do not operate the wipers until the rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of
the ice has melted and the blades are freed, rain (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and • When cleaning the outside surface of the
windscreen, if you touch on top of the
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. the wipers will operate automatically.
rain sensor.
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
• When cleaning the outside surface of the
windscreen is dirty and the weather is dry. windscreen, if you wipe with a cloth on
Wiper operation under these conditions can top of the rain sensor.
scratch the windscreen and damage the wip-
ers.
• When using an automatic car wash.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind-
5
screen or the rain sensor.
NOTE
l To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
operation of the wipers does not take place
even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi-
tion when the vehicle is stationary and the
MIST- Misting function
ambient temperature is approximately 0 °C
The wipers will operate once. or lower.
OFF- Off l Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
or label to the windscreen. Also, do not put
AUTO- Auto-wiper control any water-repellent coating on the wind-
Rain sensor screen. The rain sensor would not be able to
The wipers will automatically CAUTION detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
operate depending on the degree might stop working normally.
of wetness on the windscreen. l With the ignition switch or the operation
l In the following cases, the rain sensor may
mode in ON and lever in the “AUTO” posi- be malfunctioning.
LO- Slow tion, the wipers may automatically operate For further information, we recommend you
in the situations described below. to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
HI- Fast If your hands get trapped, you could suffer thorized Service Point.
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be • When the wipers operate at a constant in-
Rain sensor sure to turn the ignition switch to the terval despite changes in the extent of
“LOCK” position or put the operation mode rain.
Can only be used when the ignition switch or in OFF, or move lever to the “OFF” position
the operation mode is in ON. to deactivate the rain sensor.

NOTE To adjust the sensitivity of the NOTE

rain sensor
• When the wipers do not operate even • Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-
though it is raining. With the lever in the “AUTO” position, it is tive) can be changed to intermittent opera-
l The wipers may automatically operate when possible to adjust the sensitivity of the rain tion (except vehicle-speed sensitive).
things such as insects or foreign objects are sensor by turning the knob (B). For further information, we recommend
affixed to the windscreen on top of the rain you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
sensor or when the windscreen is frozen. Authorized Service Point.
5 Objects affixed to the windscreen will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
On vehicles equipped with the Smart-
phone Link Display Audio or the
them. To operate the wipers again, move the MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
lever in the “LO” or “HI” position. tem (MMCS), screen operations can be
Also, the wipers may operate automatically used to make the adjustment. Refer to the
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag- separate owner’s manual for details.
netic wave. To stop the wipers, place the lev-
er in the “OFF” position. Misting function
l Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point when replacing the wind- Move the lever in the direction of the arrow
screen or reinforcing the glass around the and release, to operate the wipers once.
sensor. Use this function when you are driving in
“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
mist or drizzle.
“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
NOTE
l It is possible to activate the following func-
tions.
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-
tive) can be changed to intermittent opera-
tion (vehicle-speed sensitive).

The wipers will operate once if the lever is The wipers will operate once if the lever is Also, by releasing the lever soon after pulling
raised to the “MIST” position and released moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob it towards you, the washer fluid will be
when the ignition switch or the operation (C) is turned in the “+” direction when the ig- sprayed several times while the wipers are
mode is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. The nition switch is in the “ON” position or the operating several times. (Comfort washer)
wipers will continue to operate while the lev- operation mode is in ON. Then approximately 6 seconds later, the wip-
er is held in the “MIST” position. ers operate once more.
Comfort washer will stop operating with any
operation of the lever.
5
Windscreen washer
The windscreen washer can be operated with
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
in ON or ACC. CAUTION
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the l If the washer is used in cold weather, the
windscreen by pulling the lever towards you. washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
When the wipers are not in operation or in in- freeze resulting in poor visibility. Heat the
termittent operation, by pulling the lever to- glass with the defroster or demister before
wards you, the wipers will operate several using the washer.
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
Then approximately 6 seconds later, wipers NOTE
operate once more.
On vehicles equipped with a headlamp wash- l It is possible to modify functions as follows:
er, while the headlamps are on, the headlamp • Causing the wiper never to operate when
washer fluid is sprayed.
washer will operate once together with the
windscreen washer.
NOTE The wiper operates continuously NOTE

for several seconds then oper-
• Deactivating the comfort washer. INT- l The rear window wiper will automatically
ates intermittently at intervals of perform several continuous operations if the
• Deactivating the function that operates the approximately every 8 seconds
wipers once more approximately 6 sec- gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in
onds later. OFF- Off the “R” position while the windscreen wip-
For further information, we recommend you ers or the rear window wiper is operating.
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- The washer fluid will be sprayed (automatic operation mode)
onto the rear window when the
5 thorized Service Point.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone knob is turned fully in either di-
After the automatic operation, the rear win-
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is
Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI rection. in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), - “INT” position, the rear window wiper will
The wipers operate automatical-
screen operations can be used to make the return to the intermittent operation.
ly several times while the wash-
adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s It is possible to set the rear window wiper to
er fluid is being sprayed. perform the automatic operation only if the
manual for details.
gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in
the “R” position while the rear window wip-
Rear window wiper and washer is operating with the knob in the “INT”
er position.
The rear window wiper and washer switch to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
can be operated with the ignition switch or thorized Service Point.
the operation mode in ON or ACC. l If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the
knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to
operate the rear window wiper continuously.
(continuous operation mode)
Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop
the rear window wiper continuous operation.

Rear window demister switch
NOTE NOTE l Avoid using the washer continuously for

more than 20 seconds. Do not operate
l The interval for intermittent operation can be l If the ignition switch or the operation mode the washer when the fluid reservoir is
adjusted. is in ON or ACC and the headlamps are on,
empty.
For further information, we recommend you the headlamp washer operates together with
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- the windscreen washer the first time the Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
thorized Service Point. windscreen washer lever is pulled. l Periodically check the level of washer
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone fluid in the reservoir and refill if re-
quired.
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), Precautions to observe when During cold weather, add a recommen-
5
screen operations can be used to make the using wipers and washers ded washer solution that will not freeze
l If the moving wipers become blocked in the washer reservoir. Failure to do so
manual for details.
partway through a sweep by ice or other could result in loss of washer function
deposits on the glass, the wipers may and frost damage to the system compo-
Headlamp washer switch* temporarily stop operating to prevent the nents.
The headlamp washer can be operated with motor from overheating. In this case,
the ignition switch or the operation mode in park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the Rear window demister
ON or ACC and the headlamps are on. ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
Push the button once and the washer fluid or put the operation mode in OFF, and switch
will be sprayed on to the headlamps. then remove the ice or other deposits.
The rear window demister switch can be op-
The wipers will start operating again af-
erated when the engine is running.
ter the wiper motor cools down, so
Push the switch to turn on the rear window
check that the wipers operate before us-
demister. It will be turned off automatically
ing them.
in approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending
l Do not use the wipers when the glass is on the outside temperature. To turn off the
dry.
demister while it is operating, push the
They may scratch the glass surface and
switch again.
the blades wear out prematurely.
l Before using the wipers in cold weather,
check that the wiper blades are not fro-
zen onto the glass. The motor may burn
out if the wipers are used with the blades
frozen onto the glass.

Heated windscreen switch*
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while NOTE Heated windscreen switch*
the demister is on.
l It is possible to change the setting to make
the rear window demister operate automati- In cold weather windscreen can be heated by
cally when ambient temperature becomes electrical-heat units.
low while the engine is running, even if you It will speed-up removal of frost and conden-
do not push the rear window demister sate.
switch. It operates automatically only once The heated windscreen switch can be operat-
5 after turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position or putting the operation mode in
ed when the engine is running and the outside
ON. temperature is approximately 5 °C or less.
If you choose this setting, the heated mirrors Push the switch to turn on the heated wind-
(if so equipped) will also operate automati- screen. It will be turned off automatically in
cally at the same time. approximately 5 to 10 minutes depending on
For further information, we recommend you the outside temperature. To turn off the heat-
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- ed windscreen while it is operating, push the
thorized Service Point. switch again.
NOTE On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while
l The rear window demister switch is pressed, Multi-Communication System (MMCS), the heated windscreen is on.
the outside rear-view mirrors are defogged
or defrosted. Refer to “Heated mirror” on
page 6-13.
manual for details.
l The demister switch is not to melt snow but
to clear mist. Remove snow before use of
the demister switch.
l When cleaning the inside of the rear win-
dow, use a soft cloth and wipe gently along
the heater wires, being careful not to damage
the wires.
l Do not allow objects to touch the inside of
the rear window glass, damaged or broken
wires may result.

Heated steering wheel switch*
CAUTION : Heating range CAUTION

l While heated windscreen is operating, the The heated steering wheel can be operated • People with sensitive skin
outer surface of the windscreen will be hot. l If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
when the ignition switch or operation mode is
Do not touch the windscreen to prevent steering wheel, allow it to dry thoroughly
burns. in ON.
before attempting to use the heated steering
wheel. Turn the heated steering wheel off
Push the switch to turn on the heated steering immediately if it appears to be malfunction-
NOTE wheel. It will be turned off automatically in ing during use.
5
approximately 30 minutes. To turn off the l Long use of the heated steering wheel with-
l Remove snow before use of the heated
out running the engine may run down the
windscreen. It is not possible to melt large heated steering wheel while operating, push
amount of accumulated snow by the heated the switch again. battery.
windscreen. The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while
l To avoid the battery runs out, do not use the the heated steering wheel is on. Horn switch
heated windscreen continuously.
Press the steering wheel on or around the

Heated steering wheel “ ” mark.
switch*
The heated steering wheel will warm the grip
portions of the left and right on the steering
wheel by internal heater.
CAUTION
l If the following types of persons use the
heated steering wheel, they might become
too hot or receive minor burns (red skin,
heat blisters, etc.):
• Elderly people

OGKE18E5
Starting and driving
Economical driving............................................................................. 6-02 Active stability control (ASC)............................................................ 6-55

Driving, alcohol and drugs..................................................................6-02 Cruise control......................................................................................6-57
Safe driving techniques.......................................................................6-03 Speed Limiter*....................................................................................6-61
Running-in recommendations............................................................. 6-03 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*...........................................6-66
Parking brake...................................................................................... 6-04 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM).....................................6-79 6
Parking................................................................................................ 6-08 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)*...................6-89
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment.......................................6-09 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*......................................................6-93
Inside rear-view mirror....................................................................... 6-10 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)........................................................ 6-95
Outside rear-view mirrors................................................................... 6-11 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*........................................ 6-99
Ignition switch*...................................................................................6-14 Parking sensors (Front/Rear)*.......................................................... 6-104
Engine switch*....................................................................................6-15 Rear-view camera*........................................................................... 6-108
Steering wheel lock.............................................................................6-18 Multi Around Monitor*.....................................................................6-111
Starting and stopping the engine.........................................................6-19 Cargo loads....................................................................................... 6-120
Gasoline particulate filter (GPF).........................................................6-24 Trailer towing....................................................................................6-121
Turbocharger operation....................................................................... 6-25
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system....................................................... 6-25
Manual transmission*......................................................................... 6-31
INVECS-III CVT with 8-step Sports Mode*..................................... 6-32
S-AWC (Super All Wheel Control)*.................................................. 6-39
4-wheel drive operation*.................................................................... 6-42
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation.............6-44
Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles*...............................6-44
Braking................................................................................................6-45
Brake auto hold*................................................................................. 6-46
Hill start assist.....................................................................................6-49
Brake assist system............................................................................. 6-51
Emergency stop signal system............................................................ 6-51
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)............................................................6-52
Electric power steering system (EPS).................................................6-54
OGKE18E5
Economical driving
Economical driving The drive mode-selector should be set to Cargo loads

“AUTO” (Electronically controlled 4WD)
For economical driving, there are some tech- when driving 4WD vehicles to obtain best Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the
nical requirements that have to be met. The possible fuel economy. luggage compartment. Especially during city
prerequisite for low fuel consumption is a driving where frequent starting and stopping
properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve City traffic is necessary, the increased weight of the vehi-
longer life of the vehicle and the most eco- cle will greatly affect fuel consumption. Also
Frequent starting and stopping increases the
nomical operation, we recommend you to avoid driving with unnecessary luggage or
average fuel consumption. Use roads with
have the vehicle checked at regular intervals
carriers, etc., on the roof; the increased air re-
6 in accordance with the service standards.
smooth traffic flow whenever possible. When
driving on congested roads, avoid use of a sistance will increase fuel consumption.
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas
low shift position at high engine speeds.
and noise are highly influenced by personal
driving habits as well as the particular operat-
Cold engine starting
Idling
ing conditions. The following points should Starting of a cold engine consumes more
be observed in order to minimize wear of The vehicle consumes fuel even during fuel. Unnecessary fuel consumption is also
brakes, tyres and engine as well as to reduce idling. Avoid extended idling whenever pos- caused by keeping a hot engine running. Af-
environmental pollution. sible. ter the engine is started, commence driving as
soon as possible.
Accelerating and decelerating Speed
Drive according to the traffic conditions and
Air conditioning
At higher vehicle speed, more fuel is con-
avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration and sumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a The use of the air conditioner will increase
sudden braking, as they will increase fuel slight release of the accelerator pedal will the fuel consumption.
consumption. save a significant amount of fuel.
Shifting Driving, alcohol and drugs

Tyre inflation pressure
Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine Driving after drinking alcohol is one of the
Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular
speed. Always use the highest shift position most frequent causes of accidents.
intervals. Low tyre inflation pressure increa-
possible. ses road resistance and fuel consumption. In
addition, low tyre pressures adversely affect
tyre wear and driving stability.
6-02 Starting and driving OGKE18E5

Safe driving techniques
Your driving ability can be seriously im- Floor mats l Make sure that infants and small chil-
paired even with blood alcohol levels far be- dren are properly restrained in accord-
low the legal minimum. If you have been WARNING ance with the laws and regulations, and
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated for maximum protection in case of an
non-drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or l Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by accident.
correctly laying floor mats that are suita-
use public transportation. Drinking coffee or
ble for the vehicle.
l Prevent children from playing in the lug-
taking a cold shower will not make you so- To prevent the floor mats from slipping
gage compartment. It is quite dangerous
ber. out of position, securely retain them using to allow them to play there while the ve-
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription the hook etc. hicle is moving.
drugs affect your alertness, perception and re- Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal 6
action time. Consult with your doctor or or laying one floor mat on top of another Loading luggage
pharmacist before driving while under the in- can obstruct pedal operation and lead to a
fluence of any of these medications. serious accident. When loading luggage, be careful not to load
above the height of seats. This is dangerous
not only because rearward vision will be ob-
WARNING structed, but also the luggage may be projec-
l NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. ted into the passenger compartment under
Your perceptions are less accurate, your hard braking.
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
impaired.
Running-in
recommendations
Safe driving techniques
During the running-in period for the first
Driving safety and protection against injury 1,000 km, it is advisable to drive your new
cannot be fully ensured. However, we recom-
mend that you pay extra attention to the fol-
Carrying children in the vehi- vehicle using the following precautions as a
cle guideline to aid long life as well as future
lowing: economy and performance.
l Never leave your vehicle unattended l Do not race the engine at high speeds.
Seat belts l Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, brak-
with the key and children inside the ve-
hicle. Children may play with the driving and prolonged high-speed running.
Before starting the vehicle, make sure that
you and your passengers have fastened your ing controls and this could lead to an ac-
seat belts. cident.
OGKE18E5 Starting and driving 6-03

Parking brake
l Keep to the running-in speed limit Shift point Speed limit Lever type parking brake*
shown below.
Please note that the legal speed limits 6th position 100 km/h (62 mph)
To apply
displayed must be adhered to. 7th position 110 km/h (68 mph)
l Do not exceed loading limits.
l Refrain from towing a trailer. 8th position 130 km/h (81 mph)
Vehicles with M/T Parking brake

6 Shift point Speed limit To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake to
1st gear 30 km/h (19 mph)
hold the vehicle.
2nd gear 60 km/h (37 mph) Make sure the brake warning lamp (red) is il-
luminated.
3rd gear 95 km/h (60 mph)
Refer to “Brake warning lamp (red)” on page 1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
4th gear 125 km/h (78 mph) 5-43. then pull the lever up without pressing
the button at the end of hand grip.
5th gear 135 km/h (84 mph)
6th gear 135 km/h (84 mph) CAUTION
l When you intend to apply the parking brake,
Vehicles with CVT firmly press the brake pedal to bring the ve-
hicle to a complete stop before pulling the
Shift point Speed limit parking brake lever.
Pulling the parking brake lever with the ve-
“D” (DRIVE) 130 km/h (81 mph) hicle moving could make the rear wheels
1st position 20 km/h (12 mph) lock up, thereby making the vehicle unsta-
ble.
2nd
position 40 km/h (25 mph) It could also make the parking brake mal-
with shift rd function.
3 position 50 km/h (31 mph)
paddles
4th position 70 km/h (43 mph)
5th position 80 km/h (50 mph)

Parking brake
NOTE CAUTION Electric parking brake*

l Apply sufficient force to the parking brake l Before driving, be sure that the parking The Electric parking brake is the system that
lever to hold the vehicle stationary after the brake is fully released and brake warning applies the parking brake by the electric mo-
foot brake is released. lamp is off. tor.
l If the parking brake does not hold the vehi- If you drive without the parking brake fully
cle stationary after the foot brake is released, released, the warning display will appear on
have your vehicle checked immediately. the information screen in the multi-informa- NOTE
tion display and a buzzer sounds when the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph).
l You may hear an operation noise from the
To release If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
vehicle body when operating the Electric
parking brake, the brake will be overheated,
parking brake. This does not indicate a mal-
function and the Electric parking brake is
6
resulting in ineffective braking and possible operating normally.
brake failure.
l When the battery is weak or dead, the Elec-
tric parking brake cannot be applied or re-
Warning lamp (red)
leased. Refer to “Emergency starting” on
page 8-02.
l You may feel the brake pedal moving when
operating the Electric parking brake.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
Warning display
To apply
1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
then pull the lever up slightly.
2- Pressing the button at the end of hand
grip.
3- Lower the lever fully.
l If the brake warning lamp does not extin-
guish when the parking brake is fully re-
leased, the brake system may be abnormal.
Have your vehicle checked immediately.
For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp
(red)” on page 5-43.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.

Parking brake
2. Pull up the Electric parking brake switch NOTE NOTE
while depressing the brake pedal.
l If the Electric parking brake must be applied l If the Electric parking brake switch is re-
in an emergency situation, pull and hold the peatedly operated in a short time, the follow-
When the parking brake is applied, the brake Electric parking brake switch to apply the ing warning display will appear in the multi-
warning lamp (red) in the instrument cluster Electric parking brake. At that time, the fol- information display and the Electric parking
and the indication lamp (A) on the Electric lowing warning display will appear in the brake will temporarily stop working. In such
parking brake switch will come on. multi-information display and a buzzer will case, wait for approximately 1 minute until
sound, however you should continue to pull the warning display disappears, and operate
and hold the Electric parking brake switch. the Electric parking brake switch again.
CAUTION
6
l While the vehicle is in motion, do not apply
the Electric parking brake. Doing so may
cause overheating and/or premature wear of
brake parts, reducing brake performance.
NOTE l When parking on steep grades, pull up the l The brake warning lamp (red) and the indi-
Electric parking brake switch twice (once cation lamp on the Electric parking brake
l In the following conditions, the brake warn- more after the operation is completed once). switch may blink. This does not indicate a
ing lamp (red) will illuminate for approxi- The maximum effect of the parking brake malfunction, the lamps go off when/if the
mately 15 seconds and then go off. will be obtained. Electric parking brake is released.
• While the electric parking brake is ap- l If the parking brake does not hold the vehi- l Depending on the situation, the Electric
plied, the ignition switch is turned to the cle stationary after the foot brake is released, parking brake may be applied automatically.
“LOCK” position or the operation mode contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-46.
is put in OFF. ized Service Point.
• While the ignition switch is in the l When the ignition switch or the operation
“LOCK” position or the operation mode mode is other than ON, if the parking brake
is in OFF, the Electric parking brake is applied, the Electric parking brake indica-
switch is pulled up. tion lamp comes on for a while.

Parking brake
To release When the Electric parking brake is released, CAUTION
the brake warning lamp (red) and the indica-
Manual operation l If the acceleration of the vehicle seems ab-
tion lamp on the Electric parking brake
normally slow after the vehicle has been
switch go off.
parked with the Electric parking brake ap-
plied in cold weather, stop the vehicle in a
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake safe place, then apply and release the Elec-
is released and the brake warning lamp is off. tric parking brake. If the vehicle acceleration
is still slow, contact the nearest
CAUTION ice Point.
6
l After the Electric parking brake switch has
been operated to apply or release the Electric
parking brake, if the brake warning lamp NOTE
(red) and the indication lamp on the Electric
parking brake switch remain blinking or the
l When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is other than ON, the parking brake
Electric parking brake warning lamp (yel- cannot be released.
1. Make sure that the ignition switch or the low) remain illuminated, the Electric parking
brake system may be malfunctioning and the
l If the Electric parking brake does not auto-
operation mode is ON. matically release, it may be released by man-
2. Press down the Electric parking brake parking brake may not be applied or re- ual operation.
switch while depressing the brake pedal. leased. Immediately park your vehicle in a
safe place and contact the nearest
l When the selector lever is other than “P”
(Park) position, if you try to release the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- Electric parking brake without depressing
Automatic operation ice Point. the brake pedal, the warning display will ap-
When the accelerator pedal is depressed l If a vehicle is driven without releasing the pear.
slowly while all of the following conditions electric parking brake, the brake will over-
are met, the Electric parking brake is auto- heat, resulting in ineffective braking and
matically released. possible brake failure.
l The engine is running. l If the brake warning lamp (red) does not go
off after the parking brake has been released,
l The selector lever is in the “D” (Drive) the brake system may be malfunctioning.
or the “R” (Reverse) position. Contact the nearest MITSUBISHI MOTORS
l The driver’s seat belt is fastened. Authorized Service Point.

Parking
NOTE If there is a malfunction in the system, the Parking

warning lamp will come on. In addition, the
l If you start driving without releasing the warning display appears on the information
Electric parking brake, the warning display To park the vehicle, firmly apply the parking
screen in the multi-information display.
will appear. brake, and then move the gearshift lever to 1st
Under normal conditions, the warning lamp
or “R” (Reverse) position for vehicles equip-
only comes on when the ignition switch is
ped with M/T, or set the selector lever to “P”
turned to the “ON” position or the operation
(PARK) position for vehicles equipped with
mode is put in ON and goes off a few sec-
CVT.
onds later.
6 Parking on a hill
l If the driver’s foot contacts the accelerator CAUTION
pedal in the condition that the Electric park- To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow
ing brake can be released by an automatic l When the Electric parking brake warning
these procedures:
lamp (yellow) does not illuminate or remains
operation, the Electric parking brake may be
illuminated when the ignition switch is
released automatically.
turned to the “ON” position or the operation Parking on a downhill slope
mode is put in ON, or comes on while driv-
Warning lamp/display Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and
ing, the Electric parking brake may not be
applied or released. Immediately contact the move the vehicle forward until the kerb side
Warning lamp (yellow) nearest MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized wheel gently touches the kerb.
Service Point. For details, refer to “Electric On vehicles equipped with M/T, apply the
parking brake warning light (yellow)” on parking brake and place the gearshift lever
page 5-44. into the “R” (Reverse) position.
When parking your vehicle while the Elec- On vehicles equipped with CVT, apply the
tric parking brake warning lamp (yellow) is parking brake and place the selector lever in-
Warning display
illuminated, park the vehicle on level and
stable ground, move the selector lever to the
to the “P” (PARK) position.
“P” (PARK) position and place chocks, If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
blocks or stones behind and in front of the
tyres to prevent the vehicle from moving. Parking on an uphill slope
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and
move the vehicle back until the kerb side
wheel gently touches the kerb.

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
On vehicles equipped with M/T, apply the WARNING Steering wheel height and
parking brake and place the gearshift lever
into the 1st position. l Leaving the engine running risks injury reach adjustment
or death from accidentally moving the
On vehicles equipped with CVT, apply the gearshift lever (with M/T), the selector 1. Release the lever while holding the
parking brake and place the selector lever in- lever (with CVT) or the accumulation of steering wheel up.
to the “P” (PARK) position. toxic exhaust fumes on the passenger
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. compartment.
position.
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull-
NOTE Where you park ing the lever fully upward.
6
l On vehicles equipped with CVT, be sure to
apply the parking brake before moving se- WARNING
lector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If
l Do not park your vehicle in areas where
you move selector lever to the “P” (Park) combustible materials such as dry grass
position before applying the parking brake, or leaves can come in contact with a hot
it may be difficult to disengage selector lever exhaust, since a fire could occur.
from the “P” (Park) position when next you
drive the vehicle, requiring application of a
strong force the selector lever to move from Do not keep the steering wheel
the “P” (Park) position. fully turned for a long time
Parking with the engine run- More effort could be required to turn the
A- Locked
steering wheel.
ning B- Release
Refer to “Electric power steering system
Never leave the engine running while you (EPS)” on page 6-54.
take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the WARNING
engine running in a closed or poorly ventila- When leaving the vehicle
l Do not attempt to adjust the steering
ted place. wheel while you are driving the vehicle.
Always carry the key and lock all doors and
the tailgate when leaving the vehicle unatten-
ded.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
area.

Inside rear-view mirror
Inside rear-view mirror To adjust the mirror position To reduce the glare
Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
any seat adjustments so you have a clear left/right to adjust its position. Type 1
view to the rear of the vehicle. The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can
be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the
Type 1 glare from the headlamps of vehicles behind
you during night driving.
6
Type 2
WARNING
1- Normal
l Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
2- Anti-glare
mirror while driving. This can be danger-
ous.
Always adjust the mirror before driving.
Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.

Outside rear-view mirrors
Type 2 Outside rear-view mirrors Type 1
When the headlamps of the vehicles behind
you are very bright, the reflection factor of To adjust the mirror position
the rear-view mirror is automatically changed The outside rear-view mirrors can be operat-
to reduce the glare. ed when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position or the operation mode is put
in ON or ACC. Type 2
WARNING 6
l Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
mirrors while driving. This can be dan-
gerous.
Always adjust the mirrors before driving.
l Your vehicle is equipped with convex type
mirrors. L- Left outside mirror adjustment
Please take into consideration, that ob- R- Right outside mirror adjustment
jects you see in the mirror will look small-
When the ignition switch is turned to the er and farther away compared to a nor-
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in mal flat mirror.
ON, the reflection factor of the mirror is au- Do not use this mirror to estimate dis- 2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up
tomatically changed. tance of following vehicles when changing or down to adjust the mirror position.
lanes. 1- Up
2- Down
NOTE 3- Right
1. Push the switch (A) on the same side as
l Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner the mirror whose adjustment is desired. 4- Left
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity 3. After completing the adjustment, return
could result. the switch (A) to the centre position.

Retracting and extending the On vehicles equipped with the mirror re- CAUTION
outside mirrors tractor switch
l It is possible to retract and extend the mir-
The outside mirror can be retracted in to- rors by hand. After retracting a mirror using
wards the side window to prevent damage Retracting and extending the the mirror retractor switch, however, you
when parking in narrow areas. mirrors using the mirror retrac- should extend it by using the switch again,
tor switch not by hand. If you extended the mirror by
hand after retracting it using the switch, it
CAUTION With the ignition switch in the “ON” or would not properly lock in position. As a re-
“ACC” position or the operation mode in ON sult, the mirror could move because of the
l Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror rewind or vibration while you are driving, and
6 tracted in. or ACC, push the mirror retractor switch to
this may limit the driver’s rearward visibili-
The lack of rearward visibility normally pro- retract the mirrors. Push it again to extend the
ty.
vided by the mirror could lead to an acci- mirrors to their original positions.
dent. After placing the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position or the operation mode in NOTE
Except for vehicles equipped OFF, it is possible to retract and extend the
l Be careful not to get your hands trapped
with the mirror retractor switch mirrors using the mirror retractor switch for while a mirror is moving.
approximately 30 seconds. l If you move a mirror by hand or it moves af-
Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi-
ter hitting a person or object, you may not be
cle with your hand to retract it in. When ex- able to return it to its original position using
tending the mirror, pull it out towards the the mirror retractor switch. If this happens,
front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in push the mirror retractor switch to place the
place. mirror in its retracted position and then push
the switch again to return the mirror to its
original position.
l When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from
repeated pushing of the retractor switch.
Retracting and extending the

mirrors without using the mir-
ror retractor switch
[Vehicles with keyless entry system]

The mirrors automatically retract or extend NOTE The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while
when the doors are locked or unlocked using the demister is on.
the key of the keyless entry system. • Automatically extend when the ignition The heater will be turned off automatically in
switch is turned to the “ON” position or
Refer to “Keyless entry system: Operation of approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending
the operation mode is put in ON, and au-
the outside rear-view mirrors ” on page 3-05. tomatically retract when the driver’s door on the outside temperature.
[Vehicles equipped with keyless operation is opened after the ignition switch is
system] turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position
The mirrors automatically retract or extend or the operation mode in put in OFF or
when the doors are locked or unlocked using ACC.
• Automatically extend when the vehicle
the keyless entry system or the keyless opera-
speed reaches 30 km/h (20 mph). 6
tion function.
• Deactivate the automatic extension func-
Refer to “Keyless entry system: Operation of tion.
the outside rear-view mirrors” on page 3-05 The outside rear-view mirrors can be re-
or “Keyless operation system: To operate us- tracted or extended by the following oper-
ing the keyless operation function” on page ations, even if changing to any of the
3-11. above.
After pressing the LOCK switch on the
key to lock the doors and tailgate, if the
NOTE LOCK switch is pressed again twice in a NOTE
row within approximately 30 seconds, the
outside rear-view mirrors will retract. l The heater mirrors can be turned on auto-
Please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
After pressing the UNLOCK switch on matically.
the key to unlock the doors and tailgate, if For further information, we recommend you
the UNLOCK switch is pressed again to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
Link Display Audio and MITSUBISHI Mul-
twice in a row within approximately 30 thorized Service Point.
ti-Communication System (MMCS), screen
seconds, the outside rear-view mirrors On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
operations can be used to make the adjust-
will extend again. Link Display Audio and MITSUBISHI Mul-
ment. Refer to the separate owner’s manual
ti-Communication System (MMCS), screen
for details.
operations can be used to make the adjust-
Heated mirror ment. Refer to the separate owner’s manual
for details.
To demist or defrost the outside rear-view
mirrors, press the rear window demister
switch.

Ignition switch*
Ignition switch* START NOTE

The starter motor operates. After the engine • The time until the power cuts out can be
changed to approximately 60 minutes.
has started, release the key and it will auto-
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can
matically return to the “ON” position. be deactivated.
The ACC power auto-cutout function can
NOTE be deactivated.
For details, we recommend you to consult
l Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
immobilizer. Service Point.
6 To start the engine, the ID code transmitted On vehicles equipped with the Smart-
by the transponder inside the key must phone Link Display Audio and
match the code registered in the immobilizer MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
computer. tem (MMCS), screen operations can be
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft used to make the adjustment.
LOCK starting system)” on page 3-03. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
details.
The engine is stopped and the steering wheel l When ACC power supply automatic stop,
locked. The key can only be inserted and re-
ACC power auto-cutout func- the steering wheel can’t lock and you can’t
moved in this position. tion lock and unlock the doors by the keyless en-
try key and keyless operation key.
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed
ACC with the ignition switch in the “ACC” posi-
tion, the function automatically cuts out the To remove the key
The engine is stopped, but the audio system power for the audio system and other electric On vehicles equipped with a M/T, when re-
and other electric devices can be operated. devices that can be operated with that posi- moving the key, push the key in at the
tion. “ACC” position and keep it depressed until it
ON When the ignition switch is turned from the is turned to the “LOCK” position and remove
“ACC” position, the power is supplied again it.
All the vehicle’s electrical devices can be op- to those devices.
erated.
NOTE
l It is possible to modify functions as follows:

Engine switch*
On vehicles equipped with CVT, when re- CAUTION CAUTION
moving the key, first set the selector lever to
the “P” (PARK) position, and push the key in l Do not leave the key in the “ON” position l The indication lamp (A) will flash orange
for a long time when the engine is not run- when there is a problem or malfunction in
at the “ACC” position and keep it depressed
ning, doing so will cause the battery to be the keyless operation system. Never drive if
until it is turned to the “LOCK” position, and discharged. the indication lamp on the engine switch is
remove it. l Do not turn the key to the “START” position flashing orange. Immediately contact a
while the engine is running. Doing so could MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
damage the starter motor. ice Point.
l If the engine switch operation is not smooth
and feels like it is sticking, do not operate
Engine switch* the switch. Immediately contact a 6
In order to prevent theft, the engine will not ice Point.
start unless a preregistered keyless operation
key is used. (Engine immobilizer function) NOTE
If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
you can start the engine. l When operating the engine switch, press the
switch all the way in. If the switch is not
fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
operation mode may not change. If the en-
CAUTION gine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
need to hold the engine switch down.
l Do not remove the ignition key from the ig-
nition switch while driving. The steering
wheel will be locked, causing loss of con-
trol.
l If the engine is stopped while driving, the
brake servomechanism will cease to function
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
the power steering system will not function
and it will require greater manual effort to
operate the steering.

Engine switch*
NOTE ACC Changing the operation mode

Electrical devices such as the audio and ac-
l When the battery in the keyless operation If you press the engine switch without de-
cessory socket can be operated.
key has worn out, or the keyless operation pressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch
The indication lamp on the engine switch il-
key is out of the vehicle, a warning display pedal (M/T), you can change the operation
will appear. luminates orange.
mode in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
Warning display (when the engine switch is
pressed one time) ON
All vehicle’s electrical devices can be operat-
ed.
6 The indication lamp on the engine switch il-
luminates green. The indication lamp goes
off when the engine is running.
Warning display (when the engine switch is NOTE

pressed two times or more)
l Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer.
To start the engine, the ID code transmitted
by the transponder inside the key must CAUTION
match the code registered in the immobilizer
computer. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer l When the engine is not running, put the op-
(Anti-theft starting system)” on page 3-03. eration mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when
the engine is not running may cause the bat-
Operation mode of the engine tery to be discharged, making it impossible
to start the engine, lock and unlock the steer-
switch and its function ing wheel.
OFF
The indication lamp on the engine switch
turns off.
The operation mode cannot be put in OFF
when the selector lever is in any position oth-
er than the “P” (PARK) position (CVT).

Engine switch*
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

l When the battery is disconnected, the cur- 2 One of the other causes could be low • The ACC power auto-cutout function can
rent operation mode is memorized. After re- . battery voltage. If this occurs, the be deactivated.
connecting the battery, the memorized mode keyless entry system, keyless opera- For details, we recommend you to consult
is selected automatically. Before disconnect- a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
tion function and steering lock will
ing the battery for repair or replacement, Service Point.
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF. also not operate. Contact a On vehicles equipped with the Smart-
Be careful if you are not sure which opera- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized phone Link Display Audio and
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery Service Point. MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
is run down. tem (MMCS), screen operations can be
l The operation mode cannot be changed from used to make the adjustment. 6
OFF to ACC or ON if the keyless operation ACC power auto-cutout func- Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
key is not detected to be in the vehicle. Refer tion details.
to “Keyless operation system: operating
After approximately 30 minutes have elapsed l When ACC power supply automatic stop,
range for starting the engine ” on page 3-11. the steering wheel can’t lock and you can’t
l When there is the keyless operation key in with the operation mode in ACC, the func- lock and unlock the doors by the keyless en-
the vehicle and the operation mode is not tion automatically cuts out the power for the try key and keyless operation key.
changed, the battery in the keyless operation audio system and other electric devices that
key may have worn out. Refer to “Warning can be operated with that position.
activation” on page 3-14. When the engine switch operate again, the
Operation mode OFF reminder
power is supplied again. system
NOTE
l If the operation mode cannot be changed to NOTE
OFF, perform the following procedure. l It is possible to modify functions as follows:
1 Move the selector lever to the “P” • The time until the power cuts out can be
. (PARK) position, and then change changed to approximately 60 minutes.
the operation mode to OFF. (For ve-
hicles with CVT) When the operation mode is in any mode oth-
er than OFF, if you try to lock the doors and
tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front pas-
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tail-
gate LOCK switch, a warning display will
appear, and the outer buzzer will sound and
you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
Steering wheel lock
Operation mode ON reminder To unlock NOTE

system Turn the key to the “ACC” position while l When the following operation is performed
moving the steering wheel slightly right and with the operation mode in OFF and the se-
left. lector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, the
steering wheel is locked.
• Open or close one of the doors (except the
tailgate).
• Lock all the doors and the tailgate with
the keyless entry system or the keyless
operation system function.
6 If the driver’s door is opened with the engine
l When the driver’s door is opened while the
stopped and the operation mode in any mode
steering wheel is unlocked, a warning dis-
other than OFF, the inner buzzer sounds in- play will appear and the buzzer sounds to
termittently to remind you to put the opera- alert that the steering wheel is unlocked.
tion mode in OFF.
Steering wheel lock

Except for vehicles equipped with the key- CAUTION
less operation system
l Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
In some countries, it is prohibited to leave
To lock the key in the vehicle when parked.
CAUTION
Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
On vehicles equipped with the keyless op- l If the engine is stopped while driving, do not
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. open a door or press the LOCK switch on
eration system the key until the vehicle stops in a safe
place. This could cause the steering wheel to
To lock lock, making it impossible to operate the ve-
hicle.
After pressing the engine switch and opera-
tion mode in OFF, when driver’s door is
opened, the steering wheel is locked. To unlock
The following methods can be used to unlock
the steering wheel.

Starting and stopping the engine
l Put the operation mode in ACC. NOTE Starting and stopping the
l Start the engine.
l If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock engine
and the steering wheel cannot be locked, the
CAUTION warning display will appear and the buzzer
l Carry the key with you when leaving the ve-

will sound. Change the operation mode from Tips for starting
ON to OFF and try to lock the steering
hicle. wheel again. If the warning display appears
l If your vehicle needs to be towed, unlock the again, have your vehicle checked at a
Except for vehicles equipped with the key-
steering wheel. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- less operation system
Refer to “Towing” on page 8-20. ice Point. l Do not operate the starter motor continu-
ously longer than 10 seconds; doing so
6
NOTE could run down the battery. If the engine
does not start, turn the ignition switch
l When the steering wheel does not unlock, back to “LOCK”, wait a few seconds,
the warning display will appear and the in-
and then try again. Trying repeatedly
ner buzzer will sound. Press the engine
switch again while moving the steering with the starter motor still turning will
wheel slightly right and left. l If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock, damage the starter mechanism.
the warning display will appear and the in-
ner buzzer will sound. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and contact a WARNING
ice Point.
l Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and
can be fatal.
CAUTION
l Never attempt to start the engine by pushing
or pulling the vehicle.
l Do not run the engine at high revolutions or
drive the vehicle at high speed until the en-
gine has had a chance to warm up.

CAUTION CAUTION On vehicles equipped with CVT, make

sure the selector lever is in the “P”
l Release the ignition key as soon as the en- l Never attempt to start the engine by pushing (PARK) position.
gine starts to avoid damaging the starter mo- or pulling the vehicle.
tor. l Do not run the engine at high revolutions or
drive the vehicle at high speed until the en- Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with CVT
gine has had a chance to warm up.
On vehicles equipped with the keyless op-
eration system
l The operation mode can be in any mode Starting the engine
6 to start the engine. Except for vehicles equipped with the key-
l The starter motor will be turning for up less operation system
to approximately 15 seconds if the en- 1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat
gine switch is released at once. Pressing belt.
the engine switch again while the starter 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
motor is still turning will stop the starter 3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
motor. The starter motor will be turning 4. Fully depress the clutch pedal (M/T).
for up to approximately 30 seconds NOTE
while the engine switch is pressed.
If the engine does not start, wait for a
NOTE l On vehicles with CVT, the starter will not
operate unless the selector lever is in the “P”
while and then attempt to start the en- l On vehicles equipped with M/T, the starter (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
gine again. Trying repeatedly with the will not operate unless the clutch pedal is For safety reasons, start the engine in the
fully depressed (Clutch interlock). “P” (Park) position so that the wheels are
starter motor still turning will damage
locked.
the starter mechanism.
5. On vehicles equipped with M/T, place
the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) 6. After turning the ignition key to the
WARNING position. “ON” position, make certain that all
l Never run the engine in a closed or poorly warning lamps are functioning properly
ventilated area any longer than is needed before starting the engine.
to move your vehicle in or out of the area. 7. Turn the ignition key to the “START”
Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and
can be fatal.
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal, and release it when the engine
starts.

NOTE 3. If the engine still will not start, the en- NOTE
gine could be flooded with too much
l Minor noises may be heard on engine start- petrol. While depressing the brake pedal l After the engine has not started for a while,
up. These will disappear as the engine the brake pedal effort needed to start the en-
on vehicles equipped with CVT or the
warms up. gine may become greater.
clutch pedal on vehicles equipped with
l If you replace the battery, it needs more time If this occurs, depress the brake pedal more
to start the engine shortly after the battery M/T, push the accelerator pedal all the firmly than usual.
replacement. way down and hold it there, then crank
the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the
4. Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal
When it is difficult to start the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
(M/T).
engine and release the accelerator pedal. Wait a 6
few seconds, and then crank the engine
After several attempts, you may experience again for 5 to 6 seconds while depress- NOTE
that the engine still does not start. ing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal,
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such l On vehicles equipped with M/T, the starter
but do not push the accelerator pedal. will not operate unless the clutch pedal is
as lamps, air conditioning blower and Release the ignition switch if the engine fully depressed (Clutch interlock).
rear window demister, are turned off. starts. If the engine fails to start, repeat
2. While depressing the brake pedal on ve- these procedures. If the engine still will
hicles equipped with CVT or the clutch 5. On vehicles equipped with M/T, place
not start, we recommend you to have the the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
pedal on vehicles equipped with M/T, vehicle checked.
press the accelerator pedal halfway and position.
hold it there, then crank the engine. Re-
On vehicles equipped with the keyless op-
lease the accelerator pedal, immediately
eration system
after the engine starts.
1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
firmly with your right foot.

On vehicles equipped with CVT, make NOTE 3. If the engine still will not start, the en-
sure the selector lever is in the “P” gine could be flooded with too much
(PARK) position. l When starting the engine, the selector lever petrol. While depressing the brake pedal
is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) or
on vehicles equipped with CVT or the
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you press-
ed the engine switch without depressing the clutch pedal on vehicles equipped with
Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with CVT
brake pedal, warning display will appear M/T, push the accelerator pedal all the
(CVT). way down and hold it there, then press
the engine switch to crank the engine. If
the engine does not start after 5 to 6 sec-
6 onds, press the engine switch to stop the
engine, and release the accelerator pedal.
Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a
few seconds, and then press the engine
l If you replace the battery, it needs more time switch to crank the engine again while
to start the engine shortly after the battery depressing the brake pedal or the clutch
replacement. pedal, but do not push the accelerator
6. Press the engine switch.
pedal. If the engine fails to start, repeat
7. Make sure that all warning lamps are
When it is difficult to start the these procedures. If the engine still will
functioning properly.
engine not start, we recommend you to have the
After several attempts, you may experience vehicle checked.
NOTE that the engine still does not start.
l Minor noises may be heard on engine start- 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such Starting the engine
up. These will disappear as the engine as lamps, air conditioning blower and
warms up.
rear window demister, are turned off.
l When starting the engine, you pressed the
2. While depressing the brake pedal on ve- CAUTION
engine switch without depressing the clutch
pedal, warning display will appear (M/T). hicles equipped with CVT or the clutch l As your vehicle is equipped with a turbo-
pedal on vehicles equipped with M/T, charger, do not stop the engine immediately
press the accelerator pedal halfway and after high-speed or uphill driving. First al-
low the engine to idle to give the turbocharg-
hold it there, then crank the engine. Re-
er a chance to cool down.
lease the accelerator pedal, immediately
after the engine starts.
Except for vehicles equipped with the key-
less operation system
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. NOTE 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your
2. Firmly apply the parking brake while de- right foot (CVT) or the clutch pedal
pressing the brake pedal. l If you have to bring the engine to an emer- (M/T).
gency stop while driving, press and hold the
3. On vehicles equipped with M/T, turn the 2. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position press it quickly three times or more. The en- or the clutch pedal (M/T), touch the por-
to stop the engine, and then move the gine will stop and the operation mode will tion of the keyless operation key shown
gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or go to ACC. in the illustration to the engine switch.
“R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position. l Do not stop the engine with the selector lev-
On vehicles equipped with CVT, place er in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
position (CVT). If the engine is stopped with
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) po-
the selector lever in any position other than 6
sition, and stop the engine. the “P” (Park) position, the operation mode
will go to ACC rather than OFF.
On vehicles equipped with the keyless op- Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
eration system the selector lever in the “P” (Park) position.
WARNING 1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake while de-
l Do not operate the engine switch while
pressing the brake pedal.
driving except in an emergency. If the en-
gine is stopped while driving, the brake 3. On vehicles equipped with M/T, press
servomechanism will cease to function the engine switch to stop the engine, 3. If the keyless operation key is recog-
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. move the gearshift lever to the 1st (on a nized, the indication lamp (A) on the en-
Also, the power steering system will not uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) gine switch illuminates in green, and
function and it will require greater man- position. then the engine can be started and the
ual effort to operate the steering. This operation mode can be changed within
On vehicles equipped with CVT, move
could result in a serious accident.
the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) po- approximately 10 seconds. Refer to
sition, press the engine switch to stop the “Starting the engine” on page 6-20 and
engine. “Changing the operation mode” on page
6-16.
If the keyless operation key is
not operating properly
The following operation can be used to start
the engine or change the operation mode.
Gasoline particulate filter (GPF)
NOTE WARNING GPF warning display

l If metal objects or other keys are near the l The GPF reaches very high temperatures.
keyless operation key, the keyless operation Do not park your vehicle in areas where
key may not be recognized. combustible materials such as dry grass
l Instead of depressing the brake pedal, the or leaves can come in contact with a hot
keyless operation key can also be recognized exhaust system since a fire could occur.
in the same way within approximately 30
seconds after pushing the engine switch.
l To change the operation mode without start- CAUTION The GPF warning display will appear in the
ing the engine, release the brake pedal event of an abnormality in the GPF system.
6 (CVT) or the clutch pedal (M/T) after the in- l Do not use any type of fuel or engine oil that
is not specified for your vehicle. Also, do
dication lamp on the engine switch illumi-
nates in green, and then press the engine
not use any moisture-removing agent or oth- NOTE
er fuel additive. Such substances could have
switch.
a detrimental effect on the GPF. Refer to l The “PF SYSTEM” warning display indi-
“Fuel selection” on page 2-02 and “Engine cates the GPF system.
Gasoline particulate filter oil” on page 10-04.
If the GPF warning display ap-
(GPF) pears during vehicle operation
NOTE
The gasoline particulate filter (GPF) is a de- l To minimize the likelihood of excessive ac- The accumulated PM in the GPF must be
vice that captures most of the particulate mat- cumulation of PM, try to avoid driving for
burned away.
ter (PM) in the exhaust emissions of the pet- long periods at low speeds and repeatedly
driving short distances.
To burn away the PM, try to drive the vehicle
rol engine. The GPF automatically burns
as follows.
away trapped PM during vehicle operation. l The engine sounds slightly different than
usual while the GPF automatically burns With the bar graph of the engine coolant tem-
Under certain driving conditions, however,
away trapped PM. The change in the engine perature display stabilized in roughly the
the GPF is not able to burn away all of the sound does not indicate a fault. middle of the scale, drive for 20 to 30 mi-
trapped PM and, as a result, an excessive
nutes at a speed of at least 60 km/h while ac-
amount of PM accumulates inside it.
celerating and decelerating intermittently.
When the accelerator pedal is released to de-
celerate, the accumulated PM in the GPF is
burned away.

Turbocharger operation
If the warning display stays on even after Warning lamp Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)
driving according to the preceding condi-
tions, drive for approximately 30 minutes at a system
speed of at least 100 km/h while accelerating
and decelerating intermittently or contact The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system auto-
If an abnormal condition occurs in the GPF matically stops and restarts the engine with-
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized system, the GPF warning display appears and
Service Point. out operating the ignition switch or engine
the check engine warning lamp illuminates. switch when the vehicle is stopped, such as at
Have the system inspected by a a traffic light or in a traffic jam, to reduce ex-
CAUTION MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service haust gases, increase fuel efficiency.
Point. 6
l You do not have to continuously drive exact-
ly as indicated above. Always strive to drive
CAUTION
safely in accordance with road conditions. CAUTION
l If the vehicle will be stopped for a long time
l Continuing to drive with the GPF warning or if you will leave the vehicle unattended,
NOTE display appearing and the check engine stop the engine.
warning lamp illuminating could result in
l The vehicle speed and driving time necessa- engine trouble and GPF damage.
ry to burn away the PM may vary according
to the payload weight, inclination of the
NOTE
road, and other driving conditions. Turbocharger operation l The accumulated time the engine has been
stopped by the AS&G system is displayed in
the multi-information display. Refer to “Au-
If the GPF warning display ap- CAUTION to Stop & Go (AS&G) monitor” on page
pears and the check engine 5-12.
l Do not run the engine at high speeds (for ex-
warning lamp illuminates at ample, by revving it or by accelerating rap-
the same time during vehicle idly) immediately after starting it.
To turn on/off AS&G
operation l Do not stop the engine immediately after
high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the The AS&G system is automatically activated
engine to idle to give the turbocharger a when the ignition switch is turned to the
Warning display chance to cool down. “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
l Replace the engine oil at the specified inter- ON.
vals. If the engine oil is not replaced, the tur-
You can deactivate the system by pressing the
bocharger could malfunction.
“Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch.
Refer to “To deactivate” on page 6-30.

Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system
Automatically stopping the en- 3. Release the clutch pedal. The engine will 2. When the ACC operates and the vehicle
gine (on vehicles equipped with stop automatically. stops, the engine will stop automatically
M/T) even if you do not depress the brake
pedal.
1. Stop the vehicle when the indica-
tor display turns on.
6 2. While depressing the brake pedal, fully

depress the clutch pedal and place the
gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
tion.
Automatically stopping the en-
gine (on vehicles equipped with
CVT) NOTE
1. Stop the vehicle when the indica-
l When the engine is automatically stopped,
changes will occur in the driving operations.
2. Depressing the brake pedal. The engine Pay close attention to the following.
will stop automatically. • The brake booster becomes inoperative
and the pedal effort will increase.
If the vehicle is moving, press down the
brake pedal harder than usual.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control System
• The electric power steering system (EPS)
(ACC) is turned on (for vehicles equipped becomes inoperative and it will become
with the ACC) harder to turn the steering wheel.
1. Turn on the ACC when the indica-

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

l When the engine is automatically stopped, l In the following cases, the indicator • “Check engine warning lamp” is illumina-
do not attempt to exit the vehicle. display will turn off and the engine will not ted or the indicator display is blink-
Because the engine restarts automatically stop automatically even if the vehicle is ing.
when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened or stopped. • The selector lever is other than in the “D”
the driver’s door is opened, an unexpected • After the engine is started, the vehicle (DRIVE) position (CVT)
accident might occur when the vehicle starts speed never exceeded approximately • ASC operation indicator and ASC OFF
moving. 5 km/h (3 mph) indicator is turned on (CVT)
l Observe the following precautions when the • After the engine start, approximately 30 • ABS warning lamp is turned on
engine is stopped automatically. Otherwise,
an unexpected accident might occur when
seconds or more have not elapsed
• After the engine restarts automatically
• CVT warning lamp will turn on/warning
display will display (CVT)
6
the engine restarts automatically. and the vehicle stops again within 10 sec- l In the following cases, the engine will not
• On vehicles equipped with M/T, do not onds stop automatically even if the indica-
move the gearshift lever to a position oth- • Engine coolant temperature is low tor display turned on.
er than the “N” (Neutral) position. • Ambient temperature is low • Depress the accelerator pedal
If the gearshift lever is moved to a posi-
• When using the heater, the vehicle interior • Brake booster vacuum pressure is low
tion other than the “N” (Neutral) position, temperature is not warm enough.
the indicator display blinks and the • Operate the steering wheel
• Air conditioning is operating and passen- • Brake pedal is not sufficiently depressed
buzzer sounds. ger compartment has not sufficiently
If the gearshift lever is returned to the “N” (CVT)
cooled
(Neutral) position, the indicator • Parking on steep hill (CVT)
• Demister switch is pressed
display stops blinking and the buzzer Refer to “Demisting of the windscreen • Parking brake operates (CVT)
stops sounding. The engine will not re- and door windows” on page 7-06. l On vehicles equipped with M/T, do not rest
start if the gearshift lever is in a position your foot on the clutch pedal while driving
• When the air conditioner is operated in
other than the “N” (Neutral) position. automatic mode where the temperature because this will cause detection of clutch
control is set to the max. hot or the max. pedal switch malfunction and blinking of
cool. AS&G OFF display, and AS&G system will
NOTE • Electric power consumption is high, such not operate.
as when the rear window demister or oth-
l In the following cases, the indicator
er electrical components are operating or
display will blink to inform the driver and
the blower speed is set to a high setting.
the engine will not stop automatically.
• Driver’s seat belt is not fastened • Battery volume, voltage or battery per-
formance is low
• Driver’s door is open
• Bonnet is open

NOTE Automatically stopping the en- NOTE

l If the AS&G system operates while the air
CVT) l On vehicles with M/T, do not move the gear-
conditioner is operating, both the engine and shift lever to a position other than the “N”
the air conditioning compressor will stop. Release the brake pedal. The indicator (Neutral) position or do not release the
Therefore, only the blower will operate, the display turns off and the engine restarts auto- clutch pedal while the engine is restarting
windows may start to fog up. If this occurs, matically. automatically. The starter motor will stop
press the demister switch to restart the en- and the engine will not restart automatically.
gine. l If the engine does not restart automatically,
Refer to “Demisting of the windscreen and When the Brake auto hold operation indi- the warning display will appear in the infor-
door windows” on page 7-06. cator is turned on (for vehicles equipped mation screen of the multi-information dis-
6 l If the windows become fogged up each time with Brake auto hold) play, and the charge warning lamp and check
the engine is stopped, we recommend you to engine warning lamp will illuminate.
When you depress the accelerator pedal, the
deactivate the AS&G system by pressing the Warning display (on vehicles equipped with
“Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch. engine restarts automatically. M/T)
l If the air conditioner is operating, set the When the Adaptive Cruise Control System
temperature control higher to lengthen the (ACC) is turned on (for vehicles equipped
time that the engine is stopped automatical-
with the ACC)
ly.
When the vehicle in front starts moving or
when you depress the accelerator pedal, the
Automatically restarting the en- engine restarts automatically.
M/T)
NOTE
Depress the clutch pedal while the gearshift
lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position. The l On vehicles equipped with Brake auto hold,
if the Brake auto hold indication lamp turns
indicator display turns off and the en-
on, the engine will not restart automatically
gine restarts automatically. even if you release the brake pedal.
l While the ACC is operating, the engine will
not restart automatically even if you release
the brake pedal (on vehicles equipped with
ACC).

NOTE NOTE CAUTION

l Warning display (on vehicles equipped with l The vehicles equipped with CVT have the • When the air conditioner is ON, the pas-
CVT) function of preventing the unexpected start senger compartment temperature rises and
of the vehicle due to creeping, etc., by tem- the air conditioning compressor operates
porarily maintain the braking force applied to lower the temperature
when the engine restarts automatically. • Demister switch is pressed
This function is deactivated if the selector Refer to “Demisting of the windscreen
lever is set into the “N” (Neutral) position. and door windows” on page 7-06.
While the function is activated, you might • Electric power consumption is high, such
hear operation noise from under the vehicle as when the rear window demister or oth-
If this occurs: or feel a shock from the brake pedal. er electrical components are operating or 6
This indicates that the system is operating the blower speed is set to a high setting.
[On vehicles equipped with M/T] normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. • Push the accelerator pedal (CVT)
The engine will not restart even if the clutch • Battery voltage or battery performance is
pedal is depressed again. While depressing low
the brake pedal, fully depress the clutch ped- CAUTION • Operate the steering wheel
al and turn the ignition switch to the • After the engine stop, 3 minute elapse
“START” position or press the engine switch
l In the following cases, the engine will restart
automatically even if the engine was stopped (CVT)
to start the engine. by the AS&G system. Pay attention, other- • Move the selector lever to the “R” (RE-
wise an unexpected accident might occur VERSE) position (CVT)
[On vehicles equipped with CVT] when the engine restarts. • Move the selector lever from the “N”
The engine will not restart even if release the (NEUTRAL) to “D” (DRIVE) position
• Vehicle speed is 3 km/h (2 mph) or higher
brake pedal again. Also, the indicator when coasting down a slope (CVT)
display blinks, and the buzzer sounds. • Brake booster vacuum pressure is low be- • Driver’s seat belt is unfastened
While depressing the brake pedal, move the cause the brake pedal is depressed repeat- • Driver’s door is opened
selector lever to the “P” (Park) or “N” (Neu- edly or depressed harder than usual • When the Electric parking brake switch is
tral) position and turn the ignition switch to • Engine coolant temperature is low pulled up to operate the Electric parking
the “START” position or press the engine brake (on vehicles equipped with the
• When the air conditioner is operated by
switch to start the engine. After the engine is pressing the air conditioning switch Electric parking brake).
started, the buzzer stops.
• When the preset temperature of the air
But the indicator display is blinking conditioner is changed significantly
until turning the ignition switch to the • When the air conditioner is operated in NOTE
“LOCK” position or putting the operation automatic mode where the temperature
mode in OFF. control is set to the max. hot or the max. l In the following cases, the engine will not
For details, refer to “Starting and stopping restart automatically.
cool
the engine” on page 6-19

NOTE To deactivate NOTE

• Bonnet is open The AS&G system is automatically activated l This display will also turn on for a few sec-
• On vehicles equipped with M/T, while the when the ignition switch is turned to the onds when the ignition switch is turned to
engine is stopped automatically, “Auto “ON” position or the operation mode put in the “ON” position or the operation mode put
Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch is press- ON. You can deactivate the system by press- in ON.
ed to deactivate the “Auto Stop & Go ing the “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF”
(AS&G) OFF” system. switch.
l When the engine restarts automatically, the If the warning lamp/display
When the AS&G system is deactivated, the
audio volume may temporarily decrease.
display will be turned on.
blinks while driving
6 l
This does not indicate a malfunction.
While the engine is stopped automatically, To reactivate the AS&G system, press the
the air volume change of the air conditioner “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch; the
may temporarily be experienced. This does display will turn off.
not indicate a malfunction.
l On vehicles equipped with CVT, while the
engine is stopped automatically, if the selec-
tor lever is moved to the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion quickly with the brake pedal firmly de- If the warning display appears on the infor-
pressed, the engine does not restart automat- mation screen in the multi-information dis-
ically even if you release the brake pedal. play and the indicator display blinks,
If this occurs, the display will blink to the AS&G system is malfunctioning and will
inform the driver. not operate.
If you want to restart the engine, depress the We recommend you to consult a
brake pedal again.
If you want to put the operation mode in
OFF, press the engine switch without de-
Point.
pressing the brake pedal. (on vehicles equip-
ped with the keyless operation system) AS&G OFF indicator display

Manual transmission*
Manual transmission* NOTE CAUTION

l If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the l Do not pull up the pull-ring (A) when mov-
The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift clutch pedal again; the shift will then be eas- ing the gearshift lever to any position other
lever knob. Press the clutch pedal all the way ier to make. than the “R” (Reverse) position. If you al-
down while shifting gears. To start off, press l The gearshift indicator shows recommended ways pulled up the pull-ring (A) when mov-
the clutch pedal all the way down and shift gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It ing the gearshift lever, you could uninten-
shows a in the multi-information dis- tionally move the gearshift lever to the “R”
into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position, operating
play when an upshift is recommended, and it (Reverse) position and cause an accident
the gearshift lever slowly. Then gradually re- and/or a transmission fault.
lease the clutch pedal while depressing the shows a when a downshift is recom-
accelerator pedal.
mended. 6
The pull-ring will return to its original posi-
tion when you return the gearshift lever to the
CAUTION “N” (Neutral) position.
l Do not put the gearshift lever into the re-
verse position while the vehicle is moving
forward. Doing so could damage the trans-
CAUTION
mission. Moving the gearshift lever to l If the pull-ring will not return from the
l Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal the “R” (Reverse) position pulled-up position, we recommend you to
while driving as this will cause premature have the vehicle inspected.
clutch wear or damage. Pull up the pull-ring (A), then move the gear-
l Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position. shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position with
l Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest, the pull-ring still pulled. Possible driving speed
because this can result in premature wear of Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this
the transmission shift forks. may cause excessive engine speed (the tach-
ometer needle into the red zone) and damage
the engine.
NOTE
l During cold weather, shifting may be diffi- Shift point Speed limit
cult until the transmission lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not harmful 1st gear 45 km/h (28 mph)
to the transmission.
2nd gear 90 km/h (56 mph)
3rd gear 140 km/h (87 mph)

INVECS-III CVT with 8-step Sports Mode*
Shift point Speed limit The selector lever (A) has two gates; the In the main gate, the selector lever has four
main gate (B) and sports mode gate (C). positions, and is equipped with a lock button
4th gear 190 km/h (118 mph) (D) to avoid inadvertent selection of the
5th gear 205 km/h (127 mph) wrong gear.
Use 6th gear whenever vehicle speed allows,

for maximum fuel economy.
INVECS-III CVT with 8-

6 step Sports Mode*
The CVT will automatically and continuous-
ly change its gear ratio depending on road
and driving conditions. This helps achieve
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
If your vehicle is equipped with shift paddles,
you can manually shift up and shift down the The lock button must be pushed
transmission. Refer to “Sports mode” on page while the brake pedal is depressed
6-35 to move the selector lever.
The lock button must be pushed to
Selector lever operation move the selector lever.
The CVT selects an optimum gear ratio auto-
matically, depending on the speed of the ve- The lock button need not be pushed
hicle and the position of the accelerator ped- to move the selector lever.
al.

WARNING When the selector lever cannot 3. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
be shifted from the “P” (Park) driver with a cloth over its tip into notch
l If the lock button is always pushed to op- (A) or the cover. Pry gently as shown to
erate the selector lever, the lever may be position remove the cover.
accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)
or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not
When the selector lever cannot be shifted
to push the lock button when performing from the “P” (PARK) position to another po-
the operations indicated by in the illus- sition while the brake pedal is pressed and
tration. held down with the ignition switch at the
l Always depress the brake pedal when “ON” position or the operation mode in ON,
shifting the selector lever into the other
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
the battery may be flat or the shift-lock 6
mechanism may be malfunctioning. Immedi-
(NEUTRAL) position. ately have your vehicle checked by a
Never put your foot on the accelerator
pedal while shifting the selector lever
from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU- Point.
TRAL) position. If you need to move the vehicle, shift the se-
lector lever as follows.
1. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
NOTE 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
applied.
foot.
l To avoid erroneous operation, move the se- 2. Stop the engine if it is running.
lector lever firmly into each position and
briefly hold it there. Always check the posi-
tion shown by the selector lever position dis-
play after moving the selector lever.
l If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.

5. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- Selector lever position display If the ambient temperature is low, the selector
driver in the shiftlock release hole (B). lever position display on the multi-informa-
Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU- tion display may blink when the selector lev-
TRAL) position while pressing the er is placed in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (RE-
ON, the position of the selector lever is indi-
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver VERSE) position immediately after the en-
cated in the multi-information display.
down. gine has been started. This indicates that the
transmission requires warming up.
While the display is blinking, the vehicle will
not move, because the transmission keeps
6 disengaging until the warm-up is completed
even if the selector lever is placed in the “D”
or “R” position.
When the selector lever position display is

blinking, perform the following procedure:
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right
foot and place the selector lever in the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position for several
When the selector lever posi- seconds.
tion display blinks 2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and
then place the selector lever in the “D”
(DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
WARNING If the selector lever position display
stops blinking, the warm-up is comple-
l To avoid unintended vehicle movement,
ted and the transmission will function
keep the brake pedal applied with your
right foot and do not depress the accelera- normally.
tor pedal, while the selector lever position 3. If the display is still blinking, repeat
display is blinking. steps 1 and 2 above.

NOTE “N” NEUTRAL CAUTION

l While the selector lever position display is At this position, the transmission is disengag- l To prevent transmission damage, never shift
blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently. ed. It is the same as the neutral position on a into the “D” (Drive) position from the “R”
M/T, and should only be used when the vehi- (Reverse) position while the vehicle is in
cle is stationary for an extended length of motion.
Selector lever positions time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.
“P” PARK Sports mode
WARNING Whether the vehicle is stationary or in mo-
This position locks the transmission to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine l Never move the selector lever to the “N” tion, sports mode is selected by gently push- 6
(Neutral) position while driving. A serious ing the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE)
can be started in this position. accident could occur since you could acci- position into sports mode gate (A).
dentally move the lever into the “P” To return to “D” range operation, gently push
CAUTION (Park) or “R” (Reverse) position or you the selector lever back into the main gate (B).
will lose engine braking.
In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rap-
l Never shift into the “P” (Park) position l On a gradient, the engine should be star-
while the vehicle is in motion to avoid a ted in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the idly simply by moving the selector lever
transmission damage. “N” (NEUTRAL) position. backward and forward or using the shift pad-
l To prevent rolling, always keep your foot dles at the steering wheel (for vehicles equip-
“R” REVERSE on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in ped with the shift paddles). In contrast to a
“N” (Neutral) position, or when shifting M/T, the sports mode allows gear shifts with
This position is to back up. into or out of “N” (Neutral) position. the accelerator pedal depressed.
CAUTION “D” DRIVE

NOTE
l Never shift into the “R” (Reverse) position This position is used for most city and high-
from the “D” (Drive) position while the ve- way driving. The transmission will automati-
l You can shift into sports mode with shift
paddles when the selector lever is in the
hicle is in motion to avoid a transmission cally and continuously change its gear ratio main gate (B) as well. Also, you can return
damage. depending on road and driving conditions. to the “D” range operation in any of follow-
ing ways.
When returning to “D” range operation, the
selector lever position display will change to
“D” (DRIVE) position.

NOTE CAUTION NOTE

• Pull the + (SHIFT UP) side shift paddle l In sports mode, the driver must execute up- l Downward shifts are made automatically
forward (towards the driver) for over 2 ward shifts in accordance with prevailing when the vehicle slows down. Before the ve-
seconds. road conditions, taking care to keep the en- hicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
• Stop the vehicle. gine speed below the red zone. Also, the vehicle will automatically return to
• Push the selector lever from the “D” l Repeated continuous operation of the shift “D” (Drive) operation if the vehicle is stop-
(DRIVE) position into the manual gate paddles will continuously switch shift posi- ped.
(A) and push the selector lever back into tion. l The upward shift may be made automatical-
the main gate (B). l Do not use the left- and right-hand shift pad- ly in sports mode when the engine revolu-
dles at the same time. Doing so could cause
6 the wrong gear ratio to be selected.
tions rise and approach the tachometer’s red
zone (the red-coloured part of the tachome-
ter dial).
l When the selector lever is in the “D” (Drive)
NOTE position and sports mode is selected, the
gearshift indicator shows recommended
l Only the eight forward gears can be selected. gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It
To reverse or park the vehicle, move the se-
lector lever to the “R” (Reverse) or “P” shows a when an upshift is recom-
(Park) position as required. mended.
l To maintain good running performance, the
transmission may refuse to perform an up-
shift when the shift paddle on the “+ (SHIFT
UP)” side is pulled at certain vehicle speeds.
Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine,
1. + (SHIFT UP) the transmission may refuse to perform a
Transmission shifts up once by each op- downshift when the shift lever or the shift
paddles on the “− (SHIFT DOWN)” side is
eration.
pulled at certain vehicle speeds. When this
2. - (SHIFT DOWN) happens, a buzzer sounds to indicate that a
Transmission shifts down once by each downshift is not going to take place.
operation.

Shift paddles position display CAUTION

The currently selected position is displayed and vehicle speed to decrease. In this case,
on the multi information display. take one of the following measures.
• Slow down your vehicle.
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the
or selector lever in the “P” (Park) position,
and open the bonnet with the engine run-
ning to allow the engine to cool down.
After a while, confirm that the warning
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
continue driving if the display is no longer
6
showing. If the warning display remains,
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point immediately.
[When warning display is showing]
NOTE It may be that there is something unusual
l The selector lever position display blinks at happening in the CVT, causing a safety de-
When a malfunction occurs in the time of or warning display appears. vice to activate. Have the vehicle inspected
the CVT l The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi- by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
tion display will blink only when there is a Service Point immediately.
There could be a system malfunction if the problem with the CVT position switch. It is
warning display or the warning display is not seen during normal driving.
displayed on the information screen in the
multi-information display.
CAUTION
l If malfunction occurs in the CVT while driv-
ing, the warning display or the warning
display will appear on the information
In this case, follow these procedures:
[When warning display is showing]
The CVT fluid is overheating. The engine
control may activate to lower the CVT fluid
temperature, causing the engine revolutions

Operation of the CVT CAUTION DRIVING DOWNHILL

l Do not race the engine with brake pedal According to the conditions, the transmission
CAUTION pressed when the vehicle is stationary. will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio
This can damage the CVT. to achieve stronger engine braking. This may
l Before selecting a position with the engine Also, when you depress the accelerator ped- help reduce your need to use the service
running and the vehicle stationary, fully de- al while holding down the brake pedal with brake.
press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as
tion, the engine revolutions may not rise as Waiting
high as when performing the same operation
the CVT is engaged, especially when the en- with the selector lever in the “N” (NEU- For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
6 gine speed is high, at fast idle or with the air TRAL) position. signals the vehicle can be left in selector lev-
conditioner operating, the brakes should on- er position and held stationary with the serv-
ly be released when you are ready to drive ice brake.
away. Passing acceleration For longer waiting periods with the engine
l Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) running, place the selector lever in the “N”
all times.
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
position push the accelerator to the floor. The (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
ment delay in case of an emergency. CVT will automatically downshift. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
l To prevent sudden acceleration, never race with the service brake.
the engine when shifting from the “P” NOTE
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
l Operating the accelerator pedal while the l When shift paddles is in operation, down- CAUTION
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will shifts do not take place when the accelerator
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- is depressed all the way to the floor.
l Never hold the vehicle stationary while in
CVT on a hill with the accelerator, always
mature wear of brake pads. apply the parking brake and/or service
l Use the selector lever in the correct shift po- brake.
sition in accordance with driving conditions. Uphill/downhill driving
Never coast downhill backward with the se-
lector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position or DRIVING UPHILL Parking
coast forward with the selector lever in the
“R” (REVERSE) position. The transmission prevents unnecessary up- To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
The engine may stop and the unexpected in- shifts even when the accelerator pedal is re- plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake,
crease in brake pedal effort and steering leased and ensures smooth driving. and then move the selector lever to the “P”
wheel weight could lead to an accident. (Park) position.

S-AWC (Super All Wheel Control)*
If you are going to leave the vehicle unatten- S-AWC (Super All Wheel NOTE
ded, always switch off the engine and carry
the key. Control)* l On vehicles equipped with the lever type
parking brake, if the parking brake lever is
S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics pulled up while the vehicle is moving, the
NOTE control system that helps enhance driving front-rear distribution of driving torque con-
trol will be temporarily suspended, which
l On a slope, be sure to apply the parking performance, cornering performance, and ve- will allow the rear wheel to lock easier.
brake before moving the selector lever to the hicle stability over a wide range of driving
“P” (Park) position. If you move the selector conditions through integrated management of
lever to the “P” (Park) position before apply- the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC Active Yaw Control (AYC)
ing the parking brake, it may be difficult to
(Active Yaw Control), the ABS and the ASC.
6
disengage the selector lever from the “P” The AYC is a system, with a yaw control
(Park) position when next you drive the ve- function, that controls the left-right driving/
hicle, requiring application of a strong force CAUTION braking force using the brake.
to the selector lever to move from the “P”
(Park) position. l Do not over-rely on the S-AWC. Even the S-
AWC cannot prevent the natural laws of Yaw control function
physics from acting on the vehicle. This sys-
When the CVT makes no speed tem, like any other system, has limits and The yaw control function is a function that
change cannot help you to maintain traction and enhances vehicle cornering performance and
control of the vehicle in all circumstances. vehicle stability with management of vehicle
If the transmission does not change speeds Reckless driving may lead to accidents. It is turning power (yaw moment) by controlling
while driving, or your vehicle does not pick the driver’s responsibility to drive carefully.
the drive power difference of the left and
up enough speed when starting on an uphill This means taking into account the traffic,
road and environmental conditions. right wheels and the braking force when the
slope, it may be that there is something un- vehicle does not turn in response to steering
usual happening in the transmission, causing input, such as when the steering wheel is
a safety device to activate. We recommend Electronically Controlled 4WD turned quickly or when driving on slippery
you to have your vehicle checked immediate- road.
ly. The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys-
tem that improves acceleration performance
and stability performance by controlling
front-rear distribution of driving torque with
operating the electronic control coupling ar-
ranged in the rear differential assembly.

CAUTION S-AWC drive Function S-AWC drive mode-selector

mode The drive mode can be switched by press the
l Control of the braking force does not en-
hance the stopping performance of the vehi- High traction mode. switch while the ignition switch is in the
cle, therefore, pay careful attention to the This mode excels at “ON” position or the operation mode in ON.
safety of your surroundings when driving. rough road driving and
escape from stuck condi-
GRAVEL
S-AWC drive mode tions, in addition, realizes
strong 4WD driving from
Select the drive mode from the following
low speed to high speed
6 three types to suit the driving conditions.
on ordinary road.
S-AWC drive Function 4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
mode ing skills.
AUTO mode applied to Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation”
dry pavement road and on page 6-42 and take care to drive safely.
wet road, etc.
This mode controls driv- NOTE If you press the switch, you can change the
ing/ braking torque be-
l The S-AWC drive mode becomes “AUTO” drive mode in the order of AUTO, SNOW,
tween front right and
when you turn on the ignition switch or the GRAVEL, AUTO.
AUTO front left wheel and be- operation mode.
tween front and rear
wheel according to the CAUTION
driving condition, and
l Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
achieves low fuel con- the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
sumption and agile driv- in similar conditions. The vehicle could
ing. lunge in an unexpected direction.
This mode is chiefly suit- l Driving on dry, paved roads in “GRAVEL”
and “SNOW” mode causes increased fuel
able for the snow road. consumption, noise and vibration.
SNOW
Stability improves on a
slippery road.

NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

l Even if an S-AWC drive mode other than l If the selected drive mode indicator is blink- l Be sure to use tyres that are the same speci-
“AUTO” was selected before turning the ig- ing, the drive mode switches automatically fied size, type, and brand, and have no dif-
nition switch to the “LOCK” position or put- to protect the drive-system components. ference in the amount of wear for all four
ting the operation mode in OFF, the SAWC The warning display is also displayed in the wheels. Otherwise, the S-AWC system may
drive mode will be set to “AUTO” when the information screen in the multi information not work properly.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- display.
tion or the operation mode is put in ON
again. S-AWC operation display
l The drive mode can be switched while driv- The S-AWC operation status can be dis- 6
ing or stopped.
played on the information screen in the multi-
information display.
S-AWC drive mode display To display the status, press the multi-infor-
Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out mation display switch to change the informa-
after driving a while, resume driving as be- tion screen.
fore. Refer to “Information screen (when the igni-
l If the drive mode indicator is blinking, a tion switch or the operation mode is ON)” on
problem has occurred with the S-AWC sys- page 5-05
tem and the safety device has activated. The
warning display is also displayed in the in- Display example
Example: “AUTO” mode is selected. formation screen in the multi-information
display. The S-AWC operation status is displayed.
The currently selected drive mode is dis-
played on the multi-information display.
In addition, when the drive mode is changed,
the selected mode appears on the interrupt
display screen of the information screen in
the multi-information display.
The drive mode display will appear on the in- Have your vehicle inspected immediately by
formation screen for a few seconds, and then a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
the original screen will return. ice Point.

4-wheel drive operation*
Yaw control function display Not only does this ensure better handling on WARNING
dry, paved roads but also permits better trac-
The amount of the yaw moment is displayed tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow- • Keep your speed low and do not drive
as a bar graph. covered roads and when moving out of mud.
faster than conditions allow you to.
A, D- Clockwise yaw moment about the But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or
vehicle’s centre of gravity towing in rough conditions. NOTE
It is particularly important to note that 4-
B, C- Anticlockwise yaw moment about wheel drive may not give sufficient hill l Driving on rough roads can be hard on a ve-
the vehicle’s centre of gravity hicle. Before you leave paved roads, be sure
climbing ability and engine braking on steep all scheduled maintenance and service has
6 Traction control level display
slopes. You should try to avoid driving on been done, and that you have inspected your
steep slopes. vehicle. Pay special attention to the condi-
The strength of the traction control operation Also, you must exercise caution when driving tion of the tyres, and check the tyre pres-
(between the front and rear wheels) is dis- on sand and mud and when driving through sures.
played in section E of the meter as a bar water because sufficient traction may not be l MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible
to the operator for any damage or injury
graph. available in certain circumstances.
caused or liability incurred by improper and
Please avoid driving the vehicle through negligent operation of a vehicle. All techni-
areas where the tyres may get stuck in deep
WARNING ques of vehicle operation depend on the skill
sand or mud. and experience of the operator and other par-
l Always concentrate on your driving first. ticipating parties. Any deviation from the
Keep your eyes and mind on the road. recommended operating instructions above
Distractions while driving can lead to an WARNING is at their own risk.
accident.
l Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive ve- l Note that the stopping distance required of a
hicles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little from
limits to the system and ability to main- that of a 2-wheel drive vehicle. When driv-
4-wheel drive operation* tain control and traction. Reckless driving ing on a snow-covered road or a slippery,
may lead to accidents. Always drive care- muddy surface, make sure that you keep a
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for fully, taking account of the road condi- sufficient distance between your vehicle and
use on paved roads. tions. the one ahead of you.
But its unique 4-wheel drive system allows l Improperly operating this vehicle on or l The driving posture should be more upright;
off-paved roads can cause an accident or adjust the seat to a good position for easy
you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads,
rollover in which you and your passengers steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar lo- the seat belt.
could be seriously injured or killed.
cations.
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in
the owner’s manual.

4-wheel drive operation*
NOTE On snowy or icy roads CAUTION

l After driving on rough roads, check each Set the drive mode-selector to “SNOW” in l Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly
part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor-
with water. Refer to “Inspection and mainte-
accordance with the road conditions, and then mal road surfaces, the engine and other
nance following rough road operation” on gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a drive-system components are put under ex-
page 6-44 and “Maintenance” on page smooth start. cessive strain when driving on such a sur-
10-02. face. This could lead to accidents.
NOTE l If the engine is overheating or the engine
power drops suddenly while the vehicle is
CAUTION l The use of snow tyres and/or snow traction being driven, immediately park your vehicle
6
device (tyre chains) is recommended. in a safe place.
l Setting the drive mode-selector to “GRAV-
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page
EL” and “SNOW” to drive on dry paved l Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- 8-04 for details and take the required meas-
road will increase fuel consumption, with
ing (downshifting). ures.
possible noise and vibration generation.
Turning sharp corners CAUTION WARNING

When turning a sharp corner in “GRAVEL” l Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration l When attempting to rock your vehicle out
and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con- of a stuck position, be sure that the area
position at low speed, a slight difference in trol of the vehicle could be lost. around the vehicle is clear of people and
steering may be experienced similar to feel- physical objects. The rocking motion may
ing as if the brakes were applied. This is cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
called tight corner braking and results from
Driving on sandy or muddy ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
each of the 4 tyres being at a different dis- roads age to nearby people or objects.
tance from the corner. The phenomenon is
Set the drive mode-selector to “GRAVEL”
typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this oc- NOTE
and then gradually depress the accelerator
curs, either straighten out the steering wheel,
pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on l Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
or change to another mode.
the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and sharp turning; such operations could re-
and drive at low speed. sult in the vehicle becoming stuck.

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation
NOTE CAUTION l Carefully wash the vehicle with water.

Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly
l If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or l Never drive through water that is deep depressing the brake pedal in order to
muddy roads, it can often be moved with a enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or ex-
dry out the brakes. If the brakes still do
rocking motion. Move the gearshift lever or haust pipe. Do not change the gearshift lever
position (M/T) or the selector lever position not function properly, we recommend
selector lever alternately between the 1st and
“R” (Reverse) positions (with M/T), the “D” (CVT) while driving through water. you to have the brakes checked as soon
(DRIVE) and “R” (REVERSE) positions Frequent driving through water can adverse- as possible.
(with CVT), while pressing lightly on the ac- ly affect the life span of the vehicle; we rec- l Remove the insects, dried grass, etc.
celerator pedal. ommend you to take the necessary measures clogging the radiator core.
to prepare, inspect, and repair the vehicle.
6 l Driving on rough roads can cause rust on the
vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon l After driving through water, apply the
l After driving through water, check the
engine, transmission and differential oil.
as possible after such use. brakes to be sure they are functioning prop-
erly. If the brakes are wet and not function- If the oil or grease is milky or cloudy be-
ing properly, dry them out by driving slowly cause of water contamination, it must be
Climbing/descending sharp while lightly depressing the brake pedal. In- replaced with new oil or grease.
grades spect each part of the vehicle carefully. l Check the inside of the vehicle. If water
entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
l Inspect the headlamps, If the headlamp
Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill Inspection and maintenance bulb is flooded with water, we recom-
climbing ability and engine braking on steep following rough road mend you to have it drained.
slopes. Avoid driving on steep slopes even
though the vehicle is a 4-wheel drive vehicle. operation
Cautions on handling of 4-
Driving through water After operating the vehicle in rough road wheel drive vehicles*
conditions, be sure to perform the following
If the electrical circuits become wet, further inspection and maintenance procedures:
operation of the vehicle will be impossible; l Check that the vehicle has not been dam-
therefore, avoid driving through water unless
Tyres and wheels
aged by rocks, gravel, etc.
absolutely necessary. If driving through water Since the driving torque can be applied to the
is unavoidable, use the following procedure: four wheels, the driving performance of the
vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is
Check the depth of the water and the terrain greatly affected by the condition of the tyres.
before attempting to drive through it. Drive
slowly to avoid creating excessive water Pay close attention to the tyres.
splashing.
Braking
l Install only the specified tyres on all Towing Jacking up a 4-wheel drive ve-
wheels. Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on hicle
page 11-09.
l Be sure all 4 tyres and wheels are the
same size and type. WARNING
When it is necessary to replace any of l Do not crank the engine while jacking up
the tyres or wheels, replace all 4 tyres. the vehicle.
The tyre on the ground may turn and the
l All tyres should be rotated before the
vehicle may roll off the jack.
wear difference between the front and
rear tyres is recognizable. 6
Braking
Good vehicle performance cannot be expec-
ted if there is a difference in wear between All the parts of the brake system are critical
tyres. Refer to “Tyre rotation” on page 10-12. to safety. We recommend you to have the ve-
l Check the tyre inflation pressure regular- hicle checked at regular intervals according
ly. to the service booklet.
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

l Always use tyres of the same size, same l Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the l Avoid driving habits that cause heavy brak-
type, and same brand, and which have no front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A ing and never “ride” the brakes by resting
wear differences. Using tyres of different or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
size, type, brands or degree of wear, will in- damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. It causes brake overheating and fade.
crease the differential oil temperature, result- If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
ing in possible damage to the driving sys- C or Type D equipment.
tem. Further, the drive train will be subjected l Even in “AUTO” drive mode, the vehicle
to excessive loading possibly leading to oil cannot be towed with the front or the rear
leakage, component seizure, or other serious wheels on the ground.
faults.

Brake auto hold*
Brake system When brakes are wet Brake pad

The service brake is divided into two brake Check the brake system while driving at a l Avoid hard braking situations.
circuits. And your vehicle is equipped with low speed immediately after starting, espe- New brakes need to be broken-in by
power brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm moderate use for the first 200 km.
other is available to stop the vehicle. If you they work normally. l The disc brakes are provided with a
should lose the power assist for some reason, A film of water can be formed on the brake warning device which emits a shrieking
the brakes will still work. In these situations, discs and prevent normal braking after driv- metallic sound while braking if the brake
even if the brake pedal moves down to the ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or pads have reached their wear limit. If
6 very end of its possible stroke or resists being after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry you hear this sound, have the brake pads
depressed, keep depressing the brake pedal the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly replaced immediately.
down harder and further than usual; stop depressing the brake pedal.
driving as soon as possible and have the WARNING
brake system repaired. When driving downhill
l Driving with worn brake pads will make
It is important to take advantage of the en- it harder to stop, and can cause an acci-
WARNING gine braking by shifting to a lower shift posi- dent.
l Do not turn off the engine while your ve- tion while driving on steep downhill roads in
hicle is in motion. If you turn off the en- order to prevent the brakes from overheating.
gine while driving, the power assistance Brake auto hold*
for the braking system will stop working
and your brakes will not work effectively. WARNING When the vehicle is stopped at traffic signals
l If the power assist is lost or if either brake etc., the vehicle can be held stationary with
hydraulic system stops working properly, l Do not leave any objects near the brake
the brake auto hold system even if you re-
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; do-
have your vehicle checked immediately. lease your foot from the brake pedal.
ing so could prevent the full pedal stroke
that would be necessary in an emergency. When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
Warning lamp Make sure that the pedal can be operated brakes are released.
freely at all times. Make sure the floor
The brake warning lamp illuminates to indi- mat is securely held in place.
cate a fault in the braking system. A warning
is also displayed on the multi-information
screen. Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on
page 5-43 and “Brake warning display” on
page 5-45.
Brake auto hold*
WARNING l The driver’s seat belt is fastened. NOTE

l The driver’s door is closed.
l Do not overly rely on the brake auto hold • If this warning appears, fasten the driver’s
system. On a steep slope, depress the seat belt.
brake pedal firmly because the system
may not hold the vehicle stationary.
l Never leave the vehicle while it is being
stopped by the brake auto hold system.
When leaving the vehicle, apply the park-
ing brake and move the selector lever to
the “P” (Park) position.
l Do not use the brake auto hold system l If any of the following occurs while the sys- 6
when driving on slippery roads. The system is standby state, the brake auto hold sys-
tem may not hold the vehicle stationary tem will be turned off automatically and the
and an accident could occur. indication lamp on the switch goes off.
A buzzer will sound and the message will
appear on the information screen in the mul-
NOTE NOTE ti-information display.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
l While operating the brake auto hold system, l When the brake auto hold system cannot be • When the driver’s door is opened.
you may hear an operation noise to increase used, a buzzer will sound and the following
braking force when the system detected the warning will appear on the information • When there is a malfunction in the sys-
movement of the vehicle. This does not indi- tem.
cate a malfunction. • If this warning appears, confirm that all of
the conditions for system operation are
How to use brake auto hold met and that there is no malfunction in the
system.
To turn on brake auto hold

If the brake auto hold switch is pressed while
all of the following conditions are met, the
system will change to the standby state and
the indication lamp (A) on the switch comes
on.
l The ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
Brake auto hold*
NOTE The brake auto hold indication lamp in the NOTE

instrument cluster will come on while the
l If you keep pressing the brake auto hold system activates. press the accelerator pedal and the vehicle
switch after setting the brake auto hold to starts moving again.
ON (Stand by), the brake auto hold will re- l If the following operation is performed, the
turn to OFF as a protection function is oper- brake auto hold will be deactivated and the
ated. brake auto hold indication lamp in the in-
After returning to OFF, the brake auto hold strument cluster goes off.
will not be switched to ON (stand by) even • When shifting the selector lever to the “P”
if the brake auto hold switch is pressed. To (Park) or “R” (Reverse) position with de-
set the brake auto hold to ON, restart the en- pressing the brake pedal.
6 gine and press the brake auto hold switch • When the Electric parking brake is ap-
again. plied by using the Electric parking brake
switch.
To activate brake auto hold l While the vehicle is held stationary with the
brake auto hold system, the Electric parking
When the vehicle is stopped by depressing brake will be automatically applied under
the brake pedal with the selector lever in any the following conditions, and a buzzer will
position other than “P” (Park) or “R” (Re- CAUTION sound and the message will appear on the in-
formation screen in the multi-information
verse), the brake auto hold activates and the l Release the brake pedal after the brake auto
display.
vehicle will be held stationary. hold indication lamp is illuminated.
• After approximately 10 minutes have
elapsed while applying the brake auto
hold system.
NOTE • When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
l In the following situations, the brake auto • When the driver’s door is opened.
hold system may not operate temporarily. • When the ignition switch is turned to the
• The vehicle is stopped on a slippery road. “LOCK” position or the operation mode
• The vehicle was stopped while the steer- is put in OFF.
ing wheel was turned all the way to the
left or right.
• The vehicle is being turned on a parking
lot turntable.
If this occurs, the brake auto hold system
will return to the normal operation if you de-

Hill start assist
NOTE NOTE If you want to turn off the system while the
brake auto hold indication lamp is illumina-
• When the system detects the vehicle slid- l If the ignition switch is turned to the ted, press the switch while depressing the
ing down a slope. “LOCK” position or the operation mode is
brake pedal.
put in OFF with the selector lever in any po-
sition other than “P” (Park) position, the
message may appear on the information NOTE
If the message appears, shift the selector lev- l If the brake auto hold system is turned off
er to the “P” (Park) position while depress- without the brake pedal being depressed, a
ing the brake pedal. buzzer will sound and the message will ap-
If the Electric parking brake cannot be ap-
pear on the information screen in the multi 6
information display.
plied automatically due to the system mal-
function, the message will appear on the
information screen in the multi informa-
tion display. Depress the brake pedal.
To start the vehicle

Depress the acceleration pedal with the selec-
tor lever in any position other than “P” (Park) Hill start assist
or “N” (Neutral).
The brakes are released, and the brake auto The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
hold indication lamp in the instrument cluster on a steep uphill slope by preventing the ve-
will go off. hicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
braking force for approximately 2 seconds
To turn off brake auto hold when you move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal.
Press the brake auto hold switch to turn off
the brake auto hold. The indication lamp on
the switch goes off.

Hill start assist
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

l Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to l When reversing on an uphill slope, place the • On vehicles equipped with M/T, the gear-
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. gearshift lever or the selector lever into the shift lever is in the following position.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill “R” position. [When starting an uphill slope forwards.]
start assist is activated, the vehicle may The gearshift lever is in any position other
move backwards if the brake pedal is not than “R”.
sufficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heav- 3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start (The hill start assist will operate, even if
ily loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip- assist will maintain the braking force ap- the gearshift lever is in the “N” position.)
pery. plied while stopped for approximately 2 [When starting an uphill slope back-
l The hill start assist is not designed to keep seconds. wards.]
6 the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes 4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the The gearshift lever is in the “R” position.
for more than 2 seconds. hill start assist will gradually decrease (The hill start assist will not operate when
l When facing uphill, do not rely on using the the braking force as the vehicle starts the gearshift lever is in the “N” position.)
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position • On vehicles equipped with CVT, the se-
as an alternative to depressing the brake ped-
moving. lector lever is in any position other than
al. “P” or “N”.
Doing so could result in an accident. NOTE • The vehicle is completely stationary, with
l Do not turn the ignition switch to the the brake pedal depressed.
“LOCK” or “ACC” position or the operation l The hill start assist is activated when all of • The parking brake is released.
mode in ACC or OFF while the hill start as- the following conditions are met.
l The hill start assist will not operate if the ac-
sist is operating. The hill start assist could • The engine is running. celerator pedal is depressed before the brake
stop operating, which could result in an acci- (The hill start assist will not be activated pedal is released.
dent. while the engine is starting or immediate-
ly after the engine is started.)
l The hill start assist also operates when re-
versing on an uphill slope.
To operate
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the Warning lamp/display
brake pedal. If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
2. On vehicles equipped with M/T, place tem, the following warning lamp/display will
the gearshift lever into the 1st position. be shown.
On vehicles equipped with CVT, place
the selector lever into the “D” position.

Brake assist system
Warning lamp If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the NOTE
brakes will be applied with more force than
usual. l You may hear an operation noise when the
- ASC indicator brake pedal is depressed suddenly while sta-
tionary. This does not indicate a malfunction
Warning display
CAUTION and the brake assist system is operating nor-
mally.
l The brake assist system is not a device de-
l When the anti-lock brake system warning
signed to exercise braking force greater than lamp or only Active Stability Control warn-
its capacity. Make sure to always keep a suf- ing lamp illuminate, the brake assist system
ficient distance between your vehicle and a in not functioning.
vehicle in front of you without relying too 6
much on the brake assist system.
Emergency stop signal
CAUTION
NOTE system
l If the warning is displayed, the hill start as-
sist will not operate. Start off carefully. l Once the brake assist system is operational, This is a device that reduces the possibility of
l Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop it maintains great braking force even if the
the engine. brake pedal is lightly released. rear end collisions by the rapid and automatic
Restart the engine and check whether the To stop its operation, completely remove blinking of the hazard warning lamps to alert
display/indicator goes out, in which case the your foot from the brake pedal. vehicles approaching from behind during
hill start assist is again working normally. l The brake assist system may become opera- sudden braking. When the emergency stop
If they remain displayed or reappear fre- tional when the brake pedal is fully de- signal system operates, the hazard warning
quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehi- pressed even if it has not been depressed
indication lamp in the instrument cluster
cle immediately, but the vehicle should be suddenly.
blinks rapidly at the same time.
inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- l When the brake assist system is in use, you
thorized Service Point as soon as possible. may feel as if the depressed brake pedal is
soft, the pedal moves in small motions in CAUTION
conjunction with the sound of the ABS oper-
Brake assist system ation, or the vehicle body and the steering l If the ABS warning or ASC warning is dis-
played, the emergency stop signal system
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
assist system is operating normally and does may not operate.
The brake assist system is a device assisting Refer to “ABS warning lamp/display ” on
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly depress the brake pedal. page 6-53.
firmly when it is necessary to do so (such as Refer to “ASC warning lamp/display” on
in emergency stop situations) and provides page 6-57.
greater braking force.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
NOTE Driving hints checking the operations of the ABS. At

this time, you may feel a shock from the
l [Activating condition for the emergency stop l Always keep a safe distance from the ve- brake pedal if you depress it. These do
signal system]
hicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- not indicate a malfunction.
It activates when all of the following condi-
tions are met. cle is equipped with ABS, leave a great- • When the ignition switch is set to the
• The vehicle speed is approximately er braking distance when: “ON” position.
55 km/h (34 mph) or higher. • Driving on gravel or snow-covered • When the vehicle is driven for a while
• The brake pedal has been depressed, and roads. after the engine is turned on.
the system judges that it was sudden brak- • Driving with snow traction device l The ABS can be used after the vehicle
ing from the vehicle deceleration and the
6 operating condition of the anti-lock brake
(tyre chains) installed. has reached a speed over approximately
• Driving on roads where the road sur- 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating
system (ABS).
[Deactivating condition for the emergency face is pitted or has other differences when the vehicle slows below 5 km/h
stop signal system] in surface height. (3 mph).
It deactivates when one of the following • Driving on uneven road surfaces.
conditions is met. l Operation of ABS is not restricted to sit- CAUTION
• The brake pedal is released. uations where brakes are applied sud-
• The hazard warning flasher switch is denly. This system may also prevent the l The ABS cannot prevent accidents. It is your
pressed. responsibility to take safety precautions and
wheels from locking when you drive
• The system judges that it was not sudden to drive carefully.
over manholes, steel roadwork plates,
braking from the vehicle deceleration and l To prevent failure of the ABS, be sure all
the operating condition of the anti-lock road markings, or any uneven road sur- four wheels and tyres are the same size and
brake system (ABS). face. the same type.
l When the ABS is activated, you may l Do not install any aftermarket limited-slip
feel the brake pedal pulsation and the vi- differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ABS
Anti-lock brake system brations of the vehicle body and steering may stop functioning properly.
(ABS) wheel. It may also feel as if the pedal re-

sists being pressed.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps pre- In this situation, simply hold the
vent the wheels from locking during braking. brake pedal down firmly. Do not
This helps maintain vehicle drivability and pump the brake, which will result in
steering wheel handling. reduced braking performance.
l An operation noise may be emitted from
the engine compartment in the following
situations. The sound is associated with
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS warning lamp/display CAUTION If the ABS warning lamp/display and

brake warning lamp/display illuminate at
Warning lamp
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is the same time
put in ON, the warning lamp does not
come on or it remains on and does not go Warning lamp
off
• The warning lamp comes on while driving
Warning display • The warning display appears while driv-
ing
6
If the warning lamp/display il-
luminate while driving
(red)
If only the ABS warning lamp/display illu-
If there is a malfunction in the system, the minate Warning display
ABS warning lamp will come on and the
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
warning display will appear on the informa-
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
tion screen in the multi-information display.
Restart the engine and check to see whether
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning
the lamp goes out after a few minutes driv-
lamp only comes on when the ignition switch
ing; if it then remains off during driving,
is turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
there is no problem.
tion mode is put in ON and goes off a few
However, if the warning lamp/display do not
seconds later.
disappear, or if they come on again when the
vehicle is driven, we recommend you to have
CAUTION the vehicle checked.
l Any of the following warning lamp/display
behaviour indicates that the ABS is not func- The ABS and brake force distribution func-
tioning and only the standard brake system tion may not work, so hard braking could
is working. (The standard brake system is
functioning normally.) If this happens, we
make the vehicle unstable.
recommend you to have your vehicle inspec- Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
ted as soon as possible.

Electric power steering system (EPS)
Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately Electric power steering NOTE
and we recommend you to have the vehicle
checked. system (EPS) l During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
The power steering system operates while the manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
NOTE engine is running. space), a protection function may be activa-
ted to prevent overheating of the power
l The ABS warning lamp and brake warning It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the steering system. This function will make the
lamp illuminate at the same time and the steering wheel. steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
warning displays appear alternately on the The power steering system has mechanical this event, limit your turning of the steering
information screen in the multi-information steering capability in case the power assist is wheel for a while. When the system has
6 display.
lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea- cooled down, the steering action will return
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi- to normal.
After driving on icy roads cle, but you will notice it takes much more l If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
cle is stationary with the headlamps on, the
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove effort to steer. If this happens, have your ve-
headlamps may become dim. This behaviour
any snow and ice which may have accumula- hicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not abnormal. The headlamps will return
ted around the wheels. When doing this, be Authorized Service Point. to their original brightness after a short
careful not to damage the wheel speed sen- while.
sors (A) and the cables located at each wheel. WARNING
Electric power steering system
l Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
Front Rear moving. Stopping the engine would make warning lamp/display
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident. Warning lamp
Warning display

Active stability control (ASC)
If there is a malfunction in the system, the Traction control function ® p. 6-55 NOTE
warning lamp will come on and the warning Stability control function ® p. 6-55
display will appear on the information screen • When the vehicle is driven for a while af-
ter the engine is turned on.
in the multi-information display.
CAUTION l When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
Under normal conditions, the warning lamp vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
come on when the ignition switch is turned to l Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC ing sound from the engine compartment.
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
the “ON” position or the operation mode is This indicates that the system is operating
from acting on the vehicle.
put in ON, and goes off after the engine has This system, like any other system, has lim-
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
started. its and cannot help you to maintain traction l When the anti-lock brake system warning
lamp is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
and control of the vehicle in all circumstan- 6
ces. Reckless driving may lead to accidents.
CAUTION It is the driver’s responsibility to drive care- Traction control function
l If the warning lamp comes on and the warn- fully. This means taking into account the
ing display appears while the engine is run- traffic, road and environmental conditions. On slippery surfaces, the traction control
ning, have the vehicle inspected by a l Be sure to use the same specified type and function prevents the drive wheels from ex-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- size of tyre on all four wheels. Otherwise, cessive spinning, thus helping the vehicle to
ice Point as soon as possible. the ASC may not work properly. start moving from a stopped condition. It also
It may become harder to turn the steering l Do not install any aftermarket limited-slip provides sufficient driving force and steering
wheel. differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
performance as the vehicle turns while press-
may stop functioning properly.
ing the acceleration pedal.
Active stability control
(ASC) NOTE CAUTION
l An operation noise may be emitted from the
l When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
The Active Stability Control (ASC) takes engine compartment in the following situa- road, be sure to install snow tyres and drive
overall control of the anti-lock brake system, tions. The sound is associated with checking the vehicle at moderate speeds.
the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
traction control function and stability control
may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
function to help maintain the vehicle’s con-
trol and traction. Please read this section in
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc- Stability control function
tion.
conjunction with the page on the anti-lock • When the ignition switch is set to the The stability control function is designed to
brake system, traction control function and “ON” position or the operation mode is help the driver maintain control of the vehicle
stability control function. put in ON. on slippery roads or during rapid steering ma-
noeuvres. It works by controlling the engine
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ® p. 6-52 output and brake on each wheel.

Active stability control (ASC)
NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

l The stability control function operates at l For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch l When indicator blinks, ASC is operating,
speeds of approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) or should be operated when your vehicle is which means that the road is slippery or that
higher. stopped. your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.
l Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in If this happens, drive slower with less accel-
normal circumstances. erator input.
ASC OFF switch l If the temperature in the braking system con-
The ASC is automatically activated when the tinues to increase due to continuous brake
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position NOTE control on a slippery road surface, the in-
6 or the operation mode is put in ON. You can l When moving out of mud, sand or fresh dicator will blink. To prevent the brake sys-
tem from overheating, the brake control of
deactivate the system by pressing down the snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
allow the engine speed to increase. In such the traction control function will be tempora-
ASC OFF switch for 3 seconds or longer. rily suspended.
situations, temporarily turning off the ASC
When the ASC is deactivated, the display/ The engine control of the traction control
with the ASC OFF switch will make it easier
indicator will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, to move out your vehicle. function and normal brake operation will not
momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; the l By pressing the “ASC OFF” switch, both the be affected. Park your vehicle in a safe
indicator is turned off. stability control function and the traction place.
control function are turned OFF. When the temperature in the braking system
l If you continue to press the ASC OFF switch has come down, the indicator will be
after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken turned off and the traction control function
operation protection function” will activate will start operating again.
and the ASC will turn back on.
NOTE
ASC operation indicator or
l The indicator may turn on when you start
ASC OFF indicator the engine. This means that the battery volt-
age momentarily dropped when the engine
ASC operation indicator was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
- The indicator will blink when tion, provided that the indicator goes out im-
the ASC is operating. mediately.
l When a compact spare tyre has been put on
ASC OFF indicator your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tyre
- This indicator will turn on will be lower, making it more likely that the
when the ASC is turned off indicator will blink.
with the ASC OFF switch.

Cruise control
ASC warning lamp/display CAUTION CAUTION

If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- l If the 2WD vehicle is towed with the igni- l When you do not wish to drive at a set
tem, the following warning lamp/display will tion switch in the “ON” position or the oper- speed, turn off the cruise control for safety.
turn on. ation mode in ON and only the front wheels l Do not use cruise control when driving con-
or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
Warning lamp the ASC may operate, resulting in an acci- speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
dent. When towing the 2WD vehicle with that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
- ASC operation indicator the front wheels raised, keep the ignition slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or l On vehicles with M/T, do not move the gear-
the operation mode in ACC or OFF. When shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position
- ASC OFF indicator
towing the vehicle with the rear wheels while driving at a set speed without depress- 6
raised, keep the ignition switch in the ing the clutch pedal. The engine will run too
Warning display “ACC” position or the operation mode in fast and might be damaged.
ACC. Refer to “Towing” on page 8-20
NOTE
l Cruise control may not be able to keep your
speed on uphills or downhills.
l Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.
CAUTION l Your speed may increase to more than the
set speed on a steep downhill. You must use
l The system may be malfunctioning. the brake to control your speed. As a result,
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the set speed driving is deactivated.
the engine.
Restart the engine and check whether the
lamp/display goes out. If they go out, there
is no abnormal condition. If they do not go Cruise control
out or appear frequently, it is not necessary
to stop the vehicle immediately, but we rec- Cruise control is an automatic speed control
ommend you to have your vehicle inspected.
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
vated at approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) or
more.

Cruise control
Cruise control switches To activate 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired

speed, then push down and release the
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” po-
“SET -” switch (B) when the indicator
sition or the operation mode in ON,
display appears on the information
press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
screen of the multi-information display.
switch (A) to turn on the cruise control.
The vehicle will then maintain the de-
The indicator display appears on the in-
sired speed.
formation screen of the multi-informa-
The “SET” indicator appears on the in-
tion display.
formation screen of the multi-informa-
6 tion display.
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

Used to turn on and off the cruise con-
trol.
B- “SET -” switch
Used to reduce the set speed and to set
the desired speed.
C- “RES +” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to re-
turn to the original set speed.
D- “CANCEL” switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
NOTE
l When operating the cruise control switches, NOTE
press the cruise control switches correctly.
The set speed driving may be deactivated l When you release the “SET -” switch (B),
automatically if two or more switches of the the vehicle speed will be set.
cruise control are pressed at the same time.

Cruise control
To increase the set speed Accelerator pedal When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
There are two ways to increase the set speed. While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
set.
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
RES + switch then push down the “SET -” switch (B) and
Push up and hold the “RES +” switch (C) release the switch momentarily to set a new
while driving at the set speed, and your speed desired cruising speed.
will then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.
6
To slow down your speed in small amounts,

push down the “SET -” switch (B) for less
than approximately 1 second and release it.
Each time you push down the “SET -” switch
To decrease the set speed (B), your vehicle will slow down by approxi-
There are two ways to decrease the set speed. mately 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
SET - switch
To increase your speed in small amounts,
Push down and hold the “SET -” switch (B)
push up the “RES +” switch (C) for less than
while driving at the set speed, and your speed
approximately 1 second and release it.
will slow down gradually.
Each time you push up the “RES +” switch
(C), your vehicle will go approximately
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Cruise control
Brake pedal To temporarily increase or de- Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
crease the speed 6-61.
While driving at the set speed, use the brake
pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
then push down the “SET -” switch (B) and To temporarily increase the
release the switch momentarily to set a new speed
desired cruising speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
normally. When you release the pedal, you
will return to your set speed.
6
To deactivate
The set speed driving can be deactivated as
follows:
l Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned
off.)
l Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
NOTE l Depress the brake pedal.
l In some driving conditions, the set speed
driving may be deactivated. If this happens,
refer to “To activate” on page 6-58 and re-
peat the speed setting procedure.
To temporarily decrease the

speed
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
speed. To return to the previously set speed,
push up the “RES +” switch (C).

Speed Limiter*
The set speed driving is deactivated automat- CAUTION
ically in any of the following ways.
l When you depress the clutch pedal (on l When the set speed driving is deactivated
automatically in any situation other than
vehicles equipped with M/T).
those listed above, there may be a system Under either of the following conditions,
l When your speed slows to approximate- malfunction.
ly 15 km/h (10 mph) or more below the however, using the switch does not allow you
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
set speed because of a hill, etc. switch to turn off the cruise control and have
to resume the previously set speed. In these
l When your speed slows to approximate- your vehicle inspected by a MITSUBISHI situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
ly 30 km/h (20 mph) or less. MOTORS Authorized Service Point. l The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch is pressed.
l When the Active Stability Control
l The ignition switch is turned to the
6
(ASC) starts operating. To resume the set speed
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” “LOCK” position or the operation mode
on page 6-55. If the set driving speed is deactivated by the is put in OFF.
condition described in “To deactivate” on l Indication lamp goes off.
page 6-60, you can resume the previously set
WARNING speed by pushing up the “RES +” switch (C)
while driving at a speed of approximately Speed Limiter*
l On vehicles equipped with CVT, although
the set speed driving will be deactivated 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The “SET” indi-
when shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) po- The Speed Limiter is a driver assist function
cator appears on the information screen of the
sition, never move the selector lever to the to prevent from exceeding the speed set by
“N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving. driver while engine power control.
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
CAUTION
Also, the set speed driving may be deactiva- l Because the system does not use service
brake (hydraulic brake), the vehicle speed
ted as follows: may exceed the set speed on the downhill.
l When the engine speed rises and ap- If a driver wants to keep the vehicle speed in
proaches the tachometer’s red zone (the such a situation, he/she must put on a service
red-coloured part of the tachometer di- brake or downshift.
al).

Speed Limiter*
NOTE NOTE D- “CANCEL” switch

To cancel the Speed Limiter.
l Ifthe clutch pedal (M/T) is depressed, the l However, this gives priority to audio and
Speed Limiter does not activate. visual signal of safety reasons or driver’s de-
mand. NOTE
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed l If the set speed is too lower based on current
l Press the switch one by one.
shift position, the Speed Limiter may not
(approximately 3 km/h (2 mph)), the indica- limit the vehicle speed to prevent engine l The Speed Limiter may be cancelled auto-
tor will blink in the combination meter. stall. matically, if two or more switches are press-
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed ap- ed at the same time.
6 proximately +3 km/h (+2 mph) more than ap-

Speed Limiter control switches
proximately 5 seconds after indicated alert Speed Limiter information on
message, beep alert is sounded for approxi- There are four switches which relate to the
Speed Limiter on the steering wheel.
the multi information display
mately 10 seconds at the most.
While running without alert message, if you area
decrease the set speed and vehicle speed is The Speed Limiter information is displayed
more than set speed approximately +3 km/h on the multi information display area in the
(+2 mph), alert message is displayed but beep combination meter.
alert is delayed.
In this case, when vehicle speed keeps ex-
ceeding set speed approximately +3 km/h
(2 mph) for approximately 30 seconds after
the alert message is appeared, beep alert is
sounded for approximately 10 seconds at the
most.
If the vehicle speeds decreases less than set
speeds after the alert message is appeared, A- SPEED LIMITER ON/OFF switch
the message is disappeared. When beep alert To turn on/off the Speed Limiter.
is sounding, the beep alert also goes off. B- “SET -” switch
To set the current vehicle speed to a set speed
decrease the set speed.
C- “RES +” switch
To resume the Speed Limiter with set speed
memorized or increase the set speed.

Speed Limiter*
A- Control state To activate To increase the set speed
There are three control states as below.
LIMIT OFF
Accelerate or decelerate to your desired By using the RES + switch
speed, and push down the “SET -” switch Push up the “RES +” switch continuously.
When the Speed Limiter is in STAND-
(B). The Speed Limiter memorizes the cur-
BY, the vehicle speed can exceed the set
rent vehicle speed when you release the “SET Then the set speed displayed in the combina-
speed.
-” switch (B). Now, the Speed Limiter starts tion meter is gradually increased.
LIMIT
controlling in order not to exceed the set If the set speed reaches your desired speed,
When the Speed Limiter is in operation.
speed. release the “RES +” switch (C).
The vehicle is controlled in order not to
exceed the set speed. 6
OVER LIMIT
When the vehicle speed is exceeding the
set speed by more than approximately
3 km/h (2 km/h).
B- SPEED LIMITER ON indication
When the Speed Limiter is started up,
the Speed Limiter’s symbol is appeared.
C- Set speed
Set speed is appeared if it is stored.
To start up If the current vehicle speed is lower than ap- The set speed is increased each approximate-
First of all, press the ON/OFF switch in order proximately 30 km/h (20 mph) (settable min- ly 5 km/h (3 mph) per approximately 0.5 sec-
to power up the Speed Limiter when the igni- imum speed), the set speed is set at approxi- ond.
tion switch in the “ON”, position or the oper- mately 30 km/h (20 mph). If a driver wants to increase the set speed a
ation mode in ON, The set speed is displayed in the combination little, push up “RES +” switch for less than
The Speed Limiter indication will be ap- meter. approximately 0.5 second and release it.
peared in the combination meter. And, control state “LIMIT” is displayed in The set speed is increased 1 km/h (1 mph)
the combination meter. each taps.

Speed Limiter*
By using the CANCEL switch, Accelerate to driver’s desired vehicle speed If the set speed reaches to your desired speed,
and push down SET - switch (B) and release. release the “SET -” switch (B).
the accelerator pedal and the
SET - switch
Press the “CANCEL” switch (D) to deacti-
vate the Speed Limiter.
Control state “LIMIT” is displayed again and The set speed decreases approximately
the set speed is updated. 5 km/h (3 mph) per approximately 0.5 sec-
ond.
To decrease the set speed If a driver wants to decrease the set speed a
Control state “LIMIT” is disappeared and little, press the “SET -” switch (B) for less
change control state “LIMIT OFF” in the than approximately 0.5 second and release it.
combination meter. By using the SET - switch The set speed is decreased 1 km/h (1 mph)
Push down the “SET -” switch (B). each taps.
Then the set speed displayed in the combina-

tion meter is gradually decreased.

Speed Limiter*
By using the CANCEL switch, Decelerate to driver’s desired speed and push The Speed Limiter will resume when the ve-
down SET - switch (B) and release. hicle speed goes down to enough less than
the service brake and the SET - the set speed.
switch
Press the “CANCEL” switch (D) to deacti-
vate the Speed Limiter.
The Speed Limiter indication is displayed

again and the set speed is updated. Put on an accelerator pedal to the pedal
stroke end. (over a detent that makes pedal
To increase the vehicle speed reaction force bigger before pedal stroke end)
Control state “LIMIT” is disappeared and temporarily
change control state “LIMIT OFF” in the A driver can temporarily accelerate for emer- CAUTION
combination meter. gency use.
l There is a possibility for the Speed Limiter
to allow abrupt acceleration corresponding
The Speed Limiter is temporarily deactiva- to accelerator pedal position. So be careful
ted, and the vehicle speed can be increased. of the abrupt acceleration.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed by

approximately +3 km/h (2 mph), alert mes-
sages appear in the combination meter.

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*
CAUTION CAUTION
l There is a possibility for the Speed Limiter l There is a possibility to occur jerk, depend-
to allow abrupt acceleration corresponding ing on a running resistance. Be careful.
to accelerator pedal position when the Speed
Limiter is deactivated. Be careful.
Adaptive Cruise Control
CAUTION To resume System (ACC)*
l Be careful about over speed. The Speed Limiter memorizes the set speed The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
6 when system has been deactivated, the Speed maintains a set speed with no need for you to
NOTE Limiter can resume by push up the RES + use the accelerator pedal. Using a sensor (A),
switch (C). the system also measures the relative speed
l A driver can change the set speed during this
emergency use. and distance between your vehicle and a ve-
hicle in front, and maintains a set following
distance between your vehicle and the vehi-
To deactivate cle in front by automatically decelerating
Use whichever following ways to deactivate. your vehicle if it becomes too close to the ve-
l Press CANCEL switch hicle in front.
l Press the Speed Limiter ON/OFF switch The ACC is the driver assist system to aid
l If CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch comfortable driving on a freeway. Stop lamps
or ACC ON/OFF switch is pressed, the are illuminated during automatic braking.
Speed Limiter will be cancelled.
NOTE However, the Speed Limiter immediately

starts controlling and the vehicle decreases as
l If the Speed Limiter is cancelled by other
if an accelerator pedal is closed fully, when
states, it may be a system malfunction.
Stop using the Speed Limiter and turn off the vehicle speed is higher than the set speed.
the Speed Limiter. Have your vehicle in-
spected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Serv-
ice Point.

If you desire, a cruise control without inter- WARNING CAUTION
vention of the following distance control is
also selectable. l This system may not correctly detect the • When driving in curved sections of road
actual situation depending on the type of including their entrance/outlet or running
vehicle in front and its conditions, the beside a closed lane in a traffic work or
weather conditions, and the road condi- similar zone.
tions.
Additionally, the system may be unable to
decelerate sufficiently if the vehicle in
front applies the brakes suddenly or an-
other vehicle cuts into your path, so your
vehicle approaches the front vehicle. 6
Improper usage of this system or loss of
attention to the front by the over-rely on
the ACC, may result in a serious accident.
• When your vehicle position in a lane is in-
stable, is frequently steered to right and
CAUTION left, or running unstably due to a traffic
WARNING l In the following situations, the system may
accident, trouble with some vehicles, etc.
become transiently unable to detect a vehicle • When driving on the road that the vehicle
l A driver is responsible for driving safely. in front runs in offset position from your
Even if the ACC is in use, always grasp in front or triggers its control and alarm
vehicle.
the surrounding circumstances and pro- functions by detecting something other than
vide for safe driving. a vehicle in front.
l Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is
the system to reduce load on the driver.
The ACC is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem or an automatic driving system. The
system is not intended to compensate for
driver’s loss of attention to the front dur-
ing driving due to distraction or careless-
ness or supplement a drop in visibility due
to the rain and fog. l Never use the ACC in any of the following
situations. Failure to follow this instruction
It is never a substitute for your safe and
could lead to an accident.
careful driving. Always be ready to apply
• On roads with heavy traffic or roads in-
the brakes manually.
cluding many windings or steep curves.

CAUTION CAUTION When ACC detects no vehicle

• On roads with slippery surfaces, such as • Do not cover the sensor mounted area in front within the set distance
frozen, snow-covered, and dirt roads (shaded area as shown in the illustration) Your vehicle runs at a speed to which you set.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain, with a sticker, licence plate or anything It is possible to set the speed between ap-
snow, sand storms, etc.) such as a grill guard, etc.
proximately 30 to 180 km/h (20 to 110 mph).
• On steep downslopes
• On roads including steep up and down
slopes or many changes in inclination NOTE
• In traffic requiring frequent acceleration
l If the vehicle speed exceed the set speed on
6 and deceleration
• When the proximity alarm sounds fre-
down slope, the system automatically ap-
plies the brake to maintain the vehicle speed.
quently
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehi- l When depressing the brake pedal while auto-
matic brake is applied, the brake pedal is felt
cle tows another vehicle.
solidly, but it is not abnormal. You can more
• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna- depress the pedal and it provides greater
mometer or free rollers.
braking force.
• When the air pressure in the tyres is not
correct. l Sound is heard while automatic brake, but it
is operated a brake control and not abnor-
• When installing the spare tyre for emer- mal.
gency.
• When snow traction device (tyre chains)
are attached. When ACC detects a vehicle in
l Be sure to take the following precautions to
keep the system in good operating condi- • The sensor front cover should not be front within the set distance
tions. modified or painted.
The ACC makes control to maintain a fol-
Improper handling of the system compo- • Avoid using different size tyres from
those specified and maintain even tyre lowing distance (time gap) matched with the
nents may result in degraded sensor per-
wear. vehicle speed between your vehicle and a ve-
formance.
• Avoid application of strong shock loads to • Do not modify the suspension of your vehicle in front while also activating brakes as
the sensor and never tamper with or re- hicle. necessary.
move the sensor mounting screws. l When the cover in front of the sensor or the
sensor itself is deformed by an accident,
• The cover in front of the sensor and the
sensor should be kept clean. please do not use the ACC and contact a
ice Point.

If the vehicle in front stops, the ACC reacts NOTE WARNING
to it by stopping your vehicle.
When the ACC system enters the stationary l When the ACC system is in the stationary l Your vehicle may accelerate up to the set
vehicle hold state, the stop lamps will illumi- speed in the following situations. Apply
vehicle hold state after the vehicle stops,
nate. the brake, if necessary, to slow down.
“HOLD” appears.
l While the ACC system is in the stationary • When your vehicle no longer follows
vehicle hold state, the vehicle will not start the vehicle in front, e.g. at a freeway ex-
moving again unless you press the switch or it or when your vehicle or the vehicle in
depress the accelerator pedal. front changes its lane.
l If the turn-signal lever is operated while the
ACC is active, the system may accelerate the
While the ACC system is in the stationary vehicle to assist you in passing a vehicle in 6
vehicle hold state, if it is possible to resume front.
following the vehicle in front because it has l If the vehicle in front starts moving within 2
started moving, “ACC READY TO RE- seconds after stopping, your vehicle will
SUME” will appear on the information start moving.
screen of the multi-information display. To While the ACC system is in the stationary
start moving again, press the switch or de- vehicle hold state, the Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) system will operate if the operation • When driving on a curve
press the accelerator pedal.
conditions are met even if you do not de-
press the brake pedal.
Refer to “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system”
on page 6-25.
When the ACC no longer detects any vehicle

in front, a buzzer sounds and the symbol of
vehicle running ahead disappears from the
WARNING screen. The vehicle is slowly accelerated to l If the vehicle in front turns off or changes
resume the set speed and continues running at lane and another stationary vehicle is lo-
l Never leave your vehicle while the ACC
cated in front of that vehicle, the ACC will
system is in the stationary vehicle hold that speed.
state. When leaving the vehicle, apply the not make deceleration control to the sta-
parking brake and move the selector lever tionary vehicle.
to the “P” (Park) position.

Proximity alarm CAUTION CAUTION

While the ACC is active, if your vehicle ap- • When there is an abnormality in the sys- • When being driven in a tunnel.
proaches too closely to a vehicle in front be- tem (When the ACC detectes an abnor- • When you are carrying extremely heavy
cause the ACC cannot allow for an adequate mality, “ACC SERVICE REQUIRED” is loads in the rear seats or luggage area.
deceleration in such cases as rapid decelera- indicated.) • After the engine starting for a while.
tion of the vehicle in front or apparition of a l The ACC makes neither acceleration nor de- • When driving in curved sections of road
celeration control and only issues warning in including their entrance/outlet or running
vehicle cutting in front of your vehicle, the
the following situation. beside a closed lane in a traffic work or
ACC gives a warning by sounding a buzzer
• The vehicle in front is in a park or moving similar zone.
and displaying a message. at an extremely slow speed.
6 If this happens, increase the following dis- l The ACC may not be able to maintain the
• When the cover part in front of the sensor
and the sensor become dirty or have snow
tance by depressing the brake pedal or mak- set speed or the distance to a vehicle in front and ice* adhering to it.
ing other decelerating control. and may not alert the driver, if the system • When water, snow or sand on the road are
cannot detect the vehicle in front properly, in extorted by the vehicle in front or an on-
the following situations. coming vehicle*.
• When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehi- *: After the ACC control has been cancel-
cle very closely. led automatically due to detection of a
• When a vehicle in front is offset to the left state of decline in performance, the ACC
or right. will not operate in the temporary condi-
• When a vehicle in front is towing a trailer. tion and will inform the driver by buzzer
• The vehicle in front is moving at a speed and indication. When the ACC is in the
much lower than your vehicle’s. state in which it can operate, indication is
CAUTION • A motorcycle or a bicycle. cancelled.
l When the ACC is not in use, turn off the sys- • A freight trailer that is not carrying a con- Should indications not be cancelled, then
tem to prevent it from operating by mistake tainer. there is a possible abnormality in the sys-
and an unexpected accident. • The vehicle has a protruding load from tem.
l Never operate the ACC from outside the ve- the carrier. Please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
hicle. • The vehicle has a low vehicle height. Authorized Service Point.
l Neither control nor a warning are performed • The vehicle has an extremely high ground
in the following situation. clearance.
• Something other than a vehicle ap- • When there is repeated steep uphill and
proaches, such as a pedestrian. downhill driving.
• When driving on an irregular or uneven
road surface.

Cruise control switch NOTE 4- Vehicles in front symbol:

Comes on when the ACC detects a vehi-
l Operate the individual switches correctly cle ahead. Two types of indication:
and one after another.
“Stand by” and “Active”
The ACC may be turned off or its control
function may be cancelled if two or more
State
switches are pressed concurrently. Display
Stand by Active
Driving aid display Vehicle in
front detected
6
5- Following distance setting symbol:
Indicates the set following distance. Two
1- ACC ON/OFF switch types of indication: “Stand by” and “Ac-
Used to turn on and off ACC or the tive”
cruise control function.
2- “SET -” switch
State
Used to set a desired speed and to reduce
the set speed. Stand by Active
3- “RES +” switch
Used to make ACC operate at the origi-
nally set speed and also to increase the 1- ACC indicator:
set speed. Indicates that the ACC is ON.
4- “CANCEL” switch 2- Control state indicator:
Used to cancel the control function of Indicates that the ACC is active.
ACC or the cruise control. Two types of indication: “SET” and
5- ACC distance switch “HOLD” (stationary vehicle hold state)
Used to change the setting of the follow- 3- Set speed:
ing distance between your vehicle and a Indicates the target speed.
vehicle in front.

State The display on the information screen of the When your desired speed is reached, release
multi-information display will switch to show the “SET -” switch; then this speed is set and
Stand by Active information on the ACC. the ACC initiates the speed control to the set
When the ACC is activated, it is placed in the speed.
standby state at which any control function is
not started.
6
NOTE
How to use ACC l Even if the ACC is in the activated state
when the ignition switch is turned to the
To start up (place in standby set to OFF, the system does not automatical-
state) the system ly become activated when the ignition The set speed is indicated on the information
With the ignition switch or operation mode switch or operation mode is set to “ON” next screen of the multi-information display.
time.
set to “ON”, press ACC ON/OFF switch The ACC can be selected between approxi-
shortly to activate the ACC. mately 30 to 180 km/h (20 to 110 mph).
To activate ACC control You can set and initiate the speed control
With the ACC turned on (in the standby when driving at approximately 0 to 30 km/h
state), push down the “SET -” switch while (0 to 20 mph) while a vehicle in front is be-
driving. ing detected. In this case, the target speed is
set to 30 km/h (20 mph).
Setting to any speed outside this range does
not cause the ACC to start the control.

When the ACC is initialized, the “SET” indi- NOTE By using the “RES +” switch:
cator lights up on the screen. At the same
time, the display showing the following dis- • When the ASC is in the OFF state. The set speed increases by 1 km/h (1 mph)
tance setting and the running-ahead vehicle • When ABS, ASC or TCL is working. every time you push up the “RES +” switch
symbol (only when the ACC is detecting a • When the selector lever is in the “P” while the ACC control is working. If you
vehicle in front) is switched to the in-control
(PARK), the “R” (REVERSE) or the “N” hold the switch pushed up, the set speed in-
(NEUTRAL) position. creases in 5 km/h (3 mph) increments.
mode display. While the brake pedal is being depressed
•
(only while the vehicle is moving).
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the system determines that its per- 6
formance has been degraded due to con-
While the ACC system is turned on (in the taminants adhered to the sensor.
• When there is any abnormality in the sys-
standby state), if you push down the “SET -” tem.
switch when a vehicle in front is detected • When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
while your vehicle is stopped and you are de- • When the driver’s door is opened.
pressing the brake pedal, “HOLD” will ap- • When the vehicle is stopped on a steep
pear and the vehicle speed will be set to slope.
30 km/h (20 mph).
To increase the set speed
There are two ways to increase the set speed.
NOTE
l There is some time lag between the setting
to a new speed and actually accelerating to
that speed.
NOTE l Speed setting operation is possible even in
presence of a vehicle in front. In this case,
l The ACC cannot start the control when any however, the set speed alone increases with-
of the following conditions is present. You out actual acceleration taking place.
are alerted to this state by a sounding buzzer.
l While the ACC system is in the stationary
• When the vehicle speed is more than vehicle hold state, the vehicle speed cannot
180 km/h (110 mph). be set.
• When the vehicle is running at a speed be-
tween approximately 0 to 30 km/h
(0 to 20 mph) and the ACC is not detect-
ing any vehicle in front.

CAUTION NOTE By using the “SET -” switch:

l The setting speed should be set up the suita- l The set speed indication on the display turns The set speed decreases by 1 km/h (1 mph)
ble speed according to a situation. to “---” when the accelerator pedal is de- every time you push down the “SET -”
pressed. This indication remains as long as switch while the ACC control is working. If
By using the accelerator pedal: the pedal is in a depressed position. you hold the switch pushed down, the set
l The ACC control at the original set speed re-
speed decreases in increments of 5 km/h
When the accelerator pedal is depressed sumes as soon as you release the accelerator
while driving with the ACC control working, pedal. Under certain conditions, however, (3 mph).
you can accelerate the vehicle temporarily the braking control and alarming functions
of the ACC may not work for a short while
6 beyond the presently set speed.
after releasing the accelerator pedal.
At the point where the vehicle speed is raised
to your desired speed, push down and release l Set speed adjustment is impossible while the
accelerator pedal is in a depressed position.
the “SET -” switch; the new speed is then set
in the system.
To decrease the set speed
There are two ways to decrease the set speed.
NOTE
l There is some time lag between the setting
to a new speed and actually decelerating to
that speed.
l If there is a vehicle in front and your vehicle
is following that vehicle at a speed lower
CAUTION than the set speed, the set speed alone de-
creases with no actual deceleration taking
l The ACC braking control and proximity
place.
alarm functions will not work while the ac-
celerator pedal is depressed. l While the ACC system is in the stationary
vehicle hold state, the vehicle speed cannot
be set.

CAUTION To temporarily accelerate the NOTE

vehicle
l The setting speed should be set up the suita- l In certain conditions, the braking control and
ble speed according to a situation. Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem- alarming functions of the ACC may not
porarily accelerate the vehicle. Release the work for a short while after releasing the ac-
By using the brake pedal: pedal to restart the ACC control. celerator pedal.
l Set speed adjustment is impossible while the
If you depress the brake pedal while the ACC accelerator pedal is in a depressed position.
control is working, the control is cancelled,
allowing you to decelerate the vehicle.
To terminate ACC control
At the point where the vehicle slows down to 6
your desired speed, push down the “SET -”
switch; the new speed is then set in the sys- To cancel of ACC control
tem. You can cancel the ACC control by using ei-
ther of the methods below.
When the control is cancelled, the system is

placed in the standby state. You can make the
CAUTION system restart the control by using the
“SET -” or “RES +” switch if the conditions
l The ACC braking control and proximity for activating the control are met.
alarm functions will not work while the ac-
celerator pedal is depressed.
l The setting speed should be set up the suita- l Press the “CANCEL” switch.
ble speed according to a situation.
NOTE NOTE
l The ACC control is cancelled if you depress l The set speed indication on the display turns
the brake pedal and the ACC control does to “---” when the accelerator pedal is de-
not resume even when you release the pedal. pressed. This indication remains as long as
the pedal is in a depressed position.

l Depress the brake pedal (except for the l When the selector lever is in the “P”
stationary vehicle hold state). (PARK), the “R” (REVERSE) or the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
l When the driver’s seat belt is unfas-
The ACC control is automatically cancelled tened.
and the ACC is placed in the standby state in l When the driver’s door is opened.
any of the situations listed below; you are
l When the ACC no longer detects any ve-
alerted to this condition by the sound of a hicle in front while it is in the stationary
buzzer and a message on the information vehicle hold state.
screen of the multi-information display. You
6 can make the system restart the control by us-
l When the vehicle is in the stationary ve-
hicle hold state for 10 minutes or more.
ing the “SET -” or “RES +” switch if the con-
l When the system detects the vehicle
ditions for resuming the control are reestab- sliding down a slope while the vehicle is
lished. in the stationary vehicle hold state.
NOTE If the ACC system is in the stationary vehicle
hold state, the Electric parking brake will op-
l You can also cancel the ACC control by erate.
pressing the ACC ON/OFF switch. If this If the ACC system judges that the stationary
switch is pressed, the ACC is turned off. vehicle hold state can no longer be main-
l If you press the “CANCEL” switch or ACC tained on a steep slope after your vehicle
ON/OFF switch to cancel the stationary ve- stops when the vehicle in front stops, the sta-
hicle hold state, the vehicle will start creep- tionary vehicle hold state is cancelled and a
ing.
warning appears on the information screen of
the multi-information display.
When the system shifts into the standby state Depress the brake pedal.
as a result of cancellation of the ACC control,
the “SET” indicator goes out. At the same
time, the display of the following distance
setting and running-ahead vehicle symbol
(only when the ACC is detecting a vehicle) is
placed in the standby state of display. l When ASC is turned off.
l When ABS, ASC or TCL is in operation.
l When the parking brake is applied.

WARNING This can occur when: To turn off ACC

l There are adverse weather conditions, Press the ACC ON/OFF switch when the
l Although the set speed driving will be de- such as rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
activated when shifting to the “N” (Neu- ACC is in the ON state to turn off the ACC.
tral) position, never move the selector lev- l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or
er to the “N” (Neutral) position while en- ice, adhere to the surface of the sensor.
gine braking and could cause a serious ac- l A vehicle in front or an oncoming vehi-
cident. cle is splashing water, snow or dirt.
l Driving on a nonbusy road with a few
If the detection performance of the ACC sys- vehicles and obstacles in front.
tem has degraded, such as in the following 6
situations, or if the ACC system judges that it If the display keeps showing the message,
can temporarily not operate, the ACC system there is a possibility that the ACC has a mal-
operation will be cancelled automatically, and function. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
then a buzzer will sound and a message will Authorized Service Point.
appear to inform the driver. When the ACC system detects an abnormali-
ty in the system, the ACC system will be
turned off, a buzzer will sound and a message NOTE
will be displayed in the multi-information
display. l Pressing the switch turns off the ACC even
if it is engaged.
If the message remains after the ignition
l The set speed is cancelled when the ACC is
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position and turned off or the ignition switch is turned to
then turned back to “ON” position or the op- the “LOCK” position or operation mode is
This can occur when: eration mode is put in OFF, and then turned set to OFF.
l The brake system is overheating due to back to ON, contact a MITSUBISHI l If the ACC is in the ON state when the igni-
continuous brake control on long down- MOTORS Authorized Service Point. tion switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
hill slope. or operation mode is set to OFF, the system
is set to the OFF state when the ignition
switch or operation mode is set to ON next
time.

To resume the control NOTE NOTE

After cancelling the ACC control (i.e. placing l The conditions to be met before the ACC l The following distance varies as a function
the system in the standby state) by pressing control can be resumed are the same as those of the speed; the faster the set speed, the lon-
the “CANCEL” switch or depressing the for starting the ACC control. ger the following distance.
brake pedal, you can resume the ACC control l While the brake pedal is depressed, the vehi-
at the originally set speed if you push up the cle will not start moving again even if the
driver operates the switches. Following distance setting
“RES +” switch.
While the ACC system is in the stationary
vehicle hold state, if it is possible to resume To change the following dis-
6 following the vehicle in front because it has tance setting
Long
started moving, “ACC READY TO RE-

Every time you press the ACC following dis-
SUME” will appear on the meter. To start
tance setting switch, the set following dis-
moving again, push up the “RES +” switch or
tance changes in order. Even after turning off
depress the accelerator pedal.
the ACC system or putting the operation
mode in OFF, the system retains your last se-
lected following distance setting in memory.
Short

Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
To activate cruise control (au- Forward Collision Stop lamps are illuminated during automatic
tomatic speed control) braking.
Mitigation System (FCM)
If you hold the ACC ON/OFF switch pressed
Type 1
with the ignition switch or operation mode The Forward Collision Mitigation System
set to ON and the ACC in the OFF state, the (FCM) uses a sensor (A) to determine the
cruise control is activated. The information distance and relative speed to a vehicle and a
screen of the multi-information display then pedestrian in front. When your vehicle is ap-
changes to the cruise control screen and a proaching a vehicle or a pedestrian straight-
buzzer sounds at the same time. Cruise con- ahead in your path and the FCM judges that
trol is turned off if you set the ignition switch there is the risk of a collision, the system
6
to the “LOCK” or the operation mode to gives audible and visual warnings (forward
“OFF”. collision warning function), increases the
Refer to “Cruise control” on page 6-57. brake fluid pressure (FCM brake prefill func-
tion), and also provides braking force assis-
tance when you depress the brake pedal
(FCM brake assist function) to avoid frontal
collision.
When the risk of collision increases more, the
CAUTION system causes the brakes to work moderately
to encourage you to apply brakes. If the sys-
l Cruise control (automatic vehicle speed con- tem judges that a potential collision is immi-
trol system) does not alert by proximity
nent, it initiates emergency braking to miti-
alarm and control distance between vehicles
to the vehicle in front. gate collision-caused damages or to avoid
possible collision (FCM braking function).

Type 2 WARNING Forward collision warning
l A driver is responsible for driving safely.
function
The FCM is the system to mitigate colli- If the system judges that there is a risk of
sion-caused damages or to avoid collisions your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pe-
as much as possible.
destrian in front, this function warns you of
The system is not intended to compensate
for driver’s loss of attention to the front
the potential hazard with visual and audible
during driving due to distraction or care- alarms.
lessness or supplement a drop in visibility When this function is triggered, a buzzer
due to the rain and fog. sounds and, at the same time, a “BRAKE”
6 It is never a substitute for your safe and message appears on the information screen of
careful driving. Always be ready to apply the multi-information display.
the brakes manually.
l The FCM works to avoid frontal collisions
as much as possible. However, the effect of
its operation varies depending on situa-
tions and conditions, such as driving con-
ditions, road conditions, and steering, ac-
celeration and braking operations, so that
the performance the function can deliver
is not always the same.
The forward collision warning function oper-
If your vehicle is in danger of collision, ates at the following vehicle speed:
take all necessary collision-evading ac- Type 1
tions, such as depressing the brake pedal l Against a vehicle: Approximately 15 to
strongly regardless of whether the system 140 km/h (10 to 87 mph).
is activated or not. l Against a pedestrian: Approximately 7
l Do not try to confirm the operation of the to 65 km/h (4 to 40 mph).
FCM. In certain situations, this can cause
an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Type 2
l Against a vehicle: Approximately 15 to
180 km/h (10 to 110 mph).
l Against a pedestrian: Approximately 7
to 65 km/h (4 to 40 mph).

CAUTION FCM brake assist function FCM braking function

l Under certain conditions, the audible alarm If the system judges that there is a risk of If the system judges that there is a high risk
may not work at all or may be scarcely audi- your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pe- of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
ble. Do not overly rely on the system; if your destrian in front, this function deploys the pedestrian in front, the system applies the
vehicle is in danger of collision, take all nec- brake assist sooner than the brake assist oper- brakes moderately to encourage you to apply
essary collision-evading actions, such as de- ation. The FCM brake assist function oper- the brakes.
pressing the brake pedal strongly regardless
ates at the following vehicle speed: If the system judges that a collision is un-
of whether the system is activated or not.
avoidable, it initiates emergency braking con-
Type 1 trol to mitigate collision-caused damages or,
FCM brake prefill function if the situation permits, to avoid a collision. 6
l Against a vehicle: Approximately 15 to
If the system judges that there is a risk of 80 km/h (10 to 50 mph). While the FCM braking control is triggered,
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pe- you are warned of the hazard with a
destrian in front, this function prefills the to 65 km/h (10 to 40 mph). “BRAKE!” message and audible alarms like
brake line with additional brake fluid to make with the forward collision warning function.
the brakes more responsive to your brake Type 2 Once the FCM braking has activated, the fol-
pedal operation. lowing message will appear on the informa-
The FCM brake prefill function operates at
l Against a vehicle: Approximately 15 to tion screen of the multi-information display.
180 km/h (10 to 110 mph).
the following vehicle speed:
Type 1 to 65 km/h (10 to 40 mph).
l Against a vehicle: Approximately 5 to CAUTION

80 km/h (3 to 50 mph).
l Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5 l The brake assist function may not be trig-
to 65 km/h (3 to 40 mph). gered when the brake pedal is operated in The FCM braking function operates at the
certain ways. following vehicle speed:
Do not overly rely on the system; if your ve-
Type 2 hicle is in danger of collision, take all neces- Type 1
l Against a vehicle: Approximately 5 to sary collision-evading actions, such as de-
180 km/h (3 to 110 mph). pressing the brake pedal strongly regardless l Against a vehicle: Approximately 5 to
l Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5 of whether the system is activated or not. 80 km/h (3 to 50 mph).
to 65 km/h (3 to 40 mph). l Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5
to 65 km/h (3 to 40 mph).

Type 2 CAUTION CAUTION
l Against a vehicle: Approximately 5 to • When the FCM has detected a problem in • When a vehicle in front does not have re-
180 km/h (3 to 110 mph). the system. flectors (lamp reflector) or the position of
l Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5 l If the ASC is deactivated, the FCM braking the reflector is low.
to 65 km/h (3 to 40 mph). function will not operate. Refer to “Active • When a vehicle in front is a car carrier or
stability control (ASC)” on page 6-55. a similar shaped vehicle.
l The FCM may or may not detect a motorcy- • When there is a different object near the
CAUTION cle, bicycle or wall depending on the situa- vehicle.
tion. The FCM is not designed to detect • When driving on a road with many and
l Do not use the FCM as a normal braking. these objects. successive curves, including when pass-
6 l After your vehicle has stopped following the l The forward collision warning function ing their entrances and outlets.
activation of the FCM, automatic braking is and/or the FCM braking function may not • When accelerating and decelerating
released. As the vehicle will then start creep- activate in the following situations. quickly.
ing, be sure to depress the brake pedal to • When a vehicle suddenly appears just in • When the system recognizes driver’s
hold the vehicle stationary. front of your vehicle. steering, accelerating, braking or gear
l When applying the brake during the auto- • When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehi- shifting actions as evasive actions to
matic braking condition the pedal will feel cle very closely. avoid collision.
firm. • When the vehicle in front is offset to the • When you are driving on a road with
This is not abnormal. left or right. steep and alternating up and down slopes.
You can apply more pressure to the pedal to • When the vehicle in front is towing a • When driving on a slippery road covered
assist in braking. trailer. by rain water, snow, ice etc.
l In the following situations, the system pro- • A freight trailer that is not carrying a con- • When a road surface is surging, and there
vides neither control nor alarming. tainer. is unevenness.
• When a vehicle or a pedestrian suddenly • The vehicle has a protruding load from • When driving in dark areas, such as in a
cuts in front of your vehicle. the carrier. tunnel or at night.
• When the distance from a vehicle or a pe- • The vehicle has a low vehicle height. • When your vehicle changed lanes, and
destrian in front is extremely short. your vehicle approached immediately be-
• The vehicle has an extremely high ground
• To an oncoming vehicle. clearance. hind the vehicle in front.
• On vehicles equipped with M/T, when the • When a vehicle in front is extremely dirty. • During a certain time after your vehicle
gearshift lever is in the “R” (REVERSE) turns left or right.
• When a vehicle in front is covered with
position. snow. • When you are carrying extremely heavy
On vehicles equipped with CVT, when loads in the rear seats or luggage area.
• When a vehicle in front has a large glass
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or surface. • After the engine has been running for an
“R” (REVERSE) position. extended period of time.
• When using a windscreen washer.


• If windscreen wipers are not • When a pedestrian’s clothing appears to • When there is a structure (B) beside the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE be nearly the same colour or brightness as entrance of a curve and intersection.
parts or equivalent. its surroundings.
• When the sensor becomes extremely hot • When a pedestrian is very close to an ob-
or cold. ject, such as a vehicle.
• If the battery becomes weak or runs • When a pedestrian is in a dark area, such
down. as at night or in a tunnel.
• When the sensor is affected by strong • When the pedestrian is walking fast or
light, such as direct sunlight or the head- running.
lamps of an oncoming vehicle. • When a pedestrian suddenly rushes in
6
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain, front of the vehicle.
snow, sand storms, etc.) • When the position of a pedestrian is close • When running on a narrow iron bridge.
• When the windscreen of the sensor por- to the edge of the vehicle. • When passing through a gate with small
tion is covered with dirt, water droplets, l Factors such as the positional relationship head or side clearances.
snow and ice, etc. between your vehicle and a vehicle in front, • When there are metallic objects, steps or
• When water, snow or sand on the road are driver’s own technique of steering the vehi- projections on the road surface.
extorted by the vehicle in front or an on- cle and irregularly moving traffic due to ac- • When quickly approaching a vehicle in
coming vehicle. cidents or vehicle trouble may deter the front to overtake it.
l The FCM may not detect a pedestrian in cer- FCM control and alarm from functioning. • When passing an electronic toll collection
tain situations. Some of these include: l When the system recognizes driver’s steer- gate.
• It the pedestrian is shorter than approxi- ing or accelerating actions as evasive actions • When running under an overpass, an pe-
mately 1 m or taller than approximately to avoid a collision, the FCM control and destrian overpass or a small tunnel.
2 m. alarm functions may be cancelled. • When running in Multi-storey car park.
• If the pedestrian is wearing loose-fitting l The FCM control and alarm functions may • When the road gradiently and suddenly
clothes. be triggered in the following situations. changes while running.
• If part of a pedestrian’s body is hidden, • When stopping very close to a wall or a
such as when holding an umbrella, large vehicle in front.
bag, etc.
• If a pedestrian bends forward, sits or lies
on the road.
• When a pedestrian is pushing/pulling
something, such as a stroller, bicycle or
wheelchair.
• When pedestrians gather in a group.

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

• When passing close to a vehicle, pedes- • When passing through a plastic curtain l A sound will be heard during the activation
trian or object. etc. of automatic braking, this is a function of the
• When the FCM detects a long object car- brake control and is not abnormal.
ried on your vehicle, such as skis or a roof
carrier.
• When driving through fog, steam, smoke FCM ON/OFF switch
or dust. This switch is used to turn on and off the
• When the windscreen of the sensor por- FCM to select your desired collision alarm
tion is covered with dirt, water droplets,
6 snow and ice, etc. timing.
l Turn off the system beforehand when the ve- When the switch is held pressed, the
• When driving on the road that the vehicle hicle is placed in any of the following situa- ON/OFF state of the FCM changes from ON
in front runs in offset position from your tions as the system can operate unexpected- to OFF and vice versa. If you give the switch
vehicle. ly. a short press with the FCM in the ON state,
• When using an automatic car wash. you can change the collision alarm timing.
• When your vehicle’s wheels are driven by
the engine on a lift.
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehi-
cle tows another vehicle.
• When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
• When enjoying sports driving on a circuit.
• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers.
• When passing through an area where ob- • When the tyre pressure is not correct.
jects may contact the vehicle, such as
thick grass, tree branches, or a banner. • When installing the spare tyre for emer-
gency.
• When there are patterns on the road that
may be mistaken for a vehicle or a pedes- • When the snow traction device (tyre
chains) are attached.
trian.
• When a vehicle cuts into your path in the • If the windscreen on or surrounding the
sensor is cracked or scratched.
detecting range of the sensor.
• When an oncoming vehicle is positioned
straight ahead of your vehicle on a curved
road.

To turn on/off the system To change alarm timing Distance mode: FAR
You can switch the system from OFF to ON Give a short press to the FCM ON/OFF
or ON to OFF if you hold the FCM ON/OFF switch to change the timing at which the
switch pressed when the ignition switch is frontal collision alarm is triggered. Every
turned to the “ON” position or the operation time you press the switch, the alarm timing
mode is put in ON. changes from three levels (FAR, MIDDLE or
Once the system is turned on, the information NEAR).
Distance mode: MIDDLE
screen of the multi-information display As you make selection, the selected alarm
shows the collision alarm timing currently se- timing is displayed on the information screen
lected, and the indicator on the instrument of the multi-information display. Even after 6
cluster goes out. turning off the FCM, turning the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the
operation mode in OFF, the system retains
your last selected alarm timing in memory. Distance mode: NEAR
When you turn off the system, the following

message appears on the information screen of
the multi-information display and the indi-
cator on the instrument cluster.
CAUTION
l For the FCM brake prefill, the FCM brake
assist and the FCM braking functions, the
function triggering timing cannot be
changed.
When the ignition switch is turned to the System problem warning

ON, the FCM will turn back on. If a problem occurs with the system, a visual
warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm.

When the camera and radar

cannot detect accurately
(Type 2 only)
When the FCM system determines that it
cannot detect objects properly, the FCM will
become inoperative.
This can occur when: When the sensor performance returns, the If the display keeps showing the message,
l In adverse weather conditions, such as FCM functions will resume operation. there is a possibility that the FCM has a mal-
rain, snow or sand storms, etc. If the display keeps showing the message, function. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
6 l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or there is a possibility that the sensor has a Authorized Service Point for inspection of
ice, adhere to the windscreen of the sen- malfunction. Contact a MITSUBISHI the system.
sor portion or the surface of the sensor. MOTORS Authorized Service Point for in-
l A vehicle in front or an oncoming vehi- spection of the sensor. Sensor is too hot or cold
cle is splashing water, snow or dirt. If the system becomes temporarily unavaila-
l Driving on a nonbusy road with a few ble due to the high or low temperature of the
NOTE sensor, the following message will appear on
vehicles and obstacles in front. (Type 2
only) l The “DRIVER ASSISTANCE CAMERA the information screen of the multi-informa-
BLOCKED” message may temporarily ap- tion display, the indicator will come on in
pear on the information screen when the sen-
The following message will appear on the in- the instrument cluster and the FCM will auto-
sor cannot detect a vehicle, a pedestrian or
formation screen of the multi-information an object within range. This is not a mal- matically be turned off.
display and the indicator will come on in function. When a vehicle or an object comes After the temperature of the sensor has been
the instrument cluster. within range, the FCM function will resume in range, the system will automatically return
and the message will go off. to operation.
When the system cannot oper-

ate temporarily
If the system becomes temporarily unavaila-
ble for some reason, the following message
or
will appear on the information screen of the
multi-information display, the indicator
will come on in the instrument cluster and the
FCM will automatically be turned off.

If the display keeps showing the message, If the display keeps showing the message, l Adaptive Cruise Control System
there is a possibility that the FCM has a mal- there is a possibility that the FCM has a mal- (ACC)*
function. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS function.
Authorized Service Point for inspection of Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- Type 1
the system. ized Service Point.
FCM deactivation due to fault

If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys-
NOTE
tem, either one of the following messages l If the sensor or its surrounding area reaches
an extremely high temperature when parking
will appear on the information screen of the
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “FCM 6
multi-information display, the indicator
SERVICE REQUIRED” message may ap-
will come on in the instrument cluster and the pear.
FCM will automatically be turned off. After the temperature of the sensor or its sur-
rounding area has been in range, if the mes-
sage remains even after restarting the en-
gine, please contact a MITSUBISHI Type 2
Handling of the sensor

The sensor (A) is located inside the wind-
screen and front bumper (Type 2 only) as
The sensor is shared in the following sys-
tems:
l Forward Collision Mitigation system
If the message remains even after the ignition (FCM)
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position and
l Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
then turned back to the “ON” position or the
l Automatic High-Beam (AHB)
operation mode is put in OFF, and then
turned back to “ON”, please contact a
Point.


l To maintain proper performance of the • If the windscreen is misted, remove the l The sensor emits infrared rays when the ig-
FCM, LDW and AHB: mist from the windscreen by using the de- nition switch is turned to the “ON” position
• Always keep the area around the sensor mister switch. and the operation mode is put in ON. Do not
clean. • Maintain the wiper blades in good condi- look into the sensor by using optical goods
If the inside of the windscreen where the tion. such as a magnifying glass. The infrared ray
sensor is installed becomes dirty or fog- Refer to “Wiper blades” on page 9-05. might injure your eyes.
ged, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS When replacing the wiper blades, use on-
Authorized Service Point. ly MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Laser radar specifications
• Do not apply an impact or load on the parts or equivalent.
6 sensor or its surrounding area. • Do not dirty or damage the sensor. Laser classification
• Do not put anything including a sticker or • Do not spray glass cleaner on the sensor.
film to the outer side of the windscreen in Also, do not spill liquid, such as a bever- Max average power 45 mW
front of or surrounding area of the sensor. age, on the sensor.
Also, do not put anything including a Pulse duration 33 ns
• Do not install an electronic device, such
sticker or film to the inner side of the as an antenna, or a device that emits Wavelength 905 nm
windscreen under the sensor. strong electric waves near the sensor.
• Always use tyres of the same size, same Divergent angle 28° x 12°
type and same brand and that have no sig- (horizon x vertical)
nificant wear differences.
• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspensions. Laser classification label
l If the windscreen on the sensor or in the sur-
For Europe
rounding area of the sensor is cracked or
scratched, the sensor may not detect an ob-
ject properly. This could cause a serious ac-
cident. Turn off the FCM and have your ve-
hicle inspected as soon as possible at a
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
the sensor and sensor mounting screw. ice Point.
• The sensor front cover should not be If you need to replace the windscreen, con-
modified or painted. tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
• Do not cover the sensor mounted area Service Point.
with a licence plate or anything such as a
grill guard, etc. (Type 2 only)

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)*
For Israel Laser warning label When a vehicle in the next lane is travelling
at the same speed or faster in the detection
areas, the Blind Spot Warning lamp in the
corresponding outside rear-view mirror will
illuminate. If the turn-signal lever is operated
to the side where the Blind Spot Warning
lamp is illuminated, the Blind Spot Warning
lamp will blink and the system will beep
three times to alert the driver.
Depending on the relative speed between 6
your vehicle and a vehicle in the next lane,
the BSW will detect up to approximately 70
m from your vehicle (Lane Change Assist).
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

Laser explanatory label
(with Lane Change Assist)*
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is a driving
aid system that alerts the driver when another
vehicle, which may not be visible through the
outside rear-view mirror, is travelling in the
next lane behind your vehicle.
WARNING
l Before using the BSW, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
tions could result in an accident.

WARNING WARNING
l Never rely solely on the BSW system • When a vehicle is travelling alongside
when changing lanes. The BSW is an aid of your vehicle at nearly the same speed
only. It is not a substitute for your safe for prolonged periods of time.
and careful driving. Always check visually • When the heights of the next lane and
behind and all around your vehicle for your lane are different.
other vehicles. • Immediately after the BSW has been
The performance of the BSW may vary turned on.
depending on driving, traffic and/or road • Immediately after the ignition switch is
conditions. turned to the “ON” position or the op-
6 eration mode is put in ON.
• Under adverse weather conditions,
Detection areas such as rain, snow, strong winds, snow
The BSW uses two sensors (A) located inside or sand storms.
• When your vehicle comes too close to
the rear bumper.
another vehicle.
The detection areas are shown as illustrated. While multiple vehicles are overtaking
•
your vehicle.
• When driving near a pot hole and
tramline.
• When a surrounding vehicle or an on-
coming vehicle is splashing water, snow
or dirt.
• When driving on a curve including the
beginning and the end of the curve.
WARNING • When driving on a road with alternat-
ing up and down steep slopes.
l In certain situations, the BSW may not
• When driving on a bumpy or rough
detect a vehicle in the detection areas or
road.
the detection may be delayed. Some of
• When the rear of your vehicle is weigh-
these include:
ed down or your vehicle is leaning to
• When a small motorcycle or a bicycle is the right or left due to the weight of
behind your vehicle.
passengers and luggage or the improp-
er adjustment of tyre pressure.

WARNING To operate
• When the bumper surface around the When the ignition switch is turned to the
sensor is covered with dirt, snow and “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ice, etc. ON and “ON” is selected in the “BSW” set-
• When a bicycle carrier or accessory is ting screen, the BSW indication lamp in the
installed to the rear of the vehicle. instrument cluster comes on and the BSW en-
• When the sensor is extremely hot or ters the standby state.
cold (while the vehicle is parked for a
long period of time under a blazing sun When “OFF” is selected in the “BSW” set-
or in cold weather). ting screen, the BSW indication lamp in the
instrument cluster goes off and the BSW 6
turns off.
CAUTION To turn the BSW ON/OFF, follow the proce-
l To maintain proper performance of the dure below.
BSW, follow the instructions below. 1. Switch to the function setting screen.
• Always keep the bumper surface around Refer to “Multi-information display
the sensor clean. switches” on page 5-04
• Avoid impacting the sensor or its sur- Refer to “Changing the function set- If you turn the BSW ON/OFF, the Rear Cross
rounding area. Traffic Alert (RCTA) also turns ON/OFF at
tings” on page 5-13
• Do not put a sticker on the sensor or its the same time.
surrounding bumper surface. 2. Press the switch or switch several
• Do not paint the sensor or its surrounding times to switch to the “BSW” screen.
bumper surface. Then, press the switch to switch to en- NOTE
• Do not modify the sensor or its surround- ter the setting selection screen.
ing area. 3. Press the switch or switch to select l When the ignition switch is turned to the
l If the bumper has experienced an impact, the the “ON” or “OFF”, and then press the set to OFF, the selected condition (BSW
sensor may have been damaged and the
switch to confirm the setting. ON/OFF) just before setting to OFF is re-
BSW may not function properly. Have the
tained.
vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. Indication lamp l The BSW operates when all of the following
conditions are met.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in
ON.
• The selector lever is in a position other
than “P” (Park) and “R” (Reverse).

NOTE NOTE When there is a malfunction in

• The speed of your vehicle is approximate- l The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside the system
ly 10 km/h (6 mph) or higher. rear-view mirror may come on or blink in
the following conditions.
When the sensor detects an ap- • When driving very near the guardrail or a
concrete wall.
proaching vehicle • When driving near the entrance and outlet
When the BSW indication lamp in the instru- of the tunnel or very near the wall or near
ment cluster is on, if a vehicle is approaching the evacuation area inside the tunnel.
• When turning at an intersection in a town
6 your vehicle in the detection area, the Blind
area.
When the warning display appears, the BSW
Spot Warning lamp in the outside rear-view does not operate normally because there is a
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
mirror illuminates. snow, sand storm etc.). malfunction in the system. Have the vehicle
If the turn-signal lever is operated to the side • When driving while your vehicle is blow- inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
where the Blind Spot Warning lamp is illumi- ing up water, snow, sand, etc., on the thorized Service Point as soon as possible.
nated, the Blind Spot Warning lamp will road.
blink and the system will beep three times to • When driving near a kerb, pothole and
tramline. NOTE
alert the driver.
l Set the BSW to OFF when towing. l When the warning display appears, the BSW
l The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside will be deactivated.
rear-view mirror may not be visible due to
strong direct sunlight or the glare from the
headlamps of vehicles behind you during When the sensor is temporarily
night driving. not available
System problem warning

If a problem occurs with the system, a visual
warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm.
The warnings are combined with the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*
When the warning display appears, the sensor Rear Cross Traffic Alert
is temporarily not available for some reason
such as the environmental condition or in- (RCTA)*
crease of the sensor temperature. When the
warning display does not disappear after The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is an
waiting for a while, contact a MITSUBISHI aid system for backing up. When the RCTA
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. system detects vehicles approaching from the
sides while your vehicle is reversing, the
When there is a foreign object Blind Spot Warning lamps in the outside rear-
view mirrors on both sides will blink and a
on the sensor
buzzer will sound to alert the driver. A warn-
6
ing message will also appear on the informa-
tion screen of the multi-information display.
When the warning display appears, the sensor

cannot detect a vehicle travelling side by side
or an approaching vehicle, because foreign
objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to
the bumper surface around the sensor.
Remove dirt, freezing or foreign material on
the bumper surface around the sensor. WARNING
When the warning display does not disappear
after having cleaned the sensor, contact a l Before using the RCTA, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
Point. tions could result in an accident.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*
WARNING Detection areas CAUTION

l Never rely solely on the RCTA when The detection area is shown as illustrated. • When the speed of an approaching vehicle
backing up. The RCTA is an aid system. is approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) or less.
It is not a substitute for your safe and • If the sensor detection area is blocked by
careful driving. Always check visually be- a nearby object, such as a wall or parked
hind and all around your vehicle for other vehicle.
vehicles, persons, animals or obstructions. • When a vehicle is approaching from
The performance of the RCTA may vary straight behind your vehicle.
depending on driving, traffic and/or sur- • When the speed of an approaching vehicle
rounding conditions. is approximately 7 km/h or less.
6
NOTE
l The Blind Spot Warning lamps in the outside
rear-view mirrors on both sides will blink,
even when only one vehicle is approaching
from one side.
• Immediately after the RCTA has been

turned on.
• Immediately after the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
tion mode is put in ON.
• When the bumper surface around the sen-
sor is covered with dirt, snow and ice, etc.
• When the sensor becomes extremely hot
CAUTION or cold, such as after the vehicle has been
l In certain situations, the RCTA may not de- parked for a prolonged time under the
tect a vehicle in the detection areas. Some of blazing sun or in cold weather.
these situations include:
• When the reversing speed of your vehicle
is approximately 18 km/h (11 mph) or
higher.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
CAUTION Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): Sys-

tem problem warning” on page 6-92.
l If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
sensor may have been damaged and the
RCTA may not function properly. Have the Lane Departure Warning
vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI (LDW)
By recognizing through a sensor (A) the lane
To operate in which your vehicle is running, the Lane
1. Select “ON” in the “BSW” setting Departure Warning (LDW) gives you a warn-
screen 6 of the multi-information dis- ing when your vehicle is likely to drift from 6
play. its lane with an audible alarm and a visual
(Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): alarm displayed on the information screen of How to operate LDW
To operate” on page 6-91.) the multi-information display.
The indication on the information screen of
2. When the gearshift lever or the selector For details about handling the sensor, refer to
the multi-information display changes as fol-
lever is moved to the “R” (REVERSE) “Handling of the sensor” on page 6-87.
lows depending on the state of the system.
position, the RCTA will operate.
To turn on/off the LDW
NOTE NOTE
l Set the RCTA to OFF when towing. l The LDW is turned on when the vehicle is
l The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside shipped from the factory.
rear-view mirror may not be visible due to
l The currently selected LDW setting (on or
strong direct sunlight or the glare from the off) is stored even when the ignition switch
headlamps of vehicles behind you during is turned to the “LOCK” position or the op-
night driving. eration mode is put in OFF.
When a problem is detected in To turn on the LDW, press the LDW switch.
the system The indicator (white) appears on the infor-
If the system detects a problem, a warning is mation screen of the multi-information dis-
displayed on the information screen in the play.

The system automatically shifts from the NOTE
“ON” state to the standby state if all of the
following conditions are simultaneously met. l The system stays in the “ON” state for ap-
proximately 7 seconds after the hazard lamp
The indicator on the information screen in
has stopped flashing or the turn-signal lever
the multi-information display will be changed has returned to the home position.
from white to green.
l The vehicle speed is approximately
65 km/h (40 mph) or higher. Lane departure warning
l The turn-signal lever is not operated. A buzzer sounds intermittently and the indi-
6 To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch. l The hazard lamp is not activated. cation of “LANE DEPARTURE” appears on
The indicator on the information screen of l Environmental conditions are adequate the information screen of the multi-informa-
the multi-information display will then go for the system to recognize the lane tion display, and the indicator starts flash-
out. markings on both sides. ing in yellow when your vehicle is about to
To return the LDW to “ON”, press the LDW l The system has been placed in the “ON” leave or has left the lane in the standby mode.
switch again. state.
(white) (green)
NOTE
Standby state l If the warning continues for approximately 3
seconds or more, the system switches to the
In the standby mode, the system is capable of standby mode before the warning stops.
recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is
positioned and issuing audible warning when
your vehicle goes out of the lane.
NOTE Windscreen is dirty

The alarm shown below is displayed if the
l If the lane markers are only on one side of
the road, the LDW will operate only for the system becomes temporarily unavailable due
appropriate side where the lane marker is to dirt on the windscreen at the sensor por-
drawn. tion.
After having cleaned the windscreen, the sys-
System problem warning tem will automatically return to operation.
If the alarm continues showing, there is a
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual possibility that the sensor has a malfunction.
warning specific to the type of the problem is Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- 6
given together with an audible alarm. ized Service Point for inspection of the sen-
sor.
Too hot or cold sensor NOTE
The alarm shown below is displayed if the
system becomes temporarily unavailable due l If the sensor or its surrounding area reaches
an extremely high temperature when parking
to a too high or low temperature of the sen-
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “LDW
sor. SERVICE REQUIRED” message may ap-
If the temperature of the sensor reaches the pear.
predetermined value, the system automatical- If the message remains even after the tem-
ly recovers the normal state. LDW deactivation due to fault perature of the sensor or its surrounding area
If the alarm continues showing, there is a The alarm shown below is displayed if the has been in range, please contact a
possibility that the LDW has a malfunction. LDW goes into a non-initialized state due to MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- ice Point.
a fault.
ized Service Point for inspection of the sys- If this happens, please contact a
tem. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service CAUTION
Point for inspection of the system.
l LDW has its performance limitations. Do
not over-rely on the system.


l LDW is not designed to lessen risks associ- • When running in an extremely narrow • When the vehicle is leaning much to one
ated with not looking ahead carefully (atten- lane. side due to heavy luggage on it or improp-
tion drawn to something on the side, absent- • When the following distance between erly adjusted tyre pressures.
mindedness, etc.) or poor visibility caused your vehicle and a vehicle in front be- • When oncoming vehicles’ headlamps
by bad weather etc. Keep steering your vehi- comes extremely reduced (especially shine the sensor.
cle correctly and drive safely. when a marking is hidden by a vehicle in • When the vehicle is equipped with non-
l The system may not operate correctly in the front this is running too close to the mark- standard tyres (including excessively
following conditions. If required, set the ing). worn tyres and temporary spare tyre),
LDW switch to “OFF.” • When entering a junction or other point of uses snow traction device (tyre chains), or
6 • When driving on a road whose lane mark- road where lanes are laid out complicated- has non-specified components such as a
ings (white or yellow) are worn out or ly. modified suspension.
smeared with dirt to an extent not recog- • When passing a road section where the • When the windscreen is covered with wa-
nizable by the system. number of lanes increases/decreases or ter droplets, snow, dust, etc.
• When lane markings are vague, typically multiple lanes are crossing each other. l Follow the instructions given below to keep
during a drive in the rain, snow, fog or • When the lane is marked by double or your LDW in good operating conditions.
dark area, or when running against the otherwise special lines. • Always keep the windscreen clean.
sun. • When driving on a winding or rough road. • Avoid applying a strong shock or pressure
• When the vehicle is moving in a place • When driving on a slippery road covered to the sensor. Do not attempt to detach or
where lane markings are interrupted, such by rain water, snow, ice, etc. disassemble it.
as a toll booth entrance and motorway • When passing through a place where the • Do not put anything like a sticker on the
junction. brightness suddenly changes, like the inlet area in front of the sensor of the wind-
• When running on a road portion with in- or outlet of a tunnel. screen.
completely removed old lane markings, • When turning steep curves. • Use only MITSUBISHI MOTORS GEN-
shadows, lingering snow, truck-like pud- • When the road surface is reflecting the UINE parts when replacing the wind-
dles mistakable for lane markings (espe- light shining from the direction opposite screen wipers.
cially after the rain when road surface is to the running direction.
reflecting light) or similar confusing fac- • Vehicle largely lurches when it is running
tors. over steps or other irregularities of the
• When running in a lane other than the road surface.
cruising lane and passing lane. • When the headlamp illumination is inade-
• When running beside a closed lane sec- quate because of contaminated or deterio-
tion or in a provisional lane in a traffic rated lenses or improperly aimed head-
work zone. lamps.

Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*
Tyre pressure monitoring WARNING NOTE

system (TPMS)* l The spare tyre with a speed limit label
Type 1
does not have a tyre inflation pressure
The tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor.
uses tyre inflation pressure sensors (A) on the When the spare tyre with a speed limit la-
bel is used, the TPMS will not work prop-
wheels to monitor the tyre inflation pressures. erly. See an MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
The system only indicates when a tyre is sig- thorized Service Point as soon as possible
nificantly under-inflated. to replace or repair the original tyre.
The base tyre pressure can be set at desired
value by the driver with the reset function ex-
6
ecution. (The low pressure warning threshold NOTE
Type 2
is set based on the reset.) l The TPMS is not a substitute for regularly
The tyre inflation pressure sensor IDs for two checking tyre inflation pressures.
sets of tyres can be registered by a Be sure to check the tyre inflation pressures
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service as described in “Tyres” on page 10-10.
Point, and the valid ID set can be switched by l The tyre inflation pressure sensor (B) is in-
stalled in the illustrated location.
the multi-information display switch (It’s
• On vehicles equipped with the Type 1
beneficial in case of seasonal tyre change be- sensor which has the metallic air valve
tween summer tyre and winter tyre.) (C), replace grommet and washer (D)
with the new ones when the tyre is re-
l The spare tyre with aluminium wheel has the
tyre inflation pressure sensor, so it can be
placed. used for tyre rotation.
• On vehicles equipped with the Type 2
sensor which has the rubber air valve (E),
replace rubber air valve (E) with new one TPMS warning lamp/display
when the tyre is replaced.
For details, please contact your
ice Point.

ON, the TPMS warning lamp normally illu-
minates and goes off a few seconds later.
CAUTION NOTE
If one or more of the vehicle tyres are signifi-
cantly under-inflated, the warning lamp will l If the warning lamp does not illuminate l The warning display is displayed on the in-
when the ignition switch is turned to the formation screen in the multi-information
remain illuminated while the ignition switch
“ON” position or the operation mode is put display.
or the operation mode is in ON. in ON, it means that the TPMS is not work-
Refer to “If the warning lamp/display illumi- ing properly. Have the system inspected by a
nates while driving” on page 6-101 and take MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
the necessary measures. ice Point.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
6 NOTE the tyre pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
l The TPMS does not monitor the spare tyre
in the tyre hanger, even if the inflation pres- l If a malfunction is detected in the TPMS, the
Each tyre, including the spare, should be
sure sensor is equipped. warning lamp will blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuously illumi- checked monthly when cold and inflated to
l The warning display is displayed on the in-
nated. The warning lamp will issue further the inflation pressure recommended by the
formation screen in the multi-information
display. warnings each time the engine is restarted as vehicle manufacturer on the tyre inflation
long as the malfunction exists. pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a
Check to see whether the warning lamp goes different size than the size indicated on the
off after few minutes driving. tyre inflation pressure label, you should de-
If it then goes off during driving, there is no termine the proper tyre inflation pressure for
problem.
However, if the warning lamp does not go
those tyres.)
off, or if it blinks again when the engine is As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by a been equipped with the TPMS that illumi-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- nates a low tyre pressure telltale when one or
ice Point. more of your tyres is significantly under-in-
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the flated.
system may be preventing the monitoring of Accordingly, when the low tyre pressure tell-
the tyre pressure. For safety reasons, when
tale illuminates, you should stop and check
the warning lamp appears while driving,
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and your tyres as soon as possible, and inflate
high-speed driving. them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
nificantly under-inflated tyre causes the tyre
to overheat and can lead to tyre failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency The TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va- NOTE
and tyre tread life, and may affect the vehi- riety of reasons, including the installation of
cle’s handling and stopping ability. replacement or alternate tyres or wheels on l After inspecting or adjusting the tyre pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
Please note that the tyre pressure monitoring the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
valve stem.
system (TPMS) is not a substitute for proper tioning properly. Always check the TPMS Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
tyre maintenance, and it is the driver’s re- malfunction telltale after replacing one or get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
sponsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, more tyres or wheels on your vehicle to en- tyre inflation pressure sensor.
even if under-inflation has not reached the sure that the replacement or alternate tyres l Do not use metal valve caps, which may
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
and damage of the tyre inflation pressure
tyre pressure telltale. function properly.
sensors. 6
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
warning lamp to indicate when the system is If the warning lamp/display il- l Once adjustments have been made, the
warning lamp will go off after a few minutes
not operating properly. luminates while driving of driving.
The warning lamp is combined with the low 1. If the warning lamp illuminates, avoid
tyre pressure telltale. hard braking, sharp steering manoeuvres 2. If the warning lamp remains illuminated
When the system detects a malfunction, the and high speeds. You should stop and after you have been driving for approxi-
telltale will flash for approximately one mi- adjust the tyres to the proper inflation mately 10 minutes after you adjust the
nute and then remain continuously illumina- pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the tyre inflation pressure, one or more of
ted. This sequence will continue upon subse- spare tyre at the same time. Refer to the tyres may have a puncture. Inspect
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- “Tyres” on page 10-10. the tyre and if it has a puncture, have it
function exists.
repaired by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
When the warning lamp is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal NOTE Authorized Service Point as soon as pos-
sible.
low tyre pressure as intended. l In addition, the warning display will be dis-
played on the information screen in the mul-
ti-information display.
l When inspecting or adjusting the tyre pres-
sure, do not apply excessive force to the
valve stem to avoid breakage.

WARNING l A wireless facility or device using the Whenever the tyres and wheels
same frequency is near the vehicle. are replaced with new ones
l If the warning lamp/display illuminates
l Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
while you are driving, avoid hard brak- If new wheels with new tyre inflation pres-
and/or on the wheels.
ing, sharp steering manoeuvres and high sure sensors are installed, their ID codes must
speeds. l The tyre inflation pressure sensor’s bat-
tery is dead. be programmed into the TPMS. Have tyre
Driving with an under-inflated tyre ad-
versely affects vehicle performance and l Wheels other than MITSUBISHI and wheel replacement performed by a
can result in an accident. MOTORS GENUINE wheels are being MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
used. Point to avoid the risk of damaging the tyre
inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel re-
6 CAUTION l Wheels that are not fitted with tyre infla-
placement is not done by a MITSUBISHI
tion pressure sensors are being used.
l The warning lamp/display may not illumi- l Wheels whose ID codes are not memo- MOTORS Authorized Service Point, it is not
nate immediately in the event of a tyre blow- rized by the vehicle are used. covered by your warranty.
out or rapid leak.
l A window tint that affects the radio
wave signals is installed. CAUTION
NOTE l The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
l To avoid the risk of damage to the tyre infla- NOTE the proper fit of the tyre inflation pressure
tion pressure sensors, have any punctured sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
l Tyre inflation pressures vary with the ambi- the sensors.
tyre repaired by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
Authorized Service Point. If the tyre repair is large variations in ambient temperature, the
not done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- tyre inflation pressures may be underinflated Reset of low tyre pressure
thorized Service Point, damage to the tyre (causing the warning lamp/display come on)
inflation pressure sensor is not covered by when the ambient temperature is relatively
warning threshold
your warranty. low. If the warning lamp/display comes on, The threshold is set based on the tyre pres-
l Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray adjust the tyre inflation pressure. sure which the reset function is executed by
on any tyre.
Such a spray could damage the tyre inflation
following procedure.
pressure sensors. 1. Switch to the function setting screen.
Have any puncture repaired by a Refer to “Multi-information display
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- switches” on page 5-04.
ice Point. Refer to “Changing the function set-
The TPMS may not work normally in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
2. Press the switch or switch several NOTE 3. Press the switch or switch to select
times to switch to the “TPMS SENSOR the “ID 1” or “ID 2”, and then press and
RESET” screen. l The reset function should be executed when hold the switch for approximately 3
the tyre is cold. If it is executed when the
Then, press the switch to switch to en- seconds or more to confirm the setting.
tyre is warm (e.g. after driving), there may
ter the setting selection screen. be a low tyre pressure warning earlier than
(reset of low tyre pressure warning usual.
threshold)
3. Press the switch or switch to select
“RESET”, and then press and hold the Tyre ID set change
switch for approximately 3 seconds or In case that 2 sets of tyre inflation pressure 6
more to confirm the setting. sensor ID are registered in the receiver, the
The setting is changed to the reset. valid tyre ID set can be changed by following
4. The warning lamp start flashing slowly. procedure.
5. Drive for a while. The reset is completed 1. Switch to the function setting screen.
if the warning lamp goes out. Refer to “Multi-information display
switches” on page 5-04.
4. The valid tyre ID set is changed, and the
number of the TPMS SET indicator is
changed.
times to switch to the “TPMS ID”
screen. Then, press the switch to the
setting selection screen. NOTE
l The tyre ID set is NOT changed, in case that
only 1 set of ID is registered.
l When changing the tyre ID set, the reset
function of low tyre pressure warning
threshold is automatically started. (The
warning lamp starts flashing slowly.) If the
NOTE tyre is warm at this time, the reset function
should be executed again when the tyre is
l The reset function should be executed every cold.
time when the tyre pressure or tyre rotation
is adjusted.

Parking sensors (Front/Rear)*
Parking sensors (Front/ Obstacle detection areas Detection areas

Rear)* The detection areas of the corner and back Depending on whether the vehicle is equip-
sensors are limited to those shown in the il- ped with a towing bar, you can change the
lustration. Moreover, the sensors are unable parking sensors between the standard mode
When parking in a garage or during parallel to detect low or thin objects or objects near and the towing bar mode. The towing bar
parking, these sensors alert the driver to any the front or rear bumper. Thus, make sure to mode changes the system to exclude the area
objects near the vehicle and their distance, check the surroundings as you operate the ve- in which the towing bar is mounted from the
through a buzzer and the sensor display on hicle in a safe manner. detection areas.
the information screen in the multi-informa-
6 tion display. Corner and back sensor loca- Vehicles without a towing bar
tions The detection areas are within approximately
60 cm (A) from the front and corner sensors
CAUTION There are eight sensors (A) in the front and
and 125 cm (B) from the back sensors.
rear bumper.
l The parking sensors assist you in determin-
ing the approximate distance between the
vehicle and any objects. It has limitations in
terms of detectable areas and objects, and
may not properly detect some objects.
Therefore, do not place excessive confidence
in the parking sensors, and operate the vehi-
cle as carefully as you would do with vehicle
not equipped with this system.
l Make sure to check the surroundings with
your own eyes to ensure safety. Do not oper-
ate the vehicle by relying on the parking sen-
sors alone.
Vehicles with a towing bar

The detection areas are within approximately CAUTION CAUTION
60 cm (A) from the front and corner sensors
and 125 cm (B) from the back sensors. The l The parking sensors may not operate proper- • Objects with a smooth surface, such as
ly under the following conditions: glass.
non-detection areas (C) are within approxi-
• The sensors or surroundings have been • Objects that are low, such as kerbstones.
mately 20 cm (D) from the bumper. wiped by hand. l If the bumper has been exposed to an im-
• The stickers or accessories have been at- pact, the sensors may fail and prevent the
tached to the sensors or surroundings. system from functioning properly. Have the
• The sensors or surroundings are covered vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI
with ice, snow, or mud. MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
• When the temperature difference is too
large. 6
• The sensors are frozen. NOTE
• The system receives ultrasonic noise from
other sources (the horns of other vehicles, l When the sensor is received ultrasonic noise
from outside, the sensor of the correspond-
motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pour-
ing portion will blink at a constant frequen-
ing rain, splashing water, snow traction
cy. When they are not received the noise and
device (tyre chains), etc.).
return to normal operation.
• The sensors are extremely hot or cold
(while the vehicle is parked for a long pe-
NOTE riod of time under a blazing sun or in cold
weather).
l The sensors do not detect objects located in • The vehicle tilts significantly.
the area directly below or near the bumper.
If the height of an object is lower than the
• The vehicle is driven on a rough road
(with a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy sur-
mounted position of the sensors, the sensors
face).
may not continue detecting it even if they
detected it initially.
• The vehicle is too close to an obstacle.
• Immediately after engine starting.
l The parking sensors may not properly detect
For information on how to change the detec- the followings:
tion areas, please refer to “Changing the de- • Objects that are thin, such as wire nets or
tection areas” on page 6-107. ropes.
• Objects that absorb sound waves, such as
snow.
• Objects that are shaped with a sharp an-
gle.

To operate Warning for obstacles Back sensor (vehicles without a towing

bar)
To operate the system, the operation mode is If there is an obstacle in the vicinity of the
put in ON. When the parking sensors are op- vehicle, a warning will be issued with the in- Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/
erated, the indication lamp (A) will turn on. formation screen in the multi-information distance sound cycle
To stop the operation, press the “SONAR” display and a warning buzzer.
switch and the indication lamp (A) goes off. Approximately 125
Intermittent
to 80 cm
Approximately 80 to
Fast intermittent
40 cm
6
Within approximate-
Continuous
ly 40 cm
Back sensor (vehicles with a towing bar)
Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/

distance sound cycle
1- Corner sensor Approximately 125
Intermittent
2- Front sensor to 100 cm
3- Back sensor Approximately 100
Fast intermittent
to 60 cm
Front and corner sensor
Within approximate-
Continuous
Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/ ly 60 cm
distance sound cycle
Approximately 60 to
Intermittent CAUTION
40 cm
l The distances given are to be used for refer-
Approximately 40 to ence only, as errors may be caused by vari-
Fast intermittent ous factors, such as temperature, humidity,
30 cm
or the shape of the obstacles.
Within approximate-
Continuous
ly 30 cm

NOTE NOTE Warning display

l When the sensors detect different obstacles l The mode of the detection area can be In case there is a malfunction in the parking
at the same time, the information screen in switched only when the selector lever is in sensors, the display for the malfunctioning
the multi-information display indicates the the “R” (Reverse) position. sensor will blink and the warning buzzer will
directions of the obstacles each sensor is de- l The detection area will not change if you sound for approximately 5 seconds.
tecting. However, closer obstacles are given keep the “SONAR” switch pressed for 10
priority over other detected obstacles and the seconds or more.
warning buzzer sounds to inform you of l After pressing the “SONAR” switch, the Example: Rear corner sensor (left) mal-
closer obstacles. parking sensors operation differs according functioning
to the detection area setting.
• Setting when towing bar is not equipped
6
Changing the detection areas When the selector lever is moved to the
The detection areas can be changed as fol- “R” (Reverse) position, the parking sen-
sors will operate even if corner sensor op-
lows:
eration was stopped by pressing the “SO-
NAR” switch.
Vehicles with a towing bar • Setting when towing bar is equipped
While the operation of the system is stopped When parking sensors operation was stop-
at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR” ped by pressing the “SONAR” switch, the
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and parking sensors will not operate until the
release it. The buzzer sounds twice to indi- engine has been stopped even if the selec-
cate that the detection area has been changed. tor lever is moved to the “R” (Reverse)
position.
To resume parking sensors operation,
Vehicles without a towing bar press the “SONAR” switch or stop and re-
While the operation of the system is stopped start the engine, and then move the selec-
at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR” tor lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and
release it. The buzzer sounds once to indicate
that the detection area has been changed.

Rear-view camera*
Even after the buzzer and display has stopped CAUTION Location of rear-view camera
warning, the indication lamp (A) on “SO-
l The rear-view camera is an assistance sys- The rear-view camera (A) is integrated into
NAR” switch will continue blinking until the
tem that enables the driver to check for ob- the part near the tailgate handle.
system reverts to the normal state. Have the
stacles behind the vehicle. Its range of view
vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI is limited, so you should not overly depend
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. on it. Please drive just as carefully as you
would if the vehicle did not have the rear-
view camera.
l Be sure to visually confirm safety around the
vehicle with your own eyes. Do not depend
6 entirely on the rear-view camera.
Range of view of rear-view

camera
The range of view of the rear-view camera is
limited to the area shown in the illustrations. Range of view of rear-view cam-
It cannot show both sides and the lower part era
of the rear bumper, etc.
Rear-view camera* When reversing, be sure to visually confirm
safety around the vehicle.
The rear-view camera is a system that shows
the view behind the vehicle on a screen of the
DISPLAY AUDIO, the Smartphone Link
Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI Multi-
Communication System (MMCS).

Rear-view camera*
NOTE l Red line (B) indicates approximately

50 cm behind the rear bumper.
l Because the rear-view camera has a special
l Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
lens, the lines on the ground between park-
mately 20 cm outside of the vehicle
ing spaces may not look parallel on the
screen. body.
l In the following situations, the screen indi- l Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate
cation may be difficult to see. There is no distance from the rear bumper.
abnormality.
• Low light (nighttime).
• When the light of the sun or the light from
a vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into
6
the lens
How to use the rear-view cam- l If the camera is hot and is then cooled by
era rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc-
When you place the gearshift lever or the se- tion. Check surroundings for safety.
lector lever in the “R” position with the igni- l It is not possible to fully see obstacles when
the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes conta-
tion switch in the “ON” position or the opera- minated by water droplets, snow, mud or oil,
tion mode in ON, the view behind the vehicle wipe off the contamination, taking care not
will automatically appear on the screen of the to scratch the lens. 1- Approximately at the rear edge of the
DISPLAY AUDIO, the Smartphone Link l Please observe the following cautions. Ig- rear bumper (if so equipped)
Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI Multi- noring them could lead to a camera malfunc-
2- Approximately 100 cm
Communication System (MMCS). When you tion.
3- Approximately 200 cm
move the gearshift lever or the selector lever • Do not subject the camera to physical
shock.
to any other position, the screen will return to
its original indication.
• Do not apply wax to the camera. NOTE
• Do not splash the camera with boiling wa-
ter. l On vehicles equipped with DISPLAY AU-
DIO, Smartphone Link Display Audio or
CAUTION • Do not disassemble the camera.
l The rear-view camera has a special lens that tem (MMCS), it is possible to change the
can make objects shown on the screen ap- Reference lines on the screen display language of the screen.
pear to be closer or further away than they For details, please refer to the separated
actually are. Reference lines and upper surface of the rear owner’s manual.
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.

Rear-view camera*
NOTE NOTE NOTE

l When the vehicle is tilting because of the • When there is an upward slope at the l The reference lines for distance and vehicle
number of people in the vehicle, the weight back. width are intended to indicate the distance to
and positioning of luggage, and/or the condi- a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
tion of the road surface, the lines in the view This may make the distance to a projecting
from the rear-view camera may not be accu- object shown on the screen differ from the
rately positioned relative to the actual road. actual distance to the projecting object. Do
The reference lines for distance and vehicle not use them as a guide for distances to solid
width are based on a level, flat road surface. objects.
In the following cases, objects shown on the Example: On the screen the point B appears
6 screen will appear to be farther off than they the nearest, then the point C and A in order
actually are. of distance. The points A and B actually are
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed the same distances from the vehicle, and the
down with the weight of passengers and point C is farther off than the points A and
luggage in the vehicle. A - Actual objects B.
B - Objects shown on the screen
Check surroundings for safety.
A - Actual objects
B - Objects shown on the screen

Multi Around Monitor*
Multi Around Monitor* CAUTION Location of each cameras

l Be sure to visually confirm safety around the The cameras are integrated into the location
The Multi Around Monitor is a system that vehicle with your own eyes. Especially, the
shows the view combined with four cameras, four corners of the vehicle become blind
as shown below.
i.e., “Front-view camera”, “Side-view cam- spots where an object is not displayed on the
eras (right and left)” and “Rear-view camera” Multi Around Monitor. Do not depend en-
on the DISPLAY AUDIO, the Smartphone tirely on the Multi Around Monitor.
Link Display Audio or the MITSUBISHI l Do not use the Multi Around Monitor with
the door mirrors folded in and/or with the
Multi-Communication System (MMCS). It doors and/or the tailgate open. It will prevent
assists drivers to park their vehicles in park- the Multi Around Monitor from displaying 6
ing spaces and to parallel park their vehicles. the appropriate range.
CAUTION
l The Multi Around Monitor is an assistance
system that enables the driver to check the
A- Rear-view camera
safety around the vehicle.
Its range of view is limited, so you should B- Front-view camera
not overly depend on it. Please drive just as C- Side-view camera
carefully as you would if the vehicle did not
have the Multi Around Monitor.

WARNING Range of view of the Multi Range of view of the Multi

Around Monitor Around Monitor cameras
l Do not install anything which will disturb
the operation of the cameras around the The range of view of the Multi Around Mon-
location of them. itor cameras is limited to the area shown in
the illustrations. It cannot show around the
both sides and the lower part of the front and
rear bumpers, etc. While driving, be sure to
visually confirm safety around the vehicle.
6
A: Front-view camera Types of views of the Multi

B: Side-view camera (Right)
Around Monitor
C: Side-view camera (Left) Two different types of views are displayed on
the left side and the right side respectively.
D: Rear-view camera

Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode Bird’s eye-view/Front-view CAUTION
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and
mode
l The cameras have special lenses that can
behind the vehicle are displayed. Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and make objects shown on the screen appear to
the front of the vehicle are displayed. be closer or further away than they actually
are.
NOTE
l Because the cameras have a special lens, the
lines on the ground between parking spaces 6
may not look parallel on the screen.
l In the following situations, the screen indi-
cation may be difficult to see. There is no
abnormality.
• Low light (nighttime)
• When the light of the sun or the light from
Side-view/Rear-view mode a vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into
the lens.
Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle
Side-view/Front-view mode • If a fluorescent light shines directly into
and behind the vehicle are displayed. Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle the lens, the screen indication may be
and the front of the vehicle are displayed. flicker.
There is no abnormality.
l If the camera is hot and is then cooled by
rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
l If the atmospheric temperature is extremely
hot or extremely cold, the camera images
may not be clear.
There is no abnormality.
l If a radio set is installed near the camera, the
camera images may cause electrical system
interference and the system may stop func-
tioning properly.

NOTE Operation with the selector lev- NOTE

l It is not possible to fully see obstacles when er l If there is no operation for 3 minutes after
the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes conta- When you place the selector lever in the “R” the Multi Around Monitor is displayed by
minated by water droplets, snow, mud or oil, (REVERSE) position, the bird’s eye-view/ pressing the switch with the selector lever in
wipe off the contamination, taking care not a position other than “R”, the display disap-
rear-view is displayed on the DISPLAY AU-
to scratch the lens. pears.
DIO, the Smartphone Link Display Audio or
l Please observe the following cautions. Ig-
the MITSUBISHI Multi-communication Sys-
noring them could lead to a camera malfunc-
tion. tem (MMCS). When you move the selector Switching of the screen (Selec-
• Do not subject the camera to physical lever to any other position, the display disap-
6 shook such as striking it strongly or pears.
tor lever position is “R”)
throwing a thing. If the switch is pressed, the mode of Multi
• Do not adhere organic substances, waxes, Operation with the switch Around Monitor is switched as follows.
oil remover, and glass cleaner to the cam- When the switch (A) is pressed, the bird’s Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode Side-
era.
eye-view/front-view is displayed. view/ Rear-view mode
If adhered to them, immediately wipe off.
• Do not splash the camera with boiling wa- Switching of the screen (Selec-
ter.
• Never spray or splash water on the cam-
tor lever position is other than
era or around it. “R”)
• Do not disconnect, disassemble or modify If the switch is pressed, the mode of Multi
the camera.
Around Monitor is switched, Bird’s eye-
• Do not scratch the camera, as this may
cause damage to the camera images. view/Front-view mode Side-view/Front-
view mode OFF
How to use the Multi Around

NOTE
Monitor
The Multi Around Monitor can only be used l The passenger’s side screen can be switched
to the side-view by pressing the switch.
when the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON.

NOTE Front-view mode NOTE

l When you move the selector lever to the “R” Reference lines for the distance and the vehi- l When the expected course lines are dis-
position with the front-view displayed on the cle width and upper surface of the front played in the front-view, the expected course
driver’s side screen, the driver’s side screen bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye-
switches to the Rear-view mode. When you l The Red line (B) indicates approximate- view (Front: solid line, Rear: broken line).
move the selector lever to any other position, ly 50 cm from the front edge of the front
the driver’s side screen switches to the
Front-view mode.
bumper.
l When the switch is pressed at the vehicle l The Two Green lines (C) indicate the ap-
speed of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) or proximate vehicle width.
higher, only the side-view can be displayed l The Orange line (D) indicates an expec- 6
on the passenger’s side screen. ted course when the vehicle moves for-
l The front-view will not be displayed when ward with the steering wheel turned. It
the vehicle speed exceeds approximately disappears when the steering wheel is in
10 km/h (6 mph).
the neutral position.
l The display of the view may be delayed dur-
ing switching of the screen. l The approximate distance from the vehi-
cle body is as follows:
Rear-view mode
l
How to read the screen Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-
cle width and upper surface of the rear bump-
In any mode other than the Bird’s eye-view
er (A) are displayed on the screen.
mode, the lines in the screen give the follow-
ing information. Use them only as a guide. l The Red line (B) indicates approximate-
ly 50 cm behind the rear edge of the rear
bumper.
CAUTION l The Two Green lines (C) indicate the ap-
l When you accidentally hit the camera and its proximately vehicle width.
circumference against something, the view l The Orange line (D) indicates an expec-
and the lines in the screen may not be dis- ted course when the vehicle is reserved
played correctly. Be sure to have it inspected with the steering wheel turned. It disap-
by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized 1- Approximately 100 cm from the pears when the steering wheel is in the
Service Point. front edge of the front bumper neutral position.
l The approximate distance from the vehi-
cle body is as follows:

NOTE Therefore when there is an obstacle on the

upward slope, it appears farther than its ac-
l When the expected course lines are dis- tual position.
played in the rear-view, the expected course
lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye-
view (Front: broken line, Rear: solid line).
6
1- Approximately 100 cm from the rear
edge of the rear bumper
2- Approximately 200 cm from the rear
edge of the rear bumper A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen
Errors between the display and
CAUTION When there is an upward slope behind the
the actual road surface vehicle
l Due to the number of people in the vehicle, The reference lines for distance and vehicle
the fuel quantity, the weight and positioning The reference lines are displayed closer than
of luggage, and/or the condition of the road width are based on a level, flat road surface. the actual distance.
surface, the lines in the view from the rear- In the following cases, errors are produced
view camera may not be accurately posi- between the display reference lines and the
tioned relative to the actual road. distance on the actual road surface.
Use the reference lines only as a guideline,
and always do a safety check of your behind When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
and surroundings directly while driving. down with the weight of passengers and
luggage in the vehicle
The reference lines are displayed closer than
the actual distance.

Therefore when there is an obstacle on the Therefore when there is an obstacle on the However, the vehicle may hit the truck be-
upward slope, it appears farther than its ac- downward slope, it appears closer than its ac- cause the body of the truck strays onto the
tual position. tual position. course in reality.
A- Actual objects A- Actual objects

B- Objects shown on the screen B- Objects shown on the screen
When there is a downward slope behind When solid objects are located close to the
the vehicle vehicle
The reference lines are displayed farther than When solid objects are located close to the
the actual distance. vehicle, the displayed distance on the screen
may differ from the actual distance.
Because the reference lines do not contact the
body of the truck, it looks as if it would not
hit the vehicle in following illustration.

When approaching to solid objects Side-view mode Bird’s eye-view mode
The reference lines for distance and vehicle Reference lines for the vehicle width and the An overhead view in which the vehicle is
width are intended to indicate the distance to front end of the vehicle are displayed on the looked down is displayed so that you can
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. screen. easily identify the location of your vehicle
This may make the distance to a projecting and the course to enter the parking space.
object shown on the screen differ from the
actual distance to the projecting object. Do
not use them as a guide for distances to solid
objects.
6 Example: On the screen the point B appears
the nearest, then the point C and A in order of
distance. The points A and B actually are the
same distances from the vehicle, and the
point C is farther off than the points A and B.
1- Approximate vehicle width including the

door mirror.
2- Approximate location of the axle centre
of the front wheel.
3- Approximate 50 cm from the front edge
of the front bumper.

CAUTION NOTE CAUTION

l The bird’s eye-view is an simulated view l In the Bird’s eye-view mode, since the views l For reasons of safety, do not operate the
processed by combining view captured by captured by the four cameras, “Front-view switch while driving.
“Front-view camera”, “Side-view cameras camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and
(right and left)” and “Rear-view camera”. left)” and “Rear-view camera” are processed
Because of this, in the Bird’s eye-view based on a level flat road surface, an image 2. Press the switch (A) to display the bird’s
mode, objects will appear to be farther away may be displayed as follows: eye-view/front-view.
than they actually are. In addition, there are • An object appears to have fallen down
blind spots in the vicinity of the actual vehi- and looks longer or larger.
cle which are not displayed on the screen. • An object having a height from the road
You may crash your vehicle even if there surface may seem to appear from the joint 6
seems to be a little distance between your of the view composition processing re-
vehicle and an object, and there may be an gions.
object in the area where there seems to be l The brightness of the views from each cam-
nothing. Be sure to check the safety around era may vary depending on the illuminance
the vehicle with your own eyes. conditions.
l The vehicle icon displayed in the Bird’s eye- l An object above the camera is not displayed.
view mode differs from the actual vehicle in
l The object displayed in the Front-view mode
colour and size. Because of this, an object or the Rear-view mode may not be displayed
near the vehicle may appear to be in contact in the Bird’s eye-view mode.
with the vehicle, and the positional relation-
l The view in the Bird’s eye-view mode may
ship between the vehicle and the object may be displaced from its true position when the 3. Press and hold down the switch (A) until
differ from the actual one. mounting location and angle of each camera the vehicle icon blinks to enter the selec-
l The view composition processing regions are changed. tion mode of the vehicle icon colour in
are present in the four corners of the Bird’s
l The lines on the road may appear to be dis- the bird’s eye-view.
eye-view display, mainly at the boundary placed or bent at the joint of the views.
sections of views from each camera. Be-
4. Press the switch until the desired colour
cause of this, in the vicinity of the boundary appears on the display.
sections, the sharpness of the views may de- To change the vehicle icon col- Each time you press the switch, the vehi-
crease and an object may disappear and re- cle icon colour in the bird’s eye-view
appear on the screen. our in the bird’s eye-view will change to the next one.
It is possible to change the vehicle icon col- 5. When it is changed to your desired col-
our in the bird’s eye-view. our, press and hold the switch (A) for a
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. few seconds. This completes the setting.

Cargo loads
NOTE Loading a roof carrier CAUTION

l When the selection mode is in the following l When luggage is loaded onto the vehicle,
situations, the vehicle icon colour does not CAUTION please make sure to drive slowly and avoid
change. excessive manoeuvres such as sudden brak-
l Use a roof carrier that properly fits your ve-
• When you place the gearshift lever or the hicle. Do not load luggage directly onto the ing or quick turning.
selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) po- roof. In addition, place the luggage on the carrier
sition. For installation, refer to the instruction man- so that its weight is distributed evenly with
• When you do not operate anything for 30 ual accompanying the roof carrier. the heaviest items on the bottom. Do not
seconds. load items that are wider than the roof carri-
• The operation mode is put in OFF. er.
6 NOTE The additional weight on the roof could raise
the vehicle’s centre of gravity and affect ve-
Cargo loads l We recommend you to use a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS GENUINE roof carrier, since the
hicle handling characteristics.
As a result, driving errors or emergency ma-
brackets to be used have a special shape. For noeuvres could lead to a loss of control and
details, we recommend you to consult a result in an accident.
Cargo loads precautions MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- l Before driving and after travelling a short
ice Point. distance, always check the load to make sure
CAUTION it is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
l Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the Roof carrier precaution Check periodically during your travel that
the load remains secure.
top of the seatback. Be sure that your cargo
or luggage cannot move once your vehicle is CAUTION
moving. Having the rear view blocked, and
your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if l Make sure that the weight of the luggage NOTE
you suddenly have to brake can cause a seri- does not exceed the allowable roof load. l To prevent wind noise or reduction in fuel
ous accident or injury. If the allowable roof load is exceeded, this economy, remove the roof carrier when not
l Load heavy cargo or luggage in the front of may cause damage to the vehicle. in use.
the vehicle. If the load in the back of the ve- The roof load is the total allowable load on l Remove the roof carrier before using an au-
hicle is too heavy, steering may become un- the roof (the weight of the roof carrier plus tomatic car wash.
stable. the weight of luggage placed on the roof car- l Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
rier). tained for raising the sunroof (if so equip-
For the specific value, refer to “Vehicle ped) when installing a roof carrier.
weight” on page 11-05

Trailer towing
NOTE CAUTION Towing bar mounting specifica-

l Be sure that adequate clearance is main- l Danger of Accident!
tions
tained for raising the tailgate while loading A towing bar should be fitted according to
luggage on the roof carrier. MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines. See the following table for fixing points (A)
for the towing bar.
Trailer towing Maximum towable weight with

brake and maximum trailer-
In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, nose weight
when having a trailer towing device mounted 6
that meets all relevant regulations in your Never exceed the maximum towable weight
area, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- with brake and the maximum trailer-nose
thorized Service Point. weight as listed in the specifications.
Check that your towing bar coupling ball For the specific value, refer to “Vehicle
does not obscure your vehicle’s licence plate weight” on page 11-05.
when the trailer or caravan is disconnected. If If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than
it obscures the licence plate, please remove 1,000 m above sea-level, reduce your weight
the towing bar coupling ball. And if the tow- by 10 % of the gross combination weight for
ing bar coupling ball is lockable by using a every increase of 1,000 m above sea-level, as
key or any kind of tools, please remove the the engine output is lowered owing to de-
coupling ball and use a towing bar coupling crease in atmospheric pressure.
ball which can be removed or repositioned
without the use of a key or any kind of tools
instead.
The regulations concerning the towing of a
trailer may differ from country to country.
You are advised to obey the regulations in
each area.
1 390 mm
2 50 mm

Trailer towing
3 21 mm l Be sure that the driving speed does not CAUTION

exceed 100 km/h (62 mph) for trailer op-
4 68.5 mm eration. l On vehicles equipped with CVT, if the
It is also recommended that you obey the warning display is showing, the temperature
5 328.5 mm
of the automatic transmission fluid, CVT
local regulations in case driving speed
6 75 mm fluid is high.
with a trailer is limited to less than Read the reference page and take the re-
7 858 mm 100 km/h (62 mph). quired measures.
8 489 mm l To prevent shocks from the overrun Refer to “ When a malfunction occurs in the
(at kerb weight condition) brake, depress the brake pedal lightly at CVT ” on page 6-37
6 372-382 mm first and then more strongly.
(at laden condition) l To make full use of engine braking,
change to a lower shift point before de-
9 500 mm scending a slope.
(at kerb weight condition)
10 524 mm Overheating
(at kerb weight condition) This will normally occur as a result of some
11 455.5 mm mechanical failure. If your vehicle should
overheat, stop and check for a loose or bro-
12 495 mm ken water pump/alternator drive belt, a
13 534.5 mm blocked radiator air intake or a low coolant
level. If these items are satisfactory the over-
Operating hints heating could be caused by a number of me-
chanical causes that would have to be
l To prevent the clutch from slipping (Ve- checked at a competent service centre.
hicle with a M/T only), do not rev the
engine more than is required when start- CAUTION
ing off.
l If the engine overheats, reference should be
made to “Engine overheating” section of
“For emergencies” prior to taking any cor-
rective action.

For pleasant driving
Important air conditioning operation tips............................................7-02 Ashtray*.............................................................................................. 7-79

Ventilators........................................................................................... 7-02 Accessory socket.................................................................................7-80
Automatic air conditioning*............................................................... 7-05 Interior lamps...................................................................................... 7-80
Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning*......................7-10 Storage spaces..................................................................................... 7-83
Customizing the air conditioning........................................................7-15 Drink holder........................................................................................ 7-84
Air purifier.......................................................................................... 7-22 Bottle holder........................................................................................7-85
LW/MW/FM radio/CD player*.......................................................... 7-22 Cargo area cover*............................................................................... 7-85 7
Handling of Discs................................................................................7-25 Assist grips..........................................................................................7-87
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)..........................................................7-26 Coat hook............................................................................................ 7-87
Important Points on Safety for the Customer......................................7-30 Luggage hooks.................................................................................... 7-87
Operation Keys................................................................................... 7-31 Convenient hook................................................................................. 7-88
Listening to the Radio......................................................................... 7-34 Luggage floor board............................................................................7-88
Listening to DAB*.............................................................................. 7-35
Listening to Traffic Messages............................................................. 7-37
Listening to CDs................................................................................. 7-37
Listening to MP3s............................................................................... 7-38
Listening to an iPod............................................................................ 7-39
Listening to Audio Files on a USB Device.........................................7-41
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice opera-
tion (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)................................. 7-43
Listening to Bluetooth Audio*............................................................7-46
Display Indicator.................................................................................7-48
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment................................ 7-49
System Settings................................................................................... 7-50
Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 7-54
Link System*...................................................................................... 7-56
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface*....................................................................7-56
USB input terminal*........................................................................... 7-76
Sun visors............................................................................................7-78
OGKE18E5
Important air conditioning operation tips
Important air conditioning l When operating the system, make sure During a long period of disuse
the air intake, which is located in front
operation tips of the windscreen, is free of obstructions The air conditioning should be operated for at
such as leaves and snow. Leaves collec- least 5 minutes each week, even in cold
CAUTION ted in the air-intake plenum may reduce weather. This is to prevent poor lubrication of
air flow and plug the plenum water the compressor internal parts and to maintain
l The engine speed may increase when the air
conditioning is operating. drains. the air conditioning in the best operating con-
With an increased engine speed, a CVT ve- dition.
hicle will creep to a greater degree than with Air conditioning system refrig-
a lower engine speed. Fully depress the
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
erant and lubricant recommen- Ventilators
dations
7 creeping.
If the air conditioning seems less effective

l Park the vehicle in the shade. than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
Parking in the hot sun will make the ve- leak. We recommend you to have the system
hicle inside extremely hot, and it will re- inspected.
quire more time to cool the interior. The air conditioning system in your vehicle
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open must be charged with the refrigerant
the windows for the first few minutes of HFO-1234yf and the lubricant PAG46A.
air conditioning operation to expel the Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
hot air. cause severe damage which will result in the
l Close the windows when the air condi- need to replace your vehicle’s entire air con-
tioning is in use. The entry of outside air ditioning system. The release of refrigerant
through open windows will reduce the 1- Centre ventilators
into the atmosphere should be prevented. 2- Side ventilators
cooling efficiency. It is recommended that the refrigerant be re-
l Too much cooling is not good for the covered and recycled for further use.
health. The inside air temperature should Adjusting the air flow direction
only be 5 to 6 °C below the outside air
temperature. Centre ventilators
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
7-02 For pleasant driving OGKE18E5

Ventilators
To close the ventilator, move the knob (A) to 1. Open
the inside as far as possible. 2. Close
CAUTION
l Be careful not to spill beverages, etc., into
the ventilators.
Doing so might cause the air conditioning
not to function normally.
NOTE
l The cool air from the ventilators may appear
7
as a mist.
This is due to moist air being suddenly
cooled by the air conditioning. This will
1. Close
clear after a few moments.
2. Open
Side ventilators
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
To close the ventilator, move the knob (A) to
the outside as far as possible.
Left Right
OGKE18E5 For pleasant driving 7-03

Ventilators
Changing the position of air flowing from the ventilators

Each time the MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes to the next one in the following sequence: “ ”→“ ”→“ ”→“ ”→
“ ”.
To change to the “ ” position, press the demister switch.
These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the ventilators.
: Small amount of air from the ventilators

: Medium amount of air from the ventilators
: Large amount of air from the ventilators
7 The mode selection and air flowing from the ventilators
Face position Foot/Face position Foot position
Foot/Demister position Demister position

Automatic air conditioning*
NOTE
l As your vehicle is equipped with the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system, the windows may start to fog up while the AS&G system is operating.
If this occurs, press the demister switch to remove fog from the windows.
l When using the “ ” or “ ” position, set the outside position to prevent the windows from fogging up.

The air conditioning can only be used while
the engine is running.
7
1. Temperature control switch ® p. 7-07 7. AUTO switch ® p. 7-07 l Usage

2. MODE switch ® p. 7-04 8. Rear window demister switch ® p. 5-67 • Changing the position of air flowing
3. A/C switch ® p. 7-08 9. OFF switch ® p. 7-06 from the ventilators ® p. 7-04
4. Blower speed selection switch 10. Temperature display ® p. 7-07 • Demisting of the windscreen and door
® p. 7-07 11. Mode selection display ® p. 7-04 windows ® p. 7-06
5. Air selection switch ® p. 7-08 12. Air conditioning indicator ® p. 7-08 • Operating the system in automatic
6. Demister switch ® p. 7-06 13. Blower speed display ® p. 7-07 mode ® p. 7-07
• Operating the system in manual mode Demisting of the windscreen CAUTION
® p. 7-07 and door windows
• Adjusting the blower speed l When setting the MODE switch to the
® p. 7-07 “ ” position, it also can prevent the win-
dows from fogging up. But the air condition-
• Adjusting the temperature control
ing system does not operate automatically
® p. 7-07 and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
• Switching the air conditioning system air) is not selected. If operating the air con-
ON/OFF ® p. 7-08 ditioning system and switching to outside
• Switching outside air and recirculated air, press the A/C switch and the air selec-
air ® p. 7-08 tion switch.
• Driving in polluted outside air condi- l Do not set the temperature to the max. cool
7 tions ® p. 7-09
position. Cool air will blow against the win-
dow glasses and prevent demisting.
NOTE
NOTE
l In extreme cold, the air conditioning control 1. Press the demister switch to change to
panel screen may operate sluggishly. This l When demisting quick, set the blower to the
does not indicate a problem. the “ ” position. When the demister maximum speed and the temperature to the
It will disappear when the vehicle interior switch is pressed, the indication lamp highest position.
temperature rises to a normal temperature. (A) comes on. l To demist the door windows effectively, di-
2. Set the temperature rather high by using rect the air flowing of the side ventilators to-
the temperature control switch. wards the door windows.
3. Select your desired blower speed by l When the demister switch is pressed, the air
conditioning system automatically operates
pressing the blower speed selection and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
switch. air) is selected. This automatic switching
control is carried out to prevent misting of
Press the demister switch, AUTO switch, the windows even if “Disable automatic air
MODE switch or OFF switch to turn off the conditioning control” or “Disable automatic
demister mode. air control” is set. (Refer to “Customizing
the air conditioning” on page 7-15.)
CAUTION
l For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.

Operating the system in auto- NOTE Adjusting the blower speed

matic mode l If the blower speed selection switch, A/C Press of the blower speed selection
switch, MODE switch, or air selection switch to increase the blower speed.
switch is operated while the system is oper- Press of the blower speed selection
ating in the AUTO mode, the activated func- switch to decrease the blower speed.
tion overrides the corresponding function of The selected blower speed (A) will be shown
automatic control. All other functions re-
in the display.
main under automatic control.
l Never place anything on top of the interior
air temperature sensor (B), which will pre-
vent it from functioning properly.
7
In normal conditions, use the system in the

AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Push the AUTO switch.
2. Set the temperature control switch to the
desired temperature.
Adjusting the temperature con-
Press the OFF switch to turn off the air con- Operating the system in man- trol
ditioning system. ual mode Press of the temperature control switch to
The mode selection, blower speed adjust-
Blower speed and ventilator mode may be increase the temperature.
ment, recirculated/outside air selection, tem-
controlled manually by setting the blower Press of the temperature control switch to
perature adjustment, and air conditioning
speed selection switch and the MODE switch decrease the temperature.
ON/OFF status are all controlled automatical-
ly. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the in- to the desired positions.
dication lamp (A) comes on. To return to automatic operation, press the
AUTO switch.

The selected temperature (A) will be shown NOTE Press the switch again to switch it off.
in the display.
ditioning will be automatically changed as
follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manual-
ly after an automatic changeover, manual
operation will be selected.
• When the temperature is set to the highest
setting (HI).
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioning will stop.
• When the temperature is set to the lowest
setting (LO).
7 Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate.
l The settings described above are the factory
Switching outside air and recir-
settings.
NOTE The air selection and air conditioning culated air
switches can be customized (function setting
l The temperature value of air conditioning is To change the air selection, simply press the
changed), and the automatic switching of
switched in conjunction with outside temper- air selection switch.
outside air and the air conditioning accord-
ature display unit of the multi-information l Outside air: Indication lamp (A) is OFF
ing to operating conditions can be changed
display.
as desired. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on
page 5-16.
For further information, we recommend you ger compartment.
l While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of air flowing will not be
Refer to “Customizing the air conditioning”
changed, even if you have selected warm air
on page 7-15.
with the switch.
To prevent the windscreen and windows
from fogging up, the mode selection will be Switching the air conditioning
changed to “ ” and the blower speed will
be reduced while the system is operating in system ON/OFF
the AUTO mode. Press the switch to turn the air conditioning
l When the temperature is set to the highest or on, the “ ” indicator (A) will be shown in
the lowest, the air selection and the air con- the display.

l Recirculated air: Indication lamp (A) is CAUTION NOTE
ON
Air is recirculated inside the passenger l Normally, use the outside position to prevent l When the engine coolant temperature rises
the windows from fogging up. to a certain level, the air selection is auto-
compartment.
Use of the recirculation position for exten- matically switched to the recirculation posi-
ded time may cause the windows to fog up. tion and the indication lamp (A) comes on.
Switch to the outside position periodically to At this time, the system will not switch to
increase ventilation. the outside position even if the air selection
switch is pressed.
NOTE
Driving in polluted outside air
l If effective cooling performance is desired,
conditions
use the recirculation position. 7
l When pressing the AUTO switch after man- If the outside air is dusty or otherwise conta-
ual operation, the air selection switch is also minated when driving through a tunnel or in
controlled automatically.
a traffic jam, select the recirculation position
by pressing the air selection switch.
Refer to “Switching outside air and recircula-
ted air” on page 7-08.

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning*
Dual-zone automatic climate

control air conditioning*
The air conditioning can only be used while
the engine is running.
1. Driver’s side temperature control switch 6. Air selection switch ® p. 7-14 15. Blower speed display ® p. 7-12
(LHD vehicles) ® p. 7-12 7. Demister switch ® p. 7-11 16. Passenger’s side temperature display
Passenger’s side temperature control 8. AUTO switch ® p. 7-12 (LHD vehicles) ® p. 7-12
switch (RHD vehicles) ® p. 7-12 9. SYNC switch ® p. 7-13 Driver’s side temperature display (RHD
2. MODE switch ® p. 7-04 10. Rear window demister switch ® p. 5-67 vehicles) ® p. 7-12
3. Blower speed selection switch 11. OFF switch ® p. 7-11
® p. 7-12 12. Driver’s side temperature display (LHD l Usage
4. A/C switch ® p. 7-14 vehicles) ® p. 7-12 • Changing the position of air flowing
5. Passenger’s side temperature control Passenger’s side temperature display from the ventilators ® p. 7-04
switch (LHD vehicles) ® p. 7-12 (RHD vehicles) ® p. 7-12 • Demisting of the windscreen and door
Driver’s side temperature control switch 13. Mode selection display ® p. 7-07 windows ® p. 7-11
(RHD vehicles) ® p. 7-12 14. Air conditioning indicator ® p. 7-14

• Operating the system in automatic Demisting of the windscreen CAUTION
mode ® p. 7-12 and door windows
• Operating the system in manual mode l For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
® p. 7-12
• Adjusting the blower speed l When setting the MODE switch to the
“ ” position, it also can prevent the win-
® p. 7-12 dows from fogging up. But the air condition-
• Adjusting the temperature control ing system does not operate automatically
® p. 7-12 and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
• To control the driver’s side and the air) is not selected. If operating the air con-
passenger’s side temperature inde- ditioning system and switching to outside
pendently ® p. 7-13 air, press the A/C switch and the air selec-
• Switching the air conditioning system
l
tion switch.
Do not set the temperature to the max. cool
7
ON/OFF ® p. 7-14 position. Cool air will blow against the win-
• Switching outside air and recirculated dow glasses and prevent demisting.
air ® p. 7-14
• Driving in polluted outside air condi- 1. Press the demister switch to change to
tions ® p. 7-14 the “ ” position. When the demister NOTE
switch is pressed, the indication lamp l When demisting quick, set the blower to the
NOTE (A) comes on. maximum speed and the temperature to the
2. Set the temperature rather high by using highest position.
l In extreme cold, the air conditioning control the driver’s side temperature control l To demist the door windows effectively, di-
panel screen may operate sluggishly. This rect the air flowing of the side ventilators to-
does not indicate a problem. switch. wards the door windows.
It will disappear when the vehicle interior 3. Select your desired blower speed by
l When the demister switch is pressed, the air
temperature rises to a normal temperature. pressing the blower speed selection conditioning system automatically operates
switch. and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
air) is selected. This automatic switching
Press the demister switch, AUTO switch, control is carried out to prevent misting of
MODE switch or OFF switch to turn off the the windows even if “Disable automatic air
conditioning control” or “Disable automatic
demister mode. air control” is set. (Refer to “Customizing
the air conditioning” on page 7-15.)

Operating the system in auto- NOTE Press of the blower speed selection
matic mode switch to decrease the blower speed.
l If the blower speed selection switch, A/C The selected blower speed (A) will be shown
switch, MODE switch, or air selection
in the display.
switch is operated while the system is oper-
ating in the AUTO mode, the activated func-
tion overrides the corresponding function of
automatic control. All other functions re-
main under automatic control.
l Never place anything on top of the interior
air temperature sensor (B), which will pre-
vent it from functioning properly.
7
In normal conditions, use the system in the

AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Press the AUTO switch.
Adjusting the temperature con-
2. Set the temperature control switch to the trol
desired temperature. Press of the temperature control switch to
increase the temperature.
Press the OFF switch to turn off the air con- Operating the system in man- Press of the temperature control switch to
ditioning system. ual mode decrease the temperature.
The mode selection, blower speed adjust-
ment, recirculated/outside air selection, tem- Blower speed and ventilator mode may be
perature adjustment, and air conditioning controlled manually by setting the blower
ON/OFF status are all controlled automatical- speed selection switch and the MODE switch
ly. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the in- to the desired positions.
dication lamp (A) comes on. Adjusting the blower speed
Press of the blower speed selection
switch to increase the blower speed.

The selected temperature (A) will be shown NOTE To control the driver’s side and
in the display. the passenger’s side tempera-
ditioning will be automatically changed as
follows. ture independently
Also, if the air selection is operated manual-
ly after an automatic changeover, manual
When the indication lamp (A) goes off by
operation will be selected. pressing the passenger’s side temperature
• When the temperature is set to the highest control switch (B) or the SYNC switch, the
setting (HI). driver’s side and the passenger’s side temper-
Outside air will be introduced and the air ature can be controlled independently.
conditioning will stop.
• When the temperature is set to the lowest
setting (LO).
Inside air will be recirculated and the air 7
conditioning will operate.
l The settings described above are the factory
settings.
NOTE The air selection and air conditioning
switches can be customized (function setting
l The temperature value of air conditioning is changed), and the automatic switching of
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
outside air and the air conditioning accord-
ature display unit of the multi-information
ing to operating conditions can be changed
display.
as desired.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on
page 5-16.
l While the engine coolant temperature is low,
thorized Service Point. NOTE
the temperature of air flowing will not be
Refer to “Customizing the air conditioning”
changed, even if you have selected warm air
on page 7-15.
l When the indication lamp (A) comes on by
with the switch. pressing the SYNC switch, the passenger’s
To prevent the windscreen and windows side temperature will be controlled to the
from fogging up, the mode selection will be same setting temperature as the driver’s side.
changed to “ ” and the blower speed will When the indication lamp (A) illuminates, if
be reduced while the system is operating in the driver’s side temperature control switch
the AUTO mode. is pressed, the passenger’s side setting tem-
perature will be synchronized to the driver’s
l When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest, the air selection and the air con- side.

Switching the air conditioning l Recirculated air: Indication lamp (A) is NOTE
system ON/OFF ON
Air is recirculated inside the passenger l When the engine coolant temperature rises
Press the switch to turn the air conditioning to a certain level, the air selection is auto-
compartment.
on, the “ ” indicator (A) will be shown in matically switched to the recirculation posi-
tion and the indication lamp (A) comes on.
the display.
At this time, the system will not switch to
Press the switch again to switch it off. the outside position even if the air selection
switch is pressed.
Driving in polluted outside air

7 conditions
If the outside air is dusty or otherwise conta-
minated when driving through a tunnel or in
a traffic jam, select the recirculation position
by pressing the air selection switch.
Refer to “Switching outside air and recircula-
CAUTION ted air” on page 7-14.
l Normally, use the outside position to prevent
Switching outside air and recir- the windows from fogging up.
Use of the recirculation position for exten-
culated air ded time may cause the windows to fog up.
To change the air selection, simply press the Switch to the outside position periodically to
air selection switch. increase ventilation.
l Outside air: Indication lamp (A) is OFF
Outside air is introduced into the passen- NOTE
ger compartment.
l If effective cooling performance is desired,
use the recirculation position.
l When pressing the AUTO switch after man-
ual operation, the air selection switch is also
controlled automatically.

Customizing the air conditioning

The following customise functions can be applied.
Modification method
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI
Item Setting content Factory setting Automatic cli- Smart phone
Multi-Commu- MOTORS Au-
mate control Link Display
nication System thorized Service
panel Audio*1
(MMCS)*2 Point
Recirculation control*3 Allow you to se-
lect the function 7
that switches au-
tomatically or Automatically ○ ○ ○ ○
manually be-
tween recirculate
and refresh mode.
*1: Refer to Smartphone Link Display Audio instruction for procedure details.
*2: Refer to MMCS instruction for procedure details.
*3: When the demister switch is pushed, the air conditioning is automatically switched to refresh mode to prevent fogging of the window even if
the air conditioning is set to the manual mode.

*4: When the demister switch is pushed, the air conditioning is automatically switched to ON mode to prevent fogging of the window even if the
air conditioning is set to the manual mode.

*5: During economical driving, you may feel that the air conditioning does not work sufficiently because operation of the air conditioning con-
trolled.

Modification method
panel Audio*1
(MMCS)*2 Point
A/C switch control*4 Allows you to se-
lect the function
that switches au-
tomatically or
Automatically ○ ○ ○ ○
manually be-
7 tween ON and
OFF mode of air
conditioning.


trolled.

Modification method
panel Audio*1
(MMCS)*2 Point
ECO mode*5 Allows you to se-
lect the function
that operates or
does not operate
economical driv-
ing for air condi-
ECO – ○ ○ ○
7
tioning during
ECO mode oper-
ation (For only
vehicles with
ECO mode
switch).


trolled.

Modification method
panel Audio*1
(MMCS)*2 Point
Foot/Demister airflow ratio When you select
by MODE
switch, this al-
lows you to set
the ratio between Normal – ○ ○ ○
7 ventilation to
your feet and
ventilation to the
window.


trolled.

Modification method
panel Audio*1
(MMCS)*2 Point
Face/Foot airflow ratio When you select
by MODE
switch, this al-
lows you to set
the ratio between Normal – ○ ○ ○
ventilation to 7
your upper body
and ventilation to
your feet.


trolled.

Modification method
panel Audio*1
(MMCS)*2 Point
Automatic rear operation Allows you to se-
demist at engine start lect the function
that switches auto
or manual opera-
tion of the rear
7 demister at the
Off – ○ ○ ○
engine start when
the outside air
temperature is
low.


trolled.

Modification method
panel Audio*1
(MMCS)*2 Point
Setting temperature When you feel
that it is hot or
cold to the setting
temperature, it is
Normal – – – ○
possible to adjust
so that you can 7
feel more com-
fortable.


trolled.
Customizing the automatic cli- l When the setting is changed from enable
mate control panel to disable 3 sounds are emitted and the
indicator*2 flashes three times.
A setting can be changed by holding down
the switch*1 for approximately 10 seconds or *1 In case of A/C switch control customizing,
more. the A/C switch is appropriated.
In case of recirculation control customizing, the
air selection switch is appropriated.

Air purifier
l When the setting is changed from disa- NOTE Important Points on Usage
ble to enable 2 sounds are emitted and
the indicator*2 flashes three times. l To listen to the audio system while the en-
gine is not running, turn the ignition switch iPod/iPhone Playback Func-
to the “ACC” position or put the operation tion*
Air purifier mode in ACC.
l This product supports audio playback
If the ignition switch or the operation mode
is left in ACC, the accessory power will au- from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif-
An air filter has been incorporated into this fering versions mean that playback can-
tomatically turn off after a certain period of
air conditioning so that dirt and dust are time and you will no longer be able to use not be guaranteed.
cleaned from the air. the audio system. The accessory power l Please be aware that depending on the
Replace the air filter periodically as its ability comes on again if the ignition switch or the iPod/iPhone model or version, operation
to clean the air will be reduced as it collects engine switch is operated with it in the
7 pollen and dirt. For the maintenance interval, “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-
may differ.
refer to the “SERVICE BOOKLET”. cutout function” on pages 6-14 and 6-17.
l If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, How to Clean
it may create noise from the audio equip-
NOTE ment. This does not mean that anything is
l If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
wrong with your audio equipment. In such a soft cloth.
l Operation in certain conditions such as driv- case, use the cellular phone at a place as far l If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the neutral detergent diluted in water, and
away as possible from the audio equipment.
air conditioning can lead to reduction of
l If foreign objects or water get into the audio then wrung out. Do not use benzene,
service life of the filter. When you feel that
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour thinners, or other chemical wipes. This
the air flow is lower than normal or when
comes from it, immediately turn off the au- may harm the surface.
the windscreen or windows start to fog up
dio system. We recommend you to have it
easily, replace the air filter.
checked. Never try to repair it by yourself.
We recommend you to have it checked.
Avoid continuous usage without inspection Trademarks
by a qualified person.
l Product names and other proper names
LW/MW/FM radio/CD are the trademarks or registered trade-
marks of their respective owners.
player* *2 In case of A/C switch control customizing, l Furthermore, even if there is no specific
The audio system can only be used when the the “ ” indicator in the display is ap- denotation of trademarks or registered
ignition switch or the operation mode is in propriated. trademarks, these are to be observed in
ON or ACC. In case of recirculation control customizing, their entirety.
the air selection switch indication lamp is
appropriated.
LW/MW/FM radio/CD player*
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other NOTE
countries.
Apple is not responsible for the opera- l For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
tion of this device or its compliance with the types of devices that can be connected
may vary.
safety and regulatory standards.
For details, access the MITSUBISHI
MOTORS website.
“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
NOTE Please read and agree to the “Warning about
Links to the Web Sites of Other Compa-
been designed to connect specifically to l iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual nies”.
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has users to privately reproduce and play back The websites mentioned above may connect
been certified by the developer to meet non- copyrighted material as well as material you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
that may be legally copied and reproduced.
Apple performance standards. Infringement of copyright is prohibited.
MOTORS website.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
7
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
ucts/index.html
and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple

LW/MW/FM radio/CD player*
5th generation 5th generation

(video) (video)
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

(video camera)
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminium)

Handling of Discs
Important Points on Handling l If discs are not going to be used for a

long period of time, remove these from
l Fingerprints or other marks on the read the product.
surface of the disc may result in its con-
4th generation
8GB 32GB 64GB
3rd generation
32GB 64GB
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one
edge and the centre hole, in order that In cold environments such as in mid-winter
the read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
l Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to
2nd generation 1st generation
8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (wa-
l Do not forcefully insert a disc if another ter droplets) to form on the disc and internal
is already within the device. This can re- optical components, and this may prevent the 7
sult in damage to discs, or malfunction. product from operating correctly.
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait
Cleaning a short time before use.
l Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright

disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a
8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB circular motion. Instead, wipe gently Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
outwards from the centre of the disc to broadcast, public performance, or rental of
the outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use
l New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
Handling of Discs outer edge or in the hole in the centre.
Ensure you check for these. If there are
Types of Disc That Can Be
This explains care that should be taken in the burrs, these may lead to faulty operation, Played Back
handling of discs. therefore ensure these are removed. The following marks are printed on the disc
label, package, or jacket.
Important Points on Storage
l When not using discs, ensure these are
kept in cases, and stored out of direct
sunlight.

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)
Maxi- l Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs l Playback of other than standard CDs is
mum (for example, heart-shaped), as these not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be
Type Size play- Comments may result in malfunction. Additionally, played back, the audio quality cannot be
back discs that have transparent portions may guaranteed.
time not be played back. l When playing back other than standard
l Discs that have not been finalized cannot CDs, the following may occur.
CD-DA 12 74 mi- — be played back. • There may be noise during playback.
cm nutes
l Even if recorded using the correct for- • There may be jumping in the audio.
mat on a recorder or computer, applica- • The disc may not be recognized.
tion software settings and environments; • The first track may not be played
CD-TEXT 12 74 mi- —
disc peculiarities, damage, or marking; back.
cm nutes
7 or dirt or condensation on the lens inside • It may take longer than usual until
the product may render the disc unplaya- start of playback of tracks.
ble. • Playback may start from within the
CD-R/RW 12 — •Disc contain- l Depending on the disc, some functions track.
cm ing MP3 files may not be used, or the disc may not • Some parts may not be played back.
play back. • Tracks may freeze during playback.
l Do not use discs with cracks or warps. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously.
l If the disc has stickers affixed, remains
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe- Audio Files (MP3/WMA/
sive, then do not use the disc.
l Discs that have decorative labels or AAC)
Discs That May Not Be Played stickers may not be used.
Back This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
l Playback of discs other than those de-

Nonstandard CDs format audio files recorded on CD-ROM,
CD-R/RW, and USB devices.
scribed in “Types of Disc That Can Be This product will play back audio CDs, how- There are limitations on the files and media
Played Back” is not guaranteed. ever please be aware of the following points that can be used, therefore read the following
l 8 cm discs may not be used. regarding CD standards. prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format
l Ensure that you use discs with on the audio files on discs or USB devices.
label surface. Additionally, ensure you read the user man-
uals for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing
software, and ensure these are used correctly.

If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files in- NOTE You can create a folder structure as in Genre -
cludes title information or other data, then Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC
this can be displayed. l Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be format audio files) for management of tracks.
played back.
CAUTION
Data Formats That Can Be ROOT
l CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
Played Back
Folder
play back MP3 format audio files.
Audio file
l Actions such as copying audio CDs or files Data formats that can be played on discs
and either distributing these to others for (CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
free or for charge, or uploading files via the fer.
Internet or other means to servers is an in-
fringement of the law. Data format DISC USB device 7
l Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
“.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than MP3
MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
discs with these types of files recorded upon WMA X
them may cause the files to be incorrectly AAC X 1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
identified for playback, which may lead to
loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or Folder Structure
accident.
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized.
NOTE
l Depending on the condition of the disc re-
corder or recording software used, correct
playback may not be possible. In these ca-
ses, refer to the user manual for your product
or software.
l Depending on your computer’s operating
system, version, software, or settings, files
may not have a file extension appended. In
these cases, append the file extensions
“.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
the files.

Speci- Speci- NOTE

Name fica- Explanation Name fica- Explanation
tion tion l The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ-
ISO96 Level Maximum 8 Maxi- 700 folders (including root) ent to how they are displayed on a computer.
60 1 character file mum
name, and 3 folder What Is MP3?
character file number
extension. (sin- MP3 is the abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of “Mo-
gle-byte alpha- mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA,
Format numeric capital tion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a vid-
specifica- number*1 and AAC files not included) eo compression standard used in video CDs,
7 tions
letters, numer-
als, “_” may be File name Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni- etc.
used) and fold- code, 32 characters), files/folders MP3 is one of the audio compression meth-
er name with file/folder names longer ods contained in the MPEG audio standard,
ISO96 Joliet Files names up and reduces the quality of sounds that are be-
restric- than this will not be displayed or
60 ex- to a maximum yond the auditory resolution of the human ear
tions played back.
tension 64 characters and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
can be used. USB sup- The recommended file system is creating high-quality data with a lower data
ported FAT32. size.
Multises- Not supported (only first session
formats 1 partition only This can compress CD audio to approximate-
sion supported)
*1: Do not include other than ly 1/10 its original data size without percepti-
Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st lev- ble loss, approximately 10 CDs can be writ-
mum el) MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if storing
many tracks within the same folder, these ten to a single CD-R/RW disc.
number
of levels may not be recognized even if less than the
*1:
maximum number of tracks. In these cases, CAUTION
Do not include other than divide the tracks up into multiple folders.
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if storing l MP3 files different to the standards at right
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
many tracks within the same folder, these names may not be displayed correctly.
may not be recognized even if less than the
maximum number of tracks. In these cases,
divide the tracks up into multiple folders.

Standards for MP3 Files That Item Details Standards for WMA Files That
Can Be Played Back Maximum 64 characters
Can Be Played Back
Specifications for MP3 files that can be number of Specifications for WMA files that can be
played are as shown below. characters played are as shown below.
that can be
Item Details indicated on Item Details
Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3 the display Specification Windows Media Audio Ver-
sion 7.0/8.0/9.0
MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3 What Is WMA?
Sampling fre- MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48 Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
WMA is the abbreviation of Windows Media
quency [kHz] quency [kHz]
MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24 Audio, and this is an audio compression for-
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression Bit rate 48 to 320
7
Bit rate [kbps] MPEG-1: 32 to 320 format that has a higher compression ratio [kbps]
MPEG-2: 8 to 160 than MP3. VBR Support
VBR (varia- Support (variable bit
ble bit rate) NOTE rate)
Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual l Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel Stereo/Monaural
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- mode
mode channel/ Monaural
poration (USA) and in other countries.
File exten- mp3 File exten- wma
sion sion
CAUTION Supported tag WMA tags
Supported tag ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
information Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4 l WMA supports digital rights management information Title name, Artist name, Al-
(DRM). This product cannot play back bum name
(ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni- WMA files protected using this system.
code)), Titles, Artist name, l WMA files different to the standards at right Maximum 64 characters
Album name may not play back correctly, or file/folder number of
names may not be displayed correctly. characters
l “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- that can be
ported.
indicated on
the display

Important Points on Safety for the Customer
What is AAC? Item Details WARNING

AAC is the abbreviation of Advanced Audio Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
l The driver should not pay close attention
Coding, and this is an audio compression [kbps] to the display while driving.
MPEG2 8 to 320
standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”. This may prevent the driver looking
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3, VBR (variable bit Support where they are going, and cause an acci-
with comparable audio quality. rate) dent.
l The driver should not perform complica-
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural ted operations while driving.
CAUTION File extension m4a
Performing complicated operations while
driving may prevent the driver looking
l AAC supports digital rights management
Supported tag infor- AAC tags or ID3 where they are going, and cause an acci-
(DRM). This product cannot play back AAC dent.
7 files protected using this system. mation tags
Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca-
l AAC files different to the standards at right Title, Artist name,
tion before performing such operations.
may not play back correctly, or file/folder Album name
names may not be displayed correctly. l Do not use during malfunctions, such as
Maximum number of 64 characters when no sound is audible.
characters that can be This may lead to accident, fire, or electric
Standards for AAC Files That indicated on the dis- shock.
Can Be Played Back play l Ensure water or other foreign objects do
not enter the product.
Specifications for AAC files that can be This may lead to smoking, fire, electric
played are as shown below. Important Points on Safety shock, or malfunction.
l Do not insert foreign objects into the disc
Item Details for the Customer slot.
This may lead to fire, electric shock, or
Specification Advanced Audio This product features a number of pictorial malfunction.
Coding indications as well as points concerning han- l In the event of abnormalities occurring
MPEG4/AAC-LC dling so that you can use the product correct- when foreign objects or water enter the
MPEG2/AAC-LC ly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent in- product, resulting in smoke or a strange
Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05 smell, immediately stop using the product,
jury or damage to yourself, other users, or and consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
frequency /24/32/44.1/48 property. Authorized Service Point.
[kHz] Continuing to use the product may result
MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05
in accident, fire, or electric shock.
/24/32/44.1/48

Operation Keys
WARNING
l Do not disassemble or modify the prod-
uct.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or
electric shock.
l During thunderstorms, do not touch the
antenna or the front panel.
This may lead to electrical shock from
lightning.
CAUTION Turn the power on, and resume playback Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to in- 7
l Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks from the previous status. crease, and counter- clockwise to de-
on the product. crease the volume.
Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may 2. Press the PWR/VOL key.
prevent heat from escaping from within the Turn the power OFF.
product, leading to fire or malfunction. NOTE
l Do not turn the volume up to the extent that l The maximum value for volume is 45, and
you cannot hear sounds from outside the ve- NOTE the minimum is 0.
hicle while driving. l The initial setting for volume is “17”.
Driving without being able to hear sounds l Hold down the steering MODE button to al-
so turn the audio function ON/OFF.
from outside the vehicle may result in an ac-
cident. Insert/Eject Discs
l Do not insert your hand or fingers into the Adjusting the Volume 1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
disc slot.
This may result in injury. 1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the label surface up.
volume.
Operation Keys
Turn the Power ON/ OFF
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.

Operation Keys
Disc slot
Disc
*Label side
7 Push the disc in a certain amount, and

the product will pull the disc in, and
playback will start.
2. Press the key.

This will eject the disc from the product,
so remove the disc.
CAUTION
l When replacing discs, first ensure that the
vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
ping is permitted.
l Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
injury, smoking, or fire.
l 8 cm CDs are not supported.

Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 6- PWR/VOL key 12- PAGE key

Use to eject a disc. Adjust the volume, and turn the power Display indicator page advance.
2- 3 key/4 key ON/OFF. 13- 5 key
For audio, rewind/fast forward. 7- MEDIA key Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*, and use as
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4. Switch between CD and other sources. preset key 5 for radio.
3- 2RDM key 8- DISP key 14- 6 key
For audio, play random playback; for ra- Switch the content of the display. Return during audio track search, and
dio, use as preset key 2. 9- PTY/SCAN key stop Bluetooth Audio*.
4- 1RPT key For audio, play scan playback; for radio, For radio, use as preset key 6.
For audio, play repeat playback; for ra- search PTY. 15- key/ key
dio, use as preset key 1. 10- TP key For audio, select audio track/file; for ra-
5- RADIO key Receive traffic messages. dio, perform automatic station selection.
Switch the radio and the band. 11- Disc slot
*Requires a separately-purchased Bluetooth-capable audio device in equipment by type (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).

Listening to the Radio
16- MENU key 17- /SEL key
Switch to Menu mode. Adjust audio quality and select items.
For radio, manually select stations.
Steering wheel audio remote 3- MODE Key Listening to the Radio

control switches Hold down to turn the audio function
ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is This explains how to listen to FM, MW, and
pressed, this switches the audio source. LW radio broadcasts.
The order of switching is as shown be-
low. To Listen to the Radio
7 If devices are not connected, then these
are to be skipped, and the next source se- Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
lected. Switch between FM1, FM2, FM3, MW, and
LW bands.
The selected band is indicated on the display.
CD or MP3
iPod*1 or USB device NOTE
Bluetooth Audio*2
1- button, button FM1, 2, 3 l This switches in the order FM1, FM2, FM3,
DAB1, 2, 3*3
DAB1*, DAB2*, DAB3*, MW, and LW.
Adjust audio functions and the mobile
MW
phone function volume.
2- button, button
LW
Manual/Seek Station Selection
Select CD and other audio source tracks
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis-
and radio stations.
ten to.
Hold down to skip up and down through
*1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
tracks.
required. /SEL key Reduces the frequency being
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- (counter- received.
tooth-capable audio device (vehicles clockwise)
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
*3: Requires DAB tuner connection.
*When a DAB tuner is connected.
Listening to DAB*
/SEL key Increases the frequency be- Auto Memory (Auto Store) 2. Turn the /SEL key to select PTY.
The PTY (program content) indicator
(clockwise) ing received.
The top 6 stations with a strong signal can be will flash, and station selection will au-
Release the button to start automatically registered in order with preset tomatically start. When a station is re-
key
seek station selection, and keys. ceived, the station name is displayed.
(hold down)
when a station is received, Hold down the RADIO key.
key scanning stops. After completion of auto store operations, the
(hold down)
NOTE
product will receive the station registered in
the preset key [1]. l This receives the station detected first.
Preset Memory l 10 seconds after reception, PTY search
mode will be cancelled.
CAUTION
Register the broadcast station in advance, and 7
select this at a later time. l Please be aware that the formerly-registered Listening to DAB*
frequency in the memory will be overwrit-
ten.
1. Tune in to the frequency to register. This explains how to listen to DAB.
2. Hold down any of the keys from the
1RPT key to the 6 key. NOTE To listen to DAB
A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is l Using auto store for FM1 and FM2 switches
to FM3. 1. Press the RADIO key to switch the
registered. band. Switch between DAB1, DAB2,
PTY Search and DAB3 bands.
NOTE The selected band is indicated on the
Select PTY (program content), and automati- display.
l The preset memory can register a maximum
of 6 stations for each band (FM1, FM2, cally scan for stations.
FM3). 1. During FM reception, press the PTY/ NOTE
l If a preset key that already has a station reg- SCAN key.
istered is selected, then this is overwritten This switches to the PTY selection l This switches in the order FM1, FM2, FM3,
with the new preset. DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, MW, and LW.
mode.
l Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered frequency.

Listening to DAB*
Select a Service Register the Service NOTE

1. Hold down the key or the key. Register the service in advance, and select l If the text information for the service name
cannot be obtained, then nothing is dis-
Receives the lead services of the ensem- this at a later time. played.
bles that can be received. 1. Tune in to the service to register.
l If there is no operation for 10 seconds, then
2. Press the key or the key to select 2. Hold down any of the keys from the service search mode will be cancelled.
the service. 1RPT key to the 6 key.
A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is PTY Search
Automatically re- registered.
ceives lower lead Select PTY (program content), and automati-
key services within en- NOTE cally scan for services.
7 (hold down) sembles that can be 1. Press the PTY/SCAN key.
received. l If a preset key that already has a service reg- This switches to the PTY selection
istered is selected, then this is overwritten
with the new preset. mode.
key Automatically re-
l Pressing the preset key will select the previ- 2. Turn the /SEL key to select PTY.
(hold down) ceives higher lead
ously registered service. 3. Press the key or key.
services within en-
This starts PTY search.
sembles that can be
received. Search for a Service
key Lower PTY search
key Switches to lower Search for ensembles and services that can be starts.
services. received.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the en- key Higher PTY search
key Switches to higher starts.
services. semble
2. Press the /SEL key.
The service name within the selected en- NOTE
NOTE semble is displayed.
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the serv- l When selecting PTY, press any of the keys
l Going to the first service or last service from the 1RPT key to the 6 key to
within the ensemble switches to the next en- ice. switch to the PTY registered as a preset.
semble. 4. Press the /SEL key.
Receive the selected service.

Listening to Traffic Messages
NOTE NOTE Listening to CDs

l When selecting PTY, select the PTY to reg- l If traffic messages are received, then this
ister, and hold down any of the keys from will switch to the volume of the previously This explains how to listen to audio CDs
the 1RPT key to the 6 key to register the received traffic messages or emergency (CD-DA/CD-TEXT).
PTY as a preset. broadcasts. The volume when receiving traf-
l While in PTY select status, if there is no op- fic messages or emergency broadcasts is that Play CDs
eration for 2 seconds, then an upwards at which subsequent broadcasts will be re-
search within the selected PTY will start. ceived. Insert the disc.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
Traffic Message Standby Mode → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-31
Listening to Traffic If a disc is already within the product, press
When the broadcast of traffic messages starts,
Messages this automatically switches to the station that the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the 7
is broadcasting traffic messages. source.
This explains how to listen to traffic messag-
1. When not in MW or LW mode, press the
es.
TP key. Select the Track
“TP” is indicated on the display, and the
To Listen to Traffic Messages Press the key or key to select the
product switches to standby mode.
track.
1. When not in MW or LW mode, press the If traffic messages are being broadcast,
This enables selection of the next or previous
TP key. these are received.
track.
If traffic messages are being broadcast, 2. When not in MW or LW mode, press the
TP key.
these are received. Fast Forward or Rewind
“TP” disappears from the display, and
standby mode will be cancelled. Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
CAUTION
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
l When receiving a MW or LW signal, traffic CAUTION
messages cannot be received. Switching Playback Mode
l When receiving a MW or LW signal, traffic
message standby mode will be cancelled.
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
NOTE playback are possible.
l Receiving traffic messages will indicate
“TRAF INF” on the display, and if text in- Repeat Playback (RPT)
formation can be received, the station name
is displayed. Press the 1RPT key.
Listening to MP3s
Repeat playback of the track currently being Listening to MP3s Fast Forward or Rewind
played.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
NOTE disc. Fast forward/rewind is possible.
l Pressing again will cancel. Switching Playback Mode

l Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding, CAUTION
or rewinding will cancel. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
l CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
play back MP3 format audio files. playback are possible.
Random Playback (RDM)
To Listen to MP3s Repeat Playback (RPT)
Press the 2RDM key.
7 Play the tracks on the disc in a random order. Press the 1RPT key.
Insert the disc. Repeat playback of the track currently being
Insert a disc to automatically start playback. played.
NOTE → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-31
l Pressing again will cancel. If a disc is already within the product, press
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the NOTE
l Ejecting will cancel this.
source. l Pressing again will cancel.
Scan Playback (SCAN) l Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
rewinding will cancel.
Press the PTY/SCAN key.
NOTE
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks l Depending on the file structure, it may take Folder Repeat Playback
on the whole disc in order. some time to read the contents of the disc.
Hold down the 1RPT key.
Select the Track (File) Repeat playback of the tracks within the fold-
NOTE er currently being played.
l Press this button again during playback if Press the key or key to select the
you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.
track. NOTE
This enables selection of the next or previous
track. l Pressing again will cancel.
l Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.

Listening to an iPod
Random Playback (RDM) 4. Press the /SEL key. CAUTION
This plays the selected file (track).
Press the 2RDM key. l No indemnification for data loss resulting
Play the tracks in the folder in a random or- when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
der. NOTE product will be possible.
l While the folder is selected, press the 6 l Depending on how the devices are handled,
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
NOTE key to cancel track search mode.
it is recommended that data be backed up.
l If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
l Pressing again will cancel. selecting the folder, then track search mode
will be cancelled.
NOTE
Folder Random Playback l Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
key to start playback from the first track in l Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
Hold down the 2RDM key. that folder. ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback 7
Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- l While the file is selected, press the 6 key on this product may not be possible.
to return to the previous operation. (→7-22) Additionally, playback as ex-
dom order.
plained in this document may not be possi-
l While the file is selected, hold down the 6
key to cancel track search mode. ble.
NOTE l If there is no operation for five seconds after l For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
selecting the file, that file is played back. the types of devices that can be connected
l Pressing again will cancel. may vary.
l Disc operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode. For details, access the MITSUBISHI
Scan Playback (SCAN) MOTORS website.
Please read and agree to the “Warning about
Press the SCAN key. Listening to an iPod Links to the Web Sites of Other Compa-
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks nies”.
in the folder currently being played in order. The websites mentioned above may connect
By connecting commercially-available iPod/ you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
iPhone devices to this product, you can play MOTORS website.
Search Tracks back tracks on these through the product. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
ucts/index.html
Search folders and files, and select a track.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. CAUTION l Usage of iPod/iPhone hardware with the lat-
est software version is recommended.
2. Press the /SEL key. l Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in l Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone,
Files within the selected folder are dis- the vehicle. refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page
played. l Never hold these devices in your hand to op- 7-77.
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file. erate while driving, as this is dangerous.

Listening to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Repeat Playback (RPT)

l When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a l If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly, Press the 1RPT key.
commercially available iPod connection ca- then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod-
ble. uct, reset, then reconnect. Repeat playback of the track currently being
l Set up the device in order that no unsafe ac- played.
tions, such as plugging in the connection ca-
ble are taken while driving.
Play iPod
l When inserting and removing the iPod/
Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the
NOTE
iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi-
cle. source. l Pressing again will cancel.
l Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone,
7 it may take some time until the device is rec- The selected source is indicated on the dis- Shuffle Playback (RDM)
ognized, or playback starts. play.
l Buttons on the product will not operate Press the 2RDM key.
while iPod/iPhone is connected. Select the Track (File)
l iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may Play tracks in the category currently being
mean that connection is not possible, or re- played in a random order.
Press the key or key to select the
sult in differences in operation or display.
track.
l Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone,
track information may not be displayed cor- NOTE
rectly. This enables selection of the next or previous
l Depending on the status of the vehicle and track. l Pressing again will cancel.
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
after starting the engine. Fast Forward or Rewind Album Shuffle Playback
l Data containing copyright information may
not play back. Hold down the 2RDM key.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
l It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
equaliser settings be set to flat. Play back the album in a random order
l Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to (tracks in any order on the album).
this product.
l If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Blue- Switching Playback Mode
tooth as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, NOTE
then do not connect the iPod/iPhone using Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
an iPod connection cable. Connection using possible. l Pressing again will cancel.
both methods will result in erroneous opera-
tion.

Listening to Audio Files on a USB Device
Search Tracks NOTE CAUTION

Search categories or track names, and select a l If there is no operation for five seconds after l Depending on how the devices are handled,
selecting the track, that file is played back. audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
track.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
l iPod operations such as selecting a track will it is recommended that data be backed up.
cancel track search mode.
gory.
2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or NOTE
tracks within the selected category are Listening to Audio Files on a
displayed.
l Digital audio players that support the mass
USB Device storage class specifications can be connec-
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- ted.
gory or track. By connecting commercially-available USB l For details regarding the types of USB devi-
4. Press the /SEL key. devices such as USB memory to this product, ces that can be connected and the types of 7
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for files that can be played back in vehicles with
you can play back audio files on these
tracks. a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, refer to “Types of
through the product. connectable devices and supported file spec-
Select the track, and press the /SEL
ifications” on page 7-77.
key to play.
CAUTION l Regarding how to connect USB devices, re-
fer to “How to connect a USB memory de-
NOTE l Do not leave the USB device unattended in vice” on page 7-76.
the vehicle. l When connecting a USB device, use a con-
l While the category (1st level) is selected, l Never hold these devices in your hand to op- nection cable. Failure to use a connection ca-
press the 6 key to cancel track search erate while driving, as this is dangerous. ble when connecting may place undue load
mode. l Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem- on, or damage the USB connector.
l If there is no operation for 10 seconds after ory readers, as damage may occur to these or l Set up the device in order that no unsafe ac-
selecting the category, then track search to the data contained therein. If these are er- tions, such as plugging in the connection ca-
mode will be cancelled. roneously connected, then turn the ignition ble are taken while driving.
l Select the category, and hold down the switch to the “LOCK” position or put the l When inserting and removing the USB de-
/SEL key to start playback from the first operation mode in OFF, then remove. vice, for safety’s sake first stop the vehicle.
track in that category. l Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom- l Do not insert other than audio devices into
mended that files be backed up. the USB port. Damage to the device or
l While the track is selected, press the 6
key to return to the previous operation. l No guarantee is made as regards damage to equipment may result.
the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam- l Depending on the status of the USB device,
l While the track is selected, hold down the 6
age to data contained therein.
key to cancel track search mode. it may take some time until the device is rec-
ognized, or playback starts.

Listening to Audio Files on a USB Device
NOTE Select the Track (File)

Repeat playback of the tracks within the fold-
l Buttons on the product will not operate Press the key or key to select the er currently being played.
while USB device is connected.
track.
l USB device specifications and settings may
mean that connection is not possible, or re- NOTE
sult in differences in operation or display. This enables selection of the next or previous
l Depending on audio data in the USB device, track. l Pressing again will cancel.
track information may not be displayed cor- l Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
rectly. Fast Forward or Rewind playback will not be cancelled.
l Depending on the status of the vehicle and
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. Folder Random Playback
7 after starting the engine. (RDM)
l Data containing copyright information may
not play back. Press the 2RDM key.
l This product can play back MP3, WMA, and
AAC format audio files. Switching Playback Mode Play tracks in the folder currently being
l Depending on the type of USB device, usage
played in a random order.
may not be possible, or functions that can be Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
used may be restricted. playback are possible.
l The recommended file system for USB NOTE
memory is FAT32. Repeat Playback (RPT)
l The maximum supported capacity for USB l Pressing again will cancel.
memory is 32GB. Press the 1RPT key. l Even if the file is selected, folder random
l Operate the USB device containing recorded playback will not be cancelled.
audio files while connected to this product. Repeat playback of the track currently being
played. All Folder Random Playback
Play Back of Audio Files on a Hold down the 2RDM key.
USB Device NOTE
l Pressing again will cancel. Play the tracks in all folders in a random or-
Press the MEDIA key to set
der.
l Selecting a file will cancel this.
USB as the source. The selected source is in-
dicated on the display. Folder Repeat Playback
Hold down the 1RPT key.

To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
NOTE 1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. To play iPod/USB memory
2. Press the /SEL key.
l Pressing again will cancel. device tracks via voice
l Even if the file is selected, all folder random Files within the selected folder are dis- operation (vehicles with
playback will not be cancelled. played.
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
Scan Playback (SCAN) 4. Press the /SEL key.
Desired tracks on the iPod/USB memory de-
Press the PTY/SCAN key.
This plays the selected file (track). vice which is connected to the USB input ter-
minal can be selected and played via voice
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
operation.
on the whole USB device in order. NOTE For information concerning the voice recog- 7
l While the folder is selected, press the 6 nition function or speaker registration func-
NOTE key to cancel track search mode. tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on
l Press this button again during playback if l If there is no operation for 10 seconds after page 7-56.
selecting the folder, then track search mode The following explains how to prepare for
will be cancelled.
will play normally. voice operation and play the tracks.
l Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
key to start playback from the first track in Preparation for voice operation
Folder Scan Playback that folder.
l While the file is selected, press the 6 key To use the voice operation, press the
Hold down the PTY/SCAN key.
to return to the previous operation. SPEECH button (A) first.
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in l While the file is selected, hold down the 6
key to cancel track search mode.
each folder on the USB device in order.
l If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
NOTE l Operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode.
l Press this button again during playback if
will play normally.
Search Tracks
Search folders and files, and select a track.

To search by artist name NOTE NOTE

1. Say “Play” on the main menu. l If you say “No” to three or all artist names l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
uttered by the system, the voice guide will ing the connected device.
say “Artist not found, please try again” and If the connected device cannot be recognized
NOTE the system returns to step 2. or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- l Search time is dependant on the number of 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
ing the connected device. songs on your connected device. Devices guide. Follow the voice guide.
If the connected device cannot be recognized containing a large number of songs may take
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® longer to return search results.
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
2. After the voice guide says “Would you
guide. Follow the voice guide. like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
6. After the voice guide says “Playing <ar-
Genre?,” say “Album”.
7 tist name>,” the system creates a playlist
2. After the voice guide says “Would you index for the artist.
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or NOTE
Genre?,” say “Artist”. NOTE l If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip
step 3.
l If the confirmation function is active, the
NOTE voice guide confirms if the artist name is
correct. If the artist name is correct, say 3. After the voice guide says “What Album
l If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip
would you like to play?” say the album
step 3. “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice
guide says “Artist not found, please try title.
again,” the system returns to step 2. 4. If there is only one match, the system
3. After the voice guide says “What Artist
proceeds to step 6.
would you like to play?,” say the artist
7. The system exits the voice recognition 5. If there are two or more matches, the
name.
mode and starts playback. voice guide will say “More than one
4. If there is only one match, the system
match was found, would you like to play
proceeds to step 6.
To search by album title <album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the
5. If there are two or more matches, the
system proceeds to step 6.
voice guide will say “More than one 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. If you say “No,” the next matching al-
bum is uttered by the system.
<artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the
system proceeds to step 6.
If you say “No,” the next matching artist
is uttered by the system.
NOTE 2. After the voice guide says “Would you 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or <playlist>,” the system creates an index
l If you say “No” to three or all album titles Genre?,” say “Playlist”. for the playlist.
uttered by the system, the voice guide will
say “Album not found, please try again” and
the system returns to step 2. NOTE NOTE
l If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip l If the confirmation function is active, the
6. After the voice guide says “Playing <al- step 3. voice guide confirms if the playlist name is
bum title>,” the system creates a playlist If the device has no playlist, the voice guide correct. If the playlist name is correct, say
index for the album title. will say “There are no playlists stored on de- “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice
vice” and the system returns to step 2. guide says “Playlist not found, please try
again,” the system returns to step 2. Refer to
NOTE 3. After the voice guide says “What Play-
“Confirmation function setting” on page 7
7-59.
l If the confirmation function is active, the list would you like to play?,” say the
voice guide confirms if the album title is playlist name.
correct. If the album title is correct, say
4. If there is only one match, the system 7. The system exits the voice recognition
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice mode and starts playback.
guide says “Album not found, please try proceeds to step 6.
again,” the system returns to step 2. 5. If there are two or more matches, the
voice guide will say “More than one To search by genre
match was found, would you like to play 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
7. The system exits the voice recognition
<playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
mode and starts playback.
tem proceeds to step 6.
If you say “No,” the next matching play- NOTE
To search by playlist list name is uttered by the system. l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
1. Say “Play” on the main menu. ing the connected device.
If the connected device cannot be recognized
NOTE or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
NOTE l If you say “No” to three or all playlist names 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
uttered by the system, the voice guide will guide. Follow the voice guide.
l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
ing the connected device. say “Playlist not found, please try again” and
If the connected device cannot be recognized the system returns to step 2.
2. After the voice guide says “Would you
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice Genre?,” say “Genre”.
guide. Follow the voice guide.

Listening to Bluetooth Audio*
NOTE NOTE NOTE

l If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip l If the confirmation function is active, the l Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable
step 3. voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. audio devices, usage may not be possible, or
If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say functions that can be used may be restricted.
3. After the voice guide says “What Genre
“No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not l Confirm together with the user manuals for
found, please try again,” the system returns the commercially- available Bluetooth-capa-
would you like to play?,” say the music to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function ble audio devices.
type. setting” on page 7-59. l Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable
4. If there is only one match, the system audio devices, volume levels may differ.
proceeds to step 6. There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior
7. The system exits the voice recognition to use, it is recommended that you turn the
5. If there are two or more matches, the mode and starts playback. volume down.
7 voice guide will say “More than one
→ “Adjusting the Volume” on page 7-31
<genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system Listening to Bluetooth l Depending on the status of the Bluetooth au-
dio device, it may take some time until the
proceeds to step 6. Audio* device is recognized, or playback starts.
If you say “No,” the next matching l Bluetooth audio device specifications and
genre is uttered by the system. This product can play back tracks on com- settings may mean that connection is not
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio possible, or result in differences in operation
or display.
NOTE devices.
l Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
audio device, track information may not be
l If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered
by the system, the voice guide will say CAUTION displayed correctly.
“Genre not found, please try again” and the l Depending on the status of the vehicle and
system returns to step 2. l Never hold these devices in your hand to op- device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
erate while driving, as this is dangerous. after starting the engine.
l Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device un-
6. After the voice guide says “Playing attended in the vehicle.
<genre>,” the system creates an index l Depending on how the devices are handled, Connect a Bluetooth-capable
for the genre. audio files being damaged or lost, therefore Audio Device
it is recommended that data be backed up.
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth de-
vice, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0
interface and Bluetooth® device” on page
7-62.

Listening to Bluetooth Audio*
Operation methods below describe situations This enables selection of the next or previous NOTE
once connection has been completed. track.
l Pressing again will cancel.
NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind
Scan Playback (SCAN)
l If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Blue- Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
tooth as a Bluetooth- capable audio device, Press the PTY/SCAN key.
then do not connect the iPod/iPhone using Fast forward/rewind is possible.
an iPod cable. Connection using both meth- Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
ods will result in erroneous operation. on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in or-
Switching Playback Mode
der.
Play Bluetooth Audio Repeat playback, random playback, and scan 7
1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth
playback are possible. NOTE
Audio as the source. Repeat Playback (RPT) l Press this button again during playback if
The selected source is indicated on the Press the 1RPT key. will play normally.
display.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio played.
playback starts.
NOTE
NOTE l Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track re-
l Hold down the 5 key to pause. peat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.
l Press the 6 key to stop.
Random Playback (RDM)
Select the Track (File) Press the 2RDM key.
Press the key or key to select the
track. Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
in a random order.

Display Indicator
Display Indicator
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During DAB Reception*

You can change the content of the display in- l The operation of changing display contents This switches in the order “Service name”,
dicator. may impede safe driving, therefore check “Ensemble name”, and “CH no. (CH ID)”.
Press the DISP key to switch the display con- safety before operation.
tent.
NOTE
Each time the DISP key is pressed, the dis-
NOTE l If the text information for the service name
and ensemble name cannot be obtained, then
play content changes. l Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
time. To display 12 or more characters, press nothing is displayed.
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters
will be displayed.

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
During CD-DA playback NOTE Adjust Audio Quality and Vol-
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track l During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
ume Balance
title”, and “Operating status”. DISP key to switch to the folder title display.
l The genre name display may not be possible. 1. Press the /SEL key to select settings
items.
NOTE
l If there is no text information to display, During iPod Playback Each time the /SEL key is pressed,
then “NO TITLE” is displayed. This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track this switches in the order BASS, TRE-
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and BLE, FADER, BALANCE, SCV (speed
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play- “Operating status”. compensated volume), and Cancel.
back 2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
7
This switches in the order “Folder title”, NOTE
“File title”, and “Operating status”. Ad-
l If there is no text information to display,
just- Turn counter-
then “NO TITLE” is displayed. Turn clockwise
ment clockwise
NOTE l Displayed genre name in equipment by type
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). items
l If there is no text information to display, l The genre name display may not be possible. BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6
then “NO TITLE” is displayed.
(low low-pass (high low-pass
volume) volume)
Display the ID3tag During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6
Hold down the DISP key. Playback* BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass
Operating details are the same as in “During volume) volume)
This switches the ID3tag display. iPod Playback” on page 7-49.
[DISP] Each time the key is pressed, this FAD- CENTER to FRONT 11 to
switches in the order “Album name”, “Track Audio Quality and Volume ER REAR 11 CENTER
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and (emphasise (emphasise
“Operating status”.
Balance Adjustment REAR) FRONT)
Change audio quality settings. BAL- LEFT 11 to CEN- CENTER to

ANC TER RIGHT 11
*Displayed when playing back audio files on E (emphasise (emphasise
a USB device (vehicles with a Bluetooth® LEFT) RIGHT)
2.0 interface).
System Settings
Ad- DAB Setting* RDS Setting

just- Turn counter-
Turn clockwise
ment clockwise
items Change DAB settings Change RDS settings
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
(SCV effect is (SCV effect is default settings.) default settings.)
OFF/low) middle/high)
Settings Settings val-
Settings con- Settings Settings val- Settings con-
name ue tent name ue tent
System Settings DAB-DAB OFF If low recep- AF AF ON Automatical-
Link settings tion sensitivi- ly track the
7 Change system settings such as product time. ON ty, switch to same station
1. Press the MENU key. another serv- as the pro-
2. Press the /SEL key to select settings ice. gram being
items.
DAB Band BAND III Set used received.
settings broadcast
Each time the /SEL key is pressed, AF OFF Do not auto-
band to 174 matically
this switches in the order DAB setting*1,
to 239 MHz. track the
Gracenote DB*2, AF, REG, TP-S, PI-S,
PTY language settings, PHONE settings, L-BAND Set used same station
CT, Adjust time, and Cancel. broadcast as the pro-
3. Turn the /SEL key to set. band to 1452 gram being
4. Press the /SEL key to determine. to 1490 MHz. received.
BOTH Set used REG REG ON Do not auto-
This completes settings, and displays the broadcast matically
next settings item. band to Band track the lo-
III and L- cal station for
Band. the program
being re-
ceived.
*1 Displayed when a DAB tuner is connected
*2 Displayed when playing back audio files
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
System Settings
Settings Settings val- Settings con- Settings Settings val- Settings con- Settings Settings val- Settings con-
name ue tent name ue tent name ue tent
REG OFF Automatical- PI-S OFF Do not search SVENSK Set the dis-
ly track the for the same play language
local station station or lo- for the pro-
for the pro- cal station for gram content
gram being that regis- search (PTY
received. tered in the search) to
TP-S TP-S ON Automatical- preset chan- Swedish.
nel.
ly search for ESPANOL Set the dis-
traffic mes- PTY ENGLISH Set the display language 7
sages (TP sta- play language for the pro-
tions). for the program content
TP-S OFF Do not auto- gram content search (PTY
matically search (PTY search) to
search for search) to Spanish.
traffic mes- English.
ITALIANO Set the dis-
sages (TP sta- FRANCAIS Set the display language
tions). play language for the pro-
PI-S PI-S ON Search for the for the program content
same station gram content search (PTY
or local sta- search (PTY search) to
tion for that search) to Italian.
registered in French. CT CT ON Update the
the preset DEUTSCH Set the dis- time if time
channel. play language data is re-
for the pro- ceived.
gram content
search (PTY
search) to
German.

System Settings
Settings Settings val- Settings con- PHONE Settings NOTE

name ue tent
Change the mobile phone voice cut-in set- l Some models may not be confirmed as con-
CT OFF Do not up- nected, or may not connect.
tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan-
date the time
guage.
even if time
Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings
Supported profiles
data is re-
may not be possible. Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
ceived.
Phone book trans- OPP(v1.1),
*: It is necessary to press the [TP] key and NOTE fer PBAP(v1.0)
turn traffic message standby mode
l Cancel functions such as the mobile phone
“ON”.
7 “dial lock”, and connect while on the stand-
by screen.
Vehicles without a Bluetooth®
2.0 Interface
Time Setting l While connected, mobile phone (receiving
calls, etc.) operations may not function cor- A hands-free kit (available separately) is re-
Turning the RDS setting CT setting “CT rectly. quired.
OFF” enables manual setting of the time. l Depending on the distance between the (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
product and the mobile phone, the condi-
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” default settings.)
tions within the vehicle, and types of screen-
screen, and press the /SEL key. ing, connection may not be possible. In these
Settings
cases, situate the mobile phone as close as Settings content
The hour can be adjusted. Press the possible to the product. value
/SEL key again to adjust the minutes. l Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust the time. phone, characteristics and specifications OFF cut-in.
3. Press the /SEL key. may mean that correct operation may not be
possible. PHONE During mobile phone voice
This completes the adjustment.
l For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile MUTE cut-in, mute the audio.
phone while driving. When operating the
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe PHONE During mobile phone voice
location. ATT cut-in, output audio from all
NOTE speakers.
l Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
l In order to finish adjusting the time, hold phone, phone specifications and settings
PHONE During mobile phone voice
down the /SEL key until the seconds are may result in differences in display, or pre-
reset to “00”. vent correct operation. IN-L cut-in, output sound from the
left front speaker.

System Settings
Settings Settings
Settings con-
Settings content Settings name
value value tent
PHONE During mobile phone voice FRENCH ule voice lan-
IN-R cut-in, output sound from the guage.
GER-
right front speaker.
MAN
PHONE During mobile phone voice
SPANISH
IN-LR cut-in, output sound from the
left and right front speakers. ITALIAN
DUTCH
Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 PORTU- Change the
Interface 7
GUESE hands free mod-
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory ule voice lan-
RUSSI- guage.
default settings.) AN
Settings Settings con-
Settings name
value tent NOTE
PHONE IN set- PHONE During mobile
tings
l Depending on the vehicle model, this may
IN-R phone voice not display.
cut-in, output
sound from the Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
right front
speaker. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
PHONE During mobile The version number can be confirmed.
IN-L phone voice 1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the
cut-in, output /SEL key.
sound from the 2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB
left front Version”.
speaker. 3. Press the /SEL key.
HFM voice lan- ENG- Change the The DB Version is displayed.
guage settings LISH hands free mod-

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.
Mode Message Cause Response

CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
7 DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and insert
the disc again. If the problem persists, consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal temperature
to return to normal.
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
→ “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-26.
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the prob-
lem persists, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. ized Service Point.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT → “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-26.
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response

VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the speak- Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the prob-
ers. lem persists, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjusting the volume. 7
sound. → “Adjusting the Volume” on page 7-31.
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjusting the balance or fader.
→ “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” on page
7-49.
The disc cannot be inserted. A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.
→ “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-31.
There is no disc in the product, but the product says it is Press the eject button once.
loading. → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-31.
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place.
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its data cannot Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs,
the disc is inserted. be read. their characteristics may render them unable to be
played.

Link System*
Link System* http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldi- WARNING

sclosure.pdf
The Link System takes overall control of the l Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface al-
lows you to make hands-free calls, if you
devices connected via the USB input terminal Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* choose to use the cellular phone while
or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the driving, you must not allow yourself to be
connected devices to be operated by using the The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak- distracted from the safe operation of your
switches in the vehicle or voice commands. ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle vehicle. Anything, including cellular
See the following section for details on how using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone phone usage, that distracts you from the
safe operation of your vehicle increases
to operate. based on the wireless communication tech-
your risk of an accident.
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It l Refer to and comply with all state and lo-
7-56. also allows the user to play music, saved in a
7 Refer to “USB input terminal” on page Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s
cal laws in your area regarding cellular
phone usage while driving.
7-76. speakers.
Refer to “Listening to an iPod” on page 7-39. The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
Refer to “Listening to Audio Files on a USB tion function, which allows you to make
NOTE
Device” on page 7-41. hands-free calls by simple switch operations l If the ignition switch or the operation mode
Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device and voice command operations using a de- is left in ACC, the accessory power will au-
tracks via voice operation” on page 7-43. tomatically turn off after a certain period of
fined voice tree.
time and you will no longer be able to use
Refer to “Listening to Bluetooth Audio” on
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory
page 7-46. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used power comes on again if the ignition switch
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of when the ignition switch or the operation or the engine switch is operated.
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. mode is in ON or ACC. Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function”
on pages 6-14 and 6-17.
Link System End User Licence Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used
Agreement face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device
if the Bluetooth® device has a flat battery or
the device power is turned off.
You have acquired a device that includes and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con- l Hands-free calls will not be possible if your
software licensed by MITSUBISHI necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and phone does not have service available.
MOTORS CORPORATION from Visteon Bluetooth® device” on page 7-62. l If you place the Bluetooth® device in the ve-
Corporation, and their subsequent 3rd party hicle’s third seat or luggage compartment,
suppliers. For a complete list of these 3rd par- you may not be able to use the Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
2.0 interface.
ty products and their end user licence agree- BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
ments, please go to the following website.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface*
NOTE Steering control switch and mi- SPEECH button

l Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible
crophone l Press this button to change to voice rec-
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. ognition mode.
l You can confirm the Link System software While the system is in voice recognition
version by pressing the HANG-UP button mode, “Listening” will appear on the au-
three times (press and hold two times and dio display.
then press briefly) within 10 seconds. l If you press the button briefly while in
l For details on the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice recognition mode, it will interrupt
you can see them by accessing the
prompting and allow voice command in-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.
Please read and agree the “Warning about put.
Pressing the button longer will deacti-
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”
vate the voice recognition mode.
7
because it connects other than MITSUBISHI
MOTORS website. l Pressing this button briefly during a call
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- will enable voice recognition and allow
ucts/ index.html voice command input.
l Software updates by cellular phone/digital
audio device manufacturers may change/ PICK-UP button
alter device connectivity.
l Press this button when an incoming call
Steering control switch and microphone 1- Volume up button is received to answer the telephone.
® p. 7-57 2- Volume down button l When another call is received during a
Voice recognition function ® p. 7-58 3- SPEECH button call, press this button to put the first call-
Useful voice commands ® p. 7-59 4- PICK-UP button er on hold and talk to the new caller.
Speaker enrollment function ® p. 7-60 5- HANG-UP button • In such circumstances, you can press
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and 6- Microphone* the button briefly to switch between
Bluetooth® device ® p. 7-62 callers. You will switch to the first
Operating a music player connected via Blue-
Volume up button caller and the other caller will be put
tooth® ® p. 7-67 Press this button to increase the volume. on hold.
How to make or receive hands-free calls • To establish a three-way call in such
® p. 7-67 Volume down button situations, press the SPEECH button
Phone book function ® p. 7-69 to enter voice recognition mode and
Press this button to decrease the volume. then say “Join calls”.

HANG-UP button NOTE NOTE
l Press this button when an incoming call l If a cellular phone is brought close to the mi- l Some voice commands have alternative
is received to refuse the call. crophone, it may create noise in the voice on commands.
l Press this button during a call to end the the phone. In such a case, take the cellular l Depending on the selected language, some
current call. phone at a place as far as possible from the functions may not be available.
When another call is on hold, you will microphone.
switch to that call. Selecting the Language
l If this button is pressed in the voice rec- Voice recognition function 1. Press the SPEECH button.
ognition mode, the voice recognition 2. Say “Setup.”
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
mode will be deactivated. 3. Say “Language.”
with a voice recognition function.
7 Simply say voice commands and you can 4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-
NOTE perform various operations and make or re- guage: English, French, Spanish, Italian,
ceive hands-free calls. German, Dutch, Portuguese or Russian”
l When you press the SPEECH button to enter Say the desired language. (Example: Say
voice recognition mode with a cellular
phone paired to the system, current informa- With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- “English.”)
tion on the cellular phone, such as “remain- ognition is possible for English, French, 5. The voice guide will say “English
ing battery life”, “signal strength” or “roam- (French, Spanish, Italian, German,
Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese
ing”, will be displayed on the audio display.* Dutch, Portuguese or Russian) selected.
and Russian. The factory setting is “English”
l Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
or “Russian.” Is this correct?” Say “Yes.”
by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is If you say “No,” the system will return
possible to use those services with your cel- to Step 4.
lular phone. NOTE
Microphone* l If the voice command that you say differs NOTE
from the predefined command or cannot be
Your voice will be recognized by a micro- recognised due to ambient noise or some l The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
phone in the overhead console, allowing you rent language, and the second message is in
will ask you for the voice command again up
to make hands-free calls with voice com- the selected language.
to three times.
mands. l If many entries are registered in the vehicle
l For best performance and further reduction
of ambient noise, close the vehicle windows, phone book, changing the language will take
lower the blower speed and refrain from longer.
*Some conversation with your passengers while en-
cellular phones will not send this informa-
gaging the voice recognition function.
tion to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
NOTE NOTE Security function

It is possible to use a password as a security
l Changing the language deletes the mobile l You can return to the previous menu by say-
phone book imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0 ing “Go Back.” (if so equipped) function by setting a password of your choice
interface. If you wish to use it, you will have for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
to import it again. When the security function is turned on, it is
Confirmation function setting necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit
6. When the voice guide says “English The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped password in order to use all functions of the
(French, Spanish, Italian, German, with a confirmation function. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep-
Dutch, Portuguese or Russian) selected,” With the confirmation function activated, you tion.
the language change process will be are given more opportunities than normal to
confirm a command when making various Setting the password
completed and the system will return to
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This
7
the main menu. Use the following procedure to turn on the
allows you to decrease the possibility that a security function by setting a password.
setting is accidentally changed.
Useful voice commands The confirmation function can be turned on
1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say “Setup.”
Help function or off by following the steps below. 3. Say “Password.”
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped 4. The voice guide will say “Password is
with a help function. 1. Press the SPEECH button. disabled. Would you like to enable it?”
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting 2. Say “Setup.” Answer “Yes.”
for a voice command input, the system will 3. Say “Confirmation prompts”. Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
tell you a list of the commands that can be 4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation password and return to the main menu.
used under the circumstances. prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
turn confirmation prompts <off/on>”. digit password. Remember this pass-
Cancelling Answer “Yes” to change the setting or word. It will be required to use this sys-
There are two cancel functions. answer “No” to keep the current setting. tem.”
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation Say a 4-digit number which you want to
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys- set as a password.
If you are anywhere else within the system, tem will return to the main menu. 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. guide will say “Password <4-digit pass-
word>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
Answer “No” to return to the password
input in Step 5.

7. When the registration of the password is NOTE Speaker enrollment function
completed, the voice guide will say
“Password is enabled” and the system l You can re-enter the password as many The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the
will return to the main menu.
times as you want. speaker enrollment function to create a voice
l If you have forgotten your password, say model for one person per language.
“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0
NOTE then check with a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
interface to recognise voice commands said
l Password will be required to access the sys- by you.
tem after the next ignition cycle. You can turn a voice model registered with
Disabling the password
l It is required for a little time after engine the speaker enrollment function on and off
stop that the entered password is actually re- Use the following procedure to turn off the whenever you want.
corded in the system. security function by disabling the password.
7 If the ignition switch or the operation mode Speaker enrollment
is made to ACC or ON or the engine is star-
ted immediately after engine stop, there is a NOTE It takes approximately 2 to 3 minutes to com-
case when the entered password is not recor- plete the speaker enrollment process.
ded in the system. At this time, please try to l System must be unlocked to disable the
To ensure the best results, run through the
password.
enter the password again. process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
Entering the password 1. Press the SPEECH button. there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
2. Say “Setup.” cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
If a password has been set and the security
3. Say “Password.” phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
function is enabled, the voice guide will say
4. The voice guide will say “Password is interruption of the process.
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-
enabled. Would you like to disable it?” Use the following procedure for speaker en-
word to continue” when the SPEECH button
Answer “Yes.” rollment.
is pressed to enter voice recognition mode.
Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
Say the 4-digit password number to enter the
the password and return to the main gearshift lever (M/T) in the “N” (Neu-
password.
menu. tral) position, or the selector lever (CVT)
If the entered password is wrong, the voice
5. When the disabling of the password is in the “P” (PARK) position, and apply
guide will say “<4-digit password>, Incorrect
completed, the voice guide will say the parking brake.
password. Please try again.” Enter the correct
“Password is disabled” and the system
password.
will return to the main menu.

NOTE ted in table “Enrollment commands” on Enabling and disabling the

page 7-76.
l Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the The system will register your voice and
voice model and retraining
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the You can turn a voice model registered with
then move on to the registration of the
vehicle in a safe area before attempting the speaker enrollment function on and off
speaker enrollment. next command. Continue the process un-
til all phrases have been registered. whenever you want.
You can also retrain the system.
2. Press the SPEECH button. Use the following procedure to perform these
3. Say “Voice training”. NOTE actions.
4. The voice guide will say “This operation l To repeat the most recent voice training 1. Press the SPEECH button.
must be performed in a quiet environ- command, press and release the SPEECH 2. Say “Voice training”.
button.
ment while the vehicle is stopped. See
the owner’s manual for the list of re- l If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
3. If you have completed a speaker enroll- 7
ment process once already, the voice
quired training phrases. Press and re- during the process, the system will beep and
guide will say either “Enrollment is ena-
stop the speaker enrollment process.
lease the SPEECH button when you are bled. Would you like to disable or re-
ready to begin. Press the HANG-UP but- train?” or “Enrollment is disabled.
ton to cancel at any time”. 6. When all enrollment commands have Would you like to enable or retrain?”
Press the SPEECH button to start the been read out, the voice guide will say 4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice
speaker enrollment process. “Speaker enrollment is complete.” The model is on; when enrollment is “disa-
system will then end the speaker enroll- bled,” the voice model is off. Say the
ment process and return to the main command that fits your needs.
NOTE menu. Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll-
l If you do not start the speaker enrollment ment process and recreate a new voice
process within 3 minutes of pressing the
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment NOTE model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment”
function will time out. on page 7-60.)
l Completing the speaker enrollment process
The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll- will turn on the voice model automatically.
ment has timed out.” The system will then l The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will
beep and the voice recognition mode will be not work in this mode.
deactivated.
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase

1. Repeat the corresponding phrase lis-

Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 To pair NOTE

interface and Bluetooth® de- To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue- l If 7 devices have already been paired, the
vice tooth® 2.0 interface, use either one of the fol- voice guide will say “Maximum devices
lowing 2 methods (Type 1 or Type 2). paired” and then the system will end the
Before you can make or receive hands-free pairing process. To register a new device,
calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0 Pairing procedure - Type 1*
delete one device and then repeat the pairing
interface function, you must pair the Blue- process.
1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the (Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a de-
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. vice” on page 7-65.)
gearshift lever (M/T) in the “N” (Neu-
tral) position, or the selector lever (CVT)
NOTE in the “P” (PARK) position, and apply 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
7 l Pairing is required only when the device is the parking brake. digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit num-
used for the first time. Once the device has ber.
been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- NOTE When the confirmation function is on,
face, all you need is to bring the device into the system will confirm whether the
the vehicle next time and the device will l You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with number said is acceptable. Answer
connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi- “Yes.”
matically (if supported by the device). The cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
Answer “No” to return to pairing code
device must have Bluetooth® turned ON to device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
connect.
selection.
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
location.
Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired NOTE
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 2. Press the SPEECH button. l Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are 3. Say “Setup.” pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or 4. Say “Pairing Options.” ual for pairing code requirements.
music player most recently connected is auto- 5. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 in-
Say “Pair.”
terface.
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to

be connected.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l The pairing code entered here is only used l If you enter the wrong number, the voice l You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
for the Bluetooth® connection certification. guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
It is any 4-digit number the user would like ing process will be cancelled. cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
to select. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be it again.
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the location.
pairing process. 8. The voice guide will say “Please say the
Depending on the connection settings of the
name of the device after the beep.” You 2. Press the SPEECH button.
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
can assign a desired name for the Blue- 3. Say “Pair Device.”
entered each time you connect the Blue-
tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- tooth® device and register it as a device 7
face. For the default connection settings, re- tag. Say the name you want to register
fer to the instructions for the device. after the beep. NOTE
l The following procedure ( to ) can also
be used instead of saying “Pair Device.”
7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing NOTE Replace this step 3 with the following proce-
procedure on the device. See the device dure if you prefer.
manual for instructions.” Enter in the
l When the confirmation function is on, after
repeating the device tag you have said, the Say “Setup.”
Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” An- Say “Pairing Options.”
you have registered in Step 6. swer “Yes.” The voice guide will say “Select one of
To change the device tag, answer “No” and the following: pair, edit, delete, list or set
then say the device tag again. code.”
NOTE Say “Pair.”
l According to the corresponding device to 9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com- l If 7 devices have already been paired, the
Bluetooth®, it might take a few minute to voice guide will say “Maximum devices
plete,” and the pairing process will end.
pair the Bluetooth® device with the Blue- paired” and then the system will end the
pairing process. To register a new device,
tooth® 2.0 interface. Pairing procedure - Type 2* delete one device and then repeat the pairing
l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the process.
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide (Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a de-
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the
gearshift lever (M/T) in the “N” (Neu-
tral) position, or the selector lever (CVT) vice” on page 7-65.)
pairing process will be cancelled.
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup- in the “P” (PARK) position, and apply
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again. the parking brake. 4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
procedure on the device. See the device
manual for instructions.” and then will NOTE 7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Com-
say “The pairing code is <pairing plete. Would you like to import the con-
code>.” l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- tacts from your mobile device now?”
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the say “Please wait while the contacts are
NOTE pairing process will be cancelled.
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
imported. This may take several mi-
l Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific nutes.” Answer “No” to end the pairing
pairing code. ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
process.
Please refer to the device manual for pairing l If you enter the wrong number, the voice
code requirements and read the next section guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
ing process will be cancelled. If your device requires a specific pairing
“If your device requires a specific pairing
code” on page 7-65 to set the pairing code. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing code
7 l The pairing code entered here is only used it again. If your device requires a specific pairing
If your device requires a specific pairing
for the Bluetooth® connection certification. code, you need to set the pairing code. Fol-
code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer
Depending on the connection settings of the low the procedures below.
to the device manual for pairing code re-
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be quirements and read the next section “If 1. Press the SPEECH button.
entered each time you connect the Blue- your device requires a specific pairing code” 2. Say “Setup.”
tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- on page 7-65. 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
face. For the default connection settings, re-
4. Say “Set Code.”
fer to the instructions for the device.
6. The voice guide will say “Please say the 5. The voice guide will say “Do you want
name of the device after the beep.” You the pairing code to be random or fixed?”
5. Enter in the Bluetooth®
device the 4-dig- Say “Fixed.”
can assign a desired name for the Blue-
it number that has been read out in Step 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
tooth® device and register it as a device
4. digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit num-
tag. Say the name you want to register
after the beep. ber.
NOTE 7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code
set to <pairing code>.”
l According to the corresponding device to NOTE When the confirmation function is on,
Bluetooth®, it might take a few minutes to
l When the confirmation function is on, after the system will confirm whether the
pair the Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
repeating the device tag you have said, the number said is acceptable. Answer
tooth® 2.0 interface. voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” An- “Yes.”
swer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the system will return to
To change the device tag, answer “No” and
Step 6.
then say the device tag again.

8. The voice guide will say “Do you want correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and When the confirmation function is on,
to pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” connect to the cellular phone. the system will ask you again whether
the system will proceed to Step 3 in the Answer “No,” and the voice guide will the music player that you want to con-
pairing process. Refer to the “Pairing say “Please say.” Say the number of the nect to is correct. Answer “Yes” to con-
procedure- Type 2.” phone that you want to connect to. tinue and connect to the music player.
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
Selecting a device NOTE say “Please say.” Say the number of the
music player that you want to connect
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are l You can connect to a phone at any time by to.
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
music player most recently connected is auto- number, even before all of the paired num-
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 in- bers and device tags of corresponding cellu- NOTE
terface. lar phones are read out by the system. 7
l You can connect to a music player at any
You can connect to the other paired cellular time by pressing the SPEECH button and
phone or music player by following setting 5. The selected phone will be connected to saying the number, even before all of the
change procedures. the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice paired numbers and device tags of corre-
sponding music players are read out by the
guide will say “<device tag> selected”
To select a cellular phone system.
and then the system will return to the
1. Press the SPEECH button. main menu.
2. Say “Setup.” 5. The selected music player will be con-
3. Say “Select phone.” To select a music player nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” 1. Press the SPEECH button. The voice guide will say “<device tag>
the numbers of the cellular phones and 2. Say “Setup.” selected” and then the system will return
device tags of corresponding cellular 3. Say “Select music player.” to the main menu.
phones will be read out in order, starting 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
Deleting a device
with the cellular phone that has been the numbers of the music players and de-
most recently connected. vice tags of corresponding music players Use the following procedure to delete a
Say the number of the cellular phone will be read out in order, starting with paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue-
that you want to connect to. the music player that has been most re- tooth® 2.0 interface.
When the confirmation function is on, cently connected. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
the system will ask you again whether Say the number of the music player that 2. Say “Setup.”
the phone that you want to connect to is you want to connect to. 3. Say “Pairing options.”

4. The voice guide will say “Select one of To check a paired Bluetooth® NOTE
Say “Delete.” device l If you press and release the SPEECH button
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by
list is being read, the system will advance or
the numbers of the devices and device following the steps below. rewind the list.
tags of corresponding devices will be 1. Press the SPEECH button. Say “Continue” to proceed to the device
read out in order, starting with the device 2. Say “Setup.” with the next highest number or “Previous”
that has been most recently connected. 3. Say “Pairing options.” to return to the phone with the previous
After it completes reading all pairs, the 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of number.
voice guide will say “or all.” the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” l You can change the device tag by pressing
Say “List.” and releasing the SPEECH button and then
Say the number of the device that you
saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
7 want to delete from the system. 5. The voice guide will read out device tags
l You can change the phone to be connected
If you want to delete all paired phones of corresponding devices in order, start- by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
from the system, say “All.” ing with the Bluetooth® device that has ton and then saying “Select phone” while the
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice been most recently connected. list is being read.
guide will say “Deleting <device tag> 6. After the device tags of all paired Blue- l You can change the music player to be con-
<number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting nected by pressing and releasing the
tooth® devices have been read, the sys-
all devices. Is this correct?” SPEECH button and then saying “Select mu-
tem will say “End of list, would you like sic player” while the list is being read.
Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). to start from the beginning?”
Answer “No” to return to Step 4. To hear the list again from the begin-
7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and ning, answer “Yes.” Changing a device tag
then the system will end the device dele- When you are done, answer “No” to re- You can change the device tag of a paired
tion process. turn to the main menu. cellular phone or music player.
Follow the steps below to change a device
NOTE tag.
l If the device deletion process fails for some
2. Say “Setup.”
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
failed” and then the system will cancel delet- 3. Say “Pairing options.”
ing the device. 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
Say “Edit.”
5. The voice guide will say “Please say,”
and read out the numbers of the Blue-
tooth® devices and device tags of corre- Operating a music player con- To make a call
sponding devices in order, starting with
nected via Bluetooth® You can make a call in the following 3 ways
the Bluetooth® that has been most re- using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:
cently connected. For the operation of a music player connected
Making a call by saying a telephone number,
After all paired device tags have been via Bluetooth®, refer to “Listen to Bluetooth
Audio” on page 7-46. On vehicles equipped making a call using the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
read, the voice guide will say “Which face’s phone book, and making a call by re-
device, please?” Say the number of the with MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication
System (MMCS), the Smartphone Link Dis- dialing.
device tag you want to change.
play Audio or the DISPLAY AUDIO, refer to
Making a call by using the telephone num-
the separate owner’s manual.
NOTE ber
l You can press and release the SPEECH but- How to make or receive hands- You can make a call by saying the telephone 7
ton while the list is being read, and immedi- free calls number.
ately say the number of the device tag you 1. Press the SPEECH button.
want to change.
You can make or receive hands-free calls us-
2. Say “Dial.”
ing a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone 3. After the voice guide says “Number
connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. please,” say the telephone number.
6. The voice guide will say “New name,
You can also use the phone books in the 4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num-
please.” Say the name you want to regis-
ter as a new device tag. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to make calls with- ber recognised>.”
When the confirmation function is on, out dialling telephone numbers. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
the voice guide will say “<New device To make a call ® p. 7-67 make the call.
tag>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” SEND function ® p. 7-69 When the confirmation function is on,
Answer “No,” to say the new device tag Receiving calls ® p. 7-69 the system will confirm again the tele-
you want to register again. MUTE function ® p. 7-69 phone number. To continue with that
7. The device tag is changed. Switching between hands-free mode and pri- number, answer “Yes.”
When the change is complete, the voice vate mode ® p. 7-69 To change the telephone number, answer
guide will say “New name saved” and “No.” The system will say “Number
then the system will return to the main NOTE please” then say the telephone number
menu. again.
l The hands-free calls might not be operated
correctly when it makes calling or receiving
by operating the cellular phone directly.

NOTE 3. After the voice guide says “Name NOTE

please,” say the name you want to call,
l In the case of English, the system will recog- from those registered in the phone book. l If the name you selected has matching data
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for in the vehicle phone book but no telephone
4. If there is only one match, the system
the number “0.” number is registered under the selected loca-
proceeds to Step 5.
l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num- tion, the voice guide will say “{home/work/
bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *). If there are two or more matches, the mobile/other} not found for <name>. Would
l The maximum supported telephone number voice guide will say “More than one you like to add location or try again?”
length is as follows: match was found, would you like to call Say “Try again,” and the system will return
• International telephone number: + and tel- <returned name>.” If that person is the to Step 3.
ephone numbers (to 18 digits). one you want to call, answer “Yes.” Say “Add location” and you can register an
• Except for international telephone num- additional telephone number under the selec-
Answer “No,” and the name of the next
ted location.
7 ber: telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
matching person will be uttered by the
l If the name you selected has matching data
voice guide. in the mobile phone book but no telephone
Making a call using a phone book
number is registered under the selected loca-
You can make calls using the vehicle phone tion, the voice guide will say “{home/work/
book or mobile phone book of the Blue-
NOTE mobile/other} not found for <name>. Would
tooth® 2.0 interface. l If you say “No” to all names read by the sys- you like to try again?”
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to
For details on the phone books, refer to
found, returning to main menu” and the sys- Step 3.
“Phone book function” on page 7-69. tem will return to the main menu. Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.
1. Press the SPEECH button. Start over again from step 1.
2. Say “Call.”
5. If only one telephone number is regis-
tered under the name you just said, the 6. The voice guide will say “Calling
NOTE voice guide proceeds to Step 6. <name> <location>” and then the sys-
If two or more telephone numbers are tem will dial the telephone number.
l If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone
book and the mobile phone book are empty, registered that match the name you just
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone said, the voice guide will say “Would NOTE
book is empty. Would you like to add a new you like to call <name> at [home],
entry now?” [work], [mobile], or [other]?” Select the l When the confirmation function is on, the
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say system will ask if the name and location of
location to call. the receiver are correct. If the name is cor-
“Entering the phone book - new entry
menu.” You can now create data in the vehi- rect, answer “Yes.”
cle phone book. To change the name or location to call, an-
Answer “No,” to return to the main menu. swer “No.” The system will return to Step 3.

Redialing If the CD player or radio was playing when Phone book function
the incoming call was received, the audio
You can redial the last number called, based system will mute the sound from the CD The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- player or radio and output only the incoming unique phone books that are different from
lular phone. call. the phone book stored in the cellular phone.
Use the following procedure to redial. To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button They are the vehicle phone book and the mo-
1. Press the SPEECH button. on the steering wheel control switch. bile phone book.
2. Say “Redial.” When the call is over, the audio system will These phone books are used to register tele-
return to its previous state. phone numbers and to make calls to desired
SEND function numbers via the voice recognition function.
During a call, press the SPEECH button to MUTE function
enter voice recognition mode, then say At any time during a call, you can mute the NOTE 7
“<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF vehicle microphone.
Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying l Disconnecting the battery cable will not de-
tones. lete information registered in the phone
For example, if during a call you need to sim- “Mute” during a call will turn ON the MUTE book.
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a re- function and mute the microphone.
sponse to an automated system, press the Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn
SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound off the MUTE function and cancel the mute Vehicle phone book
send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- on the microphone. This phone book is used when making calls
lular phone. with the voice recognition function.
Switching between hands-free Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi-
Receiving calls mode and private mode cle phone book per language.
If an incoming phone call is received while Also, each entry has 4 locations associated
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch be-
the ignition switch or the operation mode is with: home, work, mobile and other. You can
tween hands-free mode (hands-free calls) and
in ON or ACC, the audio system will be au- register one telephone number for each loca-
private mode (calls using cellular phone).
tomatically turned on and switched to the in- tion.
If you press the SPEECH button and say
coming call, even when the audio system was “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you
originally off. You can register a desired name as a name for
can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-
The voice guide announcement for the in- any phone book entry registered in the vehi-
vate mode.
coming call will be output from the front pas- cle phone book.
To return to Hands-free mode, press the
senger’s seat speaker. Names and telephone numbers can be
SPEECH button again and say “Transfer
changed later on.
call.”

The vehicle phone book can be used with all bile, or other?” Say the location for 7. The voice guide will repeat the tele-
paired cellular phones. which you want to register a telephone phone number you have just read, and
number. then register the number.
To register a telephone number in the vehi- When the telephone number has been
cle phone book registered, the voice guide will say
NOTE
You can register a telephone number in the “Number saved. Would you like to add
vehicle phone book in the following 2 ways: l When the confirmation function is on, the another number for this entry?”
voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this
Reading out a telephone number, and select- To add another telephone number for a
correct?” Answer “Yes.”
ing and transferring 1 phone book entry from If a telephone number has been registered
new location for the current entry, an-
the phone book of the cellular phone. for the selected location, the voice guide will swer “Yes.” The system will return to lo-
say “The current number is <telephone num- cation selection in Step 5.
7 To register by reading out a telephone ber>, number please.” Answer “No” to end the registration
number If you do not want to change the telephone process and return to the main menu.
number, say “cancel” or the original number
1. Press the SPEECH button. to keep it registered.
2. Say “Phone book.” NOTE
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, 6. The voice guide will say “Number l When the confirmation function is on, after
please.” Say the telephone number to repeating the telephone number you have
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
import contact.” Say “New entry.” register it.
rect?” Answer “Yes.”
4. The voice guide will say “Name please.” Answer “No” to return to telephone number
Say your preferred name to register it. NOTE registration in step 6.
l In the case of English, the system will recog- To select and transfer one phone book en-
NOTE nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for
try from the phone book of the cellular
the number “0.”
l If the maximum number of entries are al- phone
ready registered, the voice guide will say
“The phone book is full. Would you like to You can select 1 phone book entry from the
delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to phone book of the cellular phone and register
delete a registered name. it in the vehicle phone book.
Say “No,” to return to the main menu.
5. When the name has been registered, the

voice guide will say “home, work, mo-

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle l If the maximum number of entries are al- l Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
is parked. Before transferring, make sure ready registered, the voice guide will say and holding the SPEECH button will cancel
that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. “The phone book is full. Would you like to the registration.
l All or part of data may not be transferred, delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
even when the cellular phone supports Blue- delete a registered name.
Say “No,” to return to the main menu. 7. When the reception is completed, the
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
the device. voice guide will say “<Number of tele-
l The maximum supported telephone number phone numbers that had been registered
5. After the voice guide says “Ready to re- in the import source> numbers have
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
20 digits or more will be truncated to the ceive a contact from the phone. Only a been imported. What name would you
home, a work, and a mobile number can
l
first 19 digits.
If telephone numbers contain characters oth- be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
like to use for these numbers?” 7
Say the name you want to register for
er than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are face will receive the phone book data this phone book entry.
deleted before the transfer. from the Bluetooth® compatible cellular
l For the connection settings on the cellular
phone.
phone side, refer to the instructions for the
6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
NOTE
cellular phone.
lular phone to set it up so that the phone l If the entered name is already used for other
book entry you want to register in the phone book entry or similar to a name used
1. Press the SPEECH button. for other phone book entry, that name cannot
vehicle phone book can be transferred to
2. Say “Phone book.” be registered.
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
the following: new entry, edit number, 8. The voice guide will say “Adding
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or NOTE <name>.”
import contact.” Say “Import contact.” When the confirmation function is on,
4. The voice guide will say “Would you l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular the system will ask if the name is cor-
like to import a single entry or all con- phone or the connection takes too much rect. Answer “Yes.”
tacts?” Say “Single entry.” time, the voice guide will say “Import con- Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will be- tact has timed out” and then the system will say “Name please.” Register a different
come ready to receive transferred phone cancel the registration. In such case, start name.
book data. over again from Step 1. 9. The voice guide will say “Numbers
saved.”

10. The voice guide will say “Would you NOTE 7. The voice guide will repeat the tele-
like to import another contact?” phone number.
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue l Say “List names,” and the names registered When the confirmation function is on,
in the phone book will be read out in order.
with the registration. You can continue the system will ask if the number is cor-
Refer to “Vehicle phone book: Listening to
to register a new phone book entry from the list of registered names” on page 7-73. rect. Answer “Yes.”
Step 5. Answer “No,” the system will return to
Answer “No,” to return to the main the Step 3.
menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, 8. Once the telephone number is registered,
mobile or other?” Select and say the lo- the voice guide will say “Number saved”
cation where the telephone number you and then the system will return to the
To change the content registered in the ve- want to change or add is registered.
hicle phone book main menu.
7 You can change or delete a name or tele-
When the confirmation function is on,
the system will check the target name
phone number registered in the vehicle phone and location again. Answer “Yes” if you NOTE
book. want to continue with the editing. l If the location where a telephone number
You can also listen to the list of names regis- Answer “No,” the system will return to was already registered has been overwritten
tered in the vehicle phone book. Step 3. with a new number, the voice guide will say
6. The voice guide will say “Number “Number changed” and then the system will
please.” Say the telephone number you return to the main menu.
NOTE want to register. Editing a name
l The system must have at least one entry.
Editing a telephone number NOTE 2. Say “Phone book.”
1. Press the SPEECH button. 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
l If the telephone number is already registered
2. Say “Phone book.” in the selected location, the voice guide will the following: new entry, edit number,
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of say “The current number is <current num- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
the following: new entry, edit number, ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- import contact.” Say “Edit name.”
phone number to change the current number. 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact.” Say “Edit number.” name of the entry you would like to edit,
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the or say list names.” Say the name you
name of the entry you would like to edit, want to edit.
or say list names.” Say the name of the
phone book entry you want to edit.

NOTE 5. When the voice guide is done reading the phone book entry in which the tele-
the list, it will say “End of list, would phone number you want to delete is reg-
l Say “List names,” and the names registered you like to start from the beginning?” istered.
in the phone book will be read out in order.
When you want to check the list again
Refer “Vehicle phone book: Listening to the
list of registered names” on page 7-73. from the beginning, answer “Yes.” NOTE
When you are done, answer “No” to re-
turn to the previous or main menu. l Say “List names,” and the names registered
5. The voice guide will say “Changing in the phone book will be read out in order.
<name>.” Refer to “Vehicle phone book: Listening to
When the confirmation function is on, NOTE the list of registered names” on page 7-73.
the system will ask if the name is cor- l You can call, edit or delete a name that is be-
rect. Answer “Yes” if you want to con-
tinue with the editing based on this in-
ing read out.
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to
5. If only one telephone number is regis-
tered in the selected phone book entry,
7
formation. call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or “De- the voice guide will say “Deleting
Answer “No” to return to Step 4. lete” to delete it.
<name> <location>.”
The system will beep and then execute your
6. The voice guide will say “Name please.” command. If multiple telephone numbers are regis-
Say the new name you want to register. tered in the selected phone book entry,
l If you press the SPEECH button and say
7. The registered name will be changed. “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is the voice guide will say “Would you like
When the change is completed, the sys- being read, the system will advance or re- to delete [home], [work], [mobile], [oth-
tem will return to the main menu. wind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to er], or all?”
the next entry or “Previous” to return to the Select the location to delete, and the
previous entry.
Listening to the list of registered voice guide will say “Deleting <name>
names <location>.”
1. Press the SPEECH button. Deleting a telephone number
2. Say “Phone book.” 1. Press the SPEECH button. NOTE
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of 2. Say “Phone book.”
the following: new entry, edit number, 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of l To delete the telephone numbers from all lo-
cations, say “All.”
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or the following: new entry, edit number,
import contact.” Say “List names.” edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out import contact.” Say “Delete.”
the entries in the phone book in order. 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
name of the entry you would like to de-
lete, or say list names.” Say the name of

6. The system will ask if you really want to 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
delete the selected telephone number(s) guide will ask “Are you sure you want to converts from text to voice the names regis-
to go ahead with the deletion, answer erase everything from your hands-free tered in the transferred phone book entries,
“Yes.” system phone book?” Answer “Yes.” and creates names.
Answer “No,” the system will cancel de- Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of
leting the telephone number(s) and then all registered information in the phone
return to Step 4. book and return to the main menu.
NOTE
7. When the deletion of the telephone num- 5. The voice guide will say “You are about l Only the mobile phone book transferred
ber is completed, the voice guide will to delete everything from your hands- from the connected cellular phone can be
used with that cellular phone.
say “<name> <location> deleted” and free system phone book. Do you want to
then the system will return to the main continue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. l You cannot change the names and telephone
numbers in the phone book entries registered
7 menu. Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of in the mobile phone book. You cannot select
If all locations are deleted, the system all registered information in the phone and delete specific phone book entries, ei-
will say “<name> and all locations de- book and return to the main menu. ther. To change or delete any of the above,
leted” and the name will be removed 6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, change the applicable information in the
from the phone book. If numbers still re- erasing the handsfree system phone source phone book of the cellular phone and
main under the entry, the name will re- book” and then the system will delete all then transfer the phone book again.
tain the other associated numbers. data in the phone book.
When the deletion is complete, the voice To import a devices phone book
Erasing the phone book guide will say “Hands-free system phone Follow the steps below to transfer to the mo-
book erased” and then the system will bile phone book the phone book stored in the
You can delete all registered information return to the main menu. cellular phone.
from the vehicle phone book.
2. Say “Phone book.” Mobile phone book NOTE
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of All entries in the phone book stored in the
l Transfer should be completed while the ve-
the following: new entry, edit number, cellular phone can be transferred in a batch hicle is parked. Before transferring, make
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or and registered in the mobile phone book. sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe loca-
import contact.” Say “Erase all.” Up to 7 mobile phone books, each containing tion.
up to 1,000 names, can be registered. l The already stored phone book in the mobile
phone book is overwritten by the stored
phone book in the cellular phone.

NOTE Answer “No,” to return to the main

menu.
l All or part of data may not be transferred,
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of NOTE
the device.
l The transfer may take some time to com-
l Only a home, a work, and a mobile number plete depending on the number of contacts.
can be imported.
l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
l The maximum supported telephone number
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
20 digits or more will be truncated to the lular phone, the voice guide will say “Un-
first 19 digits. able to transfer contact list from phone” and
then the system will return to the main
l If telephone numbers contain characters oth-
er than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are menu. 7
deleted before the transfer. l If you press the HANG-UP button or press
and hold the SPEECH button during the data
l For the connection settings on the cellular
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and
phone side, refer to the instructions for the
cellular phone. the system will return to the main menu.
l If an error occurs during the data transfer, all
transfer will be cancelled and the voice
1. Press the SPEECH button. guide will say “Unable to complete the
2. Say “Phone book.” phone book import” and then the system will
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of return to the main menu.
the following: new entry, edit number, l If there are no contacts in the phone book,
the voice guide will say “There are no con-
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or tacts on the connected phone.”
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
4. The voice guide will say “Would you
like to import a single entry or all con- 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice
tacts?” Say “All contacts.” guide will say “Import complete” and
5. The voice guide will say “Importing the then the system will return to the main
contact list from the mobile phone book. menu.
This may take several minutes to com-
plete. Would you like to continue?” An-
swer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile
phone book the phone book stored in the
cellular phone will start.
USB input terminal*
Enrollment commands
USB input terminal* The USB input terminal (A) is located in the This section explains how to connect and re-
indicated position. move a USB memory device or iPod. See the
You can connect your USB memory device following section for details on how to play
music files.
or iPod* to play music files stored in the USB Type 1 Refer to “Listening to an iPod” on page 7-39.
memory device or iPod.
Refer to “Listening to Audio Files on a USB
Device” on page 7-41.
Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device
Type 2 tracks via voice operation” on page 7-43.
How to connect a USB memory

device
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and
*“iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
Inc. in the United States and other coun- position or put the operation mode in
tries. OFF.
USB input terminal*
2. Connect a commercially available USB How to connect an iPod [For vehicles equipped with the
connector cable (B) to the USB memory LW/MW/FM radio/CD player]
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and
device (A).
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” Refer to “Listening to an iPod” on page 7-39,
position or put the operation mode in “Listening to Audio Files on a USB Device”
OFF. on page 7-41 and “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/
2. Connect the connector cable to the iPod. AAC)” on page 7-26.
[For vehicles equipped with the

NOTE MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
l Use a genuine connector cable from Apple tem (MMCS), the Smartphone Link Dis-
Inc. play Audio or the DISPLAY AUDIO]
7
Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
3. Connect the connector cable to the USB
input terminal. For vehicles equipped with the
4. To remove the connector cable, turn the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
3. Connect the USB connector cable to the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
USB input terminal. or put the operation mode in OFF first For details about the types of connectable de-
and perform the installation steps in re- vices and supported file specifications, refer
verse. to the following section.
NOTE
l Do not connect the USB memory device to Device types
the USB input terminal directly.
Types of connectable devices Devices of the following types can be con-
The USB memory device may be damaged. and supported file specifica- nected.
tions
4. To remove the USB connector cable, Model name Condition
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” Except for vehicles equipped USB memory device Storage capacity
position or put the operation mode in with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- of 256 Mbytes or
OFF first and perform the installation face more
steps in reverse.
For details about the types of connectable de- Models other than USB Digital audio play-
vices and supported file specifications, refer memory devices and er supporting mass
to the following pages and manuals. iPods storage class

Sun visors
For connectable device type for “iPod*,” NOTE Sun visors
“iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*”
l Do not connect to the USB input terminal
and “iPhone*,” access the MITSUBISHI any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
MOTORS website. reader, etc.) other than the connectable devi-
Please read and agree to the “Warning about ces specified in the previous section. The de-
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”. vice and/or data may be damaged. If any of
The websites mentioned above may connect these devices was connected by mistake, re-
move it after turning the ignition switch to
you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
the “LOCK” position.
MOTORS website.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
ucts/ index.html File specifications
7 You can play music files of the following
NOTE specifications that are saved in a USB memo-
ry device or other device supporting mass 1- To eliminate front glare
l Depending on the type of the USB memory storage class. When you connect your iPod,
device or other device connected, the con- 2- To eliminate side glare
nected device may not function properly or playable file specifications depend on the
the available functions may be limited. connected iPod. Vanity mirror
l It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-
ware updated to the latest version. Item Condition A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the
l You can charge your iPod by connecting it to MP3, WMA, AAC, sun visor.
the USB input terminal when the ignition File format
WAV
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
l Do not keep your USB memory device or Maximum number of
iPod in your vehicle. levels Level 8
l It is recommended that you back up files in (including the root)
case of data damage.
Number of folders 700
Number of files 65,535
*“iPod”, “iPod classic”, “iPod nano”, “iPod

touch” and “iPhone” are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
Ashtray*
Type 1 Type 2 Ashtray*
Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will au- A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the
tomatically turn on the mirror lamp (A). sun visor. CAUTION
l Put out matches and cigarettes before they
are placed in the ashtray.
l Don’t put papers and other things that burn
into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or
other smoking materials could set them on
fire, causing damage.
l Always close the ashtray. If left open, other
cigarette butts in the ashtray may be rekin-
dled. 7
To use the ashtray, open the lid.
CAUTION Card holder

l If the lid of vanity mirror with lamp is kept Cards can be slipped into the holder (B) on
open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi- the back of the sun visor.
cle’s battery will be discharged.

Accessory socket
Mounting position for movea- CAUTION Floor console

ble ashtray l When the accessory socket is not in use, be
sure to close the lid or install the cap, be-
The moveable ashtray can be installed in the cause the socket might become clogged by
drink holder. foreign material and be short-circuited.
To use a plug-in type accessory, open the lid

or remove the cap, and insert the plug in the
accessory socket.
7 NOTE
Interior lamps
l Accessory sockets in 2 locations can be used
at the same time.
The accessory socket can be used while the

ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.
Accessory socket
Centre console
CAUTION
l Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory op-
erating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
same time, make sure that the electrical ac-
cessories are 12 V accessories and that the
total power consumption does not exceed
120 W.
l Long use of the electric appliance without
running the engine may run down the bat- 1. Luggage room lamp
tery. 2. Room lamp (rear)
3. Map & room lamps (front)

Interior lamps
4. LED interior illumination (Smartphone Room lamps Position of
On/off control
tray) lamp switch
5. LED interior illumination (Front drink
holder) Front 2-DOOR The lamp illuminates when
a door or the tailgate is
( )/(•)
opened. It goes off approxi-
NOTE mately 15 seconds after all
l If you leave the lamps on without running doors and the tailgate are
the engine, you will run down the battery. closed.
Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that However, the lamp goes off
the lamps are turned off. immediately with all doors
and the tailgate closed in the
following cases:
7
l When the ignition
switch is turned to the
Rear
“ON” position or the
operation mode is put
in ON.
l When the central door
lock function is used to
lock the vehicle.
l When the keyless entry
key or the keyless oper-
ation key is used to
lock the vehicle.
l If the vehicle is equip-
Position of ped with the keyless
On/off control
lamp switch operation system, when
1-ON The lamp illuminates re- the keyless operation
gardless of whether a door function is used to lock
( ) the vehicle.
or the tailgate is open or
closed.

Interior lamps
Position of
On/off control
Map lamps LED interior illumination
lamp switch When the lamp switch is in the off position, (Front drink holder)
3-OFF The lamp goes off regard- push the switch (A) to turn on the lamp. Push When the lamps are illuminated with the
( ) less of whether a door or the the switch again to turn off the lamp. lamp switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO”
tailgate is open or closed. position, the LED interior illumination (Front
drink holder) illuminates.
NOTE
l When the key was used to start the engine, if
the key is removed while the doors and tail-
gate are closed, the lamp is illuminated and
7 after approximately 15 seconds it goes off.
l When the keyless operation function was
used to start the engine, if the operation
mode is put in OFF while the doors and tail-
gate are closed, the lamp illuminates and af-
ter approximately 15 seconds it goes off. (if
so equipped)
l The time until the lamp goes off can be ad- Luggage room lamp
justed. For details, please consult a The lamp illuminates when the tailgate is
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- opened, and goes off when the tailgate is
ice Point.
closed.
manual for details.

Storage spaces
LED interior illumination The lamps will illuminate again after they au- CAUTION
(Smartphone tray) tomatically go off if the ignition switch or the
engine switch is operated, if one of the doors l Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
When the lamps are illuminated with the driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
or the tailgate is opened or closed, or if the
lamp switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO” storage space could otherwise cause injuries.
keyless entry system or keyless operation
position, the LED interior illumination system is operated.
(Smartphone tray) illuminates.
NOTE
l The interior lamps auto-cutout function can
be deactivated. The time until the lamps au-
tomatically go off can be adjusted. For de-
tails and support, consult your nearest 7
ice Point.
1- Floor console box
manual for details. 2- Glove box
Interior lamp* auto-cutout
function Storage spaces
*: Map & room lamps (front), room lamp
(rear) and luggage room lamp
If any of the interior lamps are left switched
CAUTION
on with the ignition switch in the “LOCK” l Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated
position or the operation mode in OFF, it drink, and spectacles in the cabin when park-
ing the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin
goes off automatically after approximately 30
will become extremely hot, so lighters and
minutes. other flammable items may catch fire and
unopened drink cans may rupture. Also,
spectacles with plastic lenses or materials
could deform or crack.

Drink holder
Glove box The floor console box can also be used as an For the front seat
armrest.
To open, pull the lever (A).
The drink holder is located in front of the
floor console.
Card holder Drink holder

There is a card holder inside the glove box. For the rear seat
WARNING
In order to use the drink holder, allow the
l Do not spray water or spill beverages in- armrest to drop down.
side the vehicle. If the switches, wires or
electrical components become wet, they
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
up as much liquid as possible and imme-
diately consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
CAUTION
l Do not drink beverages while driving. This
is distracting and could cause an accident.
Floor console box
To open the console box, lift the release lever
(A) and raise the lid.
Bottle holder
Bottle holder There are bottle holders located on both sides Cargo area cover*
of front and rear doors.
WARNING
To use
l Do not spray water or spill beverages in-
side the vehicle. If the switches, wires or 1. Draw out the cover retracted by spring
electrical components become wet, they
and insert it in the mounting grooves
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
(A).
up as much liquid as possible and imme-
diately consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
7
CAUTION
l Do not drink beverages while driving. This
is distracting and could cause an accident. NOTE
l Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and
l Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
jolts while driving. If the spilt drink is very holder.
hot, you could be burnt.
l Tightly close the cap on drink bottles before
storing them.
l Some bottles may be too big or the wrong
shape to fit in the holder.
2. Remove the cover from the mounting

grooves, and the cover will roll back into
the retracted position.
NOTE
l Do not put luggage on the cover.

Cargo area cover*
To change position 2. After changing the position, gently To refit

shake the entire cover to make sure it is
There are two installation holes (B) for the securely retained. Refit the cover by performing the removal
cover. steps in reverse. Gently shake the entire cov-
NOTE er after fitting it to make sure it is securely
retained.
l If the rear seatback touches the cover, move
the cover rearward.
The cover could break if it supports the seat-
To store
back of the rear seat.
The cover can be fitted at the indicated posi-
tion when not in use.
7 To remove The cover can be stored above the luggage
floor board.
1. Roll the cover into the retracted position.
2. Move one of the sliders (C) towards the
inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove
the cover.
1. Move one of the sliders (C) towards the
inside of the vehicle, and fit the tab (D)
into the installation hole that is to be
used. Move the opposite slider in the
same fashion.

Assist grips
NOTE CAUTION WARNING

l Except for vehicles equipped with a spare l Do not use the assist grips when getting into l Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-
tyre, the cover can be stored under the lug- or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could ted object on the coat hook. If the curtain
gage floor board. detach causing you to fall. airbag was activated, any such item could
be propelled away with great force and
could prevent the curtain airbag from in-
Coat hook flating correctly. Hang clothes directly on
the coat hook (without using a hanger).
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
grip of the driver’s side. objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
7
Luggage hooks
There are 4 hooks located on the side walls of
Assist grips the luggage compartment.
Use the hooks for securing the luggage.
The assist grips (located above the doors on
the headliner) are not designed to support
body weight. They are intended for use only
while seated in the vehicle.

Convenient hook
CAUTION Luggage floor board

l Do not pile up the luggage beyond the seat-
back height. Also, firmly secure the luggage. 1. Hold the tab (A) and lift the luggage
Otherwise, serious accidents could result due floor board.
to hindered rearward view or flying objects
during sudden braking.
Convenient hook
Light items of luggage can be hung from the
7 hook.
2. Hook the strap (B) of the luggage floor

board onto the top of the vehicle as
shown to secure the luggage floor board.
NOTE
l Do not hang heavy luggage (more than ap-
proximately 3 kg) on the hook.
Doing so could cause damage to the hook.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down.................................................................. 8-02

If the operation mode cannot be changed to OFF (vehicles
equipped with the keyless operation system)................................. 8-02
Emergency starting............................................................................. 8-02
Engine overheating............................................................................. 8-04
Tools and jack*................................................................................... 8-05
Tyre repair kit*....................................................................................8-06
How to change a tyre.......................................................................... 8-13
Towing................................................................................................ 8-20 8
Operation under adverse driving conditions....................................... 8-23
OGKE18E5
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down 2. One of the other causes could be low CAUTION
battery voltage. If this occurs, the key-
less entry system, keyless operation l Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move volt battery.
it to the shoulder and use the hazard warning function and steering lock will also not
If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shorting can
flashers and/or the warning triangle etc. operate. damage both vehicles.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- l Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
page 5-60. thorized Service Point. size to prevent overheating of the cables.
l Check the jumper cables for damage and
corrosion before use.
If the engine stops/fails Emergency starting l Always wear protective eye goggles when
working near the battery.
Vehicle operation and control are affected if If the engine cannot be started because the l Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
the engine stops. Before moving the vehicle battery is weak or dead, the battery from an-
to a safe area, be aware of the following:
8 l The brake booster becomes inoperative
other vehicle can be used with jumper cables
to start the engine.
1. Get the vehicles close enough so the
and the pedal effort will increase. Press jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
down the brake pedal harder than usual. vehicles aren’t touching each other.
l Since the power steering system is no WARNING 2. Turn off all lamps, heater and other elec-
longer operative, the steering wheel feels l To start the engine using jumper cables trical loads.
heavy when turning it. connected to another vehicle, perform the 3. Set the parking brake firmly on each ve-
correct procedures according to the in- hicle. Put an A/T or CVT in “P” (PARK)
struction below. Incorrect procedures or the M/T in “N” (Neutral). Stop the en-
If the operation mode could result in a fire or explosion or dam- gine.
age to the vehicles.
cannot be changed to OFF l Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away
(vehicles equipped with the from the battery because the battery may WARNING
produce an explosion.
keyless operation system) l Turn off the ignition on both vehicles be-
forehand. Make sure that the cables or
If the operation mode cannot be changed to CAUTION your clothes cannot be caught by the fan
or drive belt. Personal injury could result.
OFF, perform the following procedure.
l Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling
1. Move the selector lever to the “P” or pushing the vehicle.
(PARK) position, and then change the It could damage your vehicle. 4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the
operation mode to OFF. (For vehicles proper level.
with CVT) Refer to “Battery” on page 10-08.
8-02 For emergencies OGKE18E5

Emergency starting
WARNING hicle with the discharged battery at the 6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has
point farthest from the battery. the booster battery, let the engine idle a
l If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or ap- few minutes, then start the engine in the
pears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump
vehicle with the discharged battery.
Starting!
A battery might rupture or explode if the
temperature is below the freezing point or CAUTION
if it is not filled to the proper level.
l Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric l Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis-
acid. tance running.
If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into
contact with your hands, eyes, clothes and
the painted surface of your vehicle, it NOTE
should be thoroughly flushed with water.
l As your vehicle is equipped with the Auto
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
with water immediately and thoroughly,
Stop & Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto
Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deacti-
8
and get prompt medical attention. vate the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system
WARNING and prevent the engine from automatically
5. Connect one end of one jumper cable l Make sure that the connection is made stopping before the battery is sufficiently
to the appointed position (shown in the il- charged.
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-
lustration). If the connection is made di- Refer to “To activate” on page 6-58.
charged battery (A), and the other end
rectly to the negative (-) side of the bat-
to the positive (+) terminal of the booster
tery, the inflammable gases generated 7. After the engine is started, disconnect
battery (B). from the battery might catch fire and ex-
Connect one end of the other jumper ca- the cables in the reverse order and keep
plode.
ble to the negative (-) terminal of the the engine running for several minutes.
l When connecting the jumper cables, do
booster battery, and the other end to not connect the positive (+) cable to the
the designated ground location of the ve- negative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks NOTE
might cause explosion of the battery.
l If the vehicle is put in motion without fully
charging the battery, it might cause the loss
CAUTION of the smooth engine operation and the anti-
lock brake warning lamp to illuminate.
l Take care not to get the jumper cable caught Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on
in the cooling fan or other rotating part in page 6-52.
the engine compartment.
OGKE18E5 For emergencies 8-03

Engine overheating
Engine overheating Stop the engine, and when the steam After the high coolant temperature warn-
stops, raise the bonnet to ventilate the ing has gone off, stop the engine.
When the engine is overheating, the informa- engine compartment. Restart the engine. [If the cooling fans are not turning]
tion screen in the multi-information display Stop the engine immediately and contact
will be interrupted and the engine coolant WARNING a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
temperature warning display will appear. Service Point for assistance.
Also “ ” will blink.
l Do not open the bonnet while steam is
coming from the engine compartment. It
If this occurs, take the following corrective could cause steam or hot water to spurt
measures: out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. out even when there is no steam coming
2. Check whether steam is coming from the out, and some parts will be very hot. Be
engine compartment. very careful when opening the bonnet.
l Be careful of hot steam, which could be
8 [If steam does not come from the engine
blowing off the reserve tank cap.
l Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap
compartment] while the engine is hot.
With the engine still running, raise the
bonnet to ventilate the engine compart-
ment.
*: Front of the vehicle
NOTE WARNING
l As your vehicle is equipped with the Auto l Be careful not to get your hands or clothes
Stop & Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto caught in the cooling fan.
Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deacti-
vate the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system
before stopping the vehicle. 4. Check the coolant level in the reserve
Refer to “To deactivate” on page 6-30. tank (B).

[If steam is coming from the engine
compartment]
3. Confirm that the cooling fans (A) are
turning.
[If the cooling fans are turning]
Tools and jack*
6. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant 2- Jack
leakage and the drive belt for looseness
FULL
or damage. Vehicles with tyre repair kit
If there is anything wrong with the cool-
ing system or drive belt, we recommend
you to have it checked and repaired.
LOW
Tools and jack*
Storage
The tools and jack are stored under the lug-
5. Add coolant to the radiator and/or re- gage floor board of the luggage compartment. 1- Tools
8
serve tank if necessary. (Refer to the The storage location of the tools and jack 2- Jack
“Maintenance” section.) should be remembered in case of an emer-
gency. Tools
WARNING
Vehicles with spare wheel
l Make sure that the engine has cooled
down before removing the radiator cap
(C), because hot steam or boiling water
otherwise will gush from the filler port
and may scald you.
CAUTION
l Do not add coolant while the engine is hot.
Suddenly adding cold coolant could damage
the engine. Wait for the engine to cool down,
then add coolant a little at a time.
1- Jack bar
1- Tools 2- Wheel nut wrench

Tyre repair kit*
Jack 2. Retract the jack and remove it from its Tyre repair kit*
installation fitting (A).
The jack is used only for the purpose of This kit enables emergency repair of a small
changing a tyre when a tyre is punctured. puncture in the tread area of a tyre that has
run over a nail, screw, or similar object.
NOTE
Storage
l The jack is maintenance-free. To retract
l The jack is in conformity with EC law as ap- The tyre repair kit is stored under the luggage
proximated by the Machinery Directive
floor board of the luggage compartment.
2006/42/EC.
The storage location of the tyre repair kit
l The EC declarations of conformity are at-
tached to the section “Declaration of Con- should be remembered in case of an emer-
formity” in the end of this owner’s manual. gency.
8 • The business name, full address of the Refer to “Luggage floor board” on page 7-88.
manufacturer and of his authorized repre- To store
sentative and the designation of the jack
are described in the EC declaration of 1. Retract the jack, then return it to its orig-
conformity. inal position.
2. Extend the jack and firmly secure it,
To remove then lower the luggage floor board.
1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
Refer to “Luggage floor board” on page
7-88.
To retract
To extend

Tyre repair kit*
How to use the tyre repair kit NOTE

MOTORS Authorized Service Point or an-
WARNING other specialist.
• The tyre sealant’s expiry date has passed.
l Using the tyre repair kit may damage the (The expiry date is shown on the bottle la-
wheel and/or the tyre inflation pressure bel.)
sensor for the tyre.
The vehicle must promptly be inspected
and repaired by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point after
using the tyre repair kit.
CAUTION
8
l The tyre sealant can cause health damage if
swallowed. If you accidentally swallow it,
drink as much water as possible and imme- • More than one tyre is punctured.
diately consult a doctor. • The puncture hole has a length or width of
l If the tyre sealant gets in your eyes or on 4 mm or more.
your skin, rinse with lots of water. If you • The tyre is punctured in the side wall (A),
still sense an abnormality, consult a doctor. not in the tread (B).
l Consult a doctor immediately if any allergic
reactions occur.
l Do not allow children to touch the tyre seal-
ant.
l Do not breathe in the vapours of tyre sealant.
l Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
1- Tyre compressor GENUINE tyre sealant.
2- Tyre sealant bottle
3- Valve insert (spare)
4- Valve remover NOTE
5- Filler hose l The tyre sealant cannot be used in any of the • The vehicle has been driven with the tyre
6- Speed restriction sticker situations listed below. If any of these situa- almost completely flat.
tions occurs, please contact a MITSUBISHI

Tyre repair kit*
NOTE 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

set up a warning triangle, flashing signal
• The tyre has completely slipped over the lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from
wheel rim and has come off the wheel.
the vehicle, and have all your passengers
• The wheel is damaged.
leave the vehicle.
l Use the tyre sealant only at ambient temper- 5. Take out the tyre repair kit.
atures of -30 °C to +60 °C.
l Effect an emergency repair without pulling 6. Take the valve cap (C) off the tyre valve
out the object (nail, screw, etc.) that is stuck (D), then press the valve remover (E)
in the tyre. onto the valve as illustrated. Allow all of
l Do not use the tyre sealant if the tyre has the air in the tyre to escape.
been damaged by being driven when insuffi-
ciently inflated (e.g. bumps, cuts, cracks etc.
on the tyre). CAUTION
8 l Wipe tyre sealant off the paintwork immedi-
ately with a damp cloth. l If there is any air left in the tyre when you
l Immediately wash clothes contaminated remove the valve insert, the valve insert may
with tyre sealant. fly out and injure you. Make sure the tyre
l Check the tyre sealant’s expiry date regular- contains no air before removing the valve in-
ly, be sure to purchase a new one from a sert.
ice Point before the expiry date. 8. Shake the tyre sealant bottle well.
Before repairing a tyre, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable 7. Remove the valve insert (F) by turning it
ground. anticlockwise using the valve remover
2. Set the parking brake firmly. (E). Put the removed valve insert in a
3. On vehicles with M/T, stop the engine clean place so it does not get dirty.
and move the gearshift lever to the “R”
(Reverse) position.
On vehicles with CVT, move the selec-
tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position and
stop the engine.

Tyre repair kit*
NOTE squeeze it again and again to inject all of

the sealant into the tyre.
l In cold conditions (when the ambient tem-
perature is 0 °C or lower), thickening of the
tyre sealant can make the tyre sealant hard to
squeeze out of the bottle. Warm the bottle in-
side the vehicle.
9. Take the cap (G) off the tyre sealant bot-

tle (H). Do not remove the seal (I).
Screw the filler hose (J) onto the bottle
(H). As you screw the filler hose onto
the bottle, the seal will break, allowing NOTE
the sealant to be used.
l When removing and screwing in the valve 8
insert using the valve remover, turn the
NOTE valve remover by hand. Using a tool to turn
the valve remover could damage it.
l When injecting the sealant, position the
valve away from the bottom, i.e., away from
the point where the tyre touches the ground.
If the valve is near the point where the tyre
touches the ground, the sealant may not go
into the tyre easily.
11. After injecting the sealant, pull the hose

off the valve, remove any residual seal-
ant from the valve, rim and/or tyre. Fit
the valve insert (F) into the valve (D),
CAUTION and screw the valve insert securely into
l If you shake the bottle after screwing on the place using the valve remover (E).
hose, sealant may spray out of the hose.
10. Press the hose onto the valve (D). Hold-

ing the sealant bottle upside-down,

Tyre repair kit*
12. After injecting the sealant, securely fit 14. Place the compressor (L) with its air (Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on
the valve remover (E) into the end of the pressure gauge (M) on top. page 10-10.)
filler hose (J) to prevent sealant from Pull out the compressor’s power cord
leaking from the empty bottle. (N), insert the plug on the cord into the
accessory socket (O), and then put the
operation mode in ACC. (Refer to “Ac-
cessory socket” on page 7-80.)
Turn ON the compressor switch (P) and
inflate the tyre to the specified pressure.
13. Pull out the compressor hose (K) from

the side of the tyre compressor, and then
securely attach the hose to the tyre valve
(D).
CAUTION
l The supplied compressor is designed only
for inflation of your vehicle tyres.
l The compressor is designed to run on a vehi-
cle’s 12 V power supply. Do not connect it
to any other power source.

Tyre repair kit*
CAUTION CAUTION
l The compressor is not waterproof. If you use l If the compressor becomes sluggish or hot
it in rain, make sure water does not get on it. while operating, it is overheating. Immedi-
l Any sand or dust sucked into the compressor ately place the switch in the OFF position
could make the compressor break down. Do and let the compressor cool down for at least
not place the compressor directly on any 30 minutes.
sandy or dusty surface when using it.
l Do not disassemble or modify the compres-
sor. Also, do not subject the air pressure NOTE
gauge to shock. It could malfunction.
l If the tyre pressure does not rise to the speci-
fied level within 10 minutes, the tyre may be
15. Check and adjust the tyre pressure with so severely damaged that the tyre sealant
reference to the air pressure gauge on the cannot be used to effect an emergency re- CAUTION
compressor. If you overinflate the tyre, pair. Please contact a MITSUBISHI
l Do not affix the sticker anywhere except the 8
release air by loosening the hose’s end specified position on the pad of the steering
other specialist in this event.
fitting. wheel. Affixing the sticker in an incorrect
If there is a gap between the tyre and position could prevent the SRS airbag from
16. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then working normally.
wheel because the tyre has moved in-
ward from the wheel rim, press the pe- pull the power cord plug out of the sock-
riphery of the tyre towards the wheel to et. 18. When you have inflated the tyre to the
close the gap before running the com- specified pressure, stow the compressor,
pressor. (With no gaps, the tyre pressure NOTE bottle, and other items in the vehicle and
will rise.) promptly start driving the vehicle so that
l Simply putting sealant and air into the tyre
the tyre sealant can spread evenly in the
using the tyre repair kit does not seal the
tyre. Drive with great care. Do not ex-
CAUTION puncture hole. Air will leak through the
ceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Ob-
puncture hole until the emergency repair
l Be careful not to get your fingers trapped be- procedure is completed (through step 19 or serve local speed limits.
tween the tyre and wheel as the tyre inflates. step 20 of these instructions).
l The surface of the compressor will get hot
while the compressor is running. Do not
keep the compressor running continuously 17. Affix the speed restriction sticker (Q) to
for more than 10 minutes. After using the the three-diamond mark on the steering
compressor, wait for the compressor to cool wheel.
before using it again.

Tyre repair kit*

l If you sense any abnormality while driving, l If the tyre pressure is lower than the mini- l In cold conditions (when the ambient tem-
stop the vehicle and contact a MITSUBISHI mum permitted pressure (1.3 bar {130 perature is 0 °C or lower), the time and driv-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or an- kPa}), the tyre cannot successfully be re- ing distance necessary until completion of
other specialist. Otherwise the tyre pressure paired with the tyre sealant. Do not drive the the repair can be longer than in warmer con-
may drop before the emergency repair pro- vehicle any further. Contact a MITSUBISHI ditions, meaning that the tyre pressure can
cedure is completed, rendering the vehicle MOTORS Authorized Service Point or an- drop below the specified level even when
unsafe. other specialist. you have inflated the tyre a second time and
subsequently driven the vehicle. If this hap-
pens, inflate the tyre to the specified pres-
NOTE 20. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km sure once more, drive for approximately 10
(3 miles), check the tyre pressure using minutes or 5 km (3 miles), then check the
l Driving faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) can the air pressure gauge on the compres- tyre pressure again. If the tyre pressure has
make the vehicle vibrate.
sor. If the tyre pressure has apparently again dropped below the specified level,
8 not dropped, the emergency repair pro- stop driving the vehicle and contact
19. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km cedure is complete. You must still not aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
(3 miles), check the tyre pressure using exceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). ice Point or another specialist.
the air pressure gauge on the compres- Observe local speed limits.
sor. If the tyre pressure has apparently 21. Immediately drive with great care to a
not dropped, the emergency repair pro- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
cedure is complete. Continue the process
NOTE Service Point and have tyre repair/
from step 21. l If the tyre pressure has dropped below the replacement performed.
If the tyre pressure is not sufficient, in- specified level when you check it at the end
flate the tyre to the specified pressure of the repair procedure, do not drive the ve-
again and drive the vehicle carefully
hicle any further. Contact a MITSUBISHI CAUTION
without exceeding a speed of 80 km/h other specialist. l Be sure to check the tyre pressure for confir-
(50 mph). mation that the emergency repair procedure
is complete.

How to change a tyre
NOTE 3. On vehicles with M/T, stop the engine WARNING

and move the gearshift lever to the “R”
l Please give the empty sealant bottle to your (Reverse) position. l Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.
On vehicles with CVT, move the selec-
ice Point when you purchase new sealant or If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
dispose of the sealant bottle according to na- tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position and jack could slip out of position, leading to
tional regulations for the disposal of chemi- stop the engine. an accident.
cal waste. 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
l A tyre in which puncture sealant has been set up a warning triangle, flashing signal
used should ideally be replaced with a new lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from NOTE
one. If you wish to have such a tyre properly the vehicle, and have all your passengers
repaired for reuse, please contact a l The chocks shown in the illustration do not
leave the vehicle. come with your vehicle. It is recommended
ice Point or another specialist. Note that a 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when that you keep one in the vehicle for use if
jacking up the vehicle, place chocks or needed.
proper repair is impossible following an
emergency repair if the puncture hole cannot blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally l If chocks are not available, use stones or any 8
other objects that are large enough to hold
be located. opposite from the tyre (B) you are
the wheel in position.
l The manufacturer is unable to guarantee that changing.
all tyre punctures can be repaired with the
tyre repair kit, in particular cuts or perfora- 6. Get the jack bar and wheel nut wrench
tions with a diameter of more than 4 mm or ready.
away from the tyre’s tread. The manufactur- Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-05.
er is not liable for damage sustained through
improper use of the tyre repair kit.
l The manufacturer is not liable for damage Spare wheel information*
sustained through re-use of any tyre in
The spare wheel is stored under the luggage
which tyre sealant has been used.
floor board of the luggage compartment.
Check the air pressure of the spare tyre fre-
How to change a tyre quently and make sure it is ready for emer-
gency use at any time.
Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehi-
cle in a safe, flat location. Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable specified air pressure will ensure that it can
ground, free of loose pebbles, etc. always be used under any conditions (city/
2. Set the parking brake firmly. high-speed driving, varying load weight,
etc.).

l The pressure should be periodically checked l When you purchase the temporary spare l Upon installation of the temporary spare
and maintained at the specified pressure wheel, be sure to purchase the type designed wheel, the ground clearance is reduced as
while the tyre is stowed. specially for your vehicle from your the tyre is smaller in diameter than the stand-
Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- ard tyre.
can lead to an accident. If you have no ice Point. When passing over the projections on the
choice but to drive with an insufficient tyre road, take care not to damage the vehicle’s
pressure, keep your speed down and inflate undercarriage.
the tyre to the correct pressure as soon as CAUTION l Do not install more than one temporary
possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” spare wheel at the same time.
on page 10-10.) l Do not use snow traction device (tyre
chains) with your temporary spare wheel.
Temporary spare wheel*

Because of the smaller tyre size, a snow To remove the spare wheel
traction device (tyre chains) will not fit
8 properly. This could cause damage to the 1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
CAUTION wheel and result in loss of the snow traction Refer to “Luggage floor board” on page
device (tyre chains). 7-88.
l The temporary spare wheel is for temporary If a front tyre becomes flat when using snow
use only and should be removed as soon as 2. To remove the spare wheel, remove the
traction device (tyre chains), first replace a installation clamp (A) by turning it anti-
the original wheel can be repaired or re-
rear wheel with the temporary spare wheel
placed. (The temporary spare wheel is being clockwise.
and then use the removed rear wheel to re-
used, the tyre pressure monitoring system
place the flat front wheel so that you can
will not function properly.)
continue to use the snow traction device
l The vehicle must not be driven at speeds in
(tyre chains).
excess of 80 km/h (50 mph) while using the
temporary spare wheel.
l The temporary spare wheel is not as good as
a standard wheel in controllability and sta-
bility.
When the temporary spare wheel is used,
avoid quick starts, sudden braking and sharp
steering.
l The temporary spare wheel is specifically
designed for your vehicle and it should not
be used on any other vehicle.

NOTE 2. Place the jack under one of the jacking 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the
l Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body the jacking point closest to the tyre you top of the jack.
near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
wish to change.
slips out of position.
8
4. Check that the flange portion at the jack-
To change a tyre ing point fits in the groove at the top of
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first re-
WARNING
the jack.
move the covers (refer to “ Wheel cov- l Set the jack only at the positions shown Insert the jack bar (D) into the wheel nut
ers ” on page 8-19. here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
wrench (E). Then put the end of the jack
Then loosen the wheel nuts a quarter it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury. bar into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in
turn with the wheel nut wrench. Do not the illustration.
remove the wheel nuts yet. l Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face. Otherwise, the jack might slip and
cause personal injury. Always use the jack
on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the
jack, make sure there are no sand or peb-
bles under the jack base.

Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until WARNING WARNING
the tyre is raised slightly off the ground
surface. l Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres l Mount the spare wheel with the valve
still on the ground could turn and make stem (I) facing outboard. If you cannot see
your vehicle fall off the jack. the valve stem (I), you have installed the
wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel wheel installed backwards can cause vehi-
nut wrench, then take the wheel off. cle damage and result in an accident.
CAUTION
l Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
8
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
WARNING face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
l Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
mount the spare tyre.
tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
7. Turn the wheel nuts clockwise by hand
to initially tighten them.
l Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack. [Type 1: On vehicles with steel wheels]
l Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both hand until the tapered parts of the wheel
are very dangerous. nuts make light contact with the seats of
l Do not use a jack except the one that the wheel holes and the wheel is not
came with your vehicle.
loose.
l The jack should not be used for any pur-
[Type 2: On vehicles with aluminium
pose other than to change a tyre.
l No one should be in your vehicle when us- wheels]
ing the jack. Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
l Do not start or run the engine while your hand until the flange parts of the wheel
vehicle is on the jack.

nuts make light contact with the wheel CAUTION Tightening torque 88 to 108 Nm
and the wheel is not loose.
l Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
the nuts, or they will tighten too much.
Type 1
NOTE
l On vehicles with aluminium wheels, if all 4
Type 2 aluminium wheels are changed to steel
wheels. e. g. when fitting winter tyres, use
tapered nuts.
8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the

wheel nut wrench anticlockwise until the
CAUTION 8
tyre touches the ground.
NOTE l Never use your foot or a pipe extension for
l Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the extra force in the wheel nut wrench. If you
steel spare wheel as shown in the illustra- do so, you will tighten the nut too much.
tion, but return to the original wheel and tyre
as soon as possible.
10. On vehicles with wheel covers, install
the covers (refer to “Wheel covers” on
page 8-19 ).
11. Lower and remove the jack, then store
the jack, flat tyre, and chocks. Have your
damaged tyre repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in

the illustration until each nut has been
tightened to the torque listed here.

12. Check your tyre inflation pressure at the CAUTION NOTE
next gasstation. The correct tyre pres-
sures are shown on the driver’s door la- l If the steering wheel vibrates when driving l On vehicles with a T155/90D16 or
after changing the tyre, we recommend you T155/80D17 size spare wheel, the clamp
bel. See the illustration.
to have the tyres checked for balance. cannot be used for a normal size tyre.
l Do not mix one type of tyre with another or l When storing a normal size flat tyre in the
use a different size from the one listed. This space for the spare wheel under the luggage
would cause early wear and poor handling. floor board, the luggage floor board will be
positioned higher than usual.
To store the spare wheel

3. Have your damaged tyre repaired as
1. Lift up the luggage floor board. soon as possible.
Refer to “Luggage floor board” on page
7-88.
8 2. Store the spare wheel under the luggage To store the tools and jack
floor board. To store the spare wheel, fit Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
the installation clamp (A) by turning it ing the jack, jack bar and wheel nut wrench.
clockwise. Refer to “Tools and jack*” on page 8-05.
13. As your vehicle is equipped with the tyre
pressure monitoring system (TPMS), af-
ter filling your tyres to the correct pres-
sure, reset the tyre pressure monitoring
system (TPMS).
Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem (TPMS): Reset of low tyre pressure
warning threshold” on page 6-102.
CAUTION
l After changing the tyre and driving the vehi-
cle approximately 1,000 km (620 miles), re-
tighten the wheel nuts to make sure that they
have not come loose.

Wheel covers* To install

1. Make sure the tabs (A) of the back of the
To remove wheel cover are not broken and correctly
Wrap the tip of the jack bar with a cloth, in- fitted on the rings (B). If in doubt, do not
sert it into the notch provided in the wheel install the wheel cover and consult your
cover, and pry the cover away from the MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
wheel. Using the same procedure at the other Service Point.
wheel cover notches, work the wheel cover
away from the wheel to remove it complete-
ly.
NOTE
l Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) 8
provided on the reverse side to show the air
valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air
valve.
2. Align the air valve (C) of the tyre with

the notch (D) in the wheel cover. 3. Push the underside (F) of the wheel cov-
er into the wheel.
CAUTION 4. Gently push both sides (G) of the wheel
cover and hold them in place with both
l Removing the cover with your hands may
knees.
cause injury to the fingers.
NOTE
l The wheel cover is made of plastic. Pry it
loose carefully.

Towing
5. Gently tap around the circumference of l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside re- The regulations concerning towing may dif-
the wheel cover at the top (H), then push veals that oil or some other fluid is leak- fer from country to country. It is recommen-
the wheel cover into place. ing. ded that you obey the regulations of the area
where you are driving your vehicle.
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to
tow the vehicle.
Please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point or a commercial
tow truck service for assistance.
Do not tow 4WD vehicles, or 2WD vehicles
Only when you cannot receive a towing serv- with CVT, with this style.
ice from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point or commercial tow truck
8 service, tow your vehicle carefully in accord-
Do not tow 4WD vehicles with this style.
ance with the instructions given in “Emergen-
Towing cy towing” in this part.
If your vehicle needs to be tow-

ed
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
have it done by your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a
commercial tow truck service.
In the following cases, transport the vehicle

using a tow truck.
l The engine runs but the vehicle does not

move or abnormal noise is produced.

Towing
Towing the vehicle by a tow CAUTION Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi-
truck tion or put the operation mode in ACC and
l [For 2WD vehicles equipped with the Active secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
Stability Control (ASC)]
position with a rope or tiedown strap. Never
CAUTION If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” po-
switch in the “ON” position or the operation
l This vehicle must not be towed by a tow mode in ON and only the front wheels or on- sition or put the operation mode in OFF when
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type ly the rear wheels raised off the ground towing.
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam- (Type B or C), the ASC may operate, result-
age the bumper and front end. ing in an accident. When towing the vehicle Towing with front wheels off
l Do not tow 2WD vehicles with CVT with with the rear wheels raised, turn the ignition
the driving wheels on the ground (Type B) switch to the “ACC” position or put the op-
the ground (Type C - 2WD ve-
as illustrated. eration mode in ACC. When towing the vehicles only)
This could result in the driving system dam- hicle with the front wheels raised, keep the
age. ignition switch or the operation mode as fol- Release the parking brake.
l Do not tow 4WD vehicles with the front or lows. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
8
rear wheels on the ground (Type B or Type [Except for vehicles equipped with keyless
C) as illustrated. This could result in driving
position (M/T) or the selector lever in the
operation system] “N” (Neutral) position (CVT).
system damage or the vehicle may jump at The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
the carriage. “ACC” position.
If you tow 4WD vehicles, use Type D or E [Vehicles equipped with keyless operation Emergency towing
equipment. system]
l On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission is mal- The operation mode is in OFF or ACC. If towing service is not available in an emer-
functioning or damaged, transport the vehi- gency, your vehicle may be temporarily tow-
cle with the driving wheels on a carriage ed by a rope secured to the towing hook.
(Type C, D or E) as illustrated. Towing with rear wheels off the
If your vehicle is to be towed by another ve-
ground (Type B - 2WD vehicles hicle or if your vehicle tows another vehicle,
with M/T only) pay careful attention to the following points.
Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) If your vehicle is to be towed by
position. another vehicle
1. The front towing hooks are located as
shown in illustration. Secure the tow
rope to the front towing hook.

Towing
On vehicles with M/T, turn the ignition CAUTION
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
On vehicles with CVT, turn the ignition l Do not leave the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position or the operation mode in
switch to the “ON” position.
OFF. The steering wheel will lock, causing
[For vehicles with the keyless operation loss of control.
system] l For vehicle equipped with the Adaptive
On vehicles with M/T, put the operation Cruise Control System (ACC) and Forward
mode in ACC or ON. Collision Mitigation system (FCM), stop
On vehicles with CVT, put the operation these systems to prevent an unexpected acci-
mode in ON. dent or unexpected operation during towing.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC)” on page 6-66 and “Forward Colli-
NOTE NOTE sion Mitigation system (FCM)” on page
6-79.
8 l Using any part other than the designated l As your vehicle is equipped with the Auto
towing hook could result in damage to vehi- Stop & Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto
cle body. Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deacti- 3. Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral”
vate the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system position (M/T), or the selector lever in
l Using a wire rope or metal chain can result
before stopping the vehicle.
in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (CVT).
use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire 4. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if re-
rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any quired by law. (Follow the local driving
point where it touches the vehicle body.
l Take care that the tow rope is kept as hori- WARNING laws and regulations.)
5. During towing make sure that close con-
zontal as possible. An angled tow rope can l When the engine is not running, the brake
damage the vehicle body. tact is maintained between the drivers of
booster and power steering system do not
l Secure the tow rope to the same side towing operate. This means higher brake depres- both vehicles, and that the vehicles trav-
hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as pos- sion force and higher steering effort are el at low speed.
sible. required. Therefore, vehicle operation is
very difficult.
2. Keep the engine running.
If the engine is not running, perform the
following operation to unlock the steer-
ing wheel.
[Except for vehicles with keyless opera-
tion system]

Operation under adverse driving conditions
WARNING If your vehicle tows another ve- NOTE

hicle
l Avoid sudden braking, acceleration and l Do not tow a vehicle heavier than your own
steering wheel movements; such driving Only use the rear towing hook as shown in vehicle.
operation could cause damage to the tow- the illustration.
ing hook or tow rope. Secure the tow rope to the rear towing hook.
People in the vicinity could be injured as a Otherwise, the instructions are the same as
result.
for “When being towed by another vehicle”.
l When going down a long slope, the brakes
may overheat, reducing effectiveness.
Have your vehicle transported by a tow
truck.
CAUTION 8
l The person in the vehicle being towed must
pay attention to the brake lamps of the tow- Operation under adverse
ing vehicle and make sure the rope never be-
comes slack. driving conditions
l When a vehicle equipped with CVT is to be
towed by another vehicle with all the wheels
on the ground, make sure that the towing On a flooded road
speed and distance given below are never
exceeded, which causes damage to the trans- NOTE Avoid flooded roads. In the event driving
mission. l Using any part other than the designated flooded roads, doing so may cause the fol-
towing hook could result in damage to vehi- lowing serious damage to the vehicle.
Towing speed: 40 km/h (25 mph) cle body. l Engine stalling
Towing distance: 40 km (25 miles)
l Short in electrical components
For the towing speed and the towing dis- l Engine damage caused by water immer-
tance, follow the local driving laws and reg- sion
ulations.
After driving on flooded roads, be sure to
have an inspection at a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point and take
the necessary measures or repair.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
On a wet road l Depressing the brake pedal during travel CAUTION

on snowy or icy roads may cause tyre
When driving in rain or on a road with many slippage and skidding. When traction be- l The impact on tyres and/or wheels when
driving on a bumpy or rutted road can dam-
puddles a layer of water may form between tween the tyres and the road is reduced
age the tyre and/or wheel.
the tyres and the road surface. the wheels may skid and the vehicle can-
This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance on not readily be brought to a stop by con-
the road, resulting in loss of steering stability ventional braking techniques. Braking This vehicle is intended for driving mainly
and braking capability. will differ, depending upon whether you on roads with firm surface.
To cope with this, observe the following have anti-lock brake system (ABS). As 4WD system (if available on your vehicle)
items: your vehicle is equipped with ABS, makes possible driving on roads without spe-
(a) Drive your vehicle at a slow speed. brake by pressing the brake pedal hard, cial coverage, on flat and firm surface.
(b) Do not drive on worn tyres. and keeping it pressed. Please, remember that off-road ability of your
(c) Always maintain the specified tyre infla- l Allow extra distance between your vehi- vehicle is limited. Your vehicle is not inten-
8 tion pressures. cle and the vehicle in front of you, and ded for driving in heavy off-road terrain,
avoid sudden braking. overcoming the rugged terrain, deep ruts, etc.
On a snow-covered or frozen l Accumulation of ice on the braking sys- Manufacturer of the vehicle is proceeding
road tem can cause the wheels to lock. Pull from the following assumption:
away from a standstill slowly after con- taking the decision to keep driving under
l When driving on a snow-covered or fro- firming safety around the vehicle. conditions mentioned above, driver takes all
zen road, it is recommended that you use actions at own risk, aware of possible conse-
snow tyres or snow traction device (tyre quences.
CAUTION
chains).
Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Snow l Do not press the accelerator pedal rapidly. If
the wheels break free of the ice, the vehicle
traction device (tyre chains)” sections.
could suddenly start moving and possibly
l Avoid high-speed operation, sudden ac- cause an accident.
celeration, abrupt brake application and
sharp cornering.
On a bumpy or rutted road
Drive as slow as possible when driving on
bumpy or rutted roads.

Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions......................................................................9-02

Cleaning the interior of your vehicle.................................................. 9-02
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle..................................................9-03
OGKE18E5
Vehicle care precautions
Vehicle care precautions Cleaning the interior of your NOTE

In order to maintain the value of your vehi-
vehicle l Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
tectants containing silicons or wax.
cle, it is necessary to perform regular mainte- After cleaning the interior of your vehicle Such products can cause discolouring and,
nance using the proper procedures. with water, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry when applied to the instrument panels or
Always maintain your vehicle in compliance other parts, may cause reflections on the
in a shady, well-ventilated area. windscreen and obscure vision.
with environmental pollution control regula-
Also, if such products get on the switches of
tions.
Carefully select the materials used for wash- NOTE the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
ure of these accessories.
ing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain l To clean the inside of the tailgate window, l Do not use synthetic fiber or dry cloth. They
corrosives. always use a soft cloth and wipe the window can cause discolouring or damage the sur-
If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a glass along the demister heater element so as face.
specialist for selection of these materials. not to cause damage. l Do not place a deodorizer on the instrument
panel or near lamps and instruments. The in-
gredients for deodorizer can cause discolour-
9 CAUTION CAUTION ing or cracking.
l Cleaning products can be dangerous. Always l Do not use organic substances (solvents,
follow the instructions of the cleaning prod- benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or
uct supplier. alkaline or acidic solutions.
Upholstery
l To avoid damage, never use the following to These chemicals can cause discolouring, 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
clean your vehicle: staining or cracking of the surface. cle, handle the upholstery carefully and
• Petrol If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make keep the interior clean.
• Paint Thinner sure their ingredients do not include the sub- Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
stances mentioned above.
• Benzine the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
• Kerosene leather should be cleaned with an appro-
• Turpentine Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
• Naphtha and flocked parts cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or
• Lacquer Thinner a mild soap and water solution.
• Carbon Tetrachloride 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
• Nail Polish Remover soaked in a mild soap and water solu-
cleaner and remove any stains with car-
• Acetone tion.
pet cleaner. Oil and grease can be re-
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
moved by lightly dabbing with a clean
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter-
colourfast cloth and stain remover.
gent thoroughly.
9-02 Vehicle care OGKE18E5
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle
Genuine leather* Cleaning the exterior of Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft
cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a your vehicle clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bon-
soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and wa-
net and other sections where dirt is likely to
ter solution. If the following is left on your vehicle, it may remain.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out cause corrosion, discolouration and stains,
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter- wash the vehicle as soon as possible
gent thoroughly. l Seawater, road deicing products. CAUTION
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the l Soot and dust, iron powder from facto- l When washing the under side of your vehi-
genuine leather surface. ries, chemical substance (acids, alkalis, cle or wheel, be careful not to injure your
coaltar, etc.). hands.
NOTE l Droppings from birds, carcasses of in- l As your vehicle has rain sensor, place the
wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position to
sects, tree sap, etc. deactivate the rain sensor before washing the
l If genuine leather is wet with water or is
washed in water, wipe off water as quickly vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will operate
as possible with a dry, soft cloth. Washing in the presence of water spray on the wind-
If left damp, mildew may grow. screen and may get damaged as a result. 9
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
l Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, l Refrain from excessively using a car wash as
alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents picked up from the road surface can damage its brushes may scratch the paint surface,
may discolour the genuine leather surface. the paint coat and body of your vehicle if left causing it to lose its gloss. Scratches will be
Be sure to use neutral detergents. in prolonged contact. especially visible on darker coloured vehi-
l Remove dirty patches or oil substances Frequent washing and waxing is the best way cles.
quickly as they can stain genuine leather. to protect your vehicle from this damage. l Never spray or splash water on the electrical
l The genuine leather surface may harden and components in the engine compartment. Do-
This will also be effective in protecting it
shrink if it is exposed to direct sun for long ing so could have an adverse effect on the
from environmental elements such as rain, engine startability.
hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it
in the shade as much as possible. snow, salt air, etc. Exercise caution also when washing the un-
l When the temperature of the vehicle interior Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. derbody; be careful not to spray water into
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it the engine compartment.
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and with water to remove dust. Next, using an l Some types of hot water washing equipment
stick to the seat. ample amount of clean water and a car wash- apply high pressure and heat to the vehicle.
ing brush or sponge, wash the vehicle from They may cause heat distortion and damage
to the vehicle resin parts and may result in
top to bottom. flooding of the vehicle interior.
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Therefore:
OGKE18E5 Vehicle care 9-03

CAUTION CAUTION Waxing

• Maintain a distance of approximately • As your vehicle has a rain sensor, place Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the ad-
70 cm or more between the vehicle body the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” posi- herence of dust and road chemicals to the
and the washing nozzle. tion to deactivate the rain sensor. paintwork. Apply a wax solution after wash-
• When washing around the door glass, • As your vehicle is equipped with the For- ing the vehicle, or at least once every three
hold the nozzle at a distance of more than ward Collision Mitigation system (FCM), months to assist displacing of water.
70 cm and at right angles to the glass sur- turn off the system.
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
face. Refer to and “FCM ON/OFF switch” on
You should wax after the surfaces have
l After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle page 6-84.
slowly while lightly depressing the brake cooled.
pedal several times in order to dry out the For information on how to use wax refer to
During cold weather
brakes. the instruction manual of the wax.
Leaving the brakes wet could result in re- Salt and other chemicals spread on the roads
duced braking performance. Also, there is a in some areas in winter can have a harmful
possibility that they could freeze up or be- effect on the vehicle body. You should there-
CAUTION
come inoperative due to rust, rendering the
9 vehicle unable to move.
fore wash the vehicle as often as possible in l Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
should not be used.
accordance with our care-instructions. It is
l When using an automatic car wash, pay at-
l On vehicles with the front sunroof, be care-
tention to the following items, referring to recommended to have a preservative applied
ful when waxing the area around the sunroof
the operation manual or consulting a car and the underfloor protection checked before opening, not to put any wax on the weather-
wash operator. If the following procedure is and after the cold weather season. strip (black rubber) and surrounding plastic
not followed, it could result in damage to After washing your vehicle, wipe off all wa- parts. If stained with wax, the weatherstrip
your vehicle. ter drops from the rubber parts around the and surrounding plastic parts cannot main-
• Close the door windows. doors to prevent the doors from freezing. tain a weatherproof seal with the front sun-
• Close the front sunroof (if so equipped). roof.
• The outside mirrors are retracted.
• The wiper arms are secured in place with NOTE
tape. Polishing
l To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
• As your vehicle is equipped with the roof on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be The vehicle should only be polished if the
spoiler and the rear spoiler, check with the treated with silicone spray. paintwork has become stained or lost its lus-
car wash operator before using the car
tre. Do not polish parts with a mat coating
wash.
and the plastic bumpers. Doing so could
• If your vehicle is equipped with roof rails,
consult a car wash operator before using cause stains or damage the finish.
the car wash.

Cleaning plastic parts Aluminium wheels* Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil,
grease, insect carcasses, etc. After washing
Use a sponge or chamois leather. 1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprin-
the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft
If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough kling water on the wheels.
cloth. Never use a cloth that is used for clean-
surface of the bumper, moulding or lamps, 2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that
ing a painted surface to clean a window. Wax
the surface becomes white. In such a case, cannot be removed easily with water.
from the painted surface could get on the
wipe it off using lukewarm water and soft Rinse off the neutral detergent after
glass and lower glass transparency and visi-
cloth or chamois leather. washing the wheels.
bility.
3. Dry the wheels thoroughly using a cha-
CAUTION mois leather or a soft cloth.
NOTE
l Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard
tools as they may damage the plastic part CAUTION l To clean the inside of the rear window, al-
ways use a soft cloth and wipe the window
surface.
l Do not use a brush or other hard implement glass along the demister heater element so as
l Do not bring the plastic parts into contact on the wheels. not to cause damage.
with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine Doing so could scratch the wheels.
oils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphuric
l Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- 9
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing Wiper blades
stain or discolour the plastic parts. so could cause the coating on the wheels to
If they touch the plastic parts wipe them off peel or become discoloured or stained. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an
l Do not directly apply hot water using a grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
aqueous solution of neutral detergent then steam cleaner or by any other means. blades. Replace the wiper blades when they
immediately rinse the affected parts with no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page
l Contact with seawater and road deicer can
water. cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances 10-14.)
as soon as possible.
Chrome parts Cleaning the sunroof*
In order to prevent spots and corrosion of Window glass Use a soft cloth to clean the inner side of the
chrome parts, wash with water, dry thorough- sunroof. Hard deposits should be wiped away
The window glass can normally be cleaned
ly, and apply a special protective coating. with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
using only a sponge and water.
This should be done more frequently in win- gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
ter. sponge dipped in fresh water.
OGKE18E5 Vehicle care 9-05

NOTE
l The surface treatment on the inside of the
glass may be removed if hard cloth or organ-
ic solvent (benzine, kerosene, thinner, etc.)
is used.
Engine compartment
Clean the engine compartment at the begin-
ning and end of winter. Pay particular atten-
tion to flanges, crevices and peripheral parts
where dust containing road chemicals and
other corrosive materials might collect.
If salt and other chemicals are used on the
roads in your area, clean the engine compart-
9 ment at least every three months.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical
components in the engine compartment, as
this may cause damage.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous sol-
ution of neutral detergent then immediately
rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.

Maintenance
Service precautions........................................................................... 10-02

Catalytic converter............................................................................ 10-03
Bonnet............................................................................................... 10-03
Engine oil.......................................................................................... 10-04
Engine coolant...................................................................................10-05
Washer fluid...................................................................................... 10-06
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid*.................................................................. 10-07
Battery...............................................................................................10-08
Tyres..................................................................................................10-10
Wiper blade rubber replacement....................................................... 10-14
General maintenance.........................................................................10-16
Fusible links...................................................................................... 10-16
Fuses..................................................................................................10-17 10
Replacement of lamp bulbs...............................................................10-21
OGKE18E5
Service precautions
Service precautions *: Front of the vehicle WARNING

l Improper handling of components and
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular in- WARNING materials used in the vehicle can endanger
tervals serves to preserve the value and ap- your personal safety. We recommend you
pearance as long as possible.
l When checking or servicing the inside of
to consult a specialist for necessary infor-
the engine compartment, make sure the
Maintenance items as described in this own- engine is switched off and has had a mation.
er’s manual can be performed by the owner. chance to cool down.
We recommend you to have the periodic in- l If it is necessary to do work in the engine Check items of engine compartment are loca-
spection and maintenance performed by a compartment with the engine running, be ted as shown in the figure below.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service especially careful that your clothing, hair,
etc., does not become caught by the cool-
Point or another specialist.
ing fans, drive belts, or other moving LHD
In the event a malfunction or a problem is parts.
discovered, we recommend you to have it l After performing the maintenance, make
checked and repaired. This section contains sure that no tools or cloths are left behind
information on inspection maintenance pro- in the engine compartment.
cedures that you can do yourself. Follow the If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
10 instructions and cautions for each of the vari- the vehicle may occur.
ous procedures. l The cooling fans can turn on automatical-
ly even if the engine is not running.
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position or put the operation mode in
OFF to be safe while you work in the en- RHD
gine compartment.
l Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open
flames around fuel or battery. The fumes
are flammable.
l Be extremely cautious when working
around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulphuric acid.
l Do not get under your vehicle with just
the body jack supporting it. Always use
automotive jack stands.
A- Cooling fans
B- Caution label 1- Engine oil level dipstick
10-02 Maintenance OGKE18E5

Catalytic converter
2- Engine oil cap Bonnet CAUTION
3- Engine coolant reservoir
4- Washer fluid reservoir l Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in
the original position. Failure to do so may
5- Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reser- To open cause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms or
voir* front windscreen.
6- Battery 1. Pull the release lever towards you to un-
lock the bonnet.
3. Support the bonnet by inserting the sup-
Catalytic converter port bar in its slot.
The exhaust gas scavenging devices used

with the catalytic converter are extremely ef-
ficient for the reduction of noxious gases.
The catalytic converter is installed in the ex-
haust system.
It is important to keep the engine properly
tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and
prevent possible catalyst damage. 10
WARNING
2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safe-
l As with any vehicle, do not park or oper-
ty lock.
ate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
ble materials such as dry grass or leaves
CAUTION
can come in contact with a hot exhaust l Note that the support bar may disengage the
since a fire could occur. bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by a
l Paint should not be applied to the catalyt- strong wind.
ic converter. l After inserting the support bar into the slot,
make sure the bar supports the bonnet se-
curely from falling down on to your head or
NOTE body.
l Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel

selection” on page 2-02.
OGKE18E5 Maintenance 10-03

Engine oil
To close NOTE The engine oil used has a significant effect on

the engine’s performance, service life and
1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its l If this does not close the bonnet, release it startability. Be sure to use oil of the recom-
from a slightly higher position.
holder. mended quality and appropriate viscosity.
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position
l If you drive with the bonnet left open, a
All engines consume a certain amount of oil
warning display appears on the information
approximately 20 cm above the closed screen in the multi-information display. during normal operation. Therefore, it is im-
position, then let it drop. portant to check the oil level at regular inter-
3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked vals or before starting a long trip.
by softly lifting the centre of the bonnet. 1. Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Wait a few minutes.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean cloth.
5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes.
Engine oil 6. Remove the dipstick and confirm that
the oil level is between the marks (A)
10 To check and refill engine oil
and (B).
7. If the oil level is less than the level indi-
cated by the mark (A), remove the cap
and add enough oil to raise the level to
between the marks (A) and (B).
8. After adding oil, close the cap securely.
CAUTION 9. Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4
l Be careful that hands or fingers are not trap- to 6.
ped when closing the bonnet.
l Before driving, make sure that the bonnet is NOTE
securely locked. An incompletely locked
bonnet can suddenly open while driving. l To avoid engine damage, do not overfill by
This can be extremely dangerous. exceeding the mark (B).
l Do not press down the bonnet hard with a l Be sure to use the specified engine oil and
hand as it may damage the bonnet. do not mix various types of oil.
A- Minimum level
B- Maximum level

Engine coolant
NOTE Engine oil viscosity The coolant level in this tank should be kept
between the “LOW” and “FULL” marks
l When the oil level is checked in step 6 when measured while the engine is cold.
above, check it on a low side of the dipstick
because it is different in appearance of oil
level in the two sides of the dipstick.
l The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the FULL
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions, re-
quiring earlier oil replacement.
Please refer to the maintenance schedule.
l For handling of used engine oils, refer to
2-05. LOW
Recommended engine oil

l Select engine oil of the proper SAE vis-
cosity number according to the atmos-
Engine oil specification pheric temperature.
Engine oil should meet all the following con- 10
ditions. NOTE
l API SN classification
l Calcium content ≤ 2,000 ppm l Use of additives is not recommended since
they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-
l Base number ≥ 6.37 mg KOH/g tives already included in the engine oil. It
may result in failure of the mechanical as-
sembly.
NOTE *: Front of the vehicle
l If those conditions are unknown, contact a
To add coolant
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- Engine coolant
ice Point.
The cooling system is a closed system and
To check the coolant level normally the loss of coolant should be very
Recommended engine oil: slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant level
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE EN- could indicate leakage. If this occurs, we rec-
GINE OIL SN/GF-5. A transparent coolant reserve tank (A) is lo-
cated in the engine compartment. ommend you to have the system checked as
soon as possible.

Washer fluid
If the level should drop below the “LOW” Because of the necessity of this anti-corro- During cold weather
level on the reserve tank, open the lid and sion agent, the coolant must not be replaced
add coolant. with plain water even in summer. The re- If the temperatures in your area drop below
Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, quired concentration of anti-freeze differs de- freezing, there is the danger that the coolant
remove the radiator cap (B) and add coolant pending on the expected ambient tempera- in the engine or radiator could freeze and
until the level reaches the filler neck. ture. cause severe damage to the engine and/or ra-
diator. Add a sufficient amount of anti-freeze
WARNING Above -35 °C: 50 % concentration of anti- to the coolant to prevent it from freezing.
freeze The concentration should be checked before
l Do not open the radiator cap (B) while the Below -35 °C: 60 % concentration of anti- the start of cold weather and anti-freeze add-
engine is hot. The coolant system is under
freeze ed to the system if necessary.
pressure and any hot coolant escaping
could cause severe burns.
CAUTION Washer fluid
Anti-freeze l Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze
Open the washer fluid reservoir cap and
The engine coolant contains an ethylene gly- or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol anti-freeze. The use of an im- check the level of washer fluid with the dip-
10 col anti-corrosion agent. Some parts of the
engine are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic
proper anti-freeze can cause corrosion of the stick.
aluminium components. If the level is low, replenish the container
changing of the engine coolant is necessary l Do not use water to adjust the concentration with washer fluid.
to prevent corrosion of these parts. of coolant.
l Concentrations exceeding 60 % will result in
Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE a reduction of both the anti-freeze and cool-
SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT PREMI- ing performance thus adversely affecting the
engine.
UM” or equivalent*.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based l Do not top up with water only. EMPTY
Water by itself reduces the rust-protective
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non- and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and
borate coolant with long life hybrid organic has a lower boiling point. It can also cause FULL
acid technology damage to the cooling system if it should
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Coolant freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it can cause
has excellent protection against corrosion and corrosion and rust formation.
rust formation of all metals including alumi-
nium and can avoid blockages in the radiator,
heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc.
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid*
NOTE To check the fluid level The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when doing other work under the
l The washer fluid container serves the wind- The fluid level must be between the “MAX” bonnet. The brake system should also be
screen, rear window and headlamps (if so
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. checked for leakage at the same time.
equipped).
If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
length of time, it indicates leaks from the
During cold weather LHD brake system.
If this occurs, we recommend you to have the
To ensure proper operation of the washers at
vehicle checked.
low temperatures, use a fluid containing an
anti-freezing agent.
Fluid type
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid* Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or
DOT4 from a sealed container. The brake flu-
The brake fluid and the clutch fluid share the id is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in the
reservoir tank. brake fluid will adversely affect the brake
system, reducing the performance.
RHD 10
WARNING
l Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your
skin and will damage painted surfaces.
Wipe up spills immediately. If brake fluid
gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush
immediately with clean water. Follow up
with a doctor as necessary.
The fluid level is monitored by a float. When
the fluid level falls below the “MIN” mark,
the brake warning lamp lights up.
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
brake pads, but this does not indicate any ab-
normality.

Battery
CAUTION Checking battery electrolyte Removing and installing the air

l Use only the specified brake fluid.
level duct
Do not mix or add different brands of brake
fluid to prevent chemical reactions. Do not To replenish with the distilled water, remove
let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix the air duct.
with, or get into the brake fluid.
This will damage the seals.
l Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to pre- WARNING
vent the brake fluid from deteriorating ex- l Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
cept maintenance. position or put the operation mode in
l Clean the filler cap before removing and OFF.
close the cap securely after maintenance. Make sure that your clothes cannot be
caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
injury could result.
Battery
The electrolyte level must be between the Remove the two bolts (A), and then remove
The condition of the battery is very important
specified limit on the outside of the battery. the air duct (B).
10 for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
Replenish with distilled water as necessary.
electrical system working properly. Regular
The inside of the battery is divided into sev-
inspection and care are especially important
eral compartments; remove the cap from each
in cold weather.
compartment and fill to the upper mark. Do
not top up beyond the upper mark because
NOTE spillage during driving could cause damage.
l After replacing the battery, the electronic Check the electrolyte level at least once every
control system data for the automatic trans- 4 weeks, depending on the operating condi-
mission, etc., will be erased. As a result, tions.
shift shocks may occur. If the battery is not used, it will discharge by
Shift shocks will become smoother after sev- itself with time.
eral changes in speed. Check it once every 4 weeks and charge with
low current as necessary.
To install the air duct, perform the removal
steps in reverse.

Battery
During cold weather NOTE CAUTION

The capacity of the battery is reduced at low l Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the l Keep it out of reach of children.
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.
temperatures. This is an inevitable result of l Never disconnect the battery when the igni-
tion switch is in the “ON” position or the op-
its chemical and physical properties. This is
eration mode in ON. Doing so could damage
why a very cold battery, particularly one that electric components.
is not fully charged, will only deliver a frac-
l Never short-circuit the battery. This could
tion of the starter current which is normally cause it to overheat and be damaged.
available. l If the battery is to be quick-charged, first
We recommend you to have the battery disconnect the battery cables.
checked before the start of cold weather and, l In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to
if necessary, have it charged or replaced. disconnect the negative (-) terminal first.
This does not only ensure reliable starting, l Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
but a battery which is kept fully charged also acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
has a longer life. WARNING stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
Disconnection and connection l Always wear protective eye goggles when cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous 10
working near the battery. Battery electro- solution of neutral detergent then immediate-
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the en- lyte contains sulphuric acid, so getting it ly rinse the affected parts with plenty of wa-
in your eyes is dangerous. ter.
gine, first disconnect the negative (-) terminal
and then the positive (+) terminal. When con- l Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
from the battery because the battery
necting the battery, first connect the positive could explode. NOTE
(+) terminal and then the negative (-) termi- l The battery electrolyte is extremely caus-
nal. tic. Do not allow it to come in contact with l Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is
your eyes, skin, clothing, or the painted connected, apply terminal protection grease.
surfaces of the vehicle. To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.
NOTE Spilt electrolyte should be flushed imme- l Check to see if the battery is securely instal-
diately with ample amounts of water. led and cannot be moved during travel.
l Open the terminal cover (A) before discon- Irritation to eyes or skin from contact Also check each terminal for tightness.
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
nal of the battery. with electrolyte requires immediate medi-
cal attention.
l Ventilate when charging or using the bat-
tery in an enclosed space.

Tyres
NOTE Tyres
l When the vehicle is to be left unused for a
long period of time, remove the battery and WARNING
store it in a place where the battery fluid will
not freeze. The battery should be stored only l Driving with tyres that are worn, dam-
in a fully charged condition. aged or improperly inflated can lead to a
loss of control or blow out of the tyres
which can result in a collision with serious
or fatal injury.
Tyre inflation pressures

Item Tyre size Front Rear
Normal tyre 215/70R16 100H 2.4 bar (35 psi) [240 kPa], 2.6 bar (38 psi) [260 kPa]*
225/55R18 98H 2.4 bar (35 psi) [240 kPa], 2.6 bar (38 psi) [260 kPa]*
10 Temporary spare tyre T155/90D16 110M 4.2 bar (60 psi) [420 kPa]
T155/80D17 100M 4.2 bar (60 psi) [420 kPa]
*: Above 160 km/h (99 mph)
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.

Tyres
Wheel condition On 4-wheel drive vehicles, when replacement CAUTION

of any of the tyres is necessary, replace all of
them. l On vehicles equipped with a tyre pressure
monitoring system, only MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Genuine wheels should be used.
CAUTION Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
l Always use tyres of the same size, same to install the tyre pressure sensor properly.
type, and same brand, and which have no Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system
wear differences. Using tyres of different (TPMS)*” on page 6-99.
size, type, brands or degree of wear, will in-
crease the differential oil temperature, result-
ing in possible damage to the driving sys- NOTE
tem. Further, the drive train will be subjected
to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil l On vehicles equipped with the Electric park-
leakage, component seizure, or other serious ing brake, 16-inch steel wheels cannot be
1- Location of the tread wear indicator faults. used because they interfere with brake parts.
2- Tread wear indicator Additionally, 16-inch aluminium wheels
may not be used on your vehicle depending
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other Replacing tyres and wheels on their type, even if they are MITSUBISHI 10
damage. Replace the tyres if there are deep MOTORS Genuine wheels.
cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
pieces of metal or pebbles.
CAUTION ized Service Point before using wheels that
you have.
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous l Avoid using different size tyres from the one
l When replacing the tyres and wheels, refer
because of the greater chance of skidding or listed and the combined use of different
to the tyre pressure label on the driver’s door
hydroplaning. The tread depth of the tyres types of tyres, as this can affect driving safe-
to confirm the size of tyres that can be in-
ty.
must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to stalled on your vehicle. If you install tyres
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page 11-09.
meet the minimum requirement for use. with a size that is not indicated on the label,
l Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
they could interfere with the brake parts.
Tread wear indicators will appear on the sur- offset as the specified type of wheel, its
face of the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby in- shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
dicating that the tyre no longer meets the rectly. We recommend you to consult a spe-
minimum requirement for use. When these cialist before using wheels that you have.
wear indicators appear, the tyres must be re-
placed with new ones.

Tyres
Tyre rotation When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear CAUTION
and damage. Abnormal wear is usually
Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, l A temporary spare tyre can be fitted tempo-
caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper
road surface conditions and individual driv- rarily in place of a tyre that has been re-
wheel alignment, out of balance wheel, or se-
er’s driving habits. To equalize the wear and moved during the tyre rotation. However, it
vere braking. We recommend you to have it must not be included in the regular tyre rota-
help extend tyre life, it is recommended to ro-
checked to determine the cause of irregular tion sequence.
tate the tyres immediately after discovery of
tread wear. l If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the
abnormal wear, or whenever the wear differ-
correct direction of rotation, swap the front
ence between the front and rear tyres is rec- and rear tyres on the left-hand side of the ve-
ognizable. Spare tyre used
hicle and the front and rear tyres on the
right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
Keep each tyre on its original side of the ve-
Front hicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure the
arrows point in the direction in which the
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-
ward. Any tyre whose arrow points in the
Spare tyre not used wrong direction will not perform to its full
potential.
10
Front
Front
Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direction
Front
l Avoid the combined use of different types of

tyres.
Using different types of tyres can affect ve-
hicle performance and safety.
* If the spare tyre wheel differs from the
standard tyre wheel, do not perform tyre rota-
tion using a spare wheel.

Tyres
Snow tyres Snow traction device (tyre When driving with a snow traction device
chains) (tyre chains) on the tyres, do not drive faster
The use of snow tyres is recommended for
than 50 km/h (30 mph). When you reach
driving on snow and ice. To preserve driving If snow traction device (tyre chains) have to roads that are not covered in snow, immedi-
stability, mount snow tyres of the same size be used, ensure that they are fitted only on ately remove the snow traction device (tyre
and tread pattern on all 4 wheels. the drive wheels (front) in accordance with chains).
A snow tyre that is worn down more than the manufacturer’s instructions.
50% is no longer appropriate to use. On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power
Snow tyres which do not meet specifications is distributed preferentially to the front CAUTION
must not be used. wheels, ensure that the snow traction device l Choose a clear straight stretch of road where
(tyre chains) are fitted on the front. you can pull off and still be seen while you
are fitting the snow traction device (tyre
CAUTION Use only snow traction device (tyre chains)
chains).
which are designed for use with the tyres
l Observe permissible maximum speed for
mounted on the vehicle: use of the incorrect l Do not fit snow traction device (tyre chains)
your snow tyres and the legal speed limit. before you need them. This will wear out
size or type of snow traction device (tyre
l On vehicles equipped with a tyre pressure your tyres and the road surface.
monitoring system, only MITSUBISHI chains) could result in damage to the vehicle l After driving around for 100-300 meters,
MOTORS Genuine wheels should be used. body. stop and retighten the snow traction device
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- (tyre chains). 10
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible ized Service Point before putting on a snow l Drive cautiously and do not exceed 50 km/h
to install the tyre pressure sensor properly. traction device (tyre chains). The max. snow (30 mph). Remember that preventing acci-
Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system dents is not the purpose of snow traction de-
traction device (tyre chains) height is as fol-
(TPMS)” on page 6-99. vice (tyre chains).
lows.
l When snow traction device (tyre chains) are
installed, take care that they do not damage
NOTE Tyre size Wheel size Max. snow the disc wheel or body.
traction de- l Do not install a snow traction device (tyre
l The laws and regulations concerning snow vice (tyre chains) on an emergency wheel which is
tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.)
chains) compact in size. If one of the front wheels
vary. Find out and follow the laws and regu-
height [mm] has punctured, replace it with one of the rear
lations in the area you intend to drive.
wheels and install the temporary spare wheel
l If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, 215/70R16 16 x 6 1/2 J in that place before fitting a snow traction
change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are 100H 16 x 6 1/2 JJ device (tyre chains).
used. 9 mm
225/55R18 18x7 J
98H

Wiper blade rubber replacement
CAUTION Wiper blade rubber Refer to the illustration to ensure that the
retainers are correctly aligned as you at-
l An aluminium wheel can be damaged by a replacement tach them.
snow traction device (tyre chains) while
driving. When fitting a snow traction device
(tyre chains) on an aluminium wheel, take Windscreen wiper blades
care that any part of the snow traction device
(tyre chains) and fitting cannot be brought
1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
into contact with the wheel.
2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A)
l On vehicles equipped with the wheel covers,
remove the wheel covers before installing a disengages from the hook (B). Pull the
snow traction device (tyre chains), otherwise wiper blade further to remove it.
they may be damaged by the snow traction
device (tyre chains). (See “Wheel covers*”
on page 8-19.)
l When installing or removing a snow traction
device (tyre chains), take care that hands and
other parts of your body are not injured by
the sharp edges of the vehicle body.
10
NOTE
4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, start-
l The laws and regulations concerning the use
ing with the opposite end of the blade
of snow traction device (tyre chains) vary.
Always follow local laws and regulations. from the stopper. Make sure the hook
(B) is fitted correctly in the grooves in
In most countries, it is prohibited by the law CAUTION
to use of snow traction device (tyre chains) the blade.
on roads without snow. l Do not let the wiper arm drop onto the wind-
screen. This could damage the glass.
NOTE
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper l If a retainer is not supplied with the new
blade. wiper blade, use the retainer from the old
blade.

Wiper blade rubber replacement
5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) Refer to “Rear window wiper and wash-
engages securely with the stopper (A). er” on page 5-66
CAUTION
Rear window wiper blade l Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the
window glass; it could damage the glass.
CAUTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”
position or put the operation mode in l If the rear wiper is not stopped within the 7. Firmly insert the retainer (D) into the 10
mark (A), the wiper arm will contact the groove (E) in the wiper blade.
ON.
roof spoiler and you will not be able to lift
2. Operate the rear wiper using the rear the wiper arm. If you forcefully try to lift the
window wiper and washer switch, and wiper arm, the wiper arm and roof spoiler
when the rear wiper is within the mark could be damaged or the painted surfaces
(A) on the rear window, turn the ignition could be scratched.
switch to the “LOCK” position, or put
the operation mode in OFF. 3. Set the rear window wiper and washer
switch to OFF.
4. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass.
5. Pull the wiper blade downward to disen-
gage it from the stopper (B) at the end of
the wiper arm. Pull the wiper blade fur-
ther to remove it.
6. Slide a new wiper blade through the
hook (C) on the wiper arm.

General maintenance
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the General maintenance If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recom-
retainers are correctly aligned as you in- mend you to have your vehicle checked and
sert them into the groove. repaired.
Fuel, engine coolant, oil and ex-
Meter, gauge and indicator/
haust gas leakage
warning lamps operation
Look under the body of your vehicle to check
for fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas Start the engine and check the operation of
leaks. all instruments, gauges and indication and
warning lamps.
If there is anything wrong, we recommend
WARNING you to have your vehicle inspected.
l If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you
smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; call Hinges and latches lubrication
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point for assistance. Check all latches and hinges, and, if necessa-
ry, have them lubricated.
10 Exterior and interior lamp op-
eration Fusible links
NOTE The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if
Operate the combination headlamps and dip-
l If a retainer is not supplied with the new per switch to check that all lamps are func- a large current attempts to flow through cer-
wiper blade, use the retainer from the old tioning properly. tain electrical systems.
blade.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable In case of a melted fusible link, we recom-
cause is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. mend you to have your vehicle inspected.
Check the fuses first. If there is no blown For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
fuse, check the lamp bulbs. load capacity” on page 10-18 and “Engine
For information regarding the inspection and compartment fuse location table” on page
replacement of the fuses and the bulbs, refer 10-19.
to “Fuses” on page 10-17 and “Replacement
of lamp bulbs” on page 10-21.

Fuses
WARNING Pull the fuse lid to remove it. 1. Open the glove box.
2. Uncouple the rod (B) on the right side of
l Fusible links must not be replaced by any the glove box by pulling the rod to the
other device. Failing to fit the correct fusi-
right.
ble link may result in fire in the vehicle,
property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
Fuses
Fuse block location

To prevent damage to the electrical system
due to short-circuiting or overloading, each A- Fuse block
individual circuit is provided with a fuse.
There are fuse blocks in the passenger com- RHD vehicles
partment and in the engine compartment. The fuse block in the passenger compartment 3. Pull the glove box fastener (C), then the 10
is located behind the glove box at the posi- fastener (D), towards you in the direc-
Passenger compartment tion shown in the illustration. tions of the arrows shown in the illustra-
tion to remove them.
LHD vehicles
The fuse block in the passenger compartment
is located behind the fuse lid in front of the
driver’s seat at the position shown in the il-
lustration.
A- Fuse block
Fuses
4. Pull the glove box from the bottom to re- NOTE Sym- Electrical sys- Ca-
move it. No.
bol tem pacity
l Spare fuses are provided on the cover of fuse
Engine compartment block in the engine compartment. Always Rear window
use a fuse of the same capacity for replace- 2 30 A *
demister
ment.
The fuse block in the engine compartment is 3 Heater 30 A
located as shown in the illustration.
1. Press the tab. Passenger compartment fuse lo- 4
Windscreen wip-
30 A
2. Remove the cover. ers
cation table
5 Door locks 25 A
6 — — —
Accessory sock-
7 15 A
et
Rear window
8 15 A
wiper
10
9 Sunroof 20 A
10 Ignition switch 10 A
11 Option 10 A
Fuse load capacity
Hazard warning
The fuse capacity and the names of electrical 12 15 A
flasher
systems protected by the fuses are indicated
on the inside of the fuse lid (LHD vehicles), 4-wheel drive
13 10 A
the back side of the glove box (RHD vehi- Sym- Electrical sys- Ca- system
No.
cles) and inside of the fuse block cover (in- bol tem pacity Stop lamps
side of the engine compartment). 14 15 A
Electric window (Brake lamps)
1 30 A *
control 15 Instruments 10 A
*: Fusible link *: Fusible link

Fuses
No.
Sym- Electrical sys- Ca- Engine compartment fuse loca- Sym-
Ca-
bol tem pacity tion table No. Electrical system paci-
bol
ty
16 SRS airbag 7.5 A
30
17 Radio 15 A Fuse block 2 Electric parking brake
A*
Control unit re- Anti-lock 40
18 7.5 A 3
lay braking system A*
Interior lamps
19 15 A Anti-lock 30
(Room lamps) 4
braking system A*
Reversing lamps
20 7.5 A 30
(Backup lamps) 5 Power seat
A*
Heated door
21 7.5 A 6 Heated seat 30 A
mirror
Outside rear- 30
22
view mirrors
10 A
Behind of the fuse block cover
7 Starter
A* 10
Cigarette lighter/ Heated steering
8 15 A
23 Accessory sock- 15 A wheel
et
Headlamp
*: 9 20 A
Fusible link washer
l Some fuses may not be installed on your 10 Security horn 20 A
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
Automatic
or specifications. Ca- 11 20 A
Sym- transmission
l The table above shows the main equip- No. Electrical system paci-
ment corresponding to each fuse. bol
ty 12 Horn 10 A
30 13 Sunshade 20 A
1 Electric parking brake
A*
*: Fusible link
*: Fusible link

Fuses
Ca- Ca- l Some fuses may not be installed on your

Sym- Sym- vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
No. Electrical system paci- No. Electrical system paci-
bol bol or specifications.
ty ty
l The table above shows the main equip-
Front fog Electric Parking ment corresponding to each fuse.
14 15 A
lamps / brake/Adaptive
25 7.5 A
Daytime running Cruise
The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
15 10 A Control (ACC)
lamps 25 A or 30 A fuses. If one of these fuses
Headlamp burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
16 Air conditioner 10 A
26 high-beam 10 A 7.5 A: 10 A Spare fuse
Engine control (right) 25 A: 20 A Option
17 7.5 A 30 A: 30 A Audio system amp fuse
unit Headlamp
27 high-beam 10 A When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
18 Alternator 7.5 A fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
(left)
Radiator fan 40 ble.
19 28 Turbo actuator 20 A
motor A*
10 Identification of fuse
Audio system 29 ENG/POWER 20 A
20 30 A
amp Capacity Colour
30 Fuel pump 15 A
21 — — — 7.5 A Brown
22 IOD IOD 30 A 31 Ignition coil 10 A 10 A Red
Air conditioning 32 Injector 20 A 15 A Blue
30
23 condenser 20 A Yellow
A* 33 ETV 15 A
fan motor
25 A Natural (White)
Battery current #1 — Spare fuse 10 A
24 7.5 A Green (fuse type) / Pink (fu-
sensor #2 — Spare fuse 15 A 30 A
sible link type)
*: Fusible link #3 — Spare fuse 20 A
40 A Green (fusible link type)
*: Fusible link

Replacement of lamp bulbs
Fuse replacement 4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity

by using the fuse puller into the same
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
place the fuse block.
the electrical circuit concerned and place
the ignition switch in the “LOCK” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the in-
side of the fuse block cover in the engine
compartment.
B- Fuse is OK
C- Blown fuse
NOTE
l If any system does not function but the fuse CAUTION
corresponding to that system is normal, there l If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a 10
may be a fault in the system elsewhere. We short time, we recommend you to have the
recommend you to have your vehicle electrical system checked to find the cause
checked. and rectify it.
l Never use a fuse with a larger capacity than
3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table, specified or a substitute (such as a cable or
check the fuse pertaining to the problem. foil). Doing so could cause the circuit wires
to overheat and create a fire.

Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the skin oil left
on the glass will evaporate when the bulb
gets hot and the vapour will condense on the
reflector and dim the surface.

l Do not install commercially available LED l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a l When it rains or when the vehicle has been
type bulbs. bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from washed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-
Commercially available LED type bulbs your hand could cause the bulb to break the comes foggy. This is the same phenomenon
could adversely affect the operation of the next time the headlamps are operated. as when window glass mists up on a humid
vehicle, such as by preventing the lamps and If the glass surface is dirty, it must be day, and does not indicate a functional prob-
other vehicle equipment from operating cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and lem.
properly. refit it after drying thoroughly. When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
l Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after remove the fog. However, if water gathers
being turned off. inside the lamp, we recommend you to have
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool the lamp checked.
sufficiently before touching it. You could
otherwise be burnt.
l Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The Bulb location and capacity
gas inside a halogen lamp bulb is highly
pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or
scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause it CAUTION
to shatter.
10 l When replacing a bulb, be sure to use a new
bulb of the same type, wattage and colour.
If you install a different bulb, the bulb could
NOTE malfunction or fail to come on and could
lead to a vehicle fire.
l If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, we recommend you to
consult a specialist.
l Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a lamp or lens.

Outside NOTE 5- Rear fog lamp (RHD vehicles): 21 W

(W21W)
l The following lamps use an LED instead of Reversing lamp (LHD vehicles): 16 W
the bulb.
Front (W16W)
If you need to repair or replace these lamps,
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- 6- Rear turn-signal lamps: 21 W (WY21W)
ized Service Point. 7- Stop lamps: −
• Headlamps (LED type)
• Position lamps/Daytime running lamps
• Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear- Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
view mirror)
NOTE
Rear
l The following lamps use an LED instead of
the bulb.
ized Service Point.
• High-mounted stop lamp 10
1- Headlamps • Tail lamps
Halogen: 55 W (HIR2) • Stop lamps
LED: −
2- Position lamps/Daytime running lamps:
−
3- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W) 1- High-mounted stop lamp: −
4- Front fog lamps*: 35 W (H8) 2- Tail lamps: −
5- Side turn-signal lamps: − 3- Rear fog lamp (LHD vehicles): 21 W
(W21W)
Reversing lamp (RHD vehicles): 16 W
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types. (W16W)
4- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)

Inside NOTE 2. While pulling the tab (B), pull out the
socket (C).
ized Service Point.
• LED interior illumination (Smartphone
tray)
• LED interior illumination (Front drink
holder)
Headlamps (halogen bulb)
NOTE
l When replacing the bulb on the right side of
the vehicle, make sure that the removed 3. Turn the bulb (D) anticlockwise to re-
parts do not contact the coolant reserve tank. move it.
10
1- Vanity mirror lamps*: 2 W 1. Turn the cap (A) anticlockwise to re-
2- Map & room lamps (front): 10 W move it.
3- LED interior illumination (Smartphone
tray): −
4- Room lamp (rear): 8 W
5- Luggage room lamp: 5 W
6- LED interior illumination (Front drink
holder): −
NOTE
l The following lamps use an LED instead of
the bulb. 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.

NOTE
l After installing the cap (A), make sure that
the mark (E) on the cap is pointing upward
and the cap is locked in place. If the cap is
not locked in place, it may become detached
while the vehicle is being driven.
*: Front of the vehicle *: Front of the vehicle
CAUTION 4. Turn the socket (F) anticlockwise to re-

move it, then remove the bulb from the
l Do not pull the wheel cut moulding (B) socket by turning it anticlockwise while
Front turn-signal lamps
more than necessary to release the three
clips (C). Otherwise, the wheel cut moulding
pressing in. 10
could break.
1. To create enough work space, turn the
steering wheel all the way in the direc-
tion opposite to the side you wish to re- 3. Remove the three clips (D), and then
place. pull back the splash shield (E).
2. Remove the screw (A), and then pull the
wheel cut moulding (B) outward to re-
lease the three clips (C).

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.
NOTE
l When refitting the clip (D), first insert part
(G) of the clip into the hole and then press
part (H) into it.
*: Front of the vehicle *: Front of the vehicle
CAUTION 4. While holding down the tab (F), pull out

the socket (G).
l Do not pull the wheel cut moulding (B)
10 more than necessary to release the three
clips (C). Otherwise, the wheel cut moulding
could break.
3. Remove the three clips (D), and then

pull back the splash shield (E).
Front fog lamps*
1. To create enough work space, turn the
steering wheel all the way in the direc-
tion opposite to the side you wish to re-
place.
2. Remove the screw (A), and then pull the
wheel cut moulding (B) outward to re- *: Front of the vehicle
lease the three clips (C).

5. Turn the bulb (H) anticlockwise to re- Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)/ 2. Turn the socket (C) anticlockwise to re-
move it. Reversing lamp (Passenger’s move it, and then pull the bulb out of the
socket.
side)
1. Remove the three clips (A), and then
pull back the splash shield (B).

steps in reverse.
10
NOTE *: Rear of the vehicle
l When refitting the clip (D), first insert part 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
(I) of the clip into the hole and then press steps in reverse.
part (J) into it.

NOTE
l Fully return the splash shield (B) to its origi-
nal position in the rear bumper.
NOTE C- Rear turn-signal lamps

D- Stop lamp (LED) - cannot be re-
l When refitting the clip (A), first insert part
l Itwill be easier to remove the lamp unit if
(D) of the clip into the hole and then press placed
you insert a minus screwdriver with the end
part (E) into it.
covered with a cloth or other object into the
10 space under the lamp unit and remove the NOTE

highest pin, and then pull the lamp unit at an
upward angle. l The stop lamp use an LED instead of the
bulb.
If you need to repair or replace the stop
lamp, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS

steps in reverse.
Rear combination lamps

1. Open the tailgate. 3. Turn the rear turn-signal lamp socket an-
2. After removing the two screws (A), ticlockwise and remove it, and then pull
move the lamp unit rearward and re- the bulb out of the socket.
move the three lamp unit pins (B).
Licence plate lamps 3. Remove the bulb from the socket.

1. Remove while pressing the lamp unit
(A) to the left side of the vehicle.

steps in reverse.
2. Insert a minus screwdriver with the end
covered with a cloth or other object to NOTE 10
press the hook (B) aside and remove the l When installing the lamp unit, first insert the
lens. end of tab (C) and then align tab (D).

OGKE18E5
Specifications
Vehicle labelling................................................................................11-02
Vehicle dimensions............................................................................11-04
Vehicle performance..........................................................................11-05
Vehicle weight...................................................................................11-05
Engine specifications........................................................................ 11-07
Electrical system............................................................................... 11-08
Tyres and wheels............................................................................... 11-09
CO2 Mass Emissions.........................................................................11-09
Capacity.............................................................................................11-11
11
OGKE18E5
Vehicle labelling
Vehicle labelling Vehicle information code plate 1- Model code

2- Engine model code
The vehicle information code plate is riveted 3- Transmission model code
Vehicle identification number as shown in the illustration. 4- Body colour code
5- Interior code
The vehicle identification number is stamped 6- Option code
on the bulkhead as shown in the illustration. 7- Exterior code
Vehicle identification number

plate (RHD vehicles only)
The vehicle identification number is stamped
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the instrument panel pad. It is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the wind-
screen.
The plate shows model code, engine model,
transmission model and body colour code,
11 etc.
Please use this number when ordering re-
placement parts.
11-02 Specifications OGKE18E5

Vehicle labelling
Engine model/number
The engine model and number are stamped
on the engine cylinder block as shown in the
illustration.
*: Front of the vehicle 11
OGKE18E5 Specifications 11-03

Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
11 1 Front track 1,545 mm

2 Overall width 1,805 mm
3 Front overhang 955 mm
4 Wheel base 2,670 mm
5 Rear overhang 780 mm
6 Overall length 4,405 mm
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 183 mm
8 Overall height (unladen) 1,685 mm
9 Rear track 1,545 mm

Vehicle performance
Minimum Body 5.7 m
turning ra-
dius Wheel 5.3 m
Vehicle performance
M/T 205 km/h (127 mph)
Maximum speed
CVT 200 km/h (124 mph)
Vehicle weight
Vehicles with M/T
GK1WXJJXL6/ GK1WXJXXL6/ GK1WXJSXL6/

Item
GK1WXJJXR6 GK1WXJXXR6 GK1WXJSXR6
Seating capacity 5 persons
11
Kerb weight Without 1,425 kg 1,455 kg 1,425 kg
optional
parts
With full 1,481 kg 1,532 kg 1,461 kg
optional
parts
Maximum gross vehicle 2,050 kg
weight
Maximum axle Front 1,200 kg
weight
Rear 1,160 kg

Vehicle weight
GK1WXJJXL6/ GK1WXJXXL6/ GK1WXJSXL6/

Item
GK1WXJJXR6 GK1WXJXXR6 GK1WXJSXR6
Maximum towable With 1,600 kg
weight brake
Without 750 kg
brake
Maximum trailer-nose weight 80 kg
Maximum gross combination 3,650 kg
weight
Maximum permissible weight 25 kg
of the coupling device
Maximum roof load 50 kg
Vehicles with CVT
GK1WXTJX GK1WXTSX GK1WXTJX GK1WXTX GK1WXTSX

GK1WXTX XL6/
11 Item L6/GK1WX
GK1W XTXXR6
L6/GK1WX ZL6/GK1W XZL6/GK1 ZL6/GK1W
TJXR6 TSXR6 XTJXZR6 WXTXXZR6 XTSXZR6
Seating capacity 5 persons
Kerb weight Without 1,460 kg 1,490 kg 1,460 kg 1,520 kg 1,550 kg 1,520 kg
optional
parts
With full 1,516 kg 1,568 kg 1,496 kg 1,576 kg 1,628 kg 1,556 kg
optional
parts
Maximum gross vehicle 2,150 kg
weight
Maximum axle Front 1,200 kg
weight

Engine specifications
GK1WXTJX GK1WXTSX GK1WXTJX GK1WXTX GK1WXTSX

GK1WXTX XL6/
Item L6/GK1WX L6/GK1WX ZL6/GK1W XZL6/GK1 ZL6/GK1W
GK1W XTXXR6
TJXR6 TSXR6 XTJXZR6 WXTXXZR6 XTSXZR6
Rear 1,160 kg
Maximum towable With 1,600 kg
weight brake
Without 750 kg
brake
Maximum trailer-nose weight 80 kg
Maximum gross combination 3,750 kg
weight
Maximum permissible weight 25 kg
of the coupling device
Maximum roof load 50 kg
NOTE
11
l Vehicle usage condition should never exceed above “Maximum” values.
l Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.
Engine specifications
Engine model 4B40
No. of cylinders 4 in line
Total displacement 1,499 cc

Electrical system
Bore 75.0 mm
Stroke 84.8 mm
Camshaft Double overhead
Mixture preparation Electronic injection
Maximum output (ECC net) 120 kW/5,500 rpm
Maximum torque (ECC net) 250 N•m/2,400 to 4,500 rpm
Electrical system
Voltage 12 V
Battery Type (JIS) Q-85
Capacity (5HR) 55 Ah
Alternator capacity 110 A, 150 A*
11 Spark plug type NGK SILKR7H 8
*: Vehicles equipped with heated windscreen
NOTE
l Vehicles equipped with the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system have a dedicated AS&G battery type.
The use of a different battery could cause the battery to run down quickly or the AS&G system not to operate normally.
Please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point when replacing the battery.

Tyres and wheels
Tyres and wheels

Tyre 215/70R16 100H 225/55R18 98H
Wheel Size 16x6 1/2 JJ, 16x6 1/2 J 18x7J
Offset 38 mm
NOTE
l When replacing the tyres or wheels, refer to “Replacing tyres and wheels ” on page 10-11.
l Contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
CO2 Mass Emissions

Combined
Item CO2 (g/km)
11
NEDC*1 WLTC*2
GK1WXJJXL6/GK1WXJJXR6/
159 177
M/T GK1WXJXXL6/GK1WXJXXR6
GK1WXJSXL6/GK1WXJSXR6 154 170
GK1WXTJXL6/GK1WXTJXR6/
165 192
CVT GK1WXTXXL6/GK1WXTXXR6
GK1WXTSXL6/GK1WXTSXR6 163 185
*1: New European Driving Cycle
*2: Worldwide harmonized Light vehicles Test Cycle

CO2 Mass Emissions
Combined
Item CO2 (g/km)
NEDC*1 WLTC*2
GK1WXTJXZL6/GK1WXTJXZR6/
175 196
GK1WXTXXZL6/GK1WXTXXZR6
GK1WXTSXZL6/GK1WXTSXZR6 173 190
*1: New European Driving Cycle
*2: Worldwide harmonized Light vehicles Test Cycle
NOTE
l The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the CO2 mass emissions of the particular vehicle. The vehicle itself has not been tested and there
are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incorporate particular modifications. Furthermore, the
driver’s style and road and traffic conditions, as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven and the standard of maintenance, will all affect its
CO2 mass emissions.
11

Capacity
Capacity
LHD RHD
No. Item Quantity Lubricants 11

1 Engine oil Oil pan 4.0 litres Refer to page 10-04.
Oil filter 0.2 litre
Oil cooler 0.1 litre
2 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Clutch fluid
3 Washer fluid 4.3 litres —
*: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology

Capacity
No. Item Quantity Lubricants

4 Engine coolant [includes 0.65 litre in the re- M/T 5.0 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
serve tank] SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT PRE-
CVT 6.0 litres
MIUM or equivalent*
5 CVT fluid 7.8 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
CVTF-J4
*:Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
CAUTION
l Use only the MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE CVTF-J4. Use of a different fluid could damage the transmission.
No. Item Quantity Lubricants

6 Manual transmission oil 2.6 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO API
11 GL-4, SAE 75W-80
7 Transfer oil 0.5 litre MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
Super Hypoid Gear Oil API GL-5 SAE
8 Rear differential oil 0.4 litre 80
9 Refrigerant (air conditioner) 430 - 470 g HFO-1234yf

Alphabetical index
Audio
4 CD player...................................................... 7-22 C
LW/MW/FM radio........................................ 7-22
4-wheel drive operation.....................................6-42 Troubleshooting............................................ 7-54 Capacities........................................................ 11-11
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system......................6-25 Card holder....................................... 7-78,7-79,7-84
A Automatic air conditioning................................7-05 Cargo area cover................................................7-85
Accessory (Installation).....................................2-04 Automatic High-Beam (AHB).......................... 5-54 Cargo loads......................................................6-120
Accessory socket............................................... 7-80 Automatic transmission Catalytic converter.......................................... 10-03
Active stability control (ASC)...........................6-55 Fluid............................................................ 11-11 Caution for installing the child re-
Selector lever operation........................ 1-18,6-32 straint on vehicle with front passeng-
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)...........6-66 Selector lever positions................................. 6-35 er’s airbag.........................................................4-27
Air conditioning Sports mode.................................................. 6-35
Cautions on handling of 4-wheel
Automatic air conditioning........................... 7-05 drive vehicles................................................... 6-44
Customizing the air conditioning..................7-15 B CD player.......................................................... 7-22
Dual-zone automatic climate con-
trol air conditioning..................................... 7-10 Battery............................................................. 10-08 Central door locks............................................. 3-18
Important air conditioning operation tips..... 7-02 Charge warning lamp.................................... 5-45 Charge warning lamp........................................ 5-45
Air purifier.........................................................7-22 Discharged battery (Emergency starting)......8-02 Check engine warning lamp..............................5-44
Airbag................................................................4-25 Disposal information for used batteries........ 2-06
Specification................................................11-08 Child restraint....................................................4-15
Caution for installing the child re- Caution for installing the child re-
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with
straint in vehicles with front pas- straint in vehicles with front pas-
Lane Change Assist)........................................ 6-89
senger’s airbag.....................................4-15,4-27 senger’s airbag.....................................4-15,4-27
Curtain airbag system................................... 4-33 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface................................... 7-56
Child restraint system with ISOFIX
Driver’s and front passenger’s air- Bonnet............................................................. 10-03 mountings.................................................... 4-22
bag system................................................... 4-29 Lower anchorage location.............................4-22
Bottle holder......................................................7-85
Driver’s knee airbag system..........................4-30 Suitability for various ISOFIX positions...... 4-18
How the Supplemental Restraint Brake assist system............................................6-51
Suitability for various seating positions........4-20
System works...............................................4-25 Brake Tether anchorage locations............................4-22
Side airbag system........................................ 4-32 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)......................6-52 Child-protection rear doors............................... 3-20
SRS warning lamp/display............................4-35 Brake auto hold............................................. 6-46
Anti-lock brake system (ABS).......................... 6-52 Cleaning
Braking..........................................................6-45
Warning display............................................ 6-53 Electric parking brake................................... 6-05 Exterior of your vehicle................................ 9-03
Warning lamp................................................ 6-53 Fluid.................................................. 10-07,11-11 Interior of your vehicle................................. 9-02
Armrest..................................................... 4-03,4-04 Parking brake................................................ 6-04 Clutch
Ashtray.............................................................. 7-79 Warning display............................................ 6-53 Fluid.................................................. 10-07,11-11
Warning lamp................................................ 6-53 CO2 Mass Emissions ......................................11-09
Assist grips........................................................ 7-87
OGKE18E5 Alphabetical index 12- 1

Alphabetical index
Coat hook.......................................................... 7-87 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft Front seats......................................................... 4-02
Combination headlamps and dipper switch...... 5-52 starting system)................................................ 3-03 Front turn-signal lamps
Coolant (engine)....................................10-05,11-11 Emergency key.................................................. 3-16 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22
Cruise control.................................................... 6-57 Emergency starting............................................8-02 Replacement................................................10-25
Emergency stop signal system.......................... 6-51 Fuel
Customizing the air conditioning...................... 7-15
Engine specifications.......................................11-07 Filling the fuel tank....................................... 2-03
Fuel remaining display screen...................... 5-07
D Engine switch.................................................... 6-15 Fuel remaining warning display....................5-08
Engine Fuel selection................................................ 2-02
Daytime running lamps..................................... 5-54
Coolant..............................................10-05,11-11 Modification/alterations to the
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22 electrical or fuel systems............................. 2-05
Number........................................................11-02
Demister (rear window).................................... 5-67 Tank capacity................................................ 2-03
Oil............................................................... 10-04
Demisting.................................................. 7-06,7-11 Oil and oil filter........................................... 11-11 Fuses................................................................10-17
Digital clock Overheating...................................................8-04 Fusible links.................................................... 10-16
Safety and disposal information for
Time Setting.................................................. 7-50
Dimensions......................................................11-04
used engine oil............................................. 2-05 G
Specifications.............................................. 11-07
Dipper (High/Low beam change)......................5-54 Exterior and interior lamp operation............... 10-16 General maintenance....................................... 10-16
Doors General vehicle data........................................ 11-04
Central door locks......................................... 3-18 F Genuine parts.....................................................2-05
Child-protection............................................ 3-20
Dead Lock System........................................ 3-19 Fluid capacities and lubricants........................ 11-11 Glove box.......................................................... 7-84
Driving, alcohol and drugs................................ 6-02 Fluid
Dual-zone automatic climate control Automatic transmission fluid...................... 11-11 H
air conditioning................................................ 7-10 Brake fluid........................................ 10-07,11-11
Hazard warning flasher switch..........................5-60
Clutch fluid....................................... 10-07,11-11
E CVT fluid.................................................... 11-11 Hazard warning indication lamps......................5-43
Engine coolant.................................. 10-05,11-11 Head restraints...................................................4-05
Economical driving........................................... 6-02 Washer fluid...................................... 10-06,11-11
Head Up Display (HUD)...................................5-46
Electric parking brake....................................... 6-05 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)...6-79
Headlamp levelling switch................................ 5-58
Electric power steering system (EPS)............... 6-54 Front fog lamps
Headlamp washer switch...................................5-67
Electric window control.................................... 3-30 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22
Replacement................................................10-26 Headlamps
Safety mechanism......................................... 3-31 Switch........................................................... 5-61 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22
Switch........................................................... 3-30 Front room lamp Headlamp flasher.......................................... 5-54
Timer function...............................................3-31 Replacement................................................10-24
Electrical system..............................................11-08 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-24
Switch........................................................... 5-52
12- 2 Alphabetical index OGKE18E5
Alphabetical index
Heated mirror.................................................... 6-13
Heated seats.......................................................4-04 K M
Heated steering wheel switch............................5-69
Key number tag................................................. 3-02 Making a luggage area...................................... 4-07
Heated windscreen switch.................................5-68
Keyless entry system.........................................3-04 Manual transmission......................................... 6-31
High-mounted stop lamp
Keyless operation system.................................. 3-08 Manual transmission oil.................................. 11-11
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22
Emergency key..............................................3-16 Map lamps......................................................... 7-82
Hill start assist................................................... 6-49
Warning activation........................................ 3-14 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-24
Hinges and latches lubrication........................ 10-16 Keys...................................................................3-02 Meter illumination control................................ 5-02
Horn switch....................................................... 5-69
Mirror
L
I Inside rear-view mirror................................. 6-10
Outside rear-view mirrors............................. 6-11
Labeling...........................................................11-02
i-Size child restraint system.............................. 4-19 Modification/alterations to the electri-
Lamp monitor buzzer........................................ 5-53
cal systems....................................................... 2-05
If the vehicle breaks down................................ 8-02 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)...................... 6-95
Multi Around Monitor..................................... 6-111
Ignition switch...................................................6-14 Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil
Multi-information display................................. 5-02
Important air conditioning operation tips..........7-02 and exhaust gas).............................................10-16
Indication and warning lamps........................... 5-21 LED headlamp warning lamp........................... 5-53 O
Indication lamps................................................ 5-43 LED interior illumination (Front drink holder).7-82
Information screen.............................................5-04 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-24 Oil
Inside rear-view mirror......................................6-10 LED interior illumination (Smartphone tray)....7-83 Engine oil.......................................... 10-04,11-11
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-24 Manual transmission oil.............................. 11-11
Inspection and maintenance following Rear differential oil..................................... 11-11
rough road operation........................................6-44 Licence plate lamps
Transfer oil.................................................. 11-11
Instruments........................................................ 5-02 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22 Operation under adverse driving conditions..... 8-23
Replacement................................................10-29
Interior lamps.................................................... 7-80 Link System*.....................................................7-56 Outside rear-view mirrors..................................6-11
Locking and unlocking the doors...................... 3-16 Overheating....................................................... 8-04
J
Lubricants........................................................ 11-11
P
Jack....................................................................8-06 Luggage floor board.......................................... 7-88
Storage.......................................................... 8-05 Luggage hooks.................................................. 7-87 Parking sensors (Front/Rear)...........................6-104
Jump starting (Emergency starting).................. 8-02 Luggage room lamp.......................................... 7-82 Parking.............................................................. 6-08
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-24 Electric parking brake................................... 6-05
LW/MW/FM radio............................................ 7-22 Parking brake................................................ 6-04
Position lamps

Alphabetical index
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22 Replacement................................................10-28 Specifications.................................................. 11-02
Power panoramic sunroof..................................3-32 Roof carrier precaution....................................6-120 Speed Limiter.................................................... 6-61
Precautions to observe when using Room lamps.......................................................7-81 Starting and stopping the engine....................... 6-19
wipers and washers.......................................... 5-67 Running-in recommendations........................... 6-03 Steering
Pregnant women restraint..................................4-14
Steering wheel height adjustment................. 6-09
Puncture (Tyre changing).................................. 8-13 S Steering wheel lock.......................................6-18
Puncture Stop lamps
S-AWC (Super All Wheel Control)*.................6-39
Tyre repair kit................................................8-06 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22
Safe driving techniques..................................... 6-03
Storage spaces................................................... 7-83
R Safety and disposal information for
used engine oil................................................. 2-05
Sun visors.......................................................... 7-78
Sunroof.............................................................. 3-32
Rear combination lamps Seat belt............................................................. 4-08
Supplemental restraint system.................. 4-25,4-27
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-23 Adjustable seat belt anchor........................... 4-11
Replacement................................................10-28 Child restraint................................................4-15 Caution for installing the child re-
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)...................... 6-93 Force limiter..................................................4-15 straint in vehicles with front pas-
Inspection...................................................... 4-24 senger’s airbag............................................. 4-15
Rear differential oil..........................................11-11
Pregnant women restraint............................. 4-14 How the Supplemental Restraint
Rear fog lamp Pretensioner...................................................4-14 System works...............................................4-25
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22 Seat belt reminder..............................................4-10 Servicing....................................................... 4-36
Replacement................................................10-27 SRS warning lamp/display............................4-35
Seat
Switch........................................................... 5-62 System check screen..........................................5-10
Rear room lamp Adjustment.................................................... 4-02
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-24
Front seats..................................................... 4-02
Head restraints.............................................. 4-05
T
Rear turn-signal lamps Heated seats.................................................. 4-04 Tail lamps
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22 Making a luggage area.................................. 4-07
Replacement..................................... 10-25,10-28 Rear seat........................................................4-03 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22
Rear window demister switch........................... 5-67 Security alarm system*..................................... 3-23 Time Setting...................................................... 7-50
Rear-view camera............................................6-108 Service precaution........................................... 10-02 Tools.................................................................. 8-05
Rear-view mirror Side turn-signal lamps Storage.......................................................... 8-05
Towing...............................................................8-20
Inside.............................................................6-10 Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22
Outside.......................................................... 6-11 Snow traction device (Tyre chains)................. 10-13 Trailer towing.................................................. 6-121
Refill capacities............................................... 11-11 Snow tyres....................................................... 10-13 Transfer oil.......................................................11-11
Replacement of lamp bulbs............................. 10-21 Spare wheel....................................................... 8-13 Transmission
Reversing lamps Spark plug........................................................11-08 Automatic transmission................................ 6-32
Bulb capacity and location..........................10-22 Manual transmission..................................... 6-31
12- 4 Alphabetical index OGKE18E5

Alphabetical index
Turbocharger operation..................................... 6-25 Ventilators..........................................................7-02
Turn-signal indication lamps.............................5-43
Turn/Lane-change signals................................. 5-60 W
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)........ 6-99 Warning lamps...................................................5-43
Tyre repair kit.................................................... 8-06 Washer
Tyres................................................................ 10-10 Fluid.................................................. 10-06,11-11
How to change a tyre.................................... 8-13 Switch................................................... 5-66,5-67
Inflation pressures....................................... 10-10 Washing............................................................. 9-03
Rotation.......................................................10-12 Waxing...............................................................9-04
Size (tyre and wheel)...................................11-09
Weight..............................................................11-05
Snow traction device (Tyre chains).............10-13
Snow tyres...................................................10-13 Wheel condition.............................................. 10-11
Tyre repair kit................................................8-06 Wheel
Wheel condition.......................................... 10-11
Covers........................................................... 8-19
Specification................................................11-09
U Wiper
USB input terminal............................................7-76 Rear window................................................. 5-66
Windscreen....................................................5-62
How to connect a USB memory device........ 7-76 Wiper blade rubber replacement................. 10-14
How to connect an iPod................................ 7-77
V
Vanity mirror..................................................... 7-78
Vanity mirror lamp
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-24
Vehicle care precautions....................................9-02
Vehicle dimensions..........................................11-04
Vehicle identification number......................... 11-02
Vehicle information code plate (RHD
vehicles only)................................................. 11-02
Vehicle labeling............................................... 11-02
Vehicle performance........................................11-05
Vehicle weight................................................. 11-05

OGKE18E5
OGKE18E5 Declaration of Conformity 13- 1
13- 2 Declaration of Conformity OGKE18E5
OGKE18E5
OGKE18E5
OGKE18E5
OGKE18E5
OGKE18E5
OGKE18E5

18.5MY Eclipse Cross Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

18.5MY Eclipse Cross Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ECLIPSE CROSS - ENGLISH - OGKE18E5

ECLIPSE CROSS - ENGLISH - OGKE18E5

: See owner’s manual

© 2018 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

1 Instruments and controls

1-02 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

RHD 1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 5-52

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-03

1-04 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-05

1-06 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-07

1-08 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

RHD 1. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-10

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-09

1-10 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

RHD 1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -curtain airbag p. 4-25,

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-11

1-12 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-13

1-14 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

Quick guide Keyless operation system* 1

Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-15

With the ignition switch or the

MIST- Misting function

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-17

Driver’s switches Driver’s switches

Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on page

1-18 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

“R” REVERSE 1- mark display screen ® p. 5-06 1

Selector lever positions

OGKE18E5 Overview/Quick guide 1-19

1-20 Overview/Quick guide OGKE18E5

Fuel selection...................................................................................... 2-02

Fuel selection NOTE Graphical expression for con-

2-02 General information OGKE18E5

Filling the fuel tank Fuel tank capacity

OGKE18E5 General information 2-03

2-04 General information OGKE18E5

OGKE18E5 General information 2-05

Protect the environment

Disposal information for

2-06 General information OGKE18E5

Keys WARNING NOTE

3-02 Locking and unlocking OGKE18E5

1. Keyless entry key

OGKE18E5 Locking and unlocking 3-03

NOTE Keyless entry system To unlock

3-04 Locking and unlocking OGKE18E5

NOTE NOTE NOTE

OGKE18E5 Locking and unlocking 3-05

3-06 Locking and unlocking OGKE18E5

Procedure for replacing the key

OGKE18E5 Locking and unlocking 3-07

6. Close the key case firmly.

WARNING NOTE NOTE

OGKE18E5 Locking and unlocking 3-09

NOTE NOTE Operating range for starting the

3-10 Locking and unlocking OGKE18E5

NOTE A- Driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/ NOTE

OGKE18E5 Locking and unlocking 3-11

NOTE If the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/ NOTE